GYHM600U/GYHM600E

ISSUED
2012/12/21
HD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY­HM600U/GY­HM600E
INSTRUCTIONS
TIME
CODE
The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement
without prior notice.
Please check the latest version of the INSTRUCTIONS from the following Mobile User Guide, or
download the PDF from the URL below.
Mobile User Guide
When you are outside, you can refer to the instructions from your Android phone or
iPhone.
http://manual3.jvckenwood.com/pro/mobile/global/
You can view the Mobile User Guide using the browser on your Android phone or
iPhone.
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the body.
Retain this information for future reference.
Model No.
GY-HM600U
Serial No.
Ver. 4.00
J-TECS infomation DAS13385 Count:- Checked:JK062240 Date:20121220 Approved:JK073626 Date:20121221
Please read the following before getting started:
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product.
Before operating this unit, please read the
instructions carefully to ensure the best
possible performance.
In this manual, each model number is
described without the last letter (U/E) which
means the shipping destination.
(U: for USA and Canada, E: for Europe)
Only “U” models (GY-HM600U) have been
evaluated by UL.
LST1424­001C
ISSUED
2012/12/21
2
ISSUED
2012/12/21
FOR USA
These are general IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS and certain items may not
apply to all appliances.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Introduction
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as
power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have
fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
For USA-California Only
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
.
3
ISSUED
2012/12/21
This device complies with Part 15 of
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Safety Precautions
Introduction
FOR USA AND CANADA
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Changes or modifications not
approved by JVC could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial
environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own
expense.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with
arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of important
operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying
the appliance.
.
4
.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
POUR CANADA
ATTENTION
ATTENTION:
POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION NE PAS
OUVRIR LE BOITER. AUCUNE
PIECE INTERIEURE N’EST A
REGLER PAR L’UTILISATEUR. SE
REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE
EN CAS DE PROBLEME.
Le symbole de l’éclair à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’une “tension
dangereuse” non isolée dans
le boîtier du produit. Cette
tension est suffisante pour
provoquer l’électrocution de
personnes.
Le point d’exclamation à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’opérations
d’entretien importantes au
sujet desquelles des
renseignements se trouvent
dans le manuel
d’instructions.
Ces symboles ne sont
utilisés qu’aux Etats-Unis.
CAUTION:
The mains plug shall remain readily
operable.
Remove the mains plug immediately if
the camera functions abnormally.
WARNING:
The battery pack, the camera with
battery installed, and the remote control
with battery installed should not be
exposed to excessive heat such as direct
sunlight, fire or the like.
Introduction
RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR
SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
AVERTISSEMENT : POUR EVITER
LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS
EXPOSER L’APPAREIL A LA
PLUIE NI A L’HUMIDITE.
NOTES:
The
rating plate and safety caution are
on the bottom and/or the back of the
main unit.
The serial number plate is on the
bottom of the unit.
The rating information and safety
caution of the AC adapter are on its
upper and lower sides.
REMARQUES :
La plaque d’identification et
l’avertissement de sécurité se trouvent
sous l’appareil et/ou au dos.
La plaque du numéro de série est
située sur la partie inférieure de
l’appareil.
Les informations d’identification et
l’avertissement de sécurité de
l’adaptateur secteur sont situés sur ses
côtés supérieur et inférieur.
Caution on Replaceable lithium
battery
The battery used in this device may
present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat
above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate.
Replace battery with Panasonic, Sanyo,
Sony or Maxell CR2025.
Danger of explosion or risk of fire if the
battery is incorrectly replaced.
Dispose of used battery promptly.
Keep away from children.
Do not disassemble and do not dispose
of in fire.
5
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Introduction
When the equipment is installed in a
cabinet or on a shelf, make sure that it
has sufficient space on all sides to allow
for ventilation (10 cm (3-15/16") or more
on both sides, on top and at the rear).
Do not block the ventilation holes.
(If the ventilation holes are blocked by a
newspaper, or cloth etc. the heat may not
be able to get out.)
No naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, should be placed on the
apparatus.
When discarding batteries,
environmental problems must be
considered and the local rules or laws
governing the disposal of these batteries
must be followed strictly.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
Do not point the lens directly into the
sun. This can cause eye injuries, as well
as lead to the malfunctioning of internal
circuitry. There is also a risk of fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION!
The following notes concern possible
physical damage to this unit and to the
user.
Carrying or holding this unit by the LCD
monitor can result in dropping the unit,
or in a malfunction.
Do not use a tripod on unsteady or
unlevel surfaces. It could tip over,
causing serious damage to the unit.
CAUTION!
Connecting cables (Audio/Video, etc.) to
this unit and leaving it on top of the TV is
not recommended, as tripping on the
cables will cause the unit to fall, resulting
in damage.
6
When using the AC adapter in
areas other than the USA
The provided AC adapter features
automatic voltage selection in the AC
range from 110 V to 240 V.
USING HOUSEHOLD AC PLUG
ADAPTER
In case of connecting the unit’s power
cord to an AC wall outlet other than
American National Standard C73 series
type, use an AC plug adapter called a
“Siemens Plug” as shown.
For this AC plug adapter, consult your
nearest JVC dealer.
Plug Adapter
Remove the AC adapter from the AC
wall outlet when not in use.
Do not leave dust or metal objects
adhered to the AC wall outlet or AC
adapter (power/DC plug).
ISSUED
2012/12/21
If the plug fitted is not suitable for the
power points in your home or the cable is
too short to reach a power point, then
obtain an appropriate safety approved
extension lead or consult your dealer.
BE SURE to replace the fuse only with
an identical approved type, as originally
fitted, and to replace the fuse cover.
If nonetheless the mains plug is cut off
be sure to remove the fuse and dispose
of the plug immediately, to avoid possible
shock hazard by inadvertent connection
to the mains supply.
If this product is not supplied fitted with a
mains plug then follow the instructions
given below:
DO NOT make any connection to the
Larger Terminal coded E or Green.
The wires in the mains lead are coloured
in accordance with the following code:
Blue to N
(Neutral) or Black
Brown to L (Live)
or Red
If these colours do not correspond with
the terminal identifications of your plug,
connect as follows:
Blue wire to terminal coded N (Neutral)
or coloured black.
Brown wire to terminal coded L (Live) or
coloured Red.
If in doubt — consult a competent
electrician.
CAUTIONS:
To
prevent shock, do not open the
cabinet. No user serviceable parts
inside.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
When you are not using the AC
adapter for a long period of time, it is
recommended that you disconnect the
power cord from AC outlet.
FOR EUROPE
This equipment is in conformity with the
provisions and protection requirements of
the corresponding European Directives.
This equipment is designed for professional
video appliances and can be used in the
following environments:
Controlled EMC environment (for
example, purpose-built broadcasting or
recording studio), and rural outdoors
environments.
In order to keep the best performance and
furthermore for electromagnetic
compatibility we recommend to use cables
not exceeding the following lengths:
Port
DC INPUT
USB Mini
AV OUT
HDMI
REMOTE
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Length
1.8 m
3m
1.5 m
3m
1m
HD/SD SDI
Coaxial
Cable
10 m
AUDIO INPUT 1/2
Shielded
Cable
3m
HEADPHONE
Exclusive
Cable
3m
AUX
Shielded
Cable
5m
TC
Shielded
Cable
5m
The inrush current of this apparatus is
4.9 A.
CAUTION:
Where there are strong electromagnetic
waves or magnetism, for example near a
radio or TV transmitter, transformer,
motor, etc., the picture and the sound
may be disturbed. In such case, please
keep the apparatus away from the
sources of the disturbance.
7
Introduction
IMPORTANT (for owners in the
U.K.)
Connection to the mains supply in
the United Kingdom.
DO NOT cut off the mains plug
from this equipment.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Dear Customer,
Introduction
This apparatus is in conformance with
the valid European directives and
standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
European representative of
JVC KENWOOD Corporation is:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Germany
Information for Users on Disposal
of Old Equipment and Batteries
Products
Notice:
Battery
The sign Pb below the
symbol for batteries indicates
that this battery contains lead.
[European Union]
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr
geehrte Kundin,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen
europäischen Richtlinien und Normen
bezüglich elektromagnetischer
Verträglichkeit und elektrischer
Sicherheit überein.
Die europäische Vertretung für die
JVC KENWOOD Corporation ist:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Deutschland
CAUTION:
To avoid electric
shock or damage to
the unit, first firmly
insert the small end
of the power cord into the AC Adapter
until it is no longer wobbly, and then plug
the larger end of the power cord in to an
AC outlet.
FOR EUROPEAN
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate
measures.
These symbols indicate that the electrical
and electronic equipment and the battery
with this symbol should not be disposed of
as general household waste at its
end-of-life.
Instead, the products should be handed
over to the applicable collection points for
the recycling of electrical and electronic
equipment as well as batteries for proper
treatment, recovery and recycling in
accordance with your national legislation
and the Directive 2002/96/EC and
2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products correctly,
you will help to conserve natural resources
and will help to prevent potential negative
effects on the environment and human
health which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of these
products.
For more information about collection
points and recycling of these products,
please contact your local municipal office,
your household waste disposal service or
the shop where you purchased the
product.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect
disposal of this waste, in accordance with
national legislation.
(Business users)
If you wish to dispose of this product,
please visit our web page
http://www.jvc.eu to obtain information
about the take-back of the product.
[Other Countries outside the
European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the
European Union.
If you wish to dispose of these items,
please do so in accordance with applicable
national legislation or other rules in your
country for the treatment of old electrical
and electronic equipment and batteries.
8
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Battery Pack
Introduction
The supplied battery pack is a lithium-ion
battery. Before using the supplied battery
pack or an optional battery pack, be sure
to read the following cautions:
Terminals
To avoid hazards
... do not burn.
... do not short-circuit the
terminals. Keep it away
from metallic objects
when not in use.
When transporting, carry the battery in
a plastic bag.
... do not modify or disassemble.
... do not expose the battery to
temperatures exceeding 60°C (140°F),
as this may cause the battery to
overheat, explode or catch fire.
... use only specified chargers.
To prevent damage and prolong
service life
... do not subject to unnecessary shock.
... charge within the temperature range
of 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F). Cooler
temperatures require longer charging
time, or in some cases stop charging
at all. Warmer temperatures prevent
complete charging, or in some cases
stop charging at all.
... store in a cool, dry place. Extended
exposure to high temperatures will
increase natural discharge and
shorten service life.
... keep a 30% battery level
if the
battery pack is not to be used for a
long period of time.
In addition, fully charge and then fully
discharge the battery pack every 6
months, then continue to store it at a
30% battery level
.
... remove from charger or powered unit
when not in use, as some machines
use current even when switched off.
... do not drop or subject to strong
impact.
9
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Contents
Introduction
Introduction
Safety Precautions ............................................ 4
Contents .......................................................... 10
Main Features ................................................. 12
Precautions for Proper Use ............................. 14
Operation Modes ............................................. 18
Names of Parts ................................................ 20
Side Control Panel ....................................... 22
SD Slot ......................................................... 23
Rear Terminal .............................................. 23
LCD Monitor ................................................ 24
Lens Section ................................................ 25
Basic System Diagram .................................... 26
Preparations
Settings and Adjustments Before Use ............. 27
Adjusting the Grip Belt ................................. 27
Attaching an External Microphone ............... 27
Attaching the Tripod ..................................... 27
Attaching the Large Eyecup ......................... 27
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover ................. 28
Attaching/Detaching the Hood ..................... 28
Power Supply .................................................. 28
Using a Battery Pack .................................... 28
Using AC Power (DC IN Power) ................... 30
Power Status Display ...................................... 30
Turning On/Off the Power ................................ 31
Initial Settings .................................................. 32
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder .. 34
Display Screen ............................................. 34
Status Screen .............................................. 35
USB Mode Screen ....................................... 35
Warning Display ........................................... 35
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder ...... 36
Adjusting the LCD Monitor ........................... 36
Adjusting the Viewfinder .............................. 37
Assigning Functions to User Buttons ............... 38
Tally Lamp ....................................................... 38
SD Card ........................................................... 39
Usable Cards ............................................... 39
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards ................ 41
Restoring the SD Card ................................. 42
Clips Recorded to SD Cards ........................ 43
Shooting
Basic Shooting Procedures ............................. 44
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video
Format ............................................................. 45
Zoom Operation .............................................. 46
Focus Operation .............................................. 47
Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection ...... 49
Adjusting the Brightness .................................. 50
10
Adjusting the Iris .............................................. 51
Setting the Gain ............................................... 52
Setting the Electronic Shutter .......................... 53
Setting the ND Filter ........................................ 55
Adjusting the White Balance ............................ 55
Adjusting the Camera Image ........................... 59
Using the Image Stabilizer ............................... 59
Audio Recording .............................................. 60
Monitoring Audio Sound During Recording Using a
Headphone ...................................................... 62
Time Code and User’s Bit ................................ 62
Setting Time Code Generator .......................... 63
Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera
......................................................................... 66
Setting Zebra Pattern ...................................... 67
Setting Spot Meter ........................................... 68
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip
Review) ........................................................... 70
Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter Trig) ....... 71
Dual Rec .......................................................... 71
Backup Rec ..................................................... 73
Special Recording ........................................... 75
Pre Rec ........................................................ 75
Clip Continuous Rec .................................... 76
Frame Rec ................................................... 77
Interval Rec .................................................. 78
Variable Frame Rec ..................................... 80
Playback
Playing Recorded Clips ................................... 81
Thumbnail Screen ........................................ 81
Actions ......................................................... 83
Playing back ................................................ 84
Deleting Clips .................................................. 85
Appending/Deleting OK Mark .......................... 86
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips ................................................................ 87
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly ............... 87
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively ........ 88
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Basic Operations in Menu Screen ................... 89
Display and Description of the Menu Screen
..................................................................... 90
Text Input with Software Keyboard .............. 91
Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart ..................... 92
Camera Function Menu ................................... 93
User Switch Set Item .................................... 95
Camera Process Menu .................................... 96
Detail/Adjust Item ......................................... 99
White Balance Item .................................... 100
TC/UB Menu ................................................. 100
LCD/VF Menu ................................................ 101
Shooting Assist Item .................................. 102
Marker Settings Item .................................. 103
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Introduction
Display Settings Item ................................. 103
A/V Set Menu ................................................ 105
Video Set Item ........................................... 105
Audio Set Item ........................................... 106
System Menu ................................................ 108
Record Set Item ......................................... 109
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items
(Favorites Menu) ........................................... 112
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu ...... 112
Editing Favorites Menu .............................. 113
Display/Status Screen
Display Screen in Camera Mode ................... 116
Display Screen in Media Mode ...................... 121
Status Screen ................................................ 123
Camera Features
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode
Only) .............................................................. 124
Smoothening the Skin Color (Skin Detail
Function) ....................................................... 124
Color Bar Output ........................................... 124
Adjusting Color Matrix ................................... 125
Configuring Setup Files ................................. 126
Saving Setup Files ..................................... 126
Loading a Setup File .................................. 127
Deleting Setup Files ................................... 128
Connecting External Devices
Managing/Editing Clips on a PC .................... 129
Connecting External Monitor ......................... 130
Connecting the Headphone ........................... 131
Connecting Wired Remote Control ................ 132
Others
Error Messages and Actions ......................... 133
Tally Lamp ................................................. 135
Warning Tone ............................................ 135
Troubleshooting ............................................ 136
Specifications ................................................ 138
Index ............................................................. 141
11
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Main Features
F11 Sensitivity, 1/3­inch Full HD 3CMOS
Sensors
Introduction
This camera recorder is equipped with three 1/3­
inch 2.07M pixels full HD CMOS sensors.
It delivers high image quality, high color resolution
through processing of individual R, G, B color
signals. 12­bit signal processing and the new 2D
DNR removes dark current and optical shot noise
without losing S/N and high resolution, thereby
achieving high F11 sensitivity.
New Fujinon 23x Zoom Lens
It ensures high magnification of 29 mm at wide
ends, and provides high sensitivity across all
regions with F1.6­3.0.
The zoom ring with zoom ring pin enables zooming
from the wide end to the tele end in 90 degrees.
Focus and iris control are also possible using
separate rings.
Small, Lightweight, Stylish, and
Ergonomic Design
The camera recorder is only 2.4 kJ in operation
mode.
It is light and easy to use. Its ergonomic design
takes into consideration portability and operability
and is easy on the hand during shooting.
JVC’s Proprietary FALCONBRID High­
Quality Imaging Engine
The FALCONBRID high­quality imaging engine
omits unnecessary processing through
incorporating camera processing and image
compression on a single chip. Images from
imaging devices are compressed and processed
without any loss thereby achieving high­quality
images.
MPEG2 and H.264 Codec
FALCONBRID allows users to select MPEG­2 and
AVCHD, the most commonly used codec for
professional video, as the recording format.
12
QuickTime (MPEG­2 HD/H.264 SD)/MP4
(MPEG­2 HD)/AVCHD File Format
By inheriting the concept in ProHD memory
camera recorder, this camera recorder can support
various file formats, such as AVCHD and
QuickTime (H.264 SD) files, as well as QuickTime
(MPEG­2 HD) files that can be directly edited on
Apple Final Cut Pro and MP4 files that are most
suitable for XDCAM EX Nonlinear Editing
Workflow.
Two SDHC/SDXC Card Slots for Dual,
Backup and Series Recording
The most common SDHC/SDXC card recording
system is used as the memory card.
This ensures reliability and operation at low running
cost.
Various user friendly recording systems are also
available. These include dual recording of the
same file to two cards, and using REC/STBY to
break up video clips in one card while performing
backup recording to the other card.
Variable Frame Rec
Enables beautiful slow motion and quick motion
image recording such as overcrank and
undercrank.
SDI/HDMI Simultaneous Output
Equipped with both [HD/SD SDI] and [HDMI]
terminals as digital output.
Non­compressed full HD video signals and audio
signals can be output to the [HD/SD SDI] and
[HDMI] terminals at the same time.
Auto Focus/Optical Image Stabilizer
The camera recorder is equipped with a face
detection auto focus function that covers the entire
screen.
It can switch to manual focus as well.
A built­in optical image stabilizer feature is also
available.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Professional Switch Layout and Various
Video Parameter Settings
4­position ND Filter
This camera recorder incorporates three types of
ND filters.
Adjust the amount of light according to the
brightness during shooting by switching the 4­
position ND filter (OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64).
0.45­inch 1.22M Pixel Color Viewfinder,
3.5­inch 920K Pixel LCD Display
(Equipped with Focus Assist Function)
Built­in Stereo Microphone, 2­channel
XLR Audio Input (Microphone/Line
Switch, Phantom Power Supply) and
Mini Jack Input Terminal for Wireless
Microphone Receiver
Pre Rec Function (Up to 15 Seconds)
and Interval Rec Function
Symbols used
Caution : Describes precautions concerning the
operation of this product.
Memo : Describes reference information, such
as functions and usage restrictions of
this product.
'
: Indicates the reference page numbers
and reference items.
Content of this manual
Illustrated designs, specifications and other
Supports Wired Remote Control
Application Software Provided
The [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] application
software is provided for you to copy recorded clips
to Windows or Macintosh computers and for
checking the video images. (For MP4 file format)
The disc provided with this camera recorder
comes with [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] and other
application software as well as their user guides.
* For details, refer to the user guides for each
application software.
contents of this manual are subject to change
for improvement without prior notice.
AVCHD and the AVCHD logo are trademarks
of Panasonic Corporation and Sony
Corporation.
SDXC and SDHC logos are trademarks of
SD­3C, LLC.
HDMI (High­Definition Multimedia Interface)
and 6 are trademarks of HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
QuickTime, Final Cut Pro and iPhone are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Android is a trademark and/or registered
trademark of Google Inc.
QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso
Wave Incorporated.
Dolby and the double­D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and
Windows 7 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
Other product and company names included
in this instruction manual are trademarks and/
or registered trademarks of their respective
companies. Marks such as ™ and ® have
been omitted in this manual.
13
Introduction
Switches for Gain and White Balance are available
on the side panel to enable quick switchings
according to the shooting scene.
Image parameters such as gamma and color
matrixes are also available in the menu for
adjusting preferred tones.
How to use this manual
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Precautions for Proper
Use
Storage and Usage Locations
Introduction
o Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use this unit within the allowable
temperature range of 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104°F)
and a relative humidity of 30 % to 80 %. Using this
unit at a temperature or humidity outside the
allowable ranges could result not only in
malfunction but also serious impact on the CMOS
elements as small white spots may be generated.
Please exercise care during use.
o Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the
colors may be incorrect if this unit is used near a
radio or television transmitting antenna, in places
where strong magnetic fields are generated by
transformers, motors, etc., or near devices emitting
radio waves, such as transceivers or cellular
phones.
o Use of wireless microphone near this unit
When a wireless microphone or wireless
microphone tuner is used near this unit during
recording, the tuner could pick up noise.
o Avoid using or placing this unit in the following
places.
Places subject to extreme heat or cold
Places with excessive dirt or dust
Places with high humidity or moisture
Places subject to smoke or vapor such as near
a cooking stove
Places subject to strong vibrations or unstable
surfaces
In a parked car under direct sunlight or near a
heater for long hours
o Do not place this unit at places that are subject
to radiation or X­rays, or where corrosive gases
occur.
o Protect this unit from being splashed with water.
(Especially when shooting in the rain)
o Protect this unit from getting wet when shooting
on a beach. In addition, salt and sand may adhere
to the body. Be sure to clean the unit after use.
o Protect this unit against penetration of dust when
using it in a place subject to sandy dust.
14
Transportation
Do not drop or hit this unit against a hard object
when transporting.
Power Saving
When this unit is not in use, be sure to set the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “OFF(CHG)” in
order to reduce power consumption.
Maintenance
o Turn off the power before performing any
maintenance.
o Wipe the external cabinet of the unit with a soft
cloth. Do not wipe the body with benzene or thinner.
Doing so may cause the surface to melt or turn
cloudy. When it is extremely dirty, soak the cloth in
a solution of neutral detergent, wipe the body with
it, and then use a clean cloth to remove the
detergent.
Rechargeable Battery
o Be sure to use only the specified batteries.
We do not guarantee the safety and performance
of this device if an unspecified battery is used.
o The battery is not charged when purchased.
o When using the battery in a low temperature
environment (10°C/50 °F or below), the operating
time may be shortened, or it may not function
properly. When using the device outdoors in the
winter weather, warm the battery, such as by
placing it in the pocket, before attaching it.
o Do not expose the battery to excessive heat,
such as direct sunlight or fire.
o If the battery is not to be used for a long time
Use up the charge completely and detach it from
the camera to prevent deterioration. (Wait for the
battery to run out by itself such as through
continuous shooting or playback.)
Charge the battery once every half a year, and
store it again after using up the charge.
o Store the removed battery in a dry place between
15 °C and 25 °C (59 °F and 77 °F).
o ATTENTION:
The product you have purchased
is powered by a rechargeable
battery that is recyclable.
Please call 1­800­8­BATTERY for
information on how to recycle this
battery.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Regular Inspection (Maintenance)
SDHC/SDXC Cards
o SDHC/SDXC card is referred to as “SD card” in
this manual.
o This camera recorder saves the recorded
images and audio sound on the SD card (sold
separately) in the card slot.
o Use an SD card (4 GB to 128 GB) with Class 6
or higher performance, formatted using this
camera recorder.
o Depending on the recording format, SD card with
Class 4 or higher performance can also be used.
(' P45 [Selecting System Definition, File
Format and Video Format] )
* Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
o If the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded. In
addition, the remaining space on the card may not
increase even when files are deleted using a PC.
Handling of SD Cards
o The status indicator lights up in red when data
on the SD card is being accessed.
Do not remove the SD card during data access
(such as recording, playback, or formatting). Do not
turn off the power or remove the battery and AC
adapter during access either.
o Do not use or store the SD card in a place that is
subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
o Do not place the SD card near locations that are
exposed to strong magnetic fields or radio waves.
o Inserting the SD card incorrectly may result in
damage of this unit or the SD card.
Groove
o The SD card may pop out when it is being
removed. Be careful not to lose the card.
15
Introduction
Under normal environment, dust will accumulate
on the camera recorder when it is used over a long
period. Dust may enter the camera recorder
especially if it is used outdoors. This may affect the
image and sound quality of the camera recorder.
Check and replace the fan after every 9000 hours
(suggested guideline).
You can check the usage time of the fan in
[System]-[System Information]-[Fan Hour].
(' P109 [ Fan Hour ] )
If the fan is used for more than 9000 hours without
replacement, “FAN MAINTENANCE REQUIRED”
will be displayed every time you turn on the power.
o We are not liable for any accidental loss of data
stored on the SD card. Please back up any
important data.
o Make use of the SD card within the prescribed
conditions of use.
Do not use it at the following locations.
Places that are subject to direct sunlight, high
humidity or corrosion, places near thermal
equipment, sandy or dusty places, or in a car under
the sun with the doors and windows closed.
o Do not bend or drop the SD card, or subject it to
strong impact or vibration.
o Do not splash the SD card with water.
o Do not dismantle or modify the SD card.
o Do not touch the terminals with your hands or
with a metal object.
o Do not allow dust, dirt, water, or foreign objects
to adhere to the terminals.
o Do not remove the labels or stick other labels or
stickers on the SD cards.
o Do not use pencils or ballpoint pens to write on
the SD cards. Always use oil­based pens.
o If you format (initialize) the SD card, all data
recorded on the card, including video data and
setup files, will be deleted.
o You are recommended to use cards that are
formatted (initialized) on this camera recorder.
The SD card may be damaged if the camera
recorder is not operated correctly. Formatting
(Initializing) the SD card may allow it to operate
correctly.
SD cards that have been formatted (initialized)
on other cameras, computers or peripheral
equipment may not operate correctly. In this
case, format (initialize) the SD card on this
camera recorder.
o If you want to wipe out all information by
completely erasing the data, we recommend either
using commercially available software that is
specially designed for that purpose, or by
physically destroying the SD card with a hammer,
etc. When formatting or erasing data using the
camera recorder, only the file administration
information is changed. The data is not completely
erased from the SD card.
o Some commercially available SD cards may be
harder to be removed from this unit. Remove them
by hooking onto the groove on the cards.
It will be easier to remove the cards after several
times.
Do not stick any stickers on the cards.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Others
Introduction
o Do not insert objects other than the memory card
into the card slot.
o Do not block the vent on the unit.
Blocking of the vent causes internal heating and
may lead to burns and fires.
o Do not turn off the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]
switch or remove the power cable during recording
or playback.
o The camera recorder may not show stable
pictures for a few seconds immediately after the
power is turned on, but this is not a malfunction.
o When the video signal output terminals are not
in use, put on the covers to prevent damage to the
terminals.
o Do not drop this unit or subject it to strong impact
or vibration as it is a precision equipment.
o Optical performance of lens
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color
divergence phenomena (magnification chromatic
aberration) may occur at the periphery of the
image. This is not a camera malfunction.
o Noise may appear in the image when switching
modes.
o If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will
deteriorate.
o Use the supplied AC adapter as the power
supply. Do not use the supplied AC adapter on
other devices.
o When the connectors that come with connector
covers are not in use, put on the covers to prevent
damage to the connectors.
16
LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
o The LCD monitor and viewfinder screen are
manufactured using high­precision technology.
Black spots may appear on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen, or red, blue, and/or white spots
may not disappear. However, this is not a
malfunction and these spots are not recorded on
the SD card.
o If you use this unit continuously for a long period
of time, the characters displayed in the viewfinder
may temporarily remain on the screen. This is not
recorded on the SD card. They will not appear after
you turn the power off and then on again.
o If you use this unit in a cold place, the images
may appear to lag on the screen, but this is not a
malfunction. Retained images are not recorded on
the SD card.
o Do not press against the surface with force or
subject it to strong impact. Doing so may damage
or break the screens.
o Noise may appear in the viewfinder when
switching between the live video and playback
images.
o Due to the characteristic of the viewfinder display
device, colors may appear on the images when you
blink your eyes. It does not affect the recorded
images, SDI output, or HDMI output.
Copyright
Any recordings made on this camera recorder that
are played back for profit or public preview may
infringe on the rights of the owner of the recordings.
Do not use the recordings for purpose other than
personal enjoyment without prior consent from the
owner.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
License Notices
Introduction
o MPEGLA AVC
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER
USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE
REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD
(“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO
THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
o MPEGLA MPEG­2 Patent
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER
OTHER THAN PERSONAL USE THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG­2 STANDARD FOR
ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY
PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG­2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, LLC, 6312 S.
Fiddlers Green circle, Suite 400E, Greenwood
Village, Colorado 80111 U.S.A.
17
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Operation Modes
This camera recorder has three operation modes ­ Camera mode, Media mode, and USB mode.
Introduction
Camera
Mode
[MODE] Button
Press and hold
[MODE] button
Thumbnail
Display
Media Mode
Playback
Button
Stop
Button
Playback
(Playback/Pause/
Frame-by-Frame/
Fast Forward/Rewind/
Clip Jump)
USB Connection (When the
confirmation to change to
USB mode appears and
[Change] is selected)
Connection disabled on PC
MENU/THUMB
USB Mode
(USB Mass Storage Class)
AE LEVEL
MODE
CANCEL
Playback Button
Stop Button
18
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Operation Mode
Camera Mode
Description
This is the camera shooting mode. The camera recorder starts up in Camera
mode when the power is turned on.
Camera images are output on the viewfinder and LCD monitor. When a
Memo : Playback of SD card is not possible in Camera mode. However, you can
check the most recently recorded video clip.
(' P70 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Media Mode
This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded on the SD card.
When a playable SD card is inserted, the thumbnail or playback screen is
displayed on the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
Press the [MODE] selection button to enter Media mode when you are not
USB Mode
shooting in Camera mode. Once the camera recorder is in Media mode,
thumbnails of the selected media slot are displayed.
This mode allows you to connect to a PC and transfer the files on an SD card
to the PC.
When the camera recorder is connected to a USB cable, the message
“Change to USB Mode?” appears.
Select [Change] and press the Set button to switch to USB mode.
(' P129 [Managing/Editing Clips on a PC] )
In USB mode, the camera recorder is recognized by the connected PC as a
peripheral drive. (USB mass storage class only)
Disable the connection on the PC and remove the USB cable from the camera
recorder to switch to Camera mode.
(' P129 [Managing/Editing Clips on a PC] )
Memo : When a USB cable is connected during recording, the message appears after
recording stops.
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed
automatically, such as when playback stops.
Files on the PC cannot be written to the SD card.
19
Introduction
recordable SD card is inserted, the camera recorder enters the recording
standby mode. “STBY” appears on the operation mode display area of the
LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Names of Parts
A BC D
E
G
F
Introduction
FIX VA
F
R OF
3
LOLUX/
OIS/2
FOCUS
K
ASSIST/1
TIME
TER
ND FIL
FOCU
R
POWE
CODE
UMB
MENU/TH
S
AE
ON
L
LEVE
OFF
(CHG)
AUTO
MODE
MANU
SLOT
A/B
1/64
Bottom
∞
1/16
AUTO
PUSH
1/4
OFF
TER
SHUT
EL
CANC T BAL
WH
AUTO
FULL
GAIN
K/4
AE LOC
ZEBRA/
RKE
5 MA
R/6
H
ON
IRIS
PUSH
AUTO
L
M
H
B
A SET
PRE
OFF
ZOOM
REC
SERVO MANUAL
J
A Built­in Microphone
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )
B Tally Lamp
(' P38 [Tally Lamp] )
(' P135 [Tally Lamp] )
C Microphone Holder
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
D Microphone Holder Lock Knob
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
E Shoe
For mounting separately sold lights and
accessories.
F [FIX/VAR/OFF] Zoom Speed Switch
(' P46 [Zoom Operation] )
For switching the zoom speed of the zoom lever
a at the handle.
G Accessory Mounting Screw Hole
H Tripod Mounting Hole
(' P27 [Attaching the Tripod] )
I [REC] Record Trigger Button
Starts/stops recording.
Memo : This button is interlocked with the [REC] button
R on the grip and the [REC/HOLD] button Z at
the top of the handle.
20
I
J [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] Zoom Operation
Servo/Manual Switch
Set to “SERVO” when using the zoom lever at
the grip j or the zoom lever at the handle a.
(' P46 [Zoom Operation] )
K Monitor Speaker
(' P84 [Audio Output during Playback] )
L Viewfinder
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
M Visibility Adjustment Lever
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
N Eyecup
Prevents external light from entering the
viewfinder screen and cameraman’s vision.
(' P27 [Attaching the Large Eyecup] )
O Battery
(' P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )
P [+] Headphone Jack (Φ3.5 mm)
(' P62 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
Q [AUX] AUX Input Terminal (Φ3.5 mm)
For connecting to receiver such as wireless
microphone.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
dc
b aZ
REC
T
W
HOLD
Introduction
Y
2
INPUT
1
INPUT
X
W
L
M
BATT.R
N
A
ELEAS
IN OUT
E
AUX
TC
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
V
U
DEV
ICE
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDM
I
REM
OTE
O
DC
PQ R S T
R [REC] Record Trigger Button
Starts/stops recording.
Memo : This button is interlocked with the [REC] button
I at the bottom of the lens and the [REC/
HOLD] button Z at the top of the handle.
S [C.REVIEW/7] Clip Review/User 7 Button
For checking the most recently captured
images.
(' P70 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
T Zoom Lever at the Grip
To operate zoom servo with the zoom lever at
the grip, set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL]
switch 0 to “SERVO”.
(' P46 [Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip] )
U [TC] TC Input/Output Terminal
(' P62 [Time Code and User’s Bit] )
V [IN/OUT] TC IN/OUT Selection Switch
(' P66 [Synchronizing Time Code on
Another Camera] )
W Hood Release Button
(' P28 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )
X External Microphone Cable Clamp
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
Y [INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Terminal 1, 2
(XLR 3­pin x 2)
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
Z [REC/HOLD] Record Trigger Button/Lock
Switch
Starts/stops recording.
Set the switch to [HOLD] to lock the [REC]
Trigger button.
Memo : This button is interlocked with the [REC] button
R on the grip and the [REC] button I at the
bottom of the lens.
The [REC] button R on the grip and the [REC]
button I at the bottom of the lens will not be
locked.
a Zoom lever at the Handle
(' P46 [Using the Zoom Lever at the
Handle] )
b Shoulder Belt Mount (x2)
For mounting a shoulder belt (sold separately).
Caution : Be sure to use a shoulder belt with the strength
to withstand the weight of this camera recorder.
If the shoulder belt is not properly attached, the
camera recorder may fall and cause injuries.
Check the instruction manual provided with the
shoulder belt before using.
c [POWER/CHG] Power/Charging Display Lamp
(' P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )
d [BATT. RELEASE] Battery Lock Release Button
(' P29 [Removing the Battery] )
21
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Side Control Panel
UTS R Q P
A
FOCUS ASSIST/1
OIS / 2
LOLUX / 3
TIME CODE
ND FILTER
FOCUS
AUTO
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
Introduction
POWER
1/64
MANU
B
1/4
OFF
O
ON
1/16
OFF
(CHG)
PUSH AUTO
MODE
C
N
CANCEL
WHT BAL
GAIN
SHUTTER
IRIS
D
E
FULL AUTO
AE LOCK/4
ZEBRA/5
MARKER/6
ON
PUSH AUTO
L
M
H
F G
B
A
PRESET
OFF
I J
H
K L M
A [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] Focus Switch
(' P47 [Focus Operation] )
B [ND FILTER] ND Filter Switch
(' P55 [Setting the ND Filter] )
C [PUSH AUTO] Focus Push Auto Button
(' P48 [One Push Auto Focus] )
D [IRIS] Iris Auto/Manual Selection Button
(' P51 [Adjusting the Iris] )
E [PUSH AUTO] Iris Push Auto Button
(' P51 [Adjusting the Iris] )
F [GAIN] Gain Auto/Manual Selection Button / [L/
M /H] Sensitivity Selection Switch
(' P52 [Setting the Gain] )
G [WHT BAL] White Balance Auto/Manual
Selection Button / [B/A/PRESET] Selection
Switch
(' P55 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
H [SHUTTER] Shutter Speed Auto/Manual
Selection Button
(' P53 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
I [,] One Push Auto White Balance Button
J [FULL AUTO ON/OFF] Full Auto Switch
(' P50 [Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically] )
(' P58 [Automatic White Balance Mode
(FAW: Fulltime Auto White balance)] )
K [AE LOCK/4] AE Lock/User 4 Button
When Gain, Iris, and Shutter are set to “AUTO”,
their respective values and the value of white
balance are locked when the [AE LOCK/4] button
is pressed.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
22
L [ZEBRA/5] Zebra/User 5 Button
(' P67 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
M [MARKER/6] Marker/User 6 Button
This button toggles ON/OFF the marker, safety
zone, and center mark displays.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
N [MODE] Camera/Media Mode Selection Button
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
O [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] Lock Power ON/OFF
Switch
Turns ON/OFF the power.
Hold down the lock button (blue) in the center
to toggle ON/OFF.
When the power is turning OFF, “P.OFF”
appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the
power again.
P Cross­Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button (R)
The function changes according to the
operation status of the camera recorder.
o During menu operation (all modes)
(' P89 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Center Set button (R) : Confirms menu items
and setting values
Cross­shaped button : Selects menu items
(JK)
and setting values
o During Camera mode
Shutter operation:
Center Set button (R) : Shutter ON/OFF
Cross­shaped button : Switches shutter
(JK)
speed when shutter
is ON
AE level operation
: Cross­shaped button
(HI)
Memo : When [Camera Function]-[AE LEVEL SW] is
set to “AE LEVEL/VFR”, the cross­shaped
button (HI) is used to set the number of frames
during Variable Frame Rec.
(' P80 [Variable Frame Rec] )
(' P94 [ AE LEVEL SW ] )
Q [LOLUX/3] Low­light Shooting/User 3 Button
For switching the low­light shooting mode ON
or OFF.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
SD Slot
(' P39 [SD Card] )
A
Rear Terminal
A
DEVICE
BATT.RELEASE
A
POWER
/CHG
AV
DEVICE
OPEN
AV
CLOSE
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
REMOTE
B
REMOTE
DC
DC
B
C
D
E
F
A [DEVICE] USB Mini Terminal
(' P129 [Managing/Editing Clips on a PC] )
B [AV] AV Output Terminal
(' P130 [Connecting External Monitor] )
C [HD/SD SDI] SDI Output Terminal (BNC)
(' P130 [Connecting External Monitor] )
D [HDMI] HDMI Output Terminal
(' P130 [Connecting External Monitor] )
E [REMOTE] Remote Terminal
(' P132 [Connecting Wired Remote Control] )
F [DC] DC Input Terminal
Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply. For
connnecting with the supplied AC adapter.
(' P30 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
D
C
B
A SD Card Cover
B [SLOT A/B] Card Slot Selection Button
For switching the active card slot during
shooting and playback.
C Card Slot B Status Indicator
D Card Slot A Status Indicator
23
Introduction
R [OIS/2] Optical Image Stabilizer/User 2 Button
For switching the image stabilizer feature mode
ON or OFF.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
S [FOCUS ASSIST/1] Focus Assist/User 1 Button
For switching the focus assist function ON or
OFF.
(' P48 [Focus Assist Function] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
T [MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button
Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
(' P89 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Displays the menu screen when the button
is pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
U [CANCEL] Cancel Button
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
LCD Monitor
A
Introduction
B
MENU/THUMB
N ML K
CH1
C
D
CH2
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT1
INPUT2
LINE
MIC
MIC
+48V
LCD BRIGHT
J
MONITOR
CH1
BOTH
CH2
PEAKING
DISPLAY
STATUS
AUTO
MANUAL
CANCEL
CH1
CH2
E FG H I
A LCD Monitor
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
B [MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button
Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
(' P89 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Displays the menu screen when the button
is pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
C LCD Cross­Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button
(R)
The function changes according to the
operation status of the camera recorder.
During menu operation (all modes)
(' P89 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Center Set button (R) : Confirms menu
items and setting
values
Cross­shaped button : Selects menu
(JK)
items and setting
values
During Camera mode
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
D [CANCEL] Cancel Button
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
E [CH1/CH2] CH1/CH2 Recording Level
Adjustment Knob
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )
24
F [LCD BRIGHT +/­] LCD Display Brightness
Adjustment Button
(' P36 [Adjusting the Brightness] )
G [PEAKING +/­] LCD/VF Contour Adjustment
Button
(' P37 [Adjusting the Contour (LCD)] )
(' P37 [Adjusting the Contour (Viewfinder)] )
H [DISPLAY] Display Button
Press the [DISPLAY] button to switch to the
display screen during normal screen display
(when the menu screen is not displayed).
(' P34 [Display Screen] )
Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [DISPLAY]
button is pressed while the menu screen is
displayed.
(' P89 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
I [STATUS] Status Screen Display Button
Press the [STATUS] button to display the status
screen on the viewfinder and LCD monitor
during normal screen display (when the menu
screen is not displayed).
(' P35 [Status Screen] )
J [MONITOR]/[+/­] Audio Monitor Selection
Switch/Volume Adjustment Button
Switches the audio monitor and adjusts the
monitor speaker/headphone.
(' P62 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
K [INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Signal Selection
Switch
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )
L [CH2] CH2 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
Select the audio input terminal to record to CH2.
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )
M [CH1] CH1 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )
N [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] CH1/CH2 Audio
Recording Mode Switch
(' P61 [Adjusting Audio Recording Level] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Lens Section
Introduction
A
B
C
D
E
A Filter Built­In Screw
Transparent or UV filter for lens protection,
or filters for various effects can be installed.
Installable filter types: Φ72mmP0.75
Memo : Remove the lens hood when installing the filter.
(' P28 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )
B Lens Cover Open/Close Switch
(' P28 [Opening/Closing the Lens Cover] )
C Focus Ring
(' P47 [Focus Operation] )
D Zoom Ring
(' P46 [Zoom Operation] )
To operate zoom with this ring, set the [ZOOM
SERVO/MANUAL] switch to “MANUAL”.
E Iris Ring
(' P51 [Adjusting the Iris] )
To operate auto iris, press the [IRIS] button on
the side control panel.
( mark appears on the screen)
25
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Basic System Diagram
Shoulder Belt
GY-HM600
Introduction
Monitor
Earphone
Wireless Microphone
Receiver
Microphone
[TC]
[AUX]
Monitor
SDI Cable
BNC
GY-HM600
HDMI Cable
AV Cable
RCA pin
Battery
AC Adapter
Remote Control Unit
Carrying Case
USB Cable
Tripod
SDHC/SDXC
Memory Card
26
SDHC/SDXC
Card Reader
Non-linear Editing
System
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Settings and Adjustments
Before Use
Adjusting the Grip Belt
Open the pad and adjust the position of the grip belt
accordingly.
Use the screw hole at the bottom of this camera
recorder.
(3/8×16UNC, 1/4×20UNC)
Use the screw hole that suits the tripod.
To prevent the camera recorder from falling off,
which may result in injuries or damages, read the
instruction manual of the tripod to be used and
make sure that it is securely attached.
Preparations
INPUT2
Attaching the Tripod
INPUT1
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
o Bottom
REMO
TE
DC
Caution : If the grip is loose, the camera recorder may fall
off resulting in injuries or malfunction.
Attaching an External Microphone
You can attach a separately sold microphone to the
microphone holder.
1, 3
2
4
5
Caution : Use the tripod on a stable surface.
To prevent the camera recorder from falling,
attach securely using the rotation prevention
hole.
Use screws with screw length 5 mm and below.
Attaching the Large Eyecup
Attach the large eyecup (supplied) to prevent
external light from entering the viewfinder
screen and cameraman’s vision.
Align and attach to the groove of the eyecup
mounted on the camera recorder.
The large eyecup can be attached in any
direction.
Large Eyecup (supplied)
1 Turn the knob on the microphone holder
anticlockwise to loosen and open the
microphone holder.
2 Place the microphone in the microphone
holder.
3 Turn the knob on the microphone holder
clockwise to secure the microphone.
4 Connect the microphone cable to the
[INPUT1] or [INPUT2] terminal.
5 Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.
6 Perform the settings for the microphone
correctly.
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )
Eyecup
Memo : Do not remove the eyecup that is premounted
on the camera recorder.
27
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover
Detaching the Hood
Remove the hood when attaching a filter,
Use the lens cover open/close switch to open or
close the lens cover.
Before shooting, open the lens cover.
When this camera recorder is not in use, close the
lens cover to protect the lens.
teleconverter or wide converter to the front of the
lens.
While pressing the hood release button, turn the
hood in the anti­clockwise direction to remove it.
Preparations
Caution : Do not press against the lens cover with force.
Doing so may damage the lens or the cover.
Attaching/Detaching the Hood
Attaching the Hood
Align the markings on the camera recorder and
hood; turn the hood in the direction of the arrow until
it is locked.
Power Supply
To use this camera recorder, you can attach a
battery pack or connect an AC adapter to it.
(' P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )
(' P30 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
Caution : Set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to
“OFF(CHG)” before changing the power supply
that operates this camera recorder.
Using a Battery Pack
Charging the Battery
Charge the battery immediately after purchase or
when the battery power is running low.
* The battery is not charged when purchased.
2
4
POWER
/CHG
3
1
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
28
4
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Memo : Blinking of the [POWER/CHG] lamp during
charging indicates the charge level.
[POWER/CHG] Lamp
Orange blinking
(4 times per second)
Orange blinking
(3 times per second)
Orange blinking
(2 times per second)
Orange blinking
(1 time per second)
Light goes out
Charge Level
Less than 25%
Less than 50%
Less than 75%
Less than 100%
Fully charged
Removing the Battery
2
1
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.
2 While pressing and holding the [BATT.
RELEASE] button, push up and remove the
battery in the direction of the arrow.
Caution : Do not remove the battery when the [POWER
ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is “ON”.
Do not insert or remove the DC cable when the
battery is in use.
Leaving the camera recorder unused with the
battery inside will deplete the battery power
even if you set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]
switch to “OFF(CHG)”. Remove the battery if
you are not using the camera recorder.
Estimated Charging and Continuous
Operating Times
o Charging Time (supplied SSL­JVC50 battery
pack)
Approx. 4 h
Memo : Use up the charge completely before you
charge the battery. If the battery is not fully
discharged before charging, the battery
capacity may drop after repeated cycles.
If the battery capacity drops due to repetitive
shallow charging and discharging, it may be
recovered by using up the charge completely
and then fully charging the battery again.
If you charge the battery immediately after using
while the battery is still warm, it may not be fully
charged.
It is recommended that you charge the battery
in an environment between 10 °C and 35 °C
(50°F and 95 °F). The battery may not be fully
charged or the charging time may be prolonged
if charged under low temperatures (below 10 °C/
50 °F).
o Continuous Operating Time (supplied SSL­
JVC50 battery pack)
Approx. 2 hrs 45 mins
Memo : Actual operating times may differ depending on
the age of the battery, charging condition, and
operating environment.
Operating time is shortened in cold
environment.
The operating time may shorten when power
zoom is used, accessories are connected, or
when the LCD monitor is frequently used.
For purchase of spare batteries and battery
charger, consult your nearest JVC dealer.
Precautions for Batteries
Store the battery in a cool and dry place when
not in use. Do not expose the battery to high
temperatures (such as in a car under direct
sunlight). This will cause battery leakage and
shorten the battery life.
If the operating time shortens drastically even
after charging, the battery may be reaching the
end of its life. Replace the battery with a new
one.
29
Preparations
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.
2 Attach the supplied battery.
Slide it in until you hear a click.
3 Connect the supplied AC adapter to the
[DC] terminal.
Open the cover of the [DC] terminal and connect
as shown in the diagram.
4 Connect the AC adapter to a power outlet.
The [POWER/CHG] lamp blinks during
charging and will go out after charging is
complete.
Remove the AC adapter after charging is
complete.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)
Use the supplied AC adapter to operate the camera
recorder with AC power.
Power Status Display
Viewfinder Screen and LCD Monitor
The power status is displayed on the display and
menu screens.
Preparations
2
POWER
ON
1
Display
)7.4V
)100min
430%
9RES
Description
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out,
the battery mark appears hollow,
and “RES” (yellow) is displayed.
Currently powered by an AC
adapter.
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
1 Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to
the [DC] terminal of the camera recorder.
Check that the power switch of the camera
recorder is set to “OFF(CHG)”.
Open the cover of the [DC] terminal and
connect as shown in the diagram.
2 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “ON”.
Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.
Caution : Do not insert or remove the DC cable during
recording.
Do not use power supply of high voltage
fluctuation, containing noise such as ripple, or
with insufficient capacity.
Charging the Built­In Battery
The date/time and time code data are stored
using the built­in rechargeable battery.
When power is connected to the camera
recorder, the built­in battery always gets
charged. When the power is disconnected, the
battery gradually discharges.
The battery will be totally discharged if left
unused for 3 months and the date/time and time
code data will be reset. When this happens, set
the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “ON” to
display the [Initial Setting] screen, then set the
date/time.
(' P32 [Initial Settings] )
30
Memo : You can set the display using
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]
-[Battery].
(' P104 [ Battery ] )
Memo : If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
Display Screen
(' P116 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
(' P121 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
282min
100min
50min
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Menu Screen
(' P90 [Display and Description of the Menu
Screen] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Warnings by Lamp and Warning Tone
Turning On/Off the Power
Turning On the Power
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “ON”.
The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
and is ready for shooting.
Memo : The camera recorder always start up in Camera
mode when the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]
switch is set to “ON”. Use the [MODE] button at
the side of the camera recorder to switch mode.
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Turning Off the Power
Sets the camera recorder to the recording standby
or stop mode.
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.
2 Remove the battery and the power to the
[DC] terminal (when not in use for a long
time).
Auto Power Off function
When [System]-[Auto Power Off] is set to “On”,
the power turns off automatically when the camera
recorder is not operated for 5 minutes or longer
while running on battery.
(' P108 [ Auto Power Off ] )
Memo : When both the battery and AC adapter are
connected, power from the AC adapter
connection will be used. As such, the [Auto
Power Off] function will not have any effect.
Caution : Do not set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to “OFF(CHG)” during recording. Check that the
operation mode display is “STBY” or “STOP”
before you turn off the power.
If you have mistakenly set the [POWER ON/
OFF(CHG)] switch to “OFF(CHG)” during
recording, wait for 5 seconds or more before you
turn on the power again.
When turning off the power, first set the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch of the camera
recorder to “OFF(CHG)”. Do not remove the
battery or turn off the AC power while the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is set to “ON”.
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
.
31
Preparations
Warning status is indicated by tally lamp and
warning tone.
The tally lamp blinks.
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [+] terminal.
Memo : If you continue to use the camera recorder while
the power warning is displayed, the camera
recorder will stop automatically when the battery
or supplied voltage from the AC adapter
becomes lower.
Caution : The remaining battery power and time are
displayed as they are from the battery
information. Accurate data may not be displayed
depending on the battery condition. Replace the
battery as soon as possible when the remaining
battery power and time are low.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Initial Settings
When the power is first turned on, the Initial Setting
screen for performing the initial settings in the
camera recorder appears.
Set the date/time of the built­in clock in the [Initial
Setting] screen.
All operations are disabled until initial settings are
complete.
2 Ensure that the lens cover is closed, and
press the Set button (R).
Self­diagnosis starts.
A progress bar appears, and “Complete
Diagnosis” appears when the diagnosis is
complete.
Preparations
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
CANCEL
Memo : It is recommended to use the AC adapter as the
power supply.
Be sure to close the lens cover.
Memo : It takes about 6 minutes to complete the
diagnosis. During the diagnosis, do not operate
or turn off the camera recorder.
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “ON”.
The Initial Setting screen appears.
3 Press the Set button (R) after confirming
the exit screen.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears.
For GY­HM600U
For GY­HM600E
32
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Memo : The [Initial Setting] screen appears when the
power is turned on for the first time and when the
power is turned on after the built­in battery is fully
discharged.
The configured date/time data is saved in the
built­in rechargeable battery even if the power is
turned off.
You can change the display style of the date/time
on the menu.
Setting the Date Display (Date Style)
(' P104 [ Date Style ] )
The date display can be changed in [LCD/VF]-
[Display Settings]-[Date Style].
Setting the Time Display (Time Style)
(' P104 [ Time Style ] )
The time display can be changed in [LCD/VF]-
[Display Settings]-[Time Style].
Date/Time Display in Each Operation
Mode
During Camera mode:
Date/time of the built­in clock is displayed.
During Media mode:
Shooting date/time of the clip being played back is
displayed.
Changing the Time after Initial Setting
Setting the Date/Time
(' P108 [ Date/Time ] )
1 Select [System]-[Date/Time].
The [Date/Time] screen appears.
2 Set the date and time.
A Move the cursor with the cross­shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
B Change the values with the cross­shaped
button (JK).
3 Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
33
Preparations
4 Set the time zone and date/time.
A Move the cursor with the cross­shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
B Change the values with the cross­shaped
button (JK).
5 Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
Memo : The configured date/time data can be displayed
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder and be
recorded to the SD card.
The value of the year can be set in the range of
“2000” to “2099”.
Changing the Display Style
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Displays on the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
Preparations
You can display the camera status, media
information, zebra pattern, and various markers in
the video image on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen during shooting.
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Video Set]
-[Display On TV] is set to “On”, the display
screen and menu screen are also displayed in
the video image from the video signal output
terminal.
(' P105 [ Display On TV ] )
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Media Mode
(' P121 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
This is the screen display during clip playback in
Media Mode.
The display switches between three screen
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.
(Display 0 - 1 - 2 - 0)
1000/ 2000
Display 0 screen
Display Screen
1000/ 2000
00: 00: 00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
Display Screen in Camera Mode
Jan 24 , 2012
12 :34 : 56
The display switches between three screen
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.
(Display 0 - 1 - 2 - 0)
Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the
status screen.
4030 20
10
0
Display 1 screen
282min
1920x1080
60 i HQ
1000/2000
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
x5
x5
SELECT
INFO
4030 20
10
0
Display 0 screen
Display 2 screen
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24,2012
12 :34 :56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Display 1 screen
282min
100min
50min
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24,2012
12 :34 :56
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
Display 2 screen
34
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Status Screen
This screen allows you to check the current
This screen displays the USB mode.
Warning Display
Warning display is displayed in the display
screen (Camera mode, Media mode).
If error occurs during status screen display, the
display will return to the display screen to display
the warning.
(' P133 [Error Messages and Actions] )
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Warning Display Area
35
Preparations
settings.
To display the status screen, press the
[STATUS] button in the normal screen.
The status display differs according to the
operation mode (two types).
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the
display screen.
Press the [MENU] button at each status screen
(other than the [Camera 1]/[Camera 2] screen)
to enter the setting screen.
Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to switch
screens as follows:
USB Mode Screen
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
and Viewfinder
You can monitor video images on this camera
recorder using the viewfinder, LCD monitor, or
both.
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
3
2
LCD BRIGHT
PEAKING
Tilt 90 degrees
downward
Normal LCD
Preparations
Inverted
LCD
DISPLAY
Tilt 180 degrees
upward
Displays on the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder Screen (VF)
When [LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] is set to “Off”
(' P101 [ LCD + VF ] )
LCD Monitor Status
LCD closed Normal LCD
Inverted LCD
LCD opened Normal LCD
Inverted LCD
LCD Display
OFF
ON
ON
ON
VF Display
ON
OFF *
OFF *
OFF *
* Turns on when [LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] is set to
“On”.
Memo : Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds
to turn ON/OFF the LCD monitor.
The function to switch between LCD monitor and
viewfinder displays by pressing the [DISPLAY]
button can be canceled by opening/closing or
rotating the LCD monitor.
The viewfinder screen is always displayed when
[LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] is set to “On”.
You can display both the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screens at the same time by setting
[LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] to “On”.
(' P101 [ LCD + VF ] )
1
1 Open the LCD cover.
2 Incline the LCD cover to a position that
enables easy viewing.
Rotate the LCD monitor to adjust the angle.
While the LCD monitor is open, you can
rotate it 180 degrees upward or 90 degrees
downward.
Rotating the LCD monitor 180 degrees
upward enables you to see the screen from
the lens side. To display the image when it is
viewed from the opposite direction (mirror
image), perform setting as follows.
Set [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[LCD
Mirror] to “Mirror”- Set button (R)
(' P102 [ LCD Mirror ] )
3 Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the LCD monitor.
You can change the angle and brightness of the
LCD monitor according to your usage condition.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [LCD BRIGHT +/−] button to adjust the
brightness of the LCD monitor.
The [+] button brightens the monitor and the
[−] button darkens it.
Press the [+] and [−] buttons simultaneously
to return to standard settings.
During adjustment, the brightness level is
displayed on the LCD monitor.
LCD BRIGHT
4030 20
36
10
0
-10
P13000K
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the Contour
PEAKING
4030 20
10
0
0
P13000K
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Memo : The [PEAKING +/­] operation is disabled in the
Media mode, and its value is fixed at “­10”.
Adjusting the Contrast
Use the [LCD Contrast] menu to adjust the
contrast of the LCD monitor.
Adjust using [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[LCD
Contrast].
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: +10 to ­10] (Default value: 0)
Adjusting the Viewfinder
You can change the brightness and peaking of the
viewfinder screen according to your usage
conditions.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
1
1 Incline the viewfinder vertically to a
position that enables easy viewing.
2 Turn the visibility adjustment lever to
adjust the visibility.
Turn the visibility adjustment lever to sharpen
the image on the viewfinder screen.
3 Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [VF Bright] menu to adjust the
brightness of the viewfinder screen.
Adjust using [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[VF
Bright].
Increasing the value increases the
brightness. [Setting Values: +10 to ­10]
(Default value: 0)
Adjusting the Contour
Use the [PEAKING +/­] button to adjust the
contour of the viewfinder screen.
The contour of the LCD monitor will also be
adjusted at the same time.
(' P37 [Adjusting the Contour] )
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] is
set to “Off”, operate after switching to the
viewfinder display by pressing the [DISPLAY]
button for 2 seconds or longer.
The [PEAKING +/­] operation is disabled in the
Media mode, and its value is fixed at “­10”.
Adjusting the Contrast
PEAKING
Use the [VF Contrast] menu to adjust the
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
Adjust using [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[VF
Contrast].
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: +10 to ­10] (Default value:
0)
2
37
Preparations
Use the [PEAKING +/−] button to adjust the
contour of the LCD monitor.
(The contour of the viewfinder screen will also
be adjusted at the same time.)
The [+] button increases contour correction
and the [−] button decreases contour
correction.
Press the [+] and [−] buttons simultaneously
to return to standard settings.
During adjustment, the contour level is
displayed on the LCD monitor.
Caution : A high­definition viewfinder is used on this
camera recorder in order to provide an accurate
focusing environment. Due to the characteristic
of the display device, colors may appear on the
images when you blink your eyes. This is not a
malfunction. It does not affect the recorded
images, SDI output, AV output, or HDMI output.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Displaying in Black and White
You can display the viewfinder screen in black
and white.
[Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[VF Color] item
- Press Set button (R) - Select “Off”Press Set button (R).
(' P101 [ VF Color ] )
Preparations
Assigning Functions to
User Buttons
You can assign functions to the following buttons
and use them as user buttons.
By assigning functions to the buttons, the usability
of the camera recorder is enhanced.
Perform settings in the menu items corresponding
to each button.
Button
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
Menu Item
[USER1]
[OIS/2] Button
[USER2]
[LOLUX/3] Button
[USER3]
[AE LOCK/4] Button
[USER4]
[ZEBRA/5] Button
[USER5]
[MARKER/6] Button
[USER6]
[C.REVIEW/7] Button
[USER7]
LCD Cross­Shaped Button (J)
[LCD KEY▲]
LCD Cross­Shaped Button (K)
[LCD KEY▼]
LCD Cross­Shaped Button (H)
[LCD KEY◀]
LCD Cross­Shaped Button (I)
[LCD KEY▶]
1 Assign functions to the buttons from the
menu.
Set items in [Main Menu]-[Camera
Function]-[User Switch Set]-[USER1]­
[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD
KEY▼], [LCD KEY◀].
(' P95 [User Switch Set Item] )
Memo : Operations of the user buttons are interlocked
with the menu settings.
When the menu screen is displayed, these
buttons function as the menu operation buttons.
(' P89 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Tally Lamp
This is the indicator lamp for recording and
warning.
The operation changes according to the menu
settings.
The lamp blinks when the battery or remaining
space on the SD card is low. (Camera mode only)
* Set using [Main Menu]-[System]-[Tally
Lamp].
(' P108 [ Tally Lamp ] )
TIME
CODE
C.REVIEW/7
MENU/THUMB
Menu setting
Functional
information
CANCEL
Recording status
FOCUS ASSIST/1
TIME CODE
.
OIS / 2
LOLUX / 3
AE LOCK/4
ZEBRA/5
MARKER/6
[Tally Lamp]
Warning
Caution
Recording
Special recording *
R : Lights up
J : Blinks four times in 1 second
o : Blinks once in 1 second
* Paused state during special recording ([Clip
Continuous]).
(' P76 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
Memo : Blinking takes priority over lighting up.
38
Off
­
­
­
­
On
J
o
R
R
ISSUED
2012/12/21
SD Card
This camera recorder saves the recorded images
and audio sound on the SD card (sold separately)
in the card slot.
Usable Cards
Estimated Recordable Time of SD Cards
The estimated recordable time is only a guide.
Differences may occur depending on the SD card
in use and the battery condition.
(' P109 [ Resolution ] )
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
4GB
8GB
16 GB
32 GB
64 GB
(SDXC)
128 GB
(SDXC)
QuickTime/MP4
QuickTime
AVCHD
MPEG2/HD
H.264/SD
SP
HQ
SP
HQ
SD
720p 1080i 720p/ 1080i 1080i 480i/576i
1080i/
1080p
22
17
12
25
19
47
45
35
25
50
39
95
90
70
50
100
78
190
180 140
100
200
156
380
360 280
200
400
312
760
720
560
400
800
624
Write­Protect Switch on the SD Card
A Slide the write­protect switch upward to enable
writing or deleting.
B Slide the write­protect switch downward to
prevent writing or deleting. (Images in the card
are protected.)
Write-Protect Switch
A
Write/Delete Enabled
B
Write/Delete Disabled
1520
(Unit: minute)
39
Preparations
Use a Class 6/10 SD card.
Memo : Depending on the recording format, SD card
with Class 4 or higher performance can also be
used.
(' P45 [Selecting System Definition, File
Format and Video Format] )
Caution : Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
Memo : If the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded.
For each file format, up to 600 clips can be
recorded to one SD card on this camera
recorder. When 600 clips are recorded to one
card, the remaining space is displayed as 0 min
regardless of the estimated recordable time,
and no further recording can be performed.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, up to 4000 clips can be recorded to
one SD card.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Inserting an SD Card
Removing the SD Card
This camera recorder comes with two card slots
(Slot A and B) for video/audio recording and
playback.
1
2
A
Preparations
2
B
3
1 Open the SD card cover.
2 Insert an SD card with the notched corner
pointing up.
The status indicator of the card slot to which the
card was inserted lights up in red.
3 Close the SD card cover.
Card Slot Status Indicator
The following table shows the respective states of
slot A and B.
Lamp
Lights up in
red
Slot Status
The inserted SD card is being
accessed. (writing/reading data)
Do not turn off the power of the
camera recorder or remove the SD
card.
Lights up in
On standby. The inserted SD card
green
can be used for recording or
playback.
Light goes out SD card is not inserted.
An unusable card is inserted.
An SD card is inserted but a
different slot is selected.
40
1 Check that the SD card to be removed is not
being accessed (status indicator of the
card slot lights up in red).
2 Open the SD card cover.
3 Push the SD card and remove it from the
slot.
4 Close the SD card cover.
Memo : When both slots are inserted with usable SD
cards, the previously selected slot is used.
Caution : Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the
camera recorder or remove the SD card when it
is being accessed. All data recorded on the
card, including the file that is being accessed,
may be corrupted. Be sure to check whether the
status indicator is lighted in green or not before
you turn off the power or remove the SD card.
If you mistakenly remove the card when it is
being accessed, reinsert the card only after the
status indicator goes off.
The SD card may not be recognized if you insert
and remove the card within a short time. When
this happens, remove the card and wait for a few
seconds before you reinsert.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Switching the SD cards
When both card slots are inserted with SD cards,
you can use the [SLOT A/B] button to switch the
card to use.
When the memory on an SD card is full during
recording, data recording automatically switches to
the other card.
1 Select [System]-[Media]-[Format
Media].
(' P108 [ Format Media ] )
2 Select the slot of the SD card to be
formatted and press the Set button (R).
2
MENU/THUMB
Preparations
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
AE LEVEL
SLOT
A/B
3 The status of the selected SD card appears.
4 Select [Format] and press the Set button
(R).
Memo : The [SLOT A/B] button is disabled during
recording or playback. Cards will not be
switched even if you press the button.
4
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards
When the following cards are inserted, [!FORMAT]
appears at the remaining media display area.
Format the card using the camera recorder menu.
Unformatted SD cards
SD cards formatted under different
specifications
* For details of the menu operation, refer to “[Basic
Operations in Menu Screen] P 89”.
Caution : Be sure to format the SD card on this camera
recorder. SD cards formatted on a PC and other
peripheral equipment cannot be used on this
camera recorder.
[!RESTORE] appears at the remaining media
display area when an SD card that requires
restoring is inserted.
5 Formatting starts.
41
ISSUED
2012/12/21
6 Formatting is complete.
3 Restoring starts.
When formatting is complete, “Complete” appears
and the camera recorder returns to the [Format
Media] screen.
Preparations
Memo : During formatting, menu operation is
unavailable but you can start recording.
However, this is only available when a
recordable SD card is inserted in the other slot.
Formatting cannot be performed in the following
cases.
Recording is in progress on the SD card to be
formatted.
SD card is not inserted.
Write­protect switch of the SD card is set (2
is displayed).
Caution : If you format the SD card, all data recorded on
the card, including video data and setup files,
will be deleted.
Restoring the SD Card
It is necessary to restore the SD card if an
abnormality occurs to the data in the card due to
some reasons.
Memo : [!RESTORE] appears at the remaining media
display area when an SD card that requires
restoring is inserted.
1 Select [System]-[Media]-[Restore
Media].
(' P108 [ Restore Media ] )
2 Select the SD card to be restored and press
the Set button (R).
4 Restoring is complete.
When restoring is complete, “Complete”
appears and the camera recorder returns to the
[Restore Media] screen.
When no media that requires restoring is
inserted, the camera recorder returns to the
[Media] menu screen.
Caution : [Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera
mode. However, it cannot be selected while the
camera recorder is recording. Select [Restore
Media] in Camera mode when the camera
recorder is not recording.
[Restore Media] does not restore the SD card to
its original states completely. If restoring fails,
replace or format the SD card. Take note that
formatting erases all the information inside the
SD card.
Restoring cannot be performed in the following
cases.
Camera recorder is recording in progress.
SD card is not inserted.
Write­protect switch of the SD card is set (2
is displayed).
Restoring is not required.
2
42
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Clips Recorded to SD Cards
Folders in the SD Card
Images captured are recorded to the [PRIVATE]
folder inside the SD card.
Images recorded are sorted into the respective
folders according to the menu settings below.
Format
QuickTime(MPEG2)
MP4(MPEG2)
AVCHD
QuickTime(H.264)
Record Folder
JVC/CQAV
JVC/BPAV
AVCHD
JVC/CQAVC
Memo : By formatting (initializing) the SD card from the
[Format Media] menu on the camera recorder,
folders required for recording in the current
[System] settings will be generated.
When the [System] settings and
[QuickTime(MPEG2)] settings are changed,
folders required for recording in those settings
will be automatically generated.
Caution : When a clip inside the folder is moved or deleted
using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac),
recording to the SD card may fail if formatting
(initializing) of the card is not performed.
Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name
When recording is stopped, the images, audio
and accompanying data which are recorded
from start to stop are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
An 8­character clip name is automatically
generated for the recorded clip.
(“Clip Name Prefix” + “Clip Number”)
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, the clip name generated consists of
only the Clip Number (5­digit number).
(' P109 [ Format ] )
A B CG0001
Clip Number
A number in automatic
ascending order is assigned in
the recording order.
The Clip Number can be reset in
the menu.*
Clip Name Prefix (any four alphanumeric characters)
This is set to “xxxG” (“xxx” denotes the last 3
digits of the serial number) by default.
* [Clip Set] - [Reset Clip Number]
(' P111 [ Reset Clip Number ] )
Memo : Before recording starts, you can set any
characters for the clip name prefix by using
[Main Menu]-[System]-[Record Set]-[Clip
Set]-[Clip Name Prefix].
(' P111 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )
Changes cannot be made after recording.
Recorded Clips
The recorded materials may be split into several
files but they can be played back continuously
on the camera recorder.
Clips may be recorded across the two SD cards
in card slots A and B depending on the recording
time of the clip.
When copying videos in MP4 file format to a
HDD using a PC, it is recommended to use [JVC
ProHD Clip Manager Software], which is found
in the supplied disc, to maintain continuity.
Caution : A clip recorded across several cards cannot be
played back continuously. Continuous playback
is only possible when the recording is made on
one card.
43
Preparations
System
HD
HD
HD
SD
Example: In the case of QuickTime/MP4
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Basic Shooting
Procedures
2 Press the [REC] button to start recording to
the SD card.
This camera recorder has three [REC] buttons.
Any of the [REC] buttons can be used to start/
stop recording by default.
The tally lamp lights up in red during recording.
Zoom Operation
(' P46 [Zoom Operation] )
Adjusting the Focus Manually
(' P47 [Focus Operation] )
Preparations
2
4
4
Shooting
3
1
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
1 Supply battery or AC adapter power to the
camera recorder.
(' P28 [Power Supply] )
2 Insert an SD card.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
3 Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the center of
the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to set to
“ON”. The camera recorder starts up in Camera
mode and is ready for recording.
4 Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
Shooting
1 Configure the video and audio input
settings.
You have to configure video settings such as
brightness adjustment (iris, gain, shutter) and
white balance adjustment in order to start
shooting. You also have to adjust the audio
input settings and audio recording level for
audio recording.
Adjusting the Brightness
(' P50 [Adjusting the Brightness] )
Adjusting the White Balance
(' P55 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
Adjusting Audio Input Settings and
Recording Level
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )
44
Memo : If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the factory default, pressing the [REC] button
starts recording only to the media in the selected
slot.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record Set]
-[Slot Mode] is set to “Dual”, recording can be
performed simultaneously to the cards in both
the slots.
(' P71 [Dual Rec] )
The tally lamp can be turned off in [System]-
[Tally Lamp].
(' P108 [ Tally Lamp ] )
3 Check the most recently captured images.
Press the [C.REVIEW/7] button on the lens
to activate the Clip Review function. The
most recently captured images are played
back on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen.
After playback, the camera recorder returns
to standby mode (STBY).
(' P70 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Memo : [Clip Review] is assigned to [C.REVIEW/7]
button in factory default.
[Clip Review] can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Selecting System
Definition, File Format and
Video Format
You can select the system definition (HD or SD),
file format for recording/playback and the record
format for video images on this camera recorder.
Memo : Make a selection in [Main Menu]-[Record
Format].
Select the system definition in [System].
There are two different definitions for selection.
HD:
Records in HD (High Definition) quality.
SD:
Records in SD (Standard Definition) quality.
Selecting a File Format
Select a file format in [Format].
There are four file formats for selection.
QuickTime(MPEG2):
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
MP4(MPEG2):
MP4 file format
AVCHD:
AVCHD file format
QuickTime(H.264):
QuickTime format (.MOV)
Memo : The available options vary as follows depending
on the [System] setting.
For “HD”:
QuickTime(MPEG2), MP4(MPEG2),
AVCHD
For “SD”:
QuickTime(H.264)
Selecting a Video Format
Select a [Record Format] from the list of formats.
The selectable [Frame & Bit Rate] changes
according to the settings of [System], [Format],
and [Resolution].
The recording bit rate (video) is 35 Mbps VBR in
“HQ” mode, and 18.3 Mbps (1080i is 25 Mbps)
CBR in “SP” mode.
If [Format] is set to “AVCHD”, the recording bit
rate (system rate) is 24 Mbps VBR in “HQ”
mode, and 17 Mbps VBR in “SP” mode.
Record Format
Remarks
Resolution Frame &
Bit Rate
QuickTime 1920x1080 60i(HQ)
/MP4
30p(HQ)
50i(HQ)
25p(HQ)
24p(HQ)
1440x1080 60i(HQ)
50i(HQ)
60i(SP) HDV
compatible
50i(SP) HDV
compatible
1280x720 60p(HQ)
30p(HQ)
50p(HQ)
25p(HQ)
24p(HQ)
60p(SP) HDV
compatible
50p(SP) HDV
compatible
AVCHD
1920x1080 60i(HQ) Recordable
50i(HQ) using Class 4
60i(SP)
50i(SP)
When [System] is set to “SD”
When [System] is set to “SD”, the video format is
fixed as follows for the different models.
Format
Record Format
Resolution Frame &
Bit Rate
QuickTime 720 x 480 60i (U
model)
720 x 576 50i (E
model)
Format
Remarks
Recordable
using Class 4
45
Shooting
Selecting a System Definition
List of Formats
The following is a list of file formats and video
formats that can be selected on this camera
recorder.
When [System] is set to “HD”
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos
Select an aspect ratio for the images.
The available options vary as follows depending on
the [System] setting.
For “HD”: Fixed at 16:9
For “SD”: Can select 16:9 or 4:3
Setting the Record Format Menu
Shooting
1 Display the [Main Menu]-[Record
Format] menu.
2 Set each of the items.
3 After setting is complete for all items, press
the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The record format is switched.
A “Please Wait...” message appears on the
screen during switching.
Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip
1 Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to
“SERVO”.
2 Press the zoom lever to zoom.
The zoom speed changes according to the
extent the zoom lever is being pushed.
Zooms into wide angle and increases the
angle of view when “W” is pressed.
Zooms into telephoto and decreases the
angle of view when “T” is pressed.
A zoom bar appears during zoom operation
Adjusts the angle of view.
Zoom ratio: 1x to 23x (optical zoom only)
Zooming can be operated using any of the three
levers/rings below.
Zoom Lever at the Grip
Zoom Lever at the Handle
Zoom Ring at the Lens Section:
Functions as a zoom ring when the [ZOOM
SERVO/MANUAL] switch is set to “MANUAL”.
REC
T
REC
W
HOLD
FIX VAR OFF
ZOOM
SERVO
46
MANUAL
00:00:00.00
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
12 . 5/ 30f ps
4030
40
30 20
Zoom Operation
00:00:00.00
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
12 . 5/ 30f ps
10
0
P 13000K
5.
5.6 f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
4030
40
30 20
10
0
P 13000K
5.
5.6 f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
Using the Zoom Lever at the Handle
1 Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to
“SERVO”.
2 Set the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch
to “FIX” or “VAR”.
Memo : Setting to “FIX” will allow the zoom operation to
move at the speed set in [Handle Zoom Speed].
Set the zoom speed using [Main Menu][Camera Function]-[Handle Zoom Speed].
(' P94 [ Handle Zoom Speed ] )
Setting to “VAR” will change the zoom speed
according to the pressure applied on the lever.
3 Press the zoom lever at the handle to zoom.
Memo : When the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch is
set to “OFF”, the zoom lever at the handle
section cannot be used.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Using Zoom Ring at the Lens Section
1 Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to
“MANUAL”.
You can adjust the preferred angle of view by
turning the zoom ring.
Focus Operation
Adjusting Focus Manually
Saving/Recalling Current Zoom
Position (Preset Zoom)
This allows you to register up to three zoom
positions.
Memo : To recall the stored zoom position, set the
[ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to “SERVO”.
The zoom speed to the zoom position can be set
with [Main Menu]-[Camera Function]-
[Preset Zoom Speed].
(' P96 [ Preset Zoom Speed ] )
Operating other zoom maneuvers during a
zoom position recall will cancel the recall.
FOCUS
AUTO
TIME CODE
MANU
PUSH AUTO
Shooting
1 Assign the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset
Zoom2”, or “Preset Zoom3” function to any
of the user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
(' P95 [USER1 ­ USER7, LCD KEY▲/LCD
KEY▶/LCD KEY▼/LCD KEY◀] )
2 Save the current zoom position.
Press any of the buttons assigned with the
“Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or “Preset
Zoom3” function for more than 1 second.
The current zoom position will be stored.
3 Recall the stored zoom position.
Press any of the buttons assigned with the
“Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or “Preset
Zoom3” function and release within 1
second.
The camera recorder zooms to the stored
zoom position.
FOCUS ASSIST/1
1 Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to
“MANU”.
The manual focus icon " appears on the
screen.
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Memo : If [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display
Settings]-[Focus] is set to “Off”, the " icon will
not appear.
(' P103 [ Focus ] )
2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
Memo : Using the Focus Assist function makes it easier
to focus.
(' P48 [Focus Assist Function] )
Pressing the [FOCUS AUTO] button in the
Manual Focus mode activates the One­push
Auto Focus mode, while holding down the
[FOCUS AUTO] button activates the Push Auto
Focus mode.
(' P48 [One Push Auto Focus] )
(' P48 [Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)] )
47
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting Focus Automatically
Shooting
Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to
“AUTO”.
The auto focus icon # appears on the screen.
Memo : If [AF Assist] is set to “On”, you can temporarily
adjust the focus manually by turning the focus
ring when in the automatic focus adjustment
mode.
(' P94 [ AF Assist ] )
If [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]
-[Focus] is set to “Off”, the auto focus icon will
not appear.
(' P103 [ Focus ] )
One Push Auto Focus
While in the Manual Focus mode, pressing the
[PUSH AUTO] button (within 1 minute) makes the
camera recorder focus on the center of the frame
automatically.
Memo : Face detection does not work during One Push
Auto Focus.
When the operation is complete, the camera
recorder returns to the Manual Focus mode
automatically.
One Push Auto Focus functions with emphasis
on the focusing speed. This function is not
suitable during recording.
Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)
The camera recorder will shift to Auto Focus
mode temporarily and automatically adjusts
focus when the [PUSH AUTO] button is pressed
during shooting in Manual Focus mode.
Release the [PUSH AUTO] button to return to
Manual Focus mode.
Memo : Face detection does not work during Push Auto
Focus.
Adjusting Focus on Far Objects
Slide the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to “∞”.
The ∞ icon is displayed.
Release your finger to return to Manual Focus
mode.
48
Focus Assist Function
When the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button is pressed
during shooting, the focused area is displayed
in color. This enables easy and accurate
focusing.
Select the color (blue, red or green) in the menu.
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Shooting
Assist]-[Focus Assist]-[Type] is set to
“ACCU­Focus”, the depth of field becomes
shallower to enable easier focusing.
(' P102 [ Focus Assist ] )
The “ACCU­Focus” function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
Select the display color in [Main Menu]-[LCD/
VF]-[Shooting Assist]-[Focus Assist]-
[Color].
(' P102 [ Color ] )
If you use the zebra function and the Focus
Assist function at the same time, it may be
difficult to see the effect of the Focus Assist. In
this case, turn off the zebra function.
Setting Focus Assist Function to a User Button
You can assign the “Focus Assist” function to a user
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the Focusing by
Face Detection
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
CANCEL
.
1 Assign the “Face Detect” function to any of
the user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
2 Focus the camera recorder on a person and
press the user button that is assigned with
“Face Detect”.
When Face detection is enabled, the face
detection icon () appears.
When [Main Menu]-[Camera
Function]-[User Switch Set]-[Face
Detect] is set to “AF”, “#” appears.
When [Main Menu]-[Camera
Function]-[User Switch Set]-[Face
Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, “AE±0”
appears.
If you select the person nearest to the center
of the screen, an orange frame will appear
on his face.
Focus will be automatically adjusted for the
selected person.
AE
Memo : If the detection frame does not appear, make
sure that the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞]
selection switch has been set to “AUTO”. And if
[Face Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, set one or more
of the items (Gain, Iris and Electronic Shutter) to
the automatic adjustment mode.
(' P50 [Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically] )
(' P51 [Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment)
Mode] )
(' P52 [Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic
Gain Adjustment)] )
(' P55 [Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)] )
Selecting Specific Person from Several
Persons
1 Hold down the user button that is assigned
with “Face Detect”.
The camera recorder will enter face
selection mode and the face detection icon
() will blink.
An orange frame will appear on the face of
the person nearest to the center of the
screen. Blue frames will appear on the faces
of others.
Detection Frame (Orange)
Blinking
Detection Frame (Blue)
2 Select a specific person.
Use the cross­shaped button (HIJK) to
select a person.
An orange frame will appear on the face of
the selected person and focus will be
automatically adjusted.
49
Shooting
This function detects human faces and
automatically adjusts focus during Auto Focus.
It can also track moving objects.
When several faces are detected, you can select
one to focus on.
Memo : This function can also adjust the brightness
automatically according to the brightness of the
face detected.
(' P95 [ Face Detect ] )
Detection Frame (Orange)
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Detection Frame (Orange)
Detection Frame (Blue)
Shooting
3 Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
person for face detection.
Memo : Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the
selection.
You can specify the detection sensitivity and the
operation speed after losing sight of the face
using [Main Menu]-[Camera Function]-
[User Switch Set]-[Face Detect]-
[Sensitivity] and [Hysteresis].
(' P95 [ Sensitivity ] )
(' P96 [ Hysteresis ] )
Adjusting the Brightness
Adjust the brightness using Iris, Gain, Shutter
speed and ND filter according to the brightness of
the object.
Adjusting the Brightness Automatically
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”, Iris,
Gain, Shutter speed and ND filter are automatically
adjusted according to the brightness of the object
to maintain optimum brightness.
AE LOCK/4
AE
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
PUSH
AUTO
EL
LEV
FULL AUTO
ON
OFF
CANCEL
GAIN
50
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
Memo : You can use the cross­shaped button (HI) on
the side of the camera recorder to set the target
level (brighter/darker) to maintain optimum
brightness during automatic adjustment.
(' P93 [ AE Level ] )
The convergence speed of the automatic
adjustment for gain, shutter and iris can be set
in the menu.
(' P93 [ AE Speed ] )
If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and
Shutter) have been set to “Auto”, the value of the
corresponding items when the user button that
is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed can be fixed.
(' P96 [ AE Lock ] )
Adjusting the Brightness Manually
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “OFF”,
some or all of the items (Iris, Gain and Shutter
Speed) can be manually adjusted.
(' P51 [Adjusting the Iris] )
(' P52 [Setting the Gain] )
(' P53 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
Memo : If Iris, Gain and Shutter Speed are manually
adjusted, the [AE Level] setting is temporarily
disabled.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the Iris
Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode
You can adjust the aperture of the lens iris manually
or automatically according to the brightness of the
object.
Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto Iris mode.
The iris is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
The icon appears on the screen.
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
IRIS
Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode
The aperture value (F­number) of the lens can be
set manually.
1 Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Manual
Iris mode.
The icon on the screen disappears.
2 Turn the iris ring on the lens to adjust the
iris manually.
The open F­number of the aperture varies
according to the zoom position.
Wide [W] end
: F1.6
Tele [T] end
: F3.0
F­number
Decrease
Increase
Description
The subject appears brighter.
The focused range becomes
sharper, while the background is
blurred to produce a soft image.
The subject appears darker.
Background of image becomes
focused as well.
Memo : Pressing the [PUSH AUTO] button during
Manual Iris mode activates One Push Auto Iris
mode. And holding down the [PUSH AUTO]
button activates Push Auto Iris mode.
10
0
P13000K
Memo : Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder to “ON” to enter Auto Iris mode
(automatic adjustment mode). The iris is
automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
In this case, the [IRIS] switch on the camera
recorder is disabled.
The iris open/close limit can be set in [Main
Menu]-[Camera Function]-[Auto Iris Limit
(OPEN)]/[Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)] during Auto
Iris.
(' P94 [ Auto Iris Limit (OPEN) ] )
(' P94 [ Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE) ] )
You can use the cross­shaped button (HI) on
the side control panel to set the target level
(brighter/darker) of the auto iris.
(' P93 [ AE Level ] )
The convergence speed of the auto iris can be
set in the menu.
(' P93 [ AE Speed ] )
One Push Auto Iris
When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,
press the [PUSH AUTO] button to adjust the iris
according to the brightness of the object.
Push Auto Iris
When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,
hold down the [PUSH AUTO] button to change to
Auto Iris mode temporarily. The iris will be
automatically adjusted according to the brightness
of the object.
51
Shooting
PUSH AUTO
4030 20
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting the Gain
Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain
Adjustment)
This function electrically boosts the light sensitivity
when there is insufficient illumination on the object.
You can set the gain of the video amplifier
according to the brightness of the object. Select the
setting mode according to your shooting
conditions.
GAIN
FULL AUTO
Shooting
L
M
H
ON
OFF
Manual Gain Mode (Manual Gain
Switching)
1 Press the [GAIN] button to set to the Manual
Gain mode.
The icon on the screen disappears.
Use the [L/M/H] switch to set the gain of the
selected video amplifier.
The default positions of the switch are as
follows.
[L] : 0dB
[M] : 6dB
[H] : 12dB
Memo : You can change the gain value of each position
in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity causes
the screen to appear grainier.
(' P94 [GAIN L/GAIN M/GAIN H] )
52
1 Press the [GAIN] button to set to the
Automatic Gain mode (ALC).
The icon appears on the screen.
Memo : Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder to “ON” to enter the Automatic Gain
mode ([ALC] fixed). The gain of the video
amplifier is automatically set according to the
brightness of the object.
In this case, the [GAIN] switch on the camera
recorder is disabled.
Memo : The upper limit of the gain setting value during
ALC operation can be set in [Main Menu][Camera Function]-[ALC Limit].
(' P94 [ ALC Limit ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
You can change the shutter speed (time for each
shooting frame) using the electronic shutter
function. Electronic shutter can be adjusted
manually or automatically.
Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)
When shutter is ON, use the cross­shaped button
(JK) to set the shutter speed. Shutter speed differs
according to the video format and variable frame
rate settings.
Memo : To display Shutter in angle (DEG), set [Frame &
Bit Rate] to “24p(HQ)” or “25p(HQ)”, and set
[Shutter] in [LCD/VF]-[Display Settings] to
“DEG”.
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
(' P104 [ Shutter ] )
During Modes Other Than Variable Frame Rec
Shutter
J
Resolution/
Frame & Bit
Rate
720/60p
720/30p
1080/60i
1080/30p
720/50p
720/25p
1080/50i
1080/25p
^
^
ON
720/24p
1080/24p
1/10000
(Step)
1/4000
1/2000
AE
PUSH
LEV
AUTO
EL
FULL AUTO
ON
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
OFF
CANCEL
GAIN
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
Switching Shutter Mode
Press the Set button (center of the cross­shaped
button) to turn ON/OFF the shutter.
Memo : When the shutter is ON, “Step” or “Variable” may
be selected in [Camera Function]-[Shutter].
“Step” is the factory default.
(' P93 [ Shutter ] )
(Standard)
K
J
ON
(Upper limit)
1/10000
1/10000
1/1000
1/4000
1/4000
1/500
1/2000
1/2000
1/250
1/1000
1/1000
1/120
1/500
1/500
1/100
1/250
1/250
1/60
1/120
1/120
1/54
1/100
1/100
1/50
1/60
1/50
1/48
1/30
1/25
1/24
1/15
1/12.5
1/12
1/7.5
1/6.25
(Variable)
K
OFF
1/6
1/10843
1/10227
~
Default values 1/60.13
1/50.09
~
1/48.09
(Lower limit)
1/30.07
1/25.05
1/24.05
1/60
1/50
1/48
Memo : The operations of the cross­shaped button
(JK) and Set button (R) are disabled in the
following cases.
During clip preview
During display of the USB switching
confirmation screen
During display of the formatting confirmation
screen
When selecting a face using face detection
When selecting a photometry area with [Spot
Meter] set to “Manual”
53
Shooting
1 Press the [SHUTTER] button to set to the
Manual Shutter mode.
The icon on the screen disappears.
Use the Set button (R) to switch between the
shutter modes and the cross­shaped button
(JK) to switch between the speeds.
Switching Shutter Speed
ISSUED
2012/12/21
During Variable Frame Rec
Shutter
J
Resolution/
Frame & Bit Rate
Frame Rate
ON
(Step)
Shooting
(Standard)
K
J
ON
720/30p, 720/24p, 1080/30p, 1080/24p
60, 30, 15
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/30
1/15
1/7.5
54, 27
^
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/27
1/13.5
1/6.75
50, 25 48, 24, 12, 6
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/10000
1/4000
1/4000
1/2000
1/2000
1/1000
1/1000
1/500
1/500
1/250
1/250
1/120
1/120
1/100
1/100
1/60
1/60
1/54
1/54
1/50
1/50
1/48
1/25
1/24
1/12.5
1/12
1/6.25
1/6
1/10227
1/60.13
1/54.10
1/50.09
1/10843
~
1/48.09
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
(Upper limit)
(Variable)
K
(Lower limit)
OFF
45, 22.5
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/22.5
1/11.25
1/5.625
40, 20, 10
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/20
1/10
1/5
36, 18
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/18
1/9
1/4.5
32, 2
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/32
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
1/45.07
1/40.07
1/36.05
1/32.04
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/32
Shutter
J
Resolution/
Frame & Bit Rate
Frame Rate
ON
(Step)
(Standard)
K
J
ON
(Variable)
K
48, 24, 6
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/50
1/48
1/24
1/12
1/6
1080/25p
720/25p
45, 22.5
40, 20, 10
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/10000
1/4000
1/4000
1/2000
1/2000
1/1000
1/1000
1/500
1/500
1/250
1/250
1/120
1/120
1/100
1/100
1/50
1/50
1/48
1/48
1/45
1/45
1/40
1/22.5
1/20
1/11.25
1/10
1/5.625
1/5
36, 18
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/18
1/9
1/4.5
32, 2
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/32
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
~
(Lower limit)
OFF
54
(Upper limit)
50, 25, 12.5
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/50
1/25
1/12.5
1/6.25
1/50.09
1/48.09
1/45.07
1/40.07
1/36.05
1/32.04
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/32
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)
1 Press the [SHUTTER] button or set the
[FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter
Automatic Shutter mode.
The icon appears on the screen.
The camera recorder enters the Automatic
Shutter mode. The shutter speed is
automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
Setting the ND Filter
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the
appropriate range.
Switch according to the brightness of the object.
When the position on the switch is changed, the
selected position of the ND filter is displayed on the
LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
(Display 2 screen)
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display
Settings]-[ND Filter] is set to “Off”, the position
of the ND filter will not be displayed.
(' P103 [ ND Filter ] )
ND FILTER
1/64
1/16
1/4
OFF
.
Adjusting the White
Balance
Adjust the white balance according to the color
temperature of the lighting. You can select the
adjustment mode according to the shooting
conditions.
As the color of the light (color temperature) varies
according to the light source, it is necessary to
readjust the white balance when the main light
source illuminating the object changes.
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
FULL AUTO
B
A
PRESET
ON
OFF
Manual White Balance Mode (Manual
Switching)
1 Press the [WHT BAL] button to set to
Manual White Balance mode.
You can select the white balance with the
[WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection switch.
Use the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch to select “PRESET” (preset mode),
“A” (memory A mode), or “B” (memory B
mode).
The value assigned to the switch appears on
the screen.
Memo : This is fixed at “FAW” when the [FULL AUTO]
switch of the camera recorder is set to “ON”.
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
.
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
ND 1 /64
55
Shooting
Memo : Switching of shutter speed with the cross­
shaped button (JK) and switching of shutter
mode with the Set button (R) are disabled.
Memo : It is recommended to use the ND filter to set the
lens aperture to less than F8.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Preset Mode (PRESET)
Two different color temperature settings are
registered on this camera recorder. You can
switch between them using the [,] button.
(Default setting: “3200K”)“5600K”)
Press the [,] button to switch to a different
color temperature.
(“Preset Temp.”)“Alternative Temp.”)
1 Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] switch to
“PRESET”.
2 Press the [,] button.
Shooting
Setting the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.] Values
You can change both the color temperature
settings in the Preset mode in the menu.
1 Open the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.] menu.
Select [Main Menu]-[Camera Process]
-[White Balance]-[Preset Temp.] and
[Alternative Temp.], and press the Set button
(R).
The Color Temperature setting screen
appears.
Color Temperature Selection Screen
Color Temperature
Detailed Selection
Screen
2 Select the color temperature.
When selecting from a setting value (Color
Temperature Selection screen), use the
cross­shaped button (JK) to select the color
temperature.
[Setting Values: 7500K, 6500K, 5600K,
5200K, 4800K, 4200K, R3200K, 3000K,
2800K]
To select detailed values (Color
Temperature Detailed Selection screen)
Press the cross­shaped button (I) to
display the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
Use the cross­shaped button (JK) to
select a color temperature.
[Setting Values: 2300K to 15000K (in
100K increments)]
56
Memo : Use the cross­shaped button (I) to switch
between the Color Temperature Selection
screen and the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
If [White Balance] has been assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button will
display the Color Temperature Selection
screen.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode
(B)
Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or
Memory B.
When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch is set to “A” or “B”, press the [,] button
to execute white balance. The white balance will
be automatically adjusted and the adjusted
value will be saved in Memory A or Memory B.
1 Prepare the camera recorder.
A Set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “ON”.
B Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto mode.
C Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2 Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the
lighting.
(' P55 [Setting the ND Filter] )
3 Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch to “A” or “B”.
4 Locate a place with similar lighting
conditions as the object to be shot, place a
white object near the center of the screen
and zoom in to fill the screen with white.
5 Press the [,] (Auto White Balance)
button.
The white detection frame appears when
Auto White Balance is activated. Fill the
frame with white completely.
“AUTO WHITE A OPERATION” or “AUTO
WHITE B OPERATION” appears on the
viewfinder when Auto White Balance is
activated.
When the correct white balance is achieved,
“AUTO WHITE A OK” or “AUTO WHITE B
OK” appears for about 3 seconds together
with the approximate color temperature.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
White Paint Adjustment
You can fine­tune the white balance saved in
Memory A or Memory B.
AUTO WHITE A
OPERATION
White Detection
Frame
1 Select [Main Menu]-[Camera Process]-
[White Balance]-[AWB Paint] and press
the Set button (R).
The White Paint Adjustment screen appears.
[AWB] Activating
1
Shooting
AUTO WHITE A
OK
Result Display
Caution : Do not use highly reflective objects, such as
metals. Doing so may result in improper white
balance adjustment.
The Auto White function cannot provide
optimum white balance with an object outside
the adjustment range, for example when it
contains only a single color or not enough white
color.
2 Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross­shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
Error Message
If the white balance adjustment is not correctly
completed, one of the following messages will
appear for about 3 seconds.
Message
NG : OBJECT
ERROR : LOW
LIGHT
ERROR : OVER
LIGHT
Status
The object used is defective.
Displayed when there is not
enough white color on the
object, or when the color
temperature is not suitable.
Use another white object and
adjust the white balance
again.
Insufficient illumination.
Displayed when the lighting is
dark. Increase the lighting
and adjust the white balance
again.
Excessive illumination.
Displayed when the lighting is
too bright. Decrease the
lighting and adjust the white
balance again.
3 Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
R Value
B Value
Memo : Selecting [,] will usually clear the White Paint
Adjustment value. But when [Main Menu]-
[Camera Process]-[White Balance]-[Clear
Paint After AWB] is set to “Off”, values will not
be cleared even when [,] is selected.
(' P100 [ Clear Paint After AWB ] )
If [White Balance] has been assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button will
display the AWB Paint Adjustment screen.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
57
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Automatic White Balance Mode (FAW:
Fulltime Auto White balance)
Press the [WHT BAL] button on the side control
panel to enter into Automatic White Balance
mode.
“<FAW>” appears on the screen.
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder to “ON” to enter Automatic White
Balance mode. An appropriate white balance is
automatically adjusted according to the color
temperature of the lighting on the object.
White balance switching with the [WHT BAL
B/A/PRESET] selection switch is disabled.
FAW Paint Adjustment
You can fine­adjust the white balance that was
automatically adjusted.
1 Select [Main Menu]-[Camera Process]
-[White Balance]-[FAW Paint] and press
the Set button (R).
The FAW Paint Adjustment screen appears.
Shooting
1
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 :56
4030 20
10
0
FAW
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
FAW
Caution : The accuracy of [FAW] is inferior to that of Auto
White Balance.
When the power of the camera recorder is
turned on with the [FAW] mode selected, it takes
about 15 seconds for the colors to stabilize.
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[Camera Function][User Switch Set]-[AE Lock] is set to “AE/WB”,
the white balance when the user button that is
assigned [AE Lock] is pressed can be fixed.
(' P96 [ AE Lock ] )
If [White Balance] has been assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button will
display the FAW Paint Adjustment screen.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
2 Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross­shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
3 Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
R Value
B Value
58
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the Camera
Image
Memo : For details of the respective items, see the
[Camera Process] menu.
(' P96 [Camera Process Menu] )
Reduces blurring of images due to camera shake.
1 Check whether the image stabilizer feature
is turned ON or OFF.
If the image stabilizer icon (/) does not
appear on the screen display, the image
stabilizer function is OFF.
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24,2012
12 :34 : 56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
2 Press the [OIS/2] button to turn ON the
image stabilizer feature (when image
stabilizer feature is OFF).
The image stabilizer feature switches between
ON and OFF with every press of the [OIS/2]
button.
OFF:
Use this setting when the camera recorder is
secured, such as when using a tripod.
ON:
Reduces blurring of images due to camera
shake.
Memo : Select [Main Menu]-[Camera Function][OIS]-[Level] to set the correction level.
(' P93 [ Level ] )
Correction by this feature may not be sufficient
when camera shake is too strong.
“OIS” is assigned to [OIS/2] button in factory
default.
“OIS” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
59
Shooting
The picture quality of the camera can be set using
the [Camera Process] menu.
As the adjustments are shown on the screen, you
can adjust the values while checking the picture
quality on the camera.
[Detail]
[Master Black]
[Black Toe]
[Knee]
[White Clip]
[Gamma]
[WDR]
[White Balance]
[Color Matrix]
[Color Gain]
[Reverse Picture]
[Shooting Mode]
Using the Image Stabilizer
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Audio Recording
Setting Input Channel to [INPUT1]/[INPUT2]
You can record audio from the two channels (CH1/
CH2) in synchronization with video images on this
camera recorder.
Select from the four options below to record the
audio.
Built­in Microphone
Microphone connected to [AUX] terminal
Microphone connected to [INPUT1] terminal
Microphone connected to [INPUT2] terminal
Shooting
INPUT2
INPUT1
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
CH1
CH2
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT1
INPUT2
LINE
MIC
MIC
+48V
LCD BRIGHT
PEAKING
FULL AUTO
AUTO
MANUAL
CH1
ON
CH2
OFF
Selecting Audio to Be Recorded in Each
Channel
Select the audio to be recorded in CH1/CH2.
­
CH1
Switch Setting
INT
Connected Devices
Built­in Microphone
Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1
CH2
INT
Microphone connected to
[INPUT1] terminal
Built­in Microphone
Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1
Microphone connected to
[INPUT1] terminal
INPUT2
Microphone connected to
[INPUT2] terminal
Memo : When “INT” is set, the built­in microphone is
disabled if a microphone is connected to the
[AUX] terminal; audio from the microphone
connected to the [AUX] is recorded.
When “INT” is selected, set the reference input
level in [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio Set]
-[Int. Mic Gain]/[AUX Gain].
(' P106 [ Int. Mic Gain ] )
(' P106 [ AUX Gain ] )
60
Select the audio to input to [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]
terminals with the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode
switch.
Setting
[LINE]
[MIC]
[MIC+48]
Description
Use this setting when connecting to
an audio device or other equipment.
The reference input level is +4 dBu.
Use this setting when connecting to
a dynamic microphone.
Use this setting when connecting to
a microphone (phantom
microphone) that requires a +48 V
power supply.
Memo : When “MIC” or “MIC+48V” is selected, set the
reference input level in [Main Menu]-[A/V
Set]-[Audio Set]-[Input1 Mic Ref.]/[Input2
Mic Ref.].
(' P106 [ Input1 Mic Ref. ] )
(' P106 [ Input2 Mic Ref. ] )
Caution : When connecting a device that does not require
a +48 V power supply, make sure that it is not
set to the “MIC+48V” position.
When the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode switch is
set to “MIC”, make sure that a microphone is
connected to the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal. If
you increase the recording level when a
microphone is not connected, noise from the
input terminal may be recorded.
When a microphone is not connected to the
[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal, set the [INPUT1]/
[INPUT2] mode switch to “LINE” or adjust the
volume with the [CH1]/[CH2] recording level
adjustment knob.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting Audio Recording Level
You can select to adjust the audio recording levels
for the two channels (CH1/CH2) manually or
automatically.
CH1
CH2
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
LC
FULL AUTO
AUTO
MANUAL
ON
CH2
OFF
Manual Adjustment Mode (Manual
Adjustment)
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch on
the camera recorder to “MANUAL” to enter the
manual adjustment mode, and use the [CH1]/
[CH2] recording level adjustment knob to set the
recording level.
You can adjust the level manually during the
recording, recording standby, and stop modes.
oSetting Input Channel to “INPUT1”/“INPUT2”
1 Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch to “MANUAL” for the
channel to be adjusted manually.
2 Turn the corresponding [CH1]/[CH2]
recording level adjustment knob to adjust
the level.
When [Audio Set]-[Limiter] is set to “Off”,
adjust such that the audio level meter does not
light up at ­2 dB even for loud sounds.
(' P106 [ Limiter ] )
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24,2012
12 :34 :56
4030 20
10
0
4030 20
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
10
0
-2dB
1 Set the [CH1 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to “MANUAL”.
2 Turn the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob to adjust the level.
When the built­in microphone and the [AUX]
input terminal are used, the recording levels of
[CH1] and [CH2] are interlocked.
This is also effective when the [CH1 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is set to [CH2].
Memo : Select [Limiter], [AGC Response], [AGC Mode],
or [Int. Mic Separation] in the menu to set the
recording audio.
For the reference level to be recorded to an SD
card, set [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio
Set]-[Ref. Level] to “­20dB”, “­18dB”, or
“­12dB”. (common for CH1/CH2)
(' P106 [ Ref. Level ] )
The operations of the [CH2] recording level
adjustment knob and [CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch are disabled.
Automatic Adjustment Mode
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to “AUTO” or the [FULL AUTO] switch to
“ON” to enter Automatic Adjustment mode. The
audio recording level is set automatically
according to the input level.
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”,
mode switching with the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is disabled.
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio Set]
-[Limiter] is set to “Off” while in the automatic
adjustment mode, the limiter operates at
­5dBFS.
If [Limiter] is set to other than “Off”, the limiter
operates according to the value set.
(' P106 [ Limiter ] )
When [A/V Set]-[Audio Set]-[Audio On FULL
AUTO] is set to “SW Set”, you can switch the
audio recording mode with the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch on the
camera recorder even if the [FULL AUTO]
switch is set to “ON”.
(' P107 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
61
Shooting
CH1
oSetting Input Channel to “INT” for Both [CH1] and
[CH2]
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Monitoring Audio Sound
During Recording Using a
Headphone
You can check the recorded audio using
headphone.
1
Shooting
2
Time Code and User’s Bit
Time code and user’s bit data are recorded with the
video in this camera recorder.
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording. (Display screen)
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit
AUX
3
MONITOR
CH1
BOTH
CH2
1 Connect the headphone.
2 Select the channel to monitor with the
[MONITOR] selection switch.
Setting
[CH1]
Description
Outputs the audio recorded in [CH1].
[BOTH]
Outputs the audio recorded in
[CH1/CH2].
[CH2]
Outputs the audio recorded in [CH2].
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording.
The display differs according to the menu settings.
1 Set [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display
Settings]-[TC/UB] to settings other than
“Off”.
(' P104 [ TC/UB ] )
When “TC” or “UB” is selected, time code or
user’s bit data is displayed respectively on the
display screen.
F F EE D D 2 0
00:00:00.00
3 Use the [MONITOR +/­] button to adjust the
monitor volume.
Memo : Audio during recording is not output from the
monitor speaker.
Warning tone is output when there is an
abnormality in the camera recorder or when the
battery is low.
(' P135 [Warning Tone] )
Selecting Audio Output Method When the
[MONITOR] Selection Switch Is Set to
“BOTH”
When a stereo type earphone jack is connected,
perform the following setting to output stereo
sound.
1 Set the [MONITOR] selection switch to
“BOTH”.
2 Set [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio
Set]-[Monitor] to “Stereo”.
(' P107 [ Monitor ] )
Memo : You can set the volume of the warning tone in
[Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio Set]-[Alarm
Level]. (“Off”/“Low”/“Middle”/“High”)
(' P107 [ Alarm Level ] )
62
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24,2012
12 :34 : 56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
Memo : Values recorded on the SD card is displayed in
Media mode.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Time Code Operation Mode
Set the time code operation in [Main Menu]-[TC/
UB]-[TC Generator].
(' P100 [ TC Generator ] )
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”,
“Interval Rec” or “Frame Rec”, and [TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, Rec Run is activated.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, Pre Rec enters Free Run mode.
(' P109 [ Format ] )
Presetting the Time Code
Time code and user’s bit data generated from the
internal time code generator are recorded.
This section describes how to set [TC/UB]-[TC
Preset].
(' P101 [ TC Preset ] )
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Frame & Bit Rate] is
set to “50i(HQ)”, “50i(SP)”, “50p(HQ)”,
“50p(SP)”, “25p(HQ)”, “24p(HQ)”, or “50i”,
settings cannot be made in “Drop”.
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
You can configure the setting without accessing
the [TC/UB] menu screen.
(' P65 [Setting Time Code without Opening
the Menu] )
Required Settings Before Preset
1 Set [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] to “Rec Run”
or “Free Run”.
(' P100 [ TC Generator ] )
[Rec Run]:
Preset data in the time code generator
operates in run mode during recording
mode. Set this when recording continuous
time code in connecting frames.
[Free Run]:
Time code starts to operate in run mode from
the preset time in the time code generator.
2 Select the framing mode for the time code
generator (only when the frame rate setting
is “60” or “30”).
Set using [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[Drop
Frame].
(' P101 [ Drop Frame ] )
[Drop]:
Sets the run mode of the time code generator
to drop frame mode. Use this setting when
placing emphasis on the recording time.
[Non Drop]:
Sets the run mode of the time code generator
to non­drop frame mode. Use this setting
when placing emphasis on the number of
frames.
63
Shooting
Setting
Description
Free Run(Ext) This mode synchronizes another
camera recorder connected to the
[TC] terminal. The time code
operates in the run mode at all
times regardless of the recording
status.
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Free Run
The time code operates in the run
mode at all times regardless of the
recording status.
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Rec Run
The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. It
continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD
card is not replaced. If the SD card
is removed and recording is made
on another card, time code will be
recorded on the new card from
where it was left off in the previous
card.
Regen
The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. When the
SD card is replaced, the last time
code recorded on the card is read
and recorded on a new card so that
the time code continues in running
order.
(' P64 [Setting Time Code] )
Setting Time Code
Generator
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Shooting
Memo : Drop frame/non­drop frame mode
When the frame rate setting in [Main Menu][System]-[Record Set]-[Record Format][Frame & Bit Rate] is “60p”, “60i”, or “30p”, the
actual number of frames per second is
approximately 59.94 (29.97). However, the time
code processing standard is “60p”, “60i”, or
“30p” frames. To make up for the frame number
discrepancy, the drop frame mode (Drop) drops
the 00 frame and 01 frame every minute except
for minutes that are multiples of 10. However, in
the case of “60p”, the 00, 01, 02 and 03 frame
are dropped.
The non­drop frame mode (Non Drop) does not
drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with
the actual time.
Setting Time Code
Cursor
During non-drop
frame
During drop frame
Memo : Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).
3 Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
The time code is set and the screen returns
to [TC/UB].
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
4 Press the [MENU] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
2 Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross­
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
AE LEVEL
OIS / 2
LOLUX / 3
Presetting the User’s Bit
You can add an 8­digit hexadecimal number as the
user’s bit to the recorded image.
CANCEL
1 Select [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[TC
Preset] and press the Set button (R).
(' P101 [ TC Preset ] )
The [TC Preset] screen appears.
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
1
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
OIS / 2
CANCEL
Memo : When [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as “Regen”
and cannot be selected.
(' P100 [ TC Generator ] )
64
LOLUX / 3
ISSUED
2012/12/21
1 Select [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[UB
Preset] and press the Set button (R).
(' P101 [ UB Preset ] )
The [UB Preset] setting screen appears.
Setting Time Code without Opening the
Menu
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
1
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
OIS / 2
Memo : When [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as “Regen”
and cannot be selected.
(' P100 [ TC Generator ] )
2 Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to place
the cursor at the item to set, then use the
cross­shaped button (JK) to change the
values.
Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets
between A and F can be specified for the user’s
bit.
Cursor
TIME CODE
Memo : Settings cannot be made in the following cases.
[TC/UB]-[TC Generator] has been set to
“Regen”.
Menu screen is displayed.
The camera recorder is not in the Camera
mode.
Setting Time Code
1 Set [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] to settings
other than “Regen”.
(' P100 [ TC Generator ] )
2 Hold down the [MENU] button and press the
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The [TC Preset] setting screen appears.
Cursor
Memo : Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the left.
3 Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
The time code is set and the screen returns
to [TC/UB].
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
4 Press the [MENU] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
During drop frame
During non-drop frame
3 Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross­
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
Memo : Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).
65
Shooting
FOCUS ASSIST/1
CANCEL
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Shooting
4 Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
The time code is set and the screen returns
to the normal screen.
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
Caution : When the camera recorder is switched to Media
mode during editing, editing will be canceled
and the screen will close.
When editing the time code, operation of the
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] and [OIS/2] buttons that are
configured in [Main Menu]-[Camera
Function]-[User Switch Set] is disabled. The
[OIS/2] button functions as the number reset
button.
(' P95 [User Switch Set Item] )
Synchronizing Time Code
on Another Camera
This camera recorder is equipped with a time code
input/output terminal ([TC] terminal).
Connect another camera recorder to the [TC]
terminal and synchronize to the time code.
1 Connect the [TC] terminal of the master
device with the [TC] terminal of the slave
device.
Set the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the master device
to “OUT”, and the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the
slave device to “IN”.
Master Device
[OUT]
Recording Time Code in Continuation of
the Recorded Time Code on SD Card
INPUT2
TC
This camera recorder is equipped with the time
code reader.
1 Set [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] to “Regen”.
When the camera recorder enters from
recording standby mode to recording mode,
it reads the time code already recorded on
the SD card and records the new time code
in continuation of that value.
The same data as the user’s bit already
recorded on the SD card is recorded.
Memo : When [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the framing mode of the time code
follows the settings in [TC/UB]-[Drop Frame]
instead of the clip settings.
(' P101 [ Drop Frame ] )
BATT.RELE
ASE
AUX
A
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
HD/SD
SDI
AV
B
HDMI
REMO
TE
DC
Slave Device
(This Camera Recorder)
[IN]
IN OUT
INPUT2
INPUT1
TC
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HDMI
REMO
TE
DC
66
IN OUT
INPUT1
HD/SD
SDI
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Settings and Operation of the Camera
Recorder
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
Memo : The built­in time code generator will continue
operation even when the master device is
disconnected after synchronization.
User’s bit will become data in the master device.
While the [TC] terminal is connected, the time
code may be out of synchronization when the
[A/V Set]-[Video Set]-[HDMI/SDI Out]
setting of the Master device and Slave device is
being changed.
(' P105 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
When the luminance level range for displaying
zebra patterns is specified, diagonal lines (zebra
pattern) are displayed at areas with the specified
luminance levels during shooting.
ZEBRA/5
AE
PUSH
LEV
EL
AUTO
1 Set the zebra display pattern.
Select the display pattern in [LCD/VF]-
[Shooting Assist]-[Zebra].
2 Specify the brightness (luminance) level
range for displaying zebra pattern.
Specify the upper and lower limits of the
luminance level in [LCD/VF]-[Shooting
Assist]-[Zebra]-[Top] and [Bottom].
Item
Top
Settings
Options
Upper luminance 5% ­ 100%, Over
limit for displaying (in 5 % increments)
[Zebra]
Bottom
Lower luminance 0% ­ 100% (in 5 %
limit for displaying increments)
[Zebra]
3 Display the zebra pattern.
Press the [ZEBRA/5] button to display the zebra
pattern in the specified range.
Memo : “Zebra” is assigned to [ZEBRA/5] button in
factory default.
“Zebra” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
67
Shooting
1 Set to Camera mode.
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
2 Set [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] as follows.
Slave device:
Select “Free Run(Ext)”.
Master device:
Select “Free Run”.
3 Set LCD monitor or viewfinder to Display 1
screen.
4 Set the master device and run the time
code.
When the built­in time code generator is
synchronized with the external time code
data input, the icon on Display 1 screen
lights up.
When time code is not synchronized or time
code input is not available, the icon goes
out.
Setting Zebra Pattern
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting Spot Meter
Shooting
The brightness of the object during shooting is
displayed.
This function is useful when setting video or stage
lighting or when specifying camera exposure.
A cursor indicating the location and the brightness
(%) of that location are displayed in the images
shown on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
Zebra patterns display the brightness of output
video signals.
(' P67 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
This function allows you to check the brightness
of input images from the lens without depending
on image processing such as gamma curve. The
dynamic range of the camera recorder is 400 %
and a brightness range of 0 % to 400 % and
above is displayed.
Memo : Spot meter may not be consistent with the zebra
display range. When [Camera Process]-
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema”, the 100IRE output
is not consistent with the 100 % display.
When an object of more than 400 % luminance
is detected, it is displayed as “400 %”.
(' P97 [ Gamma ] )
Item
Max & Min
Max
Min
Manual
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
CANCEL
.
1 Select one of the following from [Main
Menu]-[Camera Function]-
[User Switch Set]-[Spot Meter].
(' P95 [ Spot Meter ] )
68
Settings
Displays the
brightness (%)
and positions of
the brightest and
darkest areas in
the screen.
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
Displays the
brightness (%)
and position of the
brightest area in
the screen.
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
Displays the
brightness (%)
and position of the
darkest area in the
screen. Frame
may also be
stopped at the
current positions.
Displays the
brightness (%) of
the specified
position.
Color of Frame
Indicating the
Position
Max: Green
Min: Yellow
Green
Yellow
Green
(Blinks in green
when specifying
the position)
2 Assign the “Spot Meter” function to any of
the user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
3 Press the user button that is assigned with
“Spot Meter”.
The operation switches as below when the
button is pressed.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
When [Max & Min]/[Max]/[Min] is selected
When [Manual] is selected
A The cursors appear according to the setting
when the button is pressed.
Green and yellow frames appear, and the
brightness levels of these areas are displayed.
A The brightness of the cursor position is
displayed when the button is pressed.
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
10
0
P 13000K
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
Cursor
(Green)
Brightness Indication
10
0
P 13000K
5.
5.6 f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
0
P 13000K
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
10
0
P 13000K
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
Cursor
(Max: Green)
Brightness Indication
Cursor
(Min: Yellow)
C Pressing the button in the state in B stops the
automatic position detection. The frames are
fixed at the stopped positions and the
brightness levels are displayed.
D By pressing the button, the cursors and
brightness indication disappear.
C Hold down the button in the state in A or B, the
cursor blinks in green.
Move the cursor with the cross­shaped button
(JKHI) to specify the position to display the
brightness.
When you decide on the position, press the Set
button (R) to confirm.
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
Brightness Indication
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
Brightness
Indication
Shooting
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
10
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
B By pressing the button, the cursors and
brightness indication disappear.
4030
40
30 20
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
4030
40
30 20
Cursor
(Yellow)
B Hold down the button in the state in A, the
positions of the brightest (Max) and darkest
(Min) areas in the screen are automatically
detected with regard to the changes of the
object, and the brightness level of these areas
are displayed.
4030
40
30 20
Cursor (Green)
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
4030
40
30 20
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
4030
40
30 20
10
0
P 13000K
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
Cursor
(Blinks in green)
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
4030
40
30 20
10
0
P 13000K
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
D Frames are fixed at the stopped positions and
the brightness is displayed.
Memo : When moving the cursor position, [Shutter]/[AE
Level] control is disabled.
When the brightness is 0 % in the entire screen,
the frame is fixed in the center.
If the cursor is outside the “4:3” range, changing
[Main Menu]-[System]-[Record Set][Record Format]-[SD Aspect] from “16:9” to
“4:3” restores the cursor to the default position.
(' P110 [ SD Aspect ] )
69
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)
You can check (review) the last recorded video clip
on the screen.
However, the video clip cannot be played back if
the settings of the camera recorder are different
from the video format (Resolution/Frame & Bit
Rate/SD Aspect) of the clip.
(' P109 [ Resolution ] )
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
(' P110 [ SD Aspect ] )
Shooting
Memo : To use this function, assign “Clip Review” to any
of the user buttons. “Clip Review” is assigned to
[C.REVIEW/7] button in factory default.
“Clip Review” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
C.REVIEW/7
INPUT2
INPUT1
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
REMO
TE
.
DC
1 Press the button assigned with the “Clip
Review” function during standby (“STBY”
is displayed).
Playback of the configured section starts.
Memo : The video clip is played back according to the
setting in [Main Menu]-[Camera Function][User Switch Set]-[Clip Review]. By default
setting (Last 5sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip
is played back.
(' P95 [ Clip Review ] )
When playback is complete, the camera
recorder exits Clip Review and returns to
“STBY” (recording standby) mode.
70
Caution : During Clip Review, only the [CANCEL] and
[REC] buttons are enabled.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel clip review
and return to “STBY” (recording standby) mode.
Press the [REC] button to cancel clip review and
enter recording mode. It will take some time to
start recording after the button is pressed.
When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the
whole clip is played back.
Only video clips in the currently selected slot can
be reviewed.
When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip
Review function is disabled.
Clip Review is unavailable when Clip
Continuous Rec is paused (“STBYC”, yellow
text). To operate Clip Review, use the
[CANCEL] button to set to “STBYC” (white text)
first.
(' P76 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
Clip Review is unavailable when the camera
recorder is connected to an external equipment
and the equipment is in recording state.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Splitting the Clips Freely
(Clip Cutter Trig)
You can split the clips freely without having to stop
recording during shooting.
REC
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
CLIP CUT
4030 20
10
0
CLIP CUT
P13000K
If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the factory default ([Slot Mode] is set to
“Series”), pressing the [REC] button starts
recording only to the media in the selected slot.
When the remaining space in the selected
media runs out, recording continues by
automatically activating the media in the other
slot.
If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the Dual Rec mode ([Slot Mode] is set to
“Dual”), pressing the [REC] button starts
recording simultaneously to the media in both
the slots.
The clips recorded to the media in both the slots
are identical, and two clips of the same content
can be created only on this camera recorder.
(' P111 [ Slot Mode ] )
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
REC
HOLD
Memo : Clips cannot be split again for a few seconds
after the operation is performed.
This item cannot be used when [Slot Mode] is
set to “Backup”.
(' P73 [Backup Rec] )
This item cannot be used when [Rec Mode] is
set to a value other than “Normal” or “Pre Rec”.
(' P110 [ Rec Mode ] )
The split clips are recorded seamlessly without
interruptions in the video.
A
INPUT2
INPUT1
BATT.REL
EASE
A
AUX
POWE
/CHGR
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
REC
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
B
REC
REMO
TE
DC
71
Shooting
1 Assign the “Clip Cutter Trig” function to
any of the user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
2 Press the user button that is assigned with
“Clip Cutter Trig” during shooting.
[CLIP CUT] appears on the display screen and
the clip is split.
Dual Rec
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting to Dual Rec Mode
1 Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Slot Mode] to “Dual”.
(' P111 [ Slot Mode ] )
“DUAL” appears on the display screen.
00: 00: 00.00
DUAL
Shooting
4030 20
10
0
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
2 Start recording.
Insert recordable media in both slots, and
press the [REC] button.
In the Dual Rec mode, recording to the media
in both slots starts at the same time.
Both the card slot marks turn red, and the
status indicators of both the card slots also
light up in red.
REC
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
Lit in red
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
3 Stop recording.
Press the [REC] button again.
Recording to both slots stops, and both the
card slot marks turn white.
The same clips are recorded to both cards.
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
White
4030 20
72
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Memo : During recording in the Dual Rec mode, both the
card slot marks light up in red.
During recording in the Dual Rec mode to two
cards with a different amount of remaining
space, if the space of one card runs out,
recording to both slots will stop automatically.
After recording stops, recording automatically
resumes for the card with remaining space.
Although the clips are separated in this case, the
clips can be seamlessly joined by arranging
them on the timeline of the editing software since
they are recorded seamlessly.
If the last clip on the cards that are inserted in the
two slots are different from each other, and the
time code operating mode is set to “Regen”, the
Regen mode for the selected card slot will be
enabled in the next recording.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Backup Rec
The Backup Rec mode allows you to make use
of the media in slot B for backup recording by
controlling the starting and stopping of recording
in slot B without using the [REC] button.
Start or stop the recording using [Main Menu][System]-[Record Set]-[Slot Mode]-
[Backup Rec] or press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(' P111 [ Slot Mode ] )
(' P95 [User Switch Set Item] )
Slot B starts
recording
Slot A starts Slot A stops Slot B stops
recording
recording
recording
Clip 2
Slot A
Slot B
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
Memo : During the Backup Rec mode (when [Slot
Mode] is set to “Backup”), you can control
recording to the 2 slots at different timings, and
backup recording can only be performed on this
camera recorder.
(' P111 [ Slot Mode ] )
You can record without worrying about missing
the important scenes by setting slot B to be
always recording (backup recording) and using
the [REC] button to start/stop recording of only
the required scenes in slot A.
It is recommended to use a media with high
capacity in slot B.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, backup recording cannot be
performed.
(' P109 [ Format ] )
73
Shooting
Caution : To perform recording in the Dual Rec mode, it is
recommended that you start recording by
making use of two cards with the same capacity
and from the formatted state.
You can combine the use of the Dual Rec mode
with a special recording mode. While in the Dual
Rec mode, you can also set [Rec Mode] to
“Normal”, “Pre Rec”, “Clip Continuous”, “Interval
Rec”, “Frame Rec”, or “Variable Frame”. When
[Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, “Clip Continuous” cannot be
selected.
(' P75 [Special Recording] )
(' P110 [ Rec Mode ] )
(' P109 [ Format ] )
When both slots are inserted with recordable
cards, the Dual Rec (simultaneous recording)
operation can be performed. If a recordable
media is only inserted in one of the slots, you can
also start recording with one card.
In the Dual Rec mode, continuous recording by
switching from one slot to another cannot be
performed. Continuous recording will not be
performed if a recordable media is inserted in a
slot after recording to the other slot has started.
When recording to one slot is in progress with
the recorder set to the Dual Rec mode, inserting
a recordable media to the other slot does not
enable the Dual Rec operation. To perform the
Dual Rec operation, stop recording temporarily
(excluding pausing recording in the Clip
Continuous Rec mode), and start again.
When one of the cards is accidentally removed
while recording is in progress in the Dual Rec
mode, recording to the card in the other slot will
continue. However, repair of the accidentally
removed card by the recovery function may fail.
If an error occurs on one of the cards while
recording is in progress in the Dual Rec mode,
recording of the erroneous card stops, while that
of the other card continues.
Operations on clips recorded in the Dual Rec
mode, such as clip deletion in the Media mode
or appending of OK marks, can only be
performed on the card in the selected slot.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
1 Set [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Record Set]-[Slot Mode] to “Backup”.
(' P111 [ Slot Mode ] )
“BACKUP” appears on the display screen.
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
BACKUP
3 Start normal recording (normal recording
into slot A)
Press any of the [REC] buttons.
Recording into the media in slot A starts.
(The characters “RREC” appear in red.)
The card icon of slot A turns red (unselected
state), and the status indicator of slot A blinks
in red.
Red (not selected)
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
Shooting
2 Start backup recording. (Backup recording
into slot B)
Select “REC” in [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Record Set]-[Slot Mode]-[Backup
Rec] and press the Set button (R).
(' P111 [ Slot Mode ] )
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(' P95 [User Switch Set Item] )
Backup recording into slot B starts. (The
characters “BACKUP” appear in red.)
The card slot mark of slot B turns red
(selected state), and the status indicator of
slot B also blinks in red.
100min
50min
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
4 Stop normal recording.
Press any of the [REC] buttons again.
Recording to slot A stops, and the card slot
mark of slot A turns white (unselected state).
The characters “RREC” (red) changes back
to “STBY” (white).
The status indicator of slot A goes out.
White (not selected)
00: 00: 00.00
Red
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
100min
50min
100min
50min
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
100min
50min
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
Red (selected)
74
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
4030 20
10
0
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
ISSUED
2012/12/21
White
Special Recording
Besides the normal recording mode, five special
recording methods are available in this camera
recorder. They are Pre Rec, Clip Continuous,
Frame Rec, Interval Rec and Variable Frame.
Select a mode from [Record Set]-[Rec Mode].
Memo : Set using [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode].
(' P110 [ Rec Mode ] )
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, “Clip Continuous” cannot be
selected.
(' P109 [ Format ] )
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Pre Rec
By setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
100min
50min
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
Memo : During backup recording, if the space of one
card runs out, recording stops only for the card
that is full.
When recording to both slots is stopped,
recording in the Regen mode will be enabled for
the card slot in which recording started.
When recording is started in the other slot while
recording to one slot, the clip being recorded is
split and simultaneous recording to the other
card starts.
When recording is stopped for either slot A or B
while recording to both slots, the clip on the slot
which is still recording is split.
Although the clips are separated during
recording the clips can be seamlessly joined by
arranging them on the timeline of the editing
software since they are recorded seamlessly.
Clip Cutter Trig cannot be performed during
backup recording.
(' P71 [Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter
Trig)] )
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, [Rec
Mode] can only be set to “Normal”.
(' P110 [ Rec Mode ] )
Time], you can start recording video and audio
before actual recording starts based on the [Pre
Rec Time] setting.
When starting actual recording while the camera
recorder is in Recording Standby (STBYP)
mode, you can start recording a few seconds
earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time] setting.
Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete
event without missing the initial scenes even if
you start the recording late.
Memo : Pre Rec Time can be set to “5sec”, “10sec”, or
“15sec” in [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode]-[Pre Rec Time].
(' P110 [ Pre Rec Time ] )
Completed Clip
(Recorded video and audio)
Recording starts a
number of seconds
earlier based on the
[Pre Rec Time] setting
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
(Recording starts) (Recording stops)
.
75
Shooting
5 Stop backup recording.
Select [STBY] in [Main Menu]-[System]
-[Record Set]-[Slot Mode]-[Backup
Rec] and press the Set button (R).
(' P111 [ Slot Mode ] )
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(' P95 [User Switch Set Item] )
Recording to slot B stops, and the card slot
mark of slot B turns white (unselected state).
The characters “BACKUP” changes back to
white.
The status indicator of slot B lights up in
green.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Shooting
1 Set [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
(' P110 [ Rec Mode ] )
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
The display changes (“STBY”-“STBYP”).
2 Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Pre Rec mode.
The display changes (“STBYP”-
“RRECP”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECP”
-“STBYP”) and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green.
Caution : When the interval between start and stop
recording is short, “STBYP” may not be
displayed immediately after recording is
complete.
“RRECP”-“STBYP” (“STBY” blinks in red)
-“STBYP” is displayed.
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is
displayed.
Video and audio before the above mentioned
time may not be recorded after recording starts
in the following cases.
Immediately after power on
Immediately after recording stops
Immediately after switching from Media
mode to Camera mode
Immediately after setting [Rec Mode]
Immediately after the end of Clip Review
Immediately after changing file format
Immediately after changing video format
Clip Continuous Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops,
the image, audio, and accompanying data from
the start till the end of the recording are recorded
as one “clip” on the SD card.
This mode allows you to consolidate several
rounds of “startstop recording” into one clip.
Example:
In normal recording, three clips are generated as
Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.
However, recording in this mode generates only
one clip.
76
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press and hold [REC]
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
(Recording pauses) (Recording pauses) (Recording stops)
Recording 1
Recording 2
Recording 3
Completed Clip
(Recorded video and audio)
Recording 1 Recording 2 Recording 3
1 Set “Rec Mode” to “Clip Continuous”.
(' P110 [ Rec Mode ] )
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Clip Continuous”.
The display changes (“STBY”-“STBYC”).
2 Start recording. (Recording 1)
Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Clip Continuous mode.
The display changes (“STBYC”-
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
3 Pause recording.
Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
-“STBYC” (yellow text)).
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
Memo : When the [CANCEL] button is pressed while the
camera recorder is paused (STBYC), the
display changes (“STBYC” (yellow text) -
“STBYC” (blinking yellow text) -“STBYC”
(white text)), and a “clip” is generated. The card
slot status indicator lights up in green.
4 Resume recording. (Recording 2)
Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) -“RRECC”).
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Memo : The following operations cannot be performed
while recording is paused (STBYC, yellow text).
Clip Review operation
(' P70 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
Switching SD card slots
Switching operation mode
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Files are split into sizes of 4 GB (or 30 minutes)
regardless of the menu settings.
Caution : Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RRECC, red text) or recording pause
(STBYC, yellow text).
To remove the SD card in the “Clip Continuous”
mode, press the [CANCEL] button, check that
“STBYC” (white text) is displayed and the card
slot status indicator lights up in green before you
remove the card.
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is
displayed.
When the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is
turned off during recording or recording pause,
recording stops and power is cut off after a clip
is generated.
Caution : If the power is cut off due to low battery power,
a proper clip may not be generated.
When [Format] in the [Main Menu][System]-[Record Set]-[Record Format]
menu is set to “AVCHD”, Clip Continuous Rec
cannot be performed.
(' P109 [ Format ] )
Frame Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording starts with every press of
the [REC] button, and only the specified number of
frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo : Audio will not be recorded.
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file cannot be written to the
media.
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
Press [REC]
(Frame Rec starts)
Press and hold [REC]
(Frame Rec stops)
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
Recording resumes Recording resumes
Pause
Pause
Pause
Normal recording
(Padding data)
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
Actual clips recorded to the media
.
Specific amount of data
77
Shooting
5 Pause recording.
Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
-“STBYC” (yellow text)).
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
6 Resume recording. (Recording 3)
Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) -“RRECC”).
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
7 Press and hold the [REC] button.
Recording stops and the display changes
(“RRECC”-“STBYC”). A “clip” is
generated.
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
8 Press the [REC] button again.
The display changes (“STBYC”-
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
A new “clip” is generated from here.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Shooting
1 Set [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
(' P110 [ Rec Mode ] )
The display changes (“STBY”-“STBY”).
2 Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
Set using [Main Menu]-[System][Record Set]-[Rec Mode]-[Rec Frames].
(' P110 [ Rec Frames ] )
3 Start recording.
Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
The display changes (“STBY”-“RREC”
-“STBY” (yellow text)).
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
4 Repeat Frame Rec.
Press the [REC] button again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
The display changes (“STBY”-“RREC”
-“STBY” (yellow text)).
Frame Rec continues until the recording is
stopped (step 5).
5 Press and hold the [REC] button.
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
Caution : Do not remove the SD card during recording
(“RREC”, red text) or recording pause
(“STBY”, yellow text).
To remove the SD card during Frame Rec, press
the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBY”
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
When [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec
Run”.
Audio cannot be recorded. A [ mark appears
in the audio level meter display.
(' P117 [Audio Level Meter] )
78
Interval Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording and pause are performed
repeatedly at the specified time interval. Only the
specified number of frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo : Audio will not be recorded.
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file will not be written to the
media.
After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
Press [REC]
(Interval Rec starts)
Press [REC]
(Interval Rec stops)
Recording resumes Recording resumes
[Rec Interval]
Pause
[Rec Interval]
Pause
Pause
Normal recording
(Padding data)
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
Actual clips recorded to the media
.
Specific amount of data
1 Set [Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
(' P110 [ Rec Interval ] )
The display changes (“STBY”-“STBY”).
2 Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
Set using [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode]-[Rec Frames].
(' P110 [ Rec Frames ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Shooting
3 Set the time interval to start recording in
[Interval Rec].
Set using [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode]-[Rec Interval].
(' P110 [ Rec Interval ] )
4 Start recording.
Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
After the specified time in [Rec Interval] has
passed, recording starts again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
Interval Rec continues until the recording is
stopped.
The display changes (“STBY”-“RREC”
-“STBY” (red text) -“RREC”-
“STBY” (red text)).
The card slot status indicator blinks in green.
5 Press and hold the [REC] button.
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
The display becomes “STBY”.
Caution : Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RREC, red text) or recording pause (STBY,
yellow text).
To remove the SD card during Interval Rec,
press the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBY”
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
When [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec
Run”.
Audio cannot be recorded. A [ mark appears
in the audio level meter display.
(' P117 [Audio Level Meter] )
79
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Variable Frame Rec
Shooting in this mode allows you to obtain smooth
slow motion or quick motion videos.
Using different frame rate settings for recording
and playback, videos captured at normal speed
can be played back more smoothly than those in
low or high speed playback.
To enable Variable Frame Rec, the following two
settings are required at the same time.
[Record Format]-[Resolution] is set to
“1920x1080” or “1280x720”.
[Record Format]-[Frame & Bit Rate] is set to
“30p(HQ)”, “24p(HQ)”, or “25p(HQ)”.
Shooting
Number of Frames that can be Set
1 Set [Resolution] and [Frame & Bit Rate].
(' P109 [ Resolution ] )
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
[Resolution]:
Set to “1920x1080” or “1280x720”.
[Frame & Bit Rate]:
Set to “30p(HQ)”, “24p(HQ)”, or “25p(HQ)”.
2 Set [Rec Mode] to “Variable Frame”.
(' P110 [ Rec Mode ] )
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Variable Frame”.
3 Select a recording frame rate from [Frame
& Bit Rate].
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
The selectable frame rates are as shown in the
table below.
Resolution
1920x1080
Frame & Bit Rate
30p(HQ)
1280x720
24p(HQ)
25p(HQ)
30p(HQ)
24p(HQ)
25p(HQ)
Effect during playback
80
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[Camera Function]-[AE
LEVEL SW] is set to “AE LEVEL/VFR”, you can
use the cross­shaped button (HI) to select the
frame rate during Variable Frame Rec. In modes
other than Variable Frame Rec, the cross­
shaped button (HI) functions as the AE level
setting button.
(' P93 [ AE Level ] )
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
Caution : The shooting frame rate cannot be changed
during recording. To change the frame rate, stop
the recording first and perform the change.
When [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec
Run”.
Audio cannot be recorded. A [ mark appears
in the audio level meter display.
(' P117 [Audio Level Meter] )
Selectable Shooting Frame Rate
30
27, 25, 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10,
6, 2
30, 27, 25
24
22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6, 2
­
25
24, 22.5, 20, 18, 12.5, 10, 6, 2
60, 54, 50, 48, 45, 40,
30
27, 25, 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10,
36, 32
6, 2
60, 54, 50, 48, 45, 40,
24
22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6, 2
36, 32, 30, 27, 25
50, 48, 45, 40, 36, 32
25
24, 22.5, 20, 18, 12.5, 10, 6, 2
Slow motion
Standard
Quick motion
­
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Playing Recorded Clips
To play back clips recorded on SD cards, switch to
the Media mode.
Press and hold the [MODE] selection button in
Camera mode to enter Media mode. A thumbnail
screen of the clips recorded on the SD card is
displayed.
You can play back the selected clip on the
thumbnail screen.
Memo : When an SD card without any clips is inserted,
“No Clips” is displayed.
Operation Buttons
A
MENU/THUMB
B
CANCEL
DISPLAY
STATUS
I
H
D
C
A
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
C
Thumbnail Screen
“Standard Screen” and “Detailed Screen” are
available.
Use the [DISPLAY] button to switch between the
screens.
Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording
from the oldest to most recent.
Standard screen
J
I
A
B
C
AE LEVEL
D
B
FOCUS ASSIST/1
OIS / 2
LOLUX / 3
TIME CODE
E
F
G
A [MENU/THUMB] Button
Displays the menu.
Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the
thumbnail screen.
B [CANCEL] (Stop) Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
C Set (Play) Button
Sets the values and items. (Confirm)
Plays back the selected clip.
D Cross­Shaped Button (JKHI)
Moves the cursor.
E [FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
Switches the OK mark of the clip selected by
the cursor.
If an OK mark has been appended, it will be
deleted. Otherwise, an OK mark will be
appended.
H
D
E
F
G
A SD Card Information
Displays the status of the inserted SD card,
selected SD card, write­protect switch, and
the need for restoring.
Use the [SLOT A/B] switch to switch slots.
Clips in slot A and B cannot be displayed at
the same time.
2 : Write­protect switch of the SD card
in slot A is set.
: SD card in slot B needs to be
restored or formatted, or is an
unsupported SD card.
B Clip Mark
Displays the clip information (properties).
A
E
B
D
C
A OK Mark
Clip is appended with OK mark.
81
Playback
Use the operation buttons, on the side control
panel of the camera recorder or the LCD monitor,
to operate the thumbnail screen.
F [OIS/2] Button
Switches the selection status of the clip
selected by the cursor.
Clips being selected are displayed with
check mark.
G [LOLUX/3] Button
Enters the action selection screen.
H [DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the “Standard Screen” and
“Detailed Screen”.
I [STATUS] Button
Displays the media information screen.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Memo : Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, the OK mark indicates that the clip is
protected.
(' P109 [ Format ] )
Playback
B Continued From Mark
This mark indicates that the current clip is
continued from another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
C Uneditable Mark
This mark indicates that an OK mark cannot
be appended to or deleted from the clip, and
the clip cannot be deleted.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, clips that are not recorded on this
camera recorder cannot be edited.
D Continue Mark
This mark indicates that recording of the current
clip is continued to another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
E Check Mark
A green check mark is displayed when the
clip is selected.
Magenta and gray check marks are
displayed in multiple selection mode.
(' P87 [Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] )
C Cursor
Clip to be worked on. Use the cross­shaped
button (JKHI) to move the cursor.
D Thumbnail Substitution Display
A
B
A A clip with corrupted management information.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
B A clip that cannot be played back nor displayed
in thumbnail with the current video format
settings.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
82
Memo : Depends on the [Main Menu]-[System][Record Set]-[Record Format]-[System],
[Resolution] and [Frame & Bit Rate] settings.
(' P109 [ System ] )
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
When [Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, you may not be able to play back files
recorded on a camera recorder other than the
GY­HM600 and GY­HM650 series.
If the file cannot be played back, the above
thumbnail substitution display 2 is displayed.
E Clip Name
The file name (clip number) of the selected clip
is displayed.
F Operation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
The action selection screen is displayed
when the User 3 ([LOLUX/3]) button is
pressed.
(' P83 [Actions] )
G Recording Start Time
Displays the recording start time of the clip.
Memo : Data/time display depends on the [LCD/VF]-
[Display Settings]-[Date Style]/[Time Style]
settings in the [Main Menu] screen.
(' P104 [ Date Style ] )
(' P104 [ Time Style ] )
H Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
Black space below the scroll bar (white)
indicates that there are more pages.
When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,
this indicates the last page.
I Remaining Battery Power
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )
J Number of Clips
If none of the clips are selected, the “running
number/total number of clips” of the clip to be
displayed appears.
Even if only one clip is selected, the number
of selected clips in the current slot is
displayed.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Detailed screen
* Items that are common with the Standard screen
will not be described. Refer to “[Standard
screen] P 81”.
A
B
C
The action selection screen is displayed when the
User 3 ([LOLUX/3]) button is pressed.
You can perform the following operations.
Item
Select All Clips
Select OK
Marked
Select Range
Description
Selects all clips.
Selects all clips appended with
OK mark.
Specifies the range when
selecting multiple clips.
(' P87 [Selecting Multiple
Clips Randomly] )
Deselect All
Clears all clip selections.
Add OK Mark
Appends an OK mark.
This Clip:
Appends an OK mark to the
clip pointed by the cursor.
Selected Clips:
Appends an OK mark to the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
All Clips:
Appends an OK mark to all
clips.
Delete OK Mark Deletes the OK mark.
This Clip:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clip pointed by the cursor.
Selected Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
All Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of all
clips.
Delete Clips
Deletes clip. However, clips with
OK mark cannot be deleted.
This Clip:
Deletes the clip pointed by
the cursor.
Selected Clips:
Deletes the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
All Clips:
Deletes all clips.
83
Playback
A Thumbnail
Thumbnail of the clip selected by the cursor.
Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to move the
cursor.
B Scroll Mark (DE)
If there are previous clips, D appears on the
left.
If there are more clips, E appears on the
right.
The marks will not be displayed if there are
no clips before and after the current clip.
C Metadata
Metadata of the clip pointed by the cursor.
You can use the cross­shaped button (JK) to
scroll.
Actions
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Memo : The object of action is the clip of the current slot
being displayed.
[Selected Clips] cannot be performed if there are
no selected (appended with check mark) clips.
[This Clip] cannot be performed if there are more
than one selected (appended with check mark)
clips.
If the write­protect switch of an SD card is set,
OK mark cannot be appended or deleted, and
the clips cannot be deleted.
Playing back
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
of the camera recorder to play back.
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
A
B
CANCEL
C
Playback
A IW Button
Plays back/pauses the clip pointed by the
cursor.
You can press the cross­shaped button (HI)
to perform frame­by­frame forward playback
during pause mode.
B S/T Button
Skips in the reverse or forward direction.
O/N Button
During Playback:
Fast forwards in the reverse or forward
direction.
While paused:
Frame­by­frame playback in the reverse or
forward direction.
C o Button
Stops playback.
1 In the thumbnail screen, move the cursor to
the clip to be played back.
Move the cursor to the clip to be played back
using the cross­shaped button (JKHI).
2 Press the playback/pause button.
Playback of the selected clip starts.
Audio Output during Playback
You can confirm the playback sound from the
monitor speaker, or the headphone connected
to the [+] terminal. When a headphone is
connected to the [+] terminal, sound cannot be
output from the monitor speaker.
(' P131 [Connecting the Headphone] )
Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker and
headphone using the [MONITOR +/­] volume
adjustment button on the LCD monitor section
of the camera recorder.
84
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Time Code Playback
Time code or user’s bit recorded on an SD card can
be displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Memo : The time code is also superimposed on the
video signal output from the [HD/SD SDI] output
terminal.
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD SDI] output
terminal is used as a flag to determine valid
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will
not be output.
If a section without time code is played back, the
time code will stop. However, playback will
continue.
Deleting Clips
Delete clip.
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
OIS / 2
Displaying Information during Shooting
Playback
During playback, pressing the [DISPLAY] button
shows the display screen.
Pressing the [AE LOCK/4] button switches the
display information during shooting between no
display, camera information display, and GPS
display.
The GPS display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
The local date/time is displayed.
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
LOLUX / 3
CANCEL
Memo : Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
Read­only clips can be deleted on a PC.
Deleting One Clip
Delete the clip (one clip) pointed by the cursor in
[Delete Clips]-[This Clip] in the menu.
Memo : Clips with OK mark cannot be deleted.
During Thumbnail Screen
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
P13000K
AE LOCK/4
Hide
Camera Information
Display
AE LOCK/4
AE LOCK/4
1 Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted.
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted using
the cross­shaped button (JKHI).
1
+35.483197
+139.652172
Oct 30,2012
07:01:58PM
GPS Display
Memo : This camera recorder does not come with GPS
function.
2 Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
85
ISSUED
2012/12/21
3 Select [Delete Clips]-[This Clip] and press
the Set button (R).
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
Appending/Deleting OK
Mark
You can append OK marks to the clips for
important scenes.
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
3
deleted, thus protecting the important clips.
When the camera recorder is in Media mode,
you can delete the OK marks appended during
recording, or append/delete OK marks after
shooting.
4 Select [Delete] using the cross­shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
Deleting starts.
MENU/THUMB
Playback
CANCEL
4
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1
LOLUX / 3
CANCEL
During Thumbnail Screen
1 Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
Selecting and Deleting Multiple Clips
To select and delete multiple clips, refer to
“[Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips] P 87”.
Deleting All Clips
Delete all clips that are displayed.
1 Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
2 Select [Delete Clips]-[All Clips].
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
3 Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
Deleting starts.
Memo : The time taken to delete clips depends on the
number of clips to be deleted.
86
OK Mark
ISSUED
2012/12/21
During Playback or Pause Screen
1 Press [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button during clip
playback.
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
1000/2000
282min
1920x1080
60i HQ
00:00:00.00
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
4030
40
30 20
0
OK Mark
Memo : The clip pauses when an OK mark is appended
or deleted during playback.
Appending/Deleting OK Mark of
Multiple Clips
To select and append/delete OK mark for multiple
clips, refer to “[Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] P 87”.
Multiple clips can be selected during thumbnail
screen or playback screen display.
After selecting multiple clips, perform
appending/deleting of OK mark, deleting of clips
using the action selection screen.
After selecting multiple clips, the selections will
be canceled by the following operations.
When [Deselect All] in the action menu is
selected
When exiting Media mode from the thumbnail
screen
When removing the SD card
When switching the slot in use
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly
1 Move the cursor to a clip without check
mark and press the [OIS/2] button.
A green check mark appears on the clip.
1
2 Repeat Step 1 to select multiple clips.
Multiple clips can be selected.
Press the [LOLUX/3] button while the
multiple clips are selected.
Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark]-[Selected Clips]
Deletes OK mark together:
[Delete OK Mark]-[Selected Clips]
Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips]-[Selected Clips]
Memo : Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [OIS/2] button will cancel the
selection.
If the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
87
Playback
1000/2000
10
Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple
Clips
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively
1 Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
2 Select “Select Range” in the action
selection screen, and press the Set button
(R).
2
Playback
3 Move the cursor to the beginning (or end)
of the range for multiple selection, and
press the Set button (R).
4 Move the cursor to the other end of the
range.
Magenta check marks appear on the clips
within the range. (Including clips that were
already selected.)
Gray check marks appear on selected clips
that are outside the range.
3
4
88
5 Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
range.
The check marks change from magenta to
green.
Pressing the [LOLUX/3] button while the
multiple clips are selected displays the
action selection screen. The following
operations can be performed.
Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark]-[Selected Clips]
Deletes OK mark together:
[Delete OK Mark]-[Selected Clips]
Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips]-[Selected Clips]
Memo : Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [OIS/2] button will cancel the
selection.
If the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Basic Operations in Menu
Screen
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button on the side
Operation Buttons
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
of the camera recorder or the buttons on the LCD
monitor to operate the menu.
A
MENU/THUMB
B
CANCEL
D
DISPLAY
G
C
A
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
D
B
CANCEL
C
FOCUS ASSIST/1
OIS / 2
TIME CODE
E
F
89
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
control panel of the camera recorder or on the
LCD monitor to display the menu screen on the
LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Various settings for shooting and playback can
be configured on the menu screen.
There are two types of menu screens ­ [Main
Menu] and [Favorites Menu].
[Main Menu] contains all the setting items of the
camera recorder, classified according to
functions and uses, while [Favorites Menu]
allows users to customize the menu items freely.
(' P112 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )
The operating procedures and main screen
displays are the same for both menus.
The menu screen can also be displayed on
external monitors connected to the video signal
output terminal.
(' P105 [ Display On TV ] )
A [MENU/THUMB] Button
Displays the menu screen. The [Main
Menu] screen is displayed by default.
During normal usage, [Main Menu] is
displayed if the previous menu operation
ended at [Main Menu], and [Favorites
Menu] if the previous menu operation ended
at [Favorites Menu].
Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the normal
screen.
B [CANCEL] Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
C Set Button (R)
Sets the values and items.
D Cross­shaped Button (JKHI)
J : Moves the cursor upward.
K : Moves the cursor downward.
H : Moves back to the previous item.
I : Moves forward to the next item.
E [FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
Adds the selected menu or submenu item to the
[Favorites Menu].
(' P112 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )
F [OIS/2] Button
Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or [UB
Preset] setting screen. This button is disabled
in other screens.
G [DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] screens.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Display and Description of the Menu
Screen
Selecting Menu Items
I
A
B
C
F
E
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
A Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross­
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
B Menu Item
Displays the names of the menu item and
sub­menu.
Menu items with [...] after them indicates that
there is a sub­menu to access.
C Fixed Item
Items that cannot be changed are displayed in
gray and cannot be selected.
D Operation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
E Setting Value
Setting values for the menu items.
For menus with sub­menus, values are not
displayed.
F Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
G Header
Indicates the current menu type with the line
color.
Blue
: [Main Menu] Screen
Green
: [Favorites Menu] (Operation
screen)
Magenta : [Favorites Menu] (Editing screen)
H Remaining Battery Power
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )
Memo : If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
90
F
A
E
D
C
H
G
D
I Menu Title
Title of the currently displayed menu.
Changing Setting Values
B
A Menu Item to Change
Menu item to be changed.
A list of setting values F appears in a pop­up.
B Operation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
C Setting Values Before Change
Setting values before changing. The
background of the item is displayed in blue.
D Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
E Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross­
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
F List of Setting Values
A pop­up displaying a list of setting values for
selection.
The height of the pop­up depends on the
number of settings available. Use the scroll
bar D to confirm the current display status.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Text Input with Software Keyboard
Use the software keyboard to enter the [Scene
File]/[Picture File] subname and [Clip Name
Prefix].
[Scene File]/[Picture File]
(' P126 [Configuring Setup Files] )
A
B
H
C
D
G
F
E
(' P111 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )
A
B
H
C
D
E
A Character Entry Field
Field for entering the title.
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Scene File]/[Picture File] subname or up to
4 characters for the [Clip Name Prefix].
B Character Cursor
Select a character using the key cursor D, and
press the Set button (R) to input the selected
character at the position of the character cursor.
The character cursor moves to the next position
on the right each time a character is input.
The cursor can be moved using the arrow keys
H.
C Character Keys
Use the cross­shaped button (JKHI) to move
the key cursor D to the character you want to
enter.
91
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
[Clip Name Prefix]
D Key Cursor
Indicates the currently selected character or
item. Use the cross­shaped button (JKHI) to
move the cursor.
E Confirmation Buttons
Select [Set]/[Store] and press the Set button
(R) to confirm the title.
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R)
on the side control panel of the camera
recorder to abort character input and return
to the previous screen.
F [SP] Space Key
Select [SP] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
enter a space at the current position of the
character cursor B.
G [7] Backspace Key
Select [7] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
delete the character on the left of the character
cursor B.
H Arrow Keys
Moves the position of the character cursor B.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Menu Screen Hierarchical
Chart
Main Menu...
TC/UB...
TC Generator
TC Preset
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Function...
Bars
OIS
Flicker Correction
Flash Band Correction
Shutter
AE Level
AE Speed
ALC Limit
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
EEI Limit
Smooth Trans
GAIN L
GAIN M
GAIN H
AE LEVEL SW
Handle Zoom Speed
AF Assist
User Switch Set...
UB Preset
Drop Frame
LCD/VF...
Shooting Assist...
Marker Settings...
Display Settings...
LCD + VF
VF Color
VF Bright
VF Contrast
LCD Contrast
LCD Backlight
LCD Mirror
A/V Set...
Video Set...
Audio Set...
Camera Process...
Detail
Master Black
Black Toe
Knee
White Clip
Gamma
WDR
White Balance...
Color Matrix
Color Gain
Reverse Picture
Shooting Mode
Reset Process
Adjust...
System...
Record Set...
Media...
Setup File...
Auto Power Off
Tally Lamp
Reset All
Date/Time
Adjust...
Time Zone
System Information
Memo : Some menus cannot be set depending on the operating mode or status of the camera recorder. These
items are displayed in gray, and they cannot be selected.
Setting value with the R mark is the factory default.
92
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Camera Function Menu
Menu screen for specifying operation settings
during shooting.
This item can only be selected in the Camera
mode.
Bars
For setting whether to output color bars.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo : The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(' P107 [ Test Tone ] )
OIS
For setting whether to enable image stabilizer.
When “On” is selected, set the Level.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
For setting the level of the image stabilizer.
[Setting Values: High, RNormal]
Memo : When “High” is selected, correcting severe
camera shake may cause the area surrounding
the image to darken.
Flicker Correction
For setting whether to adjust image flicker that
occurs under a fluorescent light.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Flash Band Correction
For reducing the condition of the flash band
phenomenon, which creates an unnatural image
with a part of it brightly lit, such as by the camera
flash of another still camera.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Shutter
For specifying shutter­related settings.
Use this item to set to “Step” (fixed value) or
“Variable” when operating with the cross­shaped
button (JK) on the right side.
Variable:
Sets to variable scan. Use this setting such as
when shooting a PC monitor.
Step:
Sets to step shutter, which switches the shutter
speed by a fixed value.
[Setting Values: Variable, RStep]
AE Level
For setting the convergence level during AE (Auto
Exposure).
This can also be adjusted using the cross­shaped
button (HI) on the right side.
[Setting Values: ­6 to +6 (R0)]
AE Speed
For setting the convergence speed during AE (Auto
Exposure).
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
93
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Level
Caution : Flash band correction function is not available in
any of the following cases.
When [Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “24p(HQ)”
When in the Automatic Shutter mode or when
the shutter is turned on in the Manual Shutter
mode
(' P53 [Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)] )
[Flash Band Correction] operates when the
luminance of the screen varies widely, with or
without flash light. However, depending on the
shooting condition, the flash band correction
may not be fully effective even if there are flash
lights.
The following symptoms may occur under flash
light, but these are not malfunctions due to flash
band correction.
Moving object appears to be stationary
momentarily.
A horizontal line appears on the image.
The [Flash Band Correction] function will be set
to “Off” if the camera recorder switches from the
Camera mode to another mode, or when the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is set to
“OFF(CHG)”.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
ALC Limit
For setting the maximum gain value of “ALC”,
which electrically boosts the sensitivity level
according to the brightness automatically.
[Setting Values: 24dB, R18dB, 12dB, 6dB]
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F5.6, F4, F2.8, F2, RF1.6]
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F11, RF8, F5.6]
EEI Limit
For setting the shutter speed control range when
EEI is enabled.
[Setting Values: 4F­stop, R3F­stop, 2F­stop]
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Smooth Trans
For setting the shock reduction function, which
slows down the sudden change when switching
with the [GAIN] or [WHT BAL] selection switch.
[Setting Values: Fast, Middle, Slow, ROff]
Memo : However, this function is disabled when the
[FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”, or when
switching the gain selection switch that was set
to “ALC”.
GAIN L/GAIN M/GAIN H
For setting the gain value of each position on the
[GAIN] selection switch.
This is fixed at “ALC” when the [FULL AUTO] switch
is set to “ON”.
[Setting Values: 24dB, 21dB, 18dB, 15dB, 12dB,
9dB, 6dB, 3dB, 0dB, ­3dB, ­6dB]
(Default values GAIN L: 0dB, GAIN M: 6dB, GAIN
H: 12dB)
Memo : When [Shooting Mode] is set to “Standard”,
“­3dB” and “­6dB” cannot be selected.
(' P98 [ Shooting Mode ] )
94
AE LEVEL SW
For specifying the operation of the cross­shaped
button (HI) on the right side.
AE LEVEL/VFR:
Sets the number of frames during Variable
Frame Rec, and operates as the AE level setting
button in other cases.
(' P80 [Variable Frame Rec] )
AE Level:
Operates as the AE level setting button at all
times.
Disable:
Disables the button.
[Setting Values: AE LEVEL/VFR, RAE Level,
Disable]
Handle Zoom Speed
This function allows you to set the zoom speed of
the zoom lever at the handle when the [ZOOM FIX/
VAR/OFF] switch is set to “FIX”.
[Setting Values: 1 to 8 (R 5)]
AF Assist
For setting whether to allow temporary manual
focus adjustment by turning the focus ring in the AF
mode.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo : This setting is effective only when the [FOCUS]
switch is set to “AUTO”.
The manual focus adjustment mode is
temporarily activated by turning the focus ring in
the AF mode. If the focus ring is not operated for
a certain time, the camera recorder returns to the
AF mode.
User Switch Set...
For specifying user button related settings.
(' P95 [User Switch Set Item] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
User Switch Set Item
USER1 ­ USER7, LCD KEY▲/LCD KEY▶/LCD
KEY▼/LCD KEY◀
By assigning one of the following functions to each
of the [FOCUS ASSIST/1], [OIS/2], [LOLUX/3], [AE
LOCK/4], [ZEBRA/5], [MARKER/6], [C.REVIEW/7]
buttons or the cross­shaped buttons on the LCD
monitor, these buttons can be used to control the
assigned function (on/off, start, switch).
Set according to the shooting conditions. Usable
only in the Camera mode.
[Setting Values: None, Zebra, Marker, Bars, Focus
Assist, OIS, Flash Band, LCD Backlight, Lolux, AE
Lock, Spot Meter, Face Detect, OK Mark, Clip
Cutter Trig, Backup Trig, Clip Review, Load Picture
File, White Balance, Preset Zoom1, Preset Zoom2,
Preset Zoom3]
Lolux
Clip Review
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]­[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Clip
Review”.
Last 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
ending.
Top 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
beginning.
Clip:
Views the entire clip.
[Setting Values: RLast 5sec, Top 5sec, Clip]
Memo : This item is selectable when any of the [USER1]­
[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD
KEY▼], [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Clip
Review”.
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]­[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Spot
Meter”.
(' P68 [Setting Spot Meter] )
Max & Min:
Displays the brightest and darkest areas of the
image.
Max:
Displays the brightest area of the image.
Min:
Displays the darkest area of the image.
Manual:
Displays the image brightness at a specified
position.
[Setting Values: RMax & Min, Max, Min, Manual]
Face Detect
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]­[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Face
Detect”.
Select the control to track results of face detection.
AF&AE:
Sets auto focus and exposure control for the
face that is being tracked.
AF:
Sets auto focus for the face that is being tracked.
[Setting Values: RAF&AE, AF]
Memo : When “AF” is specified, this function will be
activated only when the [FOCUS] switch is set
to “Auto”.
When “AF&AE” is specified, this function will be
activated only when the [FOCUS] switch is set
to “Auto”, or when one or more of the items
(Gain, Iris and Shutter) is set to Auto mode.
Sensitivity
For setting the level of ease of face detection.
[Setting Values: Low, Middle, RHigh]
95
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
To increase the sensitivity when in dim
surroundings, set a value in the Lolux mode.
[Setting Values: 36dB, R30dB]
Spot Meter
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Hysteresis
For setting the margin to maintain status when the
face that is being tracked is lost.
Set to “Fast” to select another object immediately
if the face on the screen is lost.
Set to “Slow” to operate at the same position for
some time even if the face on the screen is lost.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
AE Lock
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]­[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “AE
Lock”.
AE:
Use this feature to fix a value to the Auto function
of Gain, Iris, or Shutter when the user button that
is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed.
AE/WB:
Use this feature to fix a value to White Balance
and the Auto function of Gain, Iris, or Shutter
when the user button that is assigned “AE Lock”
is pressed.
[Setting Values: RAE, AE/WB]
Memo : This feature only works when Iris, Shutter or
Gain is set to Auto mode.
“AE Lock” is canceled when the button assigned
with “AE Lock” is pressed, or when any of the
functions that can be locked is operated
regardless of Manual/Auto mode.
Preset Zoom Speed
For setting the speed to shift to the preset zoom
position that is assigned to a user button.
[Setting Values: 1 to 127 (R 64)]
Camera Process Menu
Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera
images.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode.
Detail
For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement
level.
Increasing the value increases the sharpness of
the contour.
[Setting Values: ­10 to +10, Off (R0)]
96
Adjust...
For specifying the detailed settings of the contour
(detail).
(' P99 [Detail/Adjust Item] )
Memo : This item cannot be selected when [Detail] is set
to “Off”.
Master Black
For adjusting the pedestal level (master black) that
serves as the reference black.
Increasing the value increases the pedestal.
[Setting Values: ­50 to +50 (R ­3)]
Black Toe
Process the dark areas according to the balance of
bright and dark areas in the image to adjust the
overall balance of contrast.
For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item
according to the condition of the captured video
signals.
Stretch:
Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to
stretch the signals of these areas only, thereby
showing the contrast between bright and dark
areas more clearly.
Specify the amount of stretch with [Stretch
Level].
Normal:
Normal condition.
Compress:
Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase
the contrast when the entire image appears
bright and contrast is weak. Specify the
compression amount with [Compress Level].
[Setting Values: Stretch, RNormal, Compress]
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Stretch Level
Stretch amount increases when a larger value is
specified.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]
Memo : This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is
set to “Stretch”. Otherwise, this item appears as
“­­­” and cannot be selected.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Compress Level
Compression amount increases when a larger
value is specified.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]
Memo : This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is
set to “Compress”. Otherwise, this item appears
as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Knee
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Level
For setting the starting point (knee point) of knee
compression when [Knee] is set to “Manual”.
[Setting Values: R100%, 95%, 90%, 85%]
Memo : When [Knee] is set to other than “Auto”, or
[WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Sensitivity
For setting the response speed of the “Knee”
operation when [Knee] is set to “Auto”.
Set to “Slow” when shooting an object under a
condition where there is drastic change in the light
intensity.
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
Memo : When [Knee] is set to “Manual”, or [WDR] is set
to other than “Off”, this item appears as “­­­” and
cannot be selected.
For setting the point to apply white clip for input
video signals with a high luminance level.
108%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 108 %.
100%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 100 %. Even when this item
is set to “108%”, it switches automatically to
“100%” if the screen appears too white. Set to
this value when the system in use limits Y output
signals within 100 %.
[Setting Values: R108%, 100%]
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “108%” and cannot be selected.
Gamma
For adjusting the gamma curve that determines the
gradation expression.
Cinema:
Sets to a gamma curve with similar gradation to
the screen characteristics of movies.
Standard:
Sets to a standard gamma curve.
[Setting Values: Cinema, RStandard]
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Gamma Level
This item can be specified separately when
[Gamma] is set to “Standard” or “Cinema”.
Increase the number:
Enhances the gradation of black. However, the
gradation of bright areas deteriorates.
Decrease the number:
Enhances the gradation of bright areas.
However, the gradation of black deteriorates.
[Setting Values: ­5 to +5 (R 0)]
WDR
For setting the WDR (Wide Dynamic Range)
function.
When shooting object with wide dynamic range
due to backlight conditions, this function
compresses the dynamic range while maintaining
image contrast through providing gradation
compensation to the input video signals.
97
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For specifying the “Knee” operation, which
compresses video signals beyond a certain level to
show the gradation of the highlighted portion. To
check the gradation of a bright area, set to “Manual”
and adjust the knee point (starting point of knee
operation) manually.
Manual:
Enables manual adjustment of knee point using
[Level].
Auto:
Adjusts the knee point automatically according
to the luminance level.
[Setting Values: Manual, RAuto]
White Clip
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Strong:
Enhances the effect of gradation compensation
for object with wide dynamic range due to
outdoor or strong backlight conditions.
Natural:
Normal setting for wide dynamic range.
Weak:
Reduces the effect of gradation compensation
compared to the normal setting.
Off:
Sets the wide dynamic range function to “Off”.
[Setting Values: Strong, Natural, Weak, ROff]
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, [Black
Toe], [Knee], [Gamma] and [White Clip] cannot
be selected.
White Balance...
Menu for adjusting white balance.
(' P100 [White Balance Item] )
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
* For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] P 55”.
Color Matrix
For setting the color matrix.
Cinema Subdued:
Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to
the screen characteristics of movies.
Cinema Vivid:
Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the
screen characteristics of movies.
Standard:
Sets to a standard color matrix.
Off:
Sets the color matrix function to Off.
[Setting Values: Cinema Subdued, Cinema Vivid,
RStandard, Off]
Adjust
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a color
according to the user’s preference.
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a
color according to the user’s preference.
The saturation, hue and brightness of the
primary and complementary colors (6 colors in
total) can be set individually.
The adjusted values of “Standard”, “Cinema
Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color Matrix]
can be stored individually.
(' P125 [Adjusting Color Matrix] )
[Setting range for Lightness/Saturation: ­10 to +10]
(roughly ± 10 %)
[Setting range for Hue: ­5 to +5] (roughly ± 5°)
Memo : This item cannot be selected when [Color
Matrix] is set to “Off”.
98
Color Gain
For adjusting the video signal color level.
Increasing the value deepens the color.
[Setting Values: ­50 to +15, Off (R0)]
Memo : Images are displayed in black­and­white when
this is set to “Off”.
Reverse Picture
For recording images correctly by setting this item
to “Rotate” when the lens image appears upside
down or laterally inverted.
Rotate:
Enables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
image.
Off:
Disables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
image.
[Setting Values: Rotate, ROff]
Shooting Mode
For switching the settings for image recording on
the camera.
Standard:
Normal shooting mode.
This setting is suitable for shooting low­noise
image quality.
Use this mode in well lit places.
Extended:
High sensitivity shooting mode.
This setting enables recording in various
brightness conditions.
Use this mode in places where the lighting is
difficult to control and the brightness is
insufficient.
[Setting Values: RStandard, Extended]
Reset Process
Restores all items in the [Camera Process] menu
to their default settings.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Detail/Adjust Item
V/H Balance
For setting the H/V balance to enhance contour
(detail) in the horizontal (H) or vertical (V) direction.
H+1 to H+4:
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
horizontal direction.
V+1 to V+4:
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
vertical direction.
[Setting Values: H+1 to H+4, RNormal, V+1 to V+4]
Memo : When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Normal”.
H Frequency
Memo : When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Low”.
For specifying the correction frequency of the
vertical contour. Set this according to the object.
Low:
Emphasizes the low frequency range.
Middle:
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
High:
Emphasizes the high frequency range.
[Setting Values: Low, RMiddle, High]
Memo : When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Low”.
(' P109 [ Record Format ] )
“High” cannot be selected under the following
settings.
When [Resolution] is set to “1920x1080”, and
[Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “60i(HQ)” or
“50i(HQ)”.
When [Resolution] is set to “1440x1080”, and
[Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “60i(HQ)”,
“50i(HQ)”, “60i(SP)” or “50i(SP)”.
Skin Detail
For turning On/Off the Skin Detail function, which
is used to adjust the contour correction effect of the
colors captured.
Select “On” to soften the detail at areas where skin
tone is detected.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Level
For setting the level of contour correction (degree
of softening) using the Skin Detail function.
Decreasing the value increases the level of contour
correction (degree of softening).
[Setting Values: ­1, R ­2, ­3]
Range
For adjusting the range of skin tone to trigger the
Skin Detail function.
Increasing the value increases the range.
[Setting Values: ­5 to +5 (R0)]
99
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For specifying the correction frequency of the
horizontal contour. Set this according to the object.
High:
Emphasizes the high frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with fine patterns.
Middle:
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
Low:
Emphasizes the low frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with large patterns.
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
V Frequency
ISSUED
2012/12/21
White Balance Item
Preset Temp.
For setting the color temperature when the [WHT
BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] P 55”.
Alternative Temp.
For setting the alternative color temperature in the
Preset mode.
When the [WHT BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”,
pressing the [,] button each time switches the
color temperature setting in the Preset mode.
([Preset Temp.])[Alternative Temp.])
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] P 55”.
AWB Paint
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component in the
AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] P 55”.
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: ­32 to +32 (R 0)]
Memo : This item is selectable when the [WHT BAL]
switch on the right of the camera recorder is set
to “A” or “B”. When “PRESET” is set, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Different values can be specified for “A” and “B”.
After the [,] (Auto White Balance) button is
pressed to readjust the white balance while
[Clear Paint After AWB] is set to “On”, R and B
values switch automatically to “0”.
Clear Paint After AWB
For specifying whether to clear the [AWB Paint] (R
value and B value) settings after executing AWB
(Auto White Balance).
On:
Sets the [AWB Paint] (R value and B value)
settings to “0” after executing AWB (Auto White
Balance).
100
Off:
Does not change the [AWB Paint] (R value and
B value) settings after executing AWB (Auto
White Balance).
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
FAW Paint
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component
during FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode.
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: ­32 to +32 (R 0)]
TC/UB Menu
Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode,
or during recording.
TC Generator
For setting the operation of the time code.
Free Run(Ext):
External time code input will be synchronized
with this and the time code will be recorded.
Free Run:
The time code operates in the run mode at all
times regardless of the recording status. It
continues to run even when the power of the
camera recorder is turned off.
Rec Run:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. It continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD card is not
replaced. If the SD card is removed and
recording is made on another card, time code
will be recorded on the new card from where it
was left off in the previous card.
Regen:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. When the SD card is replaced, the
last time code recorded on the card is read and
recorded on a new card so that the time code
continues in running order.
[Setting Values: Free Run(Ext), Free Run, RRec
Run, Regen]
ISSUED
2012/12/21
TC Preset
For setting the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Display : Drop setting 02:02:25.20
: Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20
UB Preset
For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)
Display : AB CD EF 01
Drop Frame
Memo : This item can be set only when [Main
Menu]-[System]-[Record Set]-[Record
Format]-[Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “60p”,
“30p”, or “60i”. When the frame rate is “24p”,
“Non Drop” becomes fixed and cannot be
selected. When the frame rate is “50p”, “25p”, or
“50i”, this item appears as “­­­” and cannot be
selected.
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
Item for specifying settings related to the LCD
monitor or viewfinder screen.
This menu screen can be used to specify settings
related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern
display, screen size, marker, and safety zone. In
addition, it is also used for selecting whether to
display characters on the LCD monitor or
viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the
picture quality of the LCD monitor.
Shooting Assist...
Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function.
(' P102 [Shooting Assist Item] )
Marker Settings...
For setting items such as the safety zone and
center mark.
(' P103 [Marker Settings Item] )
Display Settings...
For specifying display­related settings.
(' P103 [Display Settings Item] )
LCD + VF
For selecting a method to switch between the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen displays.
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
On:
Displays images on the viewfinder at all times.
Off:
Turns off the viewfinder screen display when the
LCD monitor is turned on.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
VF Color
For selecting whether to display the image on the
viewfinder screen in color or black­and­white.
Select “On” to display in color, and “Off” to display
in black­and­white.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo : The setting of this item is valid only in Camera
mode.
When this item is set to “Off”, only the captured
images are displayed in black­and­white. The
display and menu screens are displayed in
color.
101
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For setting the framing mode of the time code
generator.
Non Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the non­
drop­frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the number of frames.
Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the drop­
frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the recording time.
[Setting Values: Non Drop, RDrop]
LCD/VF Menu
ISSUED
2012/12/21
VF Bright
For setting the brightness of the viewfinder screen.
Increasing the value increases the brightness.
[Setting Values: ­10 to +10 (R 0)]
VF Contrast
For setting the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the viewfinder
screen.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: ­10 to +10 (R 0)]
LCD Contrast
For setting the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the LCD monitor.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: ­10 to +10 (R 0)]
LCD Backlight
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For setting the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight.
[Setting Values: Bright, RNormal]
LCD Mirror
For specifying the image display method when
facing the LCD monitor.
Select “Mirror” to display the image after laterally
inverting it. (Mirror display)
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
[Setting Values: Mirror, RNormal]
Memo : The setting of this item is valid only in Camera
mode.
During color bar, menu screen and status
screen display, the “Mirror” setting is disabled.
(' P124 [Color Bar Output] )
Shooting Assist Item
Focus Assist
For setting whether to add color to the contour of
the focused image upon switching the image to
black­and­white.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
102
Type
For specifying the operation when the [FOCUS
ASSIST/1] button is pressed.
(' P48 [Focus Assist Function] )
ACCU­Focus:
Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU­Focus
(forced focus) functions. The depth of field of the
object becomes shallower to enable easier
focusing. The ACCU­Focus function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
Normal:
Enables only the Focus Assist function. The
focused area is displayed in color to enable
easier focusing. Display color can be specified
with [Color].
[Setting Values: ACCU­Focus, RNormal]
Color
For setting the display color of the focused area
when Focus Assist is activated.
[Setting Values: RBlue, Green, Red]
Zebra
For selecting whether to display zebra patterns at
the bright areas of the subject.
Select “On” to display zebra patterns or “Off” to
hide.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Top
For setting the maximum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: Over, 100% to 5% (in 5%
increments)] (R80%)
Bottom
For setting the minimum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: 100% to 0% (in 5% increments)]
(R70%)
Memo : The relation between Top and Bottom is such
that Top>Bottom always holds. To maintain this
relation when setting Top, the Bottom value is
automatically corrected.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Marker Settings Item
For setting the marker and safety zone, which are
useful in helping you determine the angle of view
for the image according to the shooting purpose.
(' P124 [Marker and Safety Zone Displays
(Camera Mode Only)] )
Memo : During Clip Review or when in the Media mode,
the markers do not appear regardless of the
setting.
Marker Settings
For setting whether to display marker, safety zone,
and center marks on the screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Aspect Ratio
Aspect Marker
For specifying how boundary markers are to be
used to indicate the parts of an image that are
beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in
[Aspect Ratio].
Line+Halftone:
Displays the boundary using lines, and areas
outside the boundary in halftone.
Halftone:
Displays areas outside the boundary in halftone.
Line:
Displays the boundary using lines.
Off:
Hides the boundary markers.
[Setting Values: Line+Halftone, Halftone, Line,
ROff]
Memo : When [Aspect Ratio] is set to “16:9” or
“16:9(+4:3)”, this item is fixed at “Off” and cannot
be selected.
Center Mark
For specifying whether to display a mark to indicate
the screen center within the aspect ratio selected
in [Aspect Ratio].
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Display Settings Item
This menu is used to set the displays on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
Zoom
For setting the display method of the zoom
position.
Number:
Displays the zoom position in numbers (0­99).
Bar:
Displays the zoom position in a bar.
Off:
Does not display the zoom position.
[Setting Values: Number, RBar, Off]
Focus
For setting the display method of the focal length
during manual focus.
Feet:
Displays the focus in feet.
Meter:
Displays the focus in meters.
Off:
Does not display the focal length during focus.
[Setting Values: Feet, RMeter, Off]
ND Filter
For setting whether to display the filter position.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Record Format
For setting whether to display the video format
during recording or playback.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
103
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For selecting the final image aspect ratio to be used
from the overall angle of view.
[Setting Values: 16:9(+4:3), 2.35:1, 1.85:1, R16:9,
1.75:1, 1.66:1, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3, 2.35:1 Center,
2.35:1 Top, 1.85:1 Center, 1.85:1 Top]
Memo : When [System]-[Record Set]-[Record
Format]-[SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item
is fixed at “4:3” and cannot be selected.
(' P110 [ SD Aspect ] )
Safety Zone
For setting the percentage of area that is to be
deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the
boundary of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect
Ratio].
[Setting Values: 95%, 93%, 90%, 88%, 80%, ROff]
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Media Remain
For setting whether to display the remaining space
of the recording SD card.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo : When the remaining space warning is
displayed, the information appears even when
“Off” is selected.
The displayed time is an estimate.
TC/UB
For specifying whether to display the time code
(TC) or user’s bit (UB) rate in the display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
[Setting Values: UB, RTC, Off]
Audio Meter
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For specifying whether to display the audio level
meter in the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Battery
For setting the display of the remaining battery
power in the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
The battery information appears only on the
Display 1 screen in Camera mode.
(' P116 [Display 1 screen] )
Time:
Displays the remaining battery power in
minutes. (min)
Capacity%:
Displays the remaining battery power in
percentage. (%)
Voltage:
Displays the current battery voltage in units of
0.1 V. (V)
[Off]:
The remaining battery power is not displayed.
[Setting Values: RTime, Capacity%, Voltage, Off]
Memo : The battery mark that appears before the “Time”,
“Capacity%” or “Voltage” value changes
according to the remaining battery power.
9 : 10 % and below
8 : 11 % to 30 %
4 : 31% to 70 %
) : 71 % to 100 %
When the remaining battery power is low, “RES”
instead of the value is displayed.
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
The remaining battery power and remaining
time are intended as reference values for the
shooting duration.
104
Date/Time
For specifying whether to display the date and time
in the display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Date Style
For setting the date display sequence for display
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen as well
as for time stamp recording.
Display examples of the setting values are as
follows.
DMY2: 30 Jun 2012
DMY1: 30­06­2012
MDY2: Jun 30, 2012
MDY1: 06­30­2012
YMD: 2012­06­30
[Setting Values: DMY2, DMY1, MDY1, MDY2,
YMD]
(Default values: MDY2 (U model), DMY1 (E
model))
Time Style
For setting the time display for display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen as well as for time
stamp recording.
[Setting Values: 24hour, 12hour]
(Default values: 12hour (U model), 24hour (E
model))
Shutter
For setting the shutter display to be displayed on
the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
DEG:
Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the
same way as film cameras.
SEC:
Displays the shutter speed in seconds.
[Setting Values: DEG, RSEC]
Memo : “DEG” is selectable only when [Frame & Bit
Rate] is set to “24p(HQ)” or “25p(HQ)”.
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to other values,
the shutter display setting is fixed at “SEC” and
cannot be selected.
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
A/V Set Menu
Menu screen for video output and audio.
Video Set...
For specifying video output­related settings.
(' P105 [Video Set Item] )
Audio Set...
For specifying audio­related settings.
(' P106 [Audio Set Item] )
Video Set Item
Display On TV
For setting whether to display the display and menu
characters on the external monitor.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
For setting the terminal to output the video.
[Setting Values: HDMI+SDI, SDI, HDMI, ROff]
Resolution
For selecting the resolution of video output from the
[HDMI]/[SDI] terminal according to the monitor to
be connected.
[Setting Values: 576i, 576p, 480i, 480p, 720p,
R1080i]
Memo : The selectable options vary according to the
setting in [System]/[Resolution]/[Frame & Bit
Rate] of [System]-[Record Set]-[Record
Format].
Cross conversion output is not possible.
For setting the style of displaying down­converted
images on a 4:3 aspect ratio screen.
Side Cut:
Displays image with the left and right sides cut
off.
Letter:
Displays as a wide image with the top and
bottom blackened.
Squeeze:
Displays image that is squeezed horizontally.
[Setting Values: Side Cut, Letter, RSqueeze]
Memo : When [Record Format]-[System] is set to “SD”
, and when [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
(' P109 [ System ] )
SD Set Up
For selecting whether to add a setup signal to the
video signal output from the [AV] output terminal.
Setup signals are added when “7.5%” is selected.
[Setting Values: 7.5%, 0.0%]
(Default values: 7.5% (U model), fixed at “0.0%” (E
model))
Memo : Depending on the menu settings of the camera
recorder and the condition of the cable
connected to it, the setup signal setting may be
fixed at “0.0%”. “0.0%” is displayed in gray in this
case.
HDMI Color
For setting the color format of HDMI signals.
This item is selectable only when [HDMI/SDI
Out] is set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.
[Setting Values: RGB, RAuto]
HDMI Enhance
For setting the color range of HDMI signals.
When connecting to a PC monitor, set this to
“On”.
This item is selectable only when [HDMI/SDI
Out] is set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
105
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
HDMI/SDI Out
SD Aspect
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Audio Set Item
Input1 Mic Ref.
For setting the reference input level when the
[INPUT1] selection switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC
+48V”.
[Setting Values: ­62dB, ­56dB, R­50dB, ­44dB,
­38dB]
Input2 Mic Ref.
For setting the reference input level when the
[INPUT2] selection switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC
+48V”.
[Setting Values: ­62dB, ­56dB, R­50dB, ­44dB,
­38dB]
Int. Mic Gain
For setting the sensitivity of the built­in microphone.
[Setting Values: +12dB, +6dB, R0dB]
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
AUX Gain
For setting the sensitivity of the [AUX] terminal
input.
[Setting Values: +12dB, +6dB, R0dB]
Ref. Level
For setting the audio reference level to be recorded
to the SD card. (Applies to both [CH1/CH2].)
[Setting Values: ­12dB, ­18dB, R­20dB]
Limiter
For setting the limiter operation.
Ref. Level:
Sets “Ref. Level” to the maximum recording
level.
­8dBFS, ­5dBFS:
Sets “­8dBFS” or “­5dBFS” to the maximum
recording level.
Off:
Depending on the settings of the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switches, the
operation may be different as described below.
The limiter does not function when
“MANUAL” is set.
The limiter functions at ­5 dBFS when
“AUTO” is set.
[Setting Values: Ref. Level, ­8dBFS, R­5dBFS, Off]
AGC Response
Attack Time
Sets the time to activate the limiter.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
Decay Time
Sets the time to deactivate the limiter operation.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
106
AGC Mode
For setting whether to link the limiter operation of
[CH1] and [CH2].
Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo : Enabled only when both the [AUX] input terminal
and [INPUT1/INPUT2] input terminal are set to
“LINE” or “MIC”, and CH1/CH2 of the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] switch is set to “AUTO”.
XLR Manual Level
For setting whether to link manual audio
adjustment operation between [INPUT1] and
[INPUT2] terminals.
Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.
When this item is set to “Link”, adjust the recording
level using the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo : Enabled only when both the [INPUT1/INPUT2]
input terminals are set to “LINE” or “MIC”, and
both [CH1]/[CH2] of the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switches are set to
“MANUAL”.
When this item is set to “Link”, [CH2] recording
level adjustment knob is disabled.
Int. Mic Separation
For setting the enhancement level of the stereo
effect of the built­in microphone.
1 to 4:
Enhances the stereo effect. Increasing the value
increases the stereo effect.
Effect off:
Does not enhance the stereo effect.
Mono:
Sets the built­in microphone to monaural.
[Setting Values: 1 to 4, Effect off, Mono (R2)]
Memo : When any value from 1 to 4 is selected, the
sound quality changes slightly due to the
process of enhancing the stereo effect. This is
normal.
This menu is enabled when the [CH1]/[CH2]
selection switch is set to “INT”.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Test Tone
For specifying whether to output the audio test
signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
INPUT1/2 Wind Cut
Int. Mic Wind Cut
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low­cut) from the built­in
microphone. Set this item to “On” to reduce wind
noise from the microphone.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Equalizer
You can correct the characteristic and enhance the
sound of the connected microphone using this
equalizer setting.
For setting the audio frequency from a 5­band
equalizer.
Frequency:
100Hz, 330Hz, 1kHz, 3.3kHz, 10kHz
Variable level:
± 6dB (1dB step)
Memo : Audio will be recorded in the characteristic set
in the equalizer.
Set all bands to “0dB” to bypass the equalizer.
When the equalizer level is set to +side, the
audio may be distorted. In this case, reduce the
recording level in Manual mode.
If the values of multiple frequencies are
changed, the specified levels and the actual
levels may be different due to interference
between the frequency bands.
This function is enabled only when both
[INPUT1/2 Wind Cut] and [Int. Mic Wind Cut] are
set to “Off”.
For setting the audio sound of the [+] terminal to
stereo or mixed sound when the [MONITOR]
switch on the LCD monitor is set to “BOTH”.
Mix:
Outputs mixed sound (mixed sound of CH1 and
CH2) to both L and R.
Stereo:
Outputs stereo sound (outputs audio sound of
CH1 to L, and CH2 to R).
[Setting Values: RMix, Stereo]
Memo : If both CH1 and CH2 are built­in microphones,
stereo sound is output from the [+] terminal
regardless of the [Monitor] setting.
Alarm Level
For selecting whether to turn on the warning tone
as well as setting the volume.
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [+] terminal.
[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low, Off]
Audio On FULL AUTO
For setting whether to enable Auto for audio when
[FULL AUTO] is set to “ON”.
SW Set:
Sets the audio recording mode following the
[CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch
setting.
Auto:
Sets audio recording mode to the forced auto
mode.
[Setting Values: SW Set, RAuto]
107
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low­cut) when the [INPUT1/
INPUT2] switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V”.
Set this item to reduce wind noise from the
microphone.
Both:
Enables low­cut on both the [INPUT1] and
[INPUT2] terminals.
INPUT2:
Enables low­cut on the audio of the [INPUT2]
terminal only.
INPUT1:
Enables low­cut on the audio of the [INPUT1]
terminal only.
Off:
Disables low­cut.
[Setting Values: Both, INPUT2, INPUT1, ROff]
Monitor
ISSUED
2012/12/21
System Menu
This menu screen allows system­related settings.
For specifying recording settings, formatting and
restoring of SD card, tally lamp setting, date/time,
time zone, and other settings.
It can also be used to reset the menu settings to
their default values.
Record Set...
For specifying recorded video­related settings.
(' P109 [Record Set Item] )
Media
Format Media
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For formatting (initializing) an SD card.
Select a card slot (A or B), select [Format] from
[Cancel]/[Format], and press the Set button (R) to
format (initialize) the card.
(' P41 [Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards] )
Restore Media
For restoring an SD card.
Select a card slot (A or B), and press the Set button
(R) to restore the SD card.
(' P42 [Restoring the SD Card] )
Memo : This item appears only when the SD card needs
to be restored. However, it is not selectable
when recording in Camera mode and during Clip
Review.
Setup File
This allows you to save the menu settings as well
as the performance results of shutter speed and
AWB.
It is useful to save settings according to different
shooting conditions.
Load File...
Loads the settings.
(' P127 [Loading a Setup File] )
Store File...
Saves the settings.
(' P126 [Saving Setup Files] )
Delete File...
Deletes the configured file.
(' P128 [Deleting Setup Files] )
108
Auto Power Off
For setting whether to turn off the power
automatically when the camera recorder is not
operated for more than 5 minutes when the battery
is used. This function is valid only when the battery
is used.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo : When both the battery and AC adapter are
connected, power from the AC adapter
connection will be used. As such, this function
will not have any effect.
Tally Lamp
For specifying the illumination settings of the tally
lamp during recording.
On:
Lights up only during recording.
Off:
Turns off the indicator.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Reset All
Resets all menu settings.
Memo : [Date/Time] and [Time Zone] cannot be reset.
(' P108 [ Date/Time ] )
(' P109 [ Time Zone ] )
This item is not selectable when recording in
Camera mode, during Clip Review, and in Media
mode.
Date/Time
For setting the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Memo : The display order of the date (year, month, day)
follows the setting in [Display Settings]-[Date
Style]. However, the 24­hour format is used for
the hour display regardless of the [Time Style]
setting.
(' P104 [ Date Style ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Time Zone
For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30
minutes.
[Setting Values: UTC­00:30­UTC­12:00, UTC,
UTC+14:00­UTC+00:30 (in 30 min increments)]
(Default values: UTC­05:00 (U model), UTC (E
model))
Memo : If [Date/Time] is already set, the [Date/Time]
item is automatically adjusted when [Time
Zone] is altered.
System Information
Version
Displays information on the firmware version.
Fan Hour
Record Set Item
Record Format
After setting of all items in the [Record Format]
menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the
screen to apply the new settings on the camera
recorder and switch the record format. A “Please
Wait...” message appears during switching.
System
For selecting a system definition.
Select whether to record in “HD” (High Definition)
or “SD” (Standard Definition).
[Setting Values: RHD, SD]
Caution : The selectable options for the [Format],
[Resolution], and [Frame & Bit Rate] settings
vary depending on the setting of this item.
Resolution
For setting the size of the recorded image when
[System] is set to “HD”. (Horizontal x vertical)
The available options vary according to the
[Format] and [System] settings.
When MP4(MPEG2) or QuickTime(MPEG2) is
selected:
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080,
1280x720]
When AVCHD is selected:
Fixed at “1920x1080”
Memo : The selectable values of [Frame & Bit Rate] vary
according to the setting of this item.
Frame & Bit Rate
For setting the frame rate and encoding bit rate
when [System] is set to “HD”.
The selectable options vary according to the
[Resolution] setting.
When “1920x1080” ([Format] is set to “AVCHD”)
is selected:
[Setting Values: 60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), 60i(SP),
50i(SP)]
(Default values: 60i(HQ) (U model), 50i(HQ) (E
model))
When “1920x1080” ([Format] is set to other than
“AVCHD”) is selected:
[Setting Values: 60i(HQ), 30p(HQ), 24p(HQ),
50i(HQ), 25p(HQ)]
(Default values: 60i(HQ) (U model), 50i(HQ) (E
model))
When “1440x1080” is selected:
[Setting Values: 60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), 60i(SP),
50i(SP)]
(Default values: 60i(HQ) (U model), 50i(HQ) (E
model))
When “1280x720” is selected:
[Setting Values: 60p(HQ), 30p(HQ), 24p(HQ),
50p(HQ), 25p(HQ), 60p(SP), 50p(SP)]
(Default values: 60p(HQ) (U model), 50p(SP) (E
model))
Memo : When [System] is set to “SD”, this item is fixed
as follows for the different models.
U model: “60i”
E model: “50i”
109
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.
Memo : Under normal environment, dust will
accumulate on the internal fan when the camera
recorder is used over a long period. Dust may
enter the camera recorder especially if it is used
outdoors. This may affect the image and sound
quality of the camera recorder. Check and
replace the fan after every 9000 hours
(suggested guideline).
Format
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to
the SD card when [System] is set to “HD”.
[Setting Values: RQuickTime(MPEG2),
MP4(MPEG2), AVCHD]
Memo : When System is set to “SD”, this item is fixed at
“QuickTime(H.264)”.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
SD Aspect
For setting the aspect ratio of the recorded image
when [System] is set to “SD”.
[Setting Values: R16:9, 4:3]
Memo : When [System] is set to “HD”, this item is fixed
at “16:9”.
Pre Rec Time
Rec Mode
For selecting the record mode for recording to
the SD card.
(' P75 [Special Recording] )
The selectable options vary according to the
[Record Format] menu settings.
Format
MP4
(MPEG2)
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
AVCHD
QuickTime
(H.264)
110
Memo : When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, this item is
fixed at “Normal”.
[Variable Frame Rate] is enabled when
[Resolution] is set to “1920x1080” or “1280x720”,
and [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “30p(HQ)”,
“24p(HQ)”, or “25p(HQ)”.
Frame & Bit Rate
30p(HQ),
24p(HQ),
25p(HQ)
Setting values
Normal, Pre
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec,
Variable Frame
60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), Normal, Pre
60i(SP), 50i(SP), Rec, Clip
60p(HQ),
Continuous,
60p(SP),
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec
50p(HQ),
50p(SP)
60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), Normal, Pre
60i(SP), 50i(SP) Rec, Interval
Rec, Frame Rec
60i (U model)
Normal, Pre
50i (E model)
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec
For setting the pre­recording time when [Rec
Mode] is set to “Pre Rec”.
[Setting Values: R5sec, 10sec, 15sec]
Rec Frames
For setting the number of frames to record when
[Rec Mode] is set to “Frame Rec” or “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1frame, 3frames, 6frames]
Rec Interval
For setting the recording time interval when [Rec
Mode] is set to “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1sec, 2sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec,
1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 30min, 1hour]
Variable Frame Rate
For setting the frame rate during recording when
[Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”.
The available options vary according to the [Record
Format]-[Resolution] and [Frame & Bit Rate]
settings.
(' P80 [Variable Frame Rec] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Slot Mode
For setting the operation of the card slot.
Series:
Mode that activates the two slots sequentially.
Dual:
Mode that activates the two slots at the same
time.
(' P71 [Dual Rec] )
Backup:
Mode that enables recording to slot B without
using the [REC] button. This item is selectable
only when [Rec Mode] is set to “Normal”.
Start or stop the recording using the [Backup
Rec] menu or press the [USER1] to [USER7],
[LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD KEY▼], [LCD
KEY◀] that is assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(' P73 [Backup Rec] )
Backup Rec
For starting/stopping backup recording with [REC]/
[STBY].
This item is selectable only when [Slot Mode] is set
to “Backup”.
Memo : When recording is stopped due to no remaining
space on the media, etc., this item is fixed at
“STOP” and cannot be selected.
For setting whether to display shooting date/time
information in the recorded video.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo : The date/time display style can be changed in
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Date Style]/
[Time Style].
(' P104 [ Date Style ] )
(' P104 [ Time Style ] )
When the date/time is hidden while the menu
screen, status screen or other screen is
displayed, the date/time during this period will
not be recorded to the video. A confirmation
screen appears if you try to display the menu
screen or status screen during recording.
Clip Set
Clip Name Prefix
For setting the first four characters of the name of
the clip file to be recorded to the SD card.
Enter any of the 38 characters including alphabets
(upper case), numbers (0 to 9), “_” (underscore),
and “­” (hyphen) using the software keyboard.
(' P91 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
[Setting Values: xxxG] (The default value of xxx is
the last three digits of the serial number.)
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, this setting is not reflected in the file
name of the clip.
However, it is recorded as the display name of
the clip in the thumbnail display.
Reset Clip Number
For assigning a new number (Clip Number) by
resetting it (0001).
Select [Reset] and press the Set button (R) to reset
the number.
When [Format] is set to “AVCHD”, the clip number
is reset to “00000”.
When other clips exist on the SD card, the smallest
available number is used after reset.
Example:
If the [Clip Name Prefix] is “ABCD”, and
“ABCD0001” already exists on the SD card,
“ABCD0002” will be assigned.
111
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Memo : When this is set to “Series”, and recordable
media are inserted in both slots, pressing the
[REC] button starts recording only to the card in
the selected slot (active slot).
When “Series” is selected, and [Record
Format]-[Format] is set to “AVCHD”, the clips
are recorded over the slots seamlessly without
interruption in the video.
When this is set to “Dual”, and recordable media
are inserted in both slots, pressing the [REC]
button starts simultaneous recording to the
cards in both slots.
Time Stamp
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adding/Editing
Frequently Used Menu
Items (Favorites Menu)
You can select and add/edit frequently used menu
items freely to create a personal menu screen
(Favorites Menu).
Memo : [Favorites Menu] is only enabled in the Camera
mode. [Favorites Menu] remains unchanged
even when the recording format changes.
Up to 20 menu items can be added.
Added items in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset
even when [Main Menu]-[Reset All] is
executed.
Long descriptive names may be displayed for
the menu items in [Favorites Menu] to enable
better understanding.
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
MENU/THUMB
DISPLAY
.
112
2
Memo : Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be
performed in the following cases. [USER1 Add]
is displayed in gray in the operation guide.
Selected item is already added to [Favorites
Menu].
Number of menu items that can be added (20
items) is exceeded.
AE LEVEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1
CANCEL
1 Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main
Menu] screen.
2 Select the menu or submenu item to add.
3 Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
A screen to confirm the addition appears.
4 Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).
The selected menu item is added to [Favorites
Menu].
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu
TIME CODE
OIS / 2
4
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Editing Favorites Menu
You can delete or change the order of the items
added to [Favorites Menu].
4 Press the [OIS/2] button.
A delete mark () appears at the beginning of
the menu item.
Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]
1 Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
A Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main
Menu] screen.
B Press the [DISPLAY] button to open the
[Favorites Menu] screen.
2 Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed­shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
5 Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
6 Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
Header
(Magenta)
6
3 Select the menu or submenu item to delete.
3
Memo : Deletion is not complete until the changes are
saved with [Save & Exit].
To exit the editing mode without deleting any
items, select [Exit without Saving].
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
113
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
2
Memo : When the [OIS/2] button is pressed again while
the menu item with the delete mark () is
selected, the menu item will be excluded from
the items to be deleted and the delete mark ()
disappears.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Changing the Order of Items in [Favorites
Menu]
MENU/THUMB
3 Select the menu or submenu item to move
and press the Set button (R).
The moving mode is activated and a position
selection bar for the move appears.
DISPLAY
CANCEL
3
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1
CANCEL
OIS / 2
TIME CODE
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
1 Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
Press the [MENU] button to open the [Favorites
Menu] screen.
2 Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed­shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
2
Position
Selection Bar
4 Select the position to move to with the
cross­shaped button (JK).
Move the position selection bar with the cross­
shaped button (JK) and select a position to
move to.
5 Press the Set button (R).
The selected item moves to the new position.
4
Header
(Magenta)
5
114
ISSUED
2012/12/21
6 Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
7 Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
7
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Memo : Moving is not complete until the changes are
saved with [Save & Exit].
To exit the editing mode without saving any
changes, select [Exit without Saving].
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
115
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Display Screen in Camera
Mode
Display 0 screen
This screen displays the event. It is also used to
display warnings only.
※1 Y X
A
※1
282min
100min
50min
D
12 . 5/ 30f ps
※2
H
0
P13000K
P
13000K
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.
6
F1.6
1/ 100
I
*1
*2
Appears only during warnings
Appears only during operation
Display 1 screen
Display/Status Screen
A
※
D
Y X
※
W
282min
100min
50min
V
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
12 . 5/ 30f ps
0
G
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
H IJ
K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
L
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
M
* Appears only during warnings
Display 2 screen
A
B
C
D
E
F
Z
Y X
W
282min
100min
50min
V
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
12 . 5/ 30f ps
1920x1080
30p HQ
0
G
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
H I J
116
K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
N
L M
A OK Mark
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.
(' P86 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
B Voltage/Battery Power
Displays the current status of the power supply
in use.
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )
Memo : Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only.
C Remaining Space on Media
Displays the remaining recording time of the SD
cards in slot A and slot B separately.
: Currently selected slot. (White card)
2 : Write­protect switch of SD card is set.
!INVALID
: SD card cannot be read or
written to, or restored.
!FORMAT
: SD card requires
formatting.
!RESTORE
: SD card requires restoring.
!INCORRECT : When [Rec Mode] is set to
other than “AVCHD”/“SD”
with a Class 4 SD card
inserted.
Or when the SD card is not
supported.
!REC INH
: When attempting to record
in 50i(HQ)/50i(SP) to an SD
card recorded in
[AVCHD]60i(HQ)/60i(SP)
(or vice versa).
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Media
Remain] is set to “Off”. However, warnings will
be displayed.
(' P104 [ Media Remain ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only. (When the remaining time
is shorter than 3 minutes)
The displayed time is an estimate.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
D Frame rate
Displayed as xx/yy fps (xx: recording frame rate,
yy: playback frame rate) only when [Rec Mode]
is set to “Variable Frame”.
(' P110 [ Rec Mode ] )
E Resolution
Displays the video image resolution.
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Record
Format] is set to “Off”.
(' P103 [ Record Format ] )
F Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Record
Format] is set to “Off”.
(' P103 [ Record Format ] )
4030 20
10
0
When [Rec Mode]-[Rec Mode] is set to
“Frame Rec”, “Interval Rec”, or “Variable
Frame”, audio cannot be recorded and is
indicated by the [ mark.
4030 20
10
0
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Audio Meter]
is set to “Off”.
(' P104 [ Audio Meter ] )
0
12
LCD BRIGHT
PEAKING
-10
0
Memo : There is no audio output from the speaker in
Camera mode.
I Flash Band Correction Mark
This item is displayed when [Main Menu]-
[Camera Function]-[Flash Band Correction] is
set to “On”.
(' P93 [ Flash Band Correction ] )
J Image Stabilizer Mark
Displayed when the image stabilizer is ON.
: When [Level] of [OIS] is set to
“Normal”.
: When [Level] of [OIS] is set to
“High”.
Memo : If image stabilizer is set to “OFF” when the
Display 0 screen is displayed, appears for 3
seconds.
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
K White Balance Mode
Displays the current white balance mode.
(*****K indicates color temperature)
A<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
Auto A.
B<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
Auto B.
P<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
Preset.
<FAW> : During Full Auto White Balance
mode.
<FAW> : When [AE LOCK] is set to “On”
during Full Auto White Balance
mode.
Memo : Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
117
Display/Status Screen
G Audio Level Meter
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.
appears on the screen when in the Auto
mode.
H Volume Operation Indicator
Displayed when there are changes made to the
volume of the headphone, speaker (0 to 15),
and the values of LCD BRIGHT, PEAKING (­10
to +10).
ISSUED
2012/12/21
L Shutter
The current shutter speed is displayed when
the shutter is set to “On”.
(' P93 [ Shutter ] )
is displayed when the [FULL AUTO] switch
is set to “ON” to enable Full Auto shooting
mode, or when the [SHUTTER] button is
pressed to enable automatic shutter mode.
Memo : The variable range of the shutter speed varies
according to the video format settings.
(' P53 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
If the shutter speed is not displayed, the shutter
is OFF.
Display/Status Screen
M Iris F­Number
Displays F­number of the lens iris.
N Gain
Displays the gain value.
is displayed in the ALC mode during
Manual shooting.
is displayed when AE LOCK is set to “ON”.
“LUX30” or “LUX36” is displayed when in the
low­light shooting mode.
Memo : Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
O AE Level
Appears when the AE function is activated,
and [Main Menu]-[Camera Function]-
[AE Level] is set to a value other than
“Normal”.
(' P93 [ AE Level ] )
When operated while manual operation is
disabled, “AE” blinks for about 5 seconds.
When face detection is enabled and [Face
Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, appears on the
left side of “AE”.
(' P49 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
P ND Filter Position
Displays the current ND filter position.
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[ND Filter] is
set to “Off”.
(' P103 [ ND Filter ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
Q Focus Display
Displays the value of the focal length during
manual focus.
# is displayed during Auto Focus.
When face detection is enabled, appears
on the left side of #.
(' P49 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
(' P95 [ Face Detect ] )
Memo : You can specify whether to display the focus
value (“Feet”/“Meter”) or turn off the display in
[Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]
-[Focus].
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(' P103 [ Focus ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
R Focus Assist
“FOCUS” is displayed when auto focus is
activated.
When ACCU­Focus is enabled, “ACCU­
FOCUS” blinks for about 10 seconds while
Focus Assist starts up, after which the
“FOCUS” indicator lights up.
If recording starts while [ACCU­Focus] is
active, [ACCU­Focus] will be forcibly
deactivated.
(' P102 [ Focus Assist ] )
Memo : Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
S Luminance Information
Displayed when the Spot Meter function is
activated.
(' P68 [Setting Spot Meter] )
MAX
: Maximum luminance
MIN
: Minimum luminance
118
ISSUED
2012/12/21
T Date/Time Display
Displays the current date and time.
Memo : The date/time display style can be specified in
[Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]
-[Date Style]/[Time Style].
(' P104 [ Date Style ] )
(' P104 [ Time Style ] )
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Date/Time] is
set to “Off”.
(' P104 [ Date/Time ] )
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Time Stamp] is set to “On”, this item is
not displayed.
(' P111 [ Time Stamp ] )
00:00:00:00
※
* Colon (:) denotes non­drop frames and dot (.)
denotes drop frames.
Example of user’s bit display:
FF EE DD 20
Memo : You can specify whether to display the time
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[TC/UB].
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(' P104 [ TC/UB ] )
W Time Code Lock Indicator
When the built­in time code generator is
synchronized to the external time code data
input during the synchronization of time code
with another camera recorder, lights up.
(' P66 [Synchronizing Time Code on Another
Camera] )
X Event/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(' P133 [Error Messages and Actions] )
119
Display/Status Screen
U Zoom Display
Displays the zoom position. (Zoom bar or
value)
The zoom bar will only be displayed for 3
seconds after the zoom operation is
activated.
The value will always be displayed. (0 to 99)
Memo : You can specify the display method (Number/
Bar) and whether to turn off the display in [LCD/
VF]-[Display Settings]-“Zoom”.
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(' P103 [ Zoom ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
V Time Code ()/User’s Bit () Display
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data.
Example of time code display:
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Display/Status Screen
Y Media Status
­­­­
: No card found in the selected
slot
STBY
: Recording standby
RREC
: Recording
REVIEW
: Clip Review
(' P70 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
STBY P
: Pre Rec recording standby
(' P75 [Pre Rec] )
RRECP
: Pre Rec recording
(' P75 [Pre Rec] )
STBY C
: Clip Continuous Rec recording
standby
(' P76 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
RRECC
: Clip Continuous Rec recording
(' P76 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBYC
: Clip Continuous Rec recording
(displayed in pause
yellow)
(' P76 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBY : Interval Rec recording standby
(' P78 [Interval Rec] )
STBY
: Interval recording pause
(displayed in
red)
RREC
: Interval Rec recording
(' P78 [Interval Rec] )
STBY : Frame Rec recording standby
(' P77 [Frame Rec] )
RREC
: Frame Rec recording
(' P77 [Frame Rec] )
STBY
: Frame Rec recording pause
(displayed in
yellow)
(' P77 [Frame Rec] )
STOP
: Unable to record to the card in
the slot
P.OFF
: Power OFF
Z Dual Rec/Backup Rec Display
“DUAL” is displayed in the Dual Rec mode and
“BACKUP” is displayed in the Backup Rec
mode.
(' P111 [ Slot Mode ] )
120
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Slot Mode] is
set to “Series”.
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Media
Remain] is set to “Off”. However, warnings will
be displayed.
(' P104 [ Media Remain ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only. (When the remaining time
is shorter than 3 minutes)
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Display Screen in Media
Mode
Media Display 0 Screen
This screen displays the media status or event. It
is also used to display warnings only.
O
A
※
NM L K
Memo : Displayed in the Media Display 0 screen during
warnings only.
1000/ 2000
282min
C Resolution
Displays the video image resolution.
D Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
E Operation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
F Audio Level Meter
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.
0
G
H
* Appears only during warnings
Media Display 1 Screen
O
NM L K
1000/ 2000
282min
1920x1080
60 i HQ
J
4030 20
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
I
0
F
4030 20
10
H
Media Display 2 Screen
O
NM L K
1000/ 2000
282min
1920x1080
60 i HQ
0
J
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Audio Meter]
is set to “Off”.
(' P104 [ Audio Meter ] )
G Volume Operation Indicator
Displayed when there are changes made to
the volume of the headphone, speaker (0 to
15), and the value of LCD BRIGHT (­10 to
+10).
The [PEAKING +/­] operation is disabled in the
Media mode, and its value is fixed at “­10”.
(' P117 [Volume Operation Indicator] )
0
G
A
B
C
D
10
00: 00: 00.00
I
E
0
F
4030 20
10
0
G
H
121
Display/Status Screen
A
B
C
D
A Media
Displays the media slot (A or B) of the
currently played clip.
2 appears when the write­protect switch of
the SD card is set.
B Voltage/Battery Power
Displays the current status of the power supply
in use.
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
H Information Display
Use the [AE LOCK/4] button to switch between
camera information display, GPS display and
turning off the display.
The GPS display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
The local date/time is displayed.
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
J Time Code ()/User’s Bit () Display
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data.
Example of time code display:
00:00:00:00
※
* Colon (:) denotes non­drop frames and dot (.)
denotes drop frames.
Example of user’s bit display:
FF EE DD 20
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
P13000K
AE LOCK/4
Hide
Camera Information
Display
AE LOCK/4
AE LOCK/4
Display/Status Screen
+35.483197
+139.652172
Oct 30,2012
07:01:58PM
GPS Display
Memo : This camera recorder does not come with GPS
function.
I Date/Time Display
Displays the date/time that is recorded on the
currently played SD card.
Memo : The date/time display style can be specified in
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Date Style]/
[Time Style].
(' P104 [ Date Style ] )
(' P104 [ Time Style ] )
122
Memo : You can specify whether to display the time
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in [TC/UB]
of [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display
Settings].
(' P104 [ TC/UB ] )
K Event/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(' P133 [Error Messages and Actions] )
L Media Status
PLAY
STILL
FWD *
: Playing
: Still picture playback mode
: High­speed playback in the
forward direction (* playback
speed: 5x or 15x)
REV *
: High­speed playback in the
reverse direction (* reverse
playback speed: 5x or 15x)
STOP
: Stop mode
P.OFF
: Power OFF
M Check Mark
Displayed when the currently played clip is
selected.
N OK Mark
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.
(' P86 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
O Clip Information
Displays current clip number/total number of
clips.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Status Screen
For checking the settings of the camera recorder.
Audio Screen
For checking the settings related to audio input.
(' P106 [Audio Set Item] )
Camera 1 Screen/Camera 2 Screen
For checking information related to shooting using
the camera recorder.
Audio Level Screen
For checking audio related information such as
microphone volume level.
(' P60 [Audio Recording] )
For checking the status (functions assigned) of the
user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
Video Screen
For checking the settings related to video output.
(' P105 [Video Set Item] )
123
Display/Status Screen
USER Switch Set Screen
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Marker and Safety Zone
Displays (Camera Mode
Only)
The marker and safety zone displays are useful in
helping you determine the angle of view for the
image according to the shooting purpose.
Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = “4:3”,
[Aspect Marker] = “Line+Halftone”, and [Center
Mark] = “On”
Safety Zone
Center Mark
Color Bar Output
Color bars can be output on this camera recorder.
Memo : The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(' P107 [ Test Tone ] )
To Output the Color Bar Using the Menu
To output color bars, follow the setting procedure
below.
1 Set [Camera Function]-[Bars] to “On”.
(' P93 [ Bars ] )
Color bars are output.
To Output the Color Bar Using the User Button
Aspect Marker
Camera Features
.
Memo : You can turn On/Off the safety zone and center
mark displays using [LCD/VF]-[Marker
Settings]-[Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone], and
[Center Mark].
(' P103 [ Safety Zone ] )
Smoothening the Skin
Color (Skin Detail
Function)
The Skin Detail function can be used to reduce the
contour enhancement of video signals for only the
skin areas so as to produce a smoother skin tone.
1 Set [Skin Detail] to “On”.
(' P99 [ Skin Detail ] )
Set [Main Menu]-[Camera Process]-
[Detail]/[Adjust]-[Skin Detail] to “On”.
Memo : You can specify the adjustment level for the
contour enhancement of the skin tone in [Main
Menu]-[Camera Process]-[Detail]/[Adjust]
-[Skin Detail]/[Level].
(' P99 [ Level ] )
124
1 Assign the “Bars” function to any of the
user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
2 Press the user button that is assigned with
“Bars”.
Color bars are output.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting Color Matrix
The color matrix of the camera recorder can be
adjusted to a color of the user’s preference.
When shooting is performed using multiple
cameras, the colors of the different cameras can
be adjusted, and a color of the user’s preference
can be set on this camera recorder.
The Saturation, Hue and Lightness of the
primary and complementary colors (6 colors in
total) can be set individually.
Adjust the color on the vector scope and
waveform monitor using the DSC color chart.
* The adjusted values of “Standard”, “Cinema
Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color Matrix]
can be stored individually.
(' P98 [ Color Matrix ] )
Red
Cyan
R
I
Mg
R
I
Y
Mg
Y
B
G
Cyan
Mg
R
I
Mg
Y
Y
B
G
Yellow
R
I
B
Cy
G
Blue
Mg
Cy
R
I
Mg
Y
Y
B
B
G
G
Cy
Magenta
Green
R
I
Mg
Cy
R
I
Mg
YI
Y
B
B
G
Cy
G
Cy
4 Adjust Lightness.
Pressing the cross­shaped button (J)
lightens; and pressing the cross­shaped
button (K) darkens.
Press the cross­shaped button (I) to return
the cursor to Hue.
Cy
Blue
R
I
R
I
B
G
Cy
Yellow
Red
Mg
R
I
Y
Mg
Y
B
G
Green
R
I
B
G
Cy
Magenta
Mg
R
I
Y
Cy
Mg
Y
B
G
Cy
B
G
Cy
125
Camera Features
1 Select [Camera Process]-[Color Matrix]/
[Adjust].
(' P98 [ Adjust ] )
2 Adjust Hue.
Select the color using the cross­shaped
button (JK) and confirm using the cross­
shaped button (I). (The cursor moves to
Hue.)
Pressing the cross­shaped button (J)
rotates the hue in the clockwise direction on
the vector scope.
Pressing the cross­shaped button (K)
rotates the hue in the anti­clockwise
direction on the vector scope.
3 Adjust Saturation.
Press the cross­shaped button (I) to move
the cursor to Saturation.
Each of the colors changes in the direction
indicated by the arrow on the vector scope.
Pressing the cross­shaped button (J)
moves the color outward from the center of
the circle on the vector scope.
Pressing the cross­shaped button (K)
moves the color toward to the center of the
circle on the vector scope.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Configuring Setup Files
The menu settings can be stored on the camera
recorder or an SD card by saving them as a setup
file.
Loading a saved setup file enables you to
reproduce the appropriate setup state speedily.
Two types of setup files are available.
oScene file:
File that contains all menu settings, ranging from
video format settings to image creation settings
such as device settings and shooting conditions,
as well as the contents of the [Favorites Menu].
oPicture file:
File that contains image creation settings in
accordance to the shooting conditions ([Camera
Process] menu items).
(' P96 [Camera Process Menu] )
Memo : Make use of the [Setup File] menu to save or
load a setup file.
The following operations can be performed on
the [Setup File] menu.
[Saving Setup Files] P 126
[Loading a Setup File] P 127
[Deleting Setup Files] P 128
Camera Features
Number of Storable Setup Files
Camera recorder
SD slot A
SD slot B
: [CAM1] to [CAM4]
: [1] to [8]
: [31] to [38]
Compatibility
oScene file
Only scene files of the GY­HM600 and
GY­HM650 series can be loaded.
When the scene files saved using GY­HM650
are loaded, the functions that only exist on
GY­HM650 are ignored.
oPicture file
Only picture files of the GY­HM600 and GY­HM650
series can be loaded.
126
Saving Setup Files
1 Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu]-[System]-[Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(' P108 [ Setup File ] )
2 Select [Store File] and press the Set button
(R).
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and
press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4 Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross­shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
4
Memo : Files cannot be written in the following cases.
(Displayed in gray, selection disabled)
When the inserted SD card is not supported or
not formatted. (File name appears as “­­­”.)
When a write­protected SD card is inserted
(a 2 mark appears beside the SD card icon).
5 Name the file.
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
(' P91 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Store File]/[Picture File] subname.
Memo : When overwriting an existing file, the subname
of the existing file is displayed.
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous screen.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
6 Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
5
6
7 Save the file.
A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen.
7
screen when the file is newly saved.
1 Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu]-[System]-[Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(' P108 [ Setup File ] )
2 Select [Load File] and press the Set button
(R).
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and
press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4 Select the file to load using the cross­
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
4
Memo : When the write­protect switch of the inserted SD
card is set, a 2 mark appears beside the SD
card icon. Setup files can be loaded from an SD
card even if the write­protect switch is set.
Setup files that are completely incompatible will
not be displayed.
(' P126 [Configuring Setup Files] )
5 Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the
screen.
8 Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
5
6 Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
127
Camera Features
Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
Loading a Setup File
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Deleting Setup Files
1 Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu]-[System]-[Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(' P108 [ Setup File ] )
2 Select [Delete File] and press the Set button
(R).
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and
press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4 Select the file to delete using the cross­
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
4
Camera Features
Memo : Scene files saved on the SD card cannot be
deleted.
5 Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the
screen.
5
6 Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
128
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Managing/Editing Clips on
a PC
2 Select [Change] using the cross­shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The camera recorder switches to USB mode.
Loading Clips to the PC (USB
Connection Mode)
You can load clips to a PC by connecting the
camera recorder to the PC via the USB port.
Doing so enables clips stored in the SD card to
be managed and edited on the PC.
Files on the SD card can be managed/edited on
the connected PC in this mode only for USB
mass storage class devices that are recognized
by the said PC as a peripheral drive.
Memo : Files cannot be written to the SD card.
Make sure to manage/edit files recorded in the
MP4 file format using the (JVC ProHD Clip
Manager) PC application software in the
supplied disc.
For details on how to install the application
software, refer to the [User's Guide] of the [JVC
ProHD Clip Manager] inside the supplied disc.
1 Connect the camera recorder to the PC
using a USB cable.
A confirmation message “Change to USB
Mode?” to enable the USB connection appears.
Memo : If recording is in progress, the “Change to USB
Mode?” message appears after recording
stops.
If playback is in progress, the camera recorder
switches to USB mode after the file closes
automatically, such as when playback stops.
Disconnecting
Disable the connection on the PC, then remove
the USB cable from the camera recorder.
Doing so exits the USB mode and switches the
camera recorder to Camera mode.
Memo : The procedure for disabling the USB connection
varies according to the PC in use. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of the PC.
Connecting External Devices
INPUT2
2
INPUT1
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HDMI
REMO
TE
HD/SD
SDI
DEVICE
AV
DC
PC
129
ISSUED
2012/12/21
When your PC cannot recognize the SD
card
Confirm and update the OS of your PC.
OS
Windows XP/
Windows XP SP1
Windows XP SP2/
Windows XP SP3
Connecting External Devices
Description
Necessary to update to SP2
or higher.
Necessary to download the
update software.
(KB955704)
http://www.microsoft.com/
downloads/details.aspx?
familyid=1CBE3906­
DDD1­4CA2­B727­
C2DFF5E30F61&
displaylang=en
Windows Vista
Necessary to update to SP1
or higher.
Windows Vista SP1/ Necessary to download the
Windows Vista SP2 update software.
(KB975823)
32 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=2d1abe01­
0942­4f8aabb2­
2ad529de00a1
64 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=7d54c53f­017c
­4ea5­
ae08­34c3452ba315
Windows 7
Necessary to download the
update software.
(KB976422)
32 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=3ee91fc2­
a9bc­4ee1­
aca3­2a9aff5915ea
64 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=73f766dd­
7127­4445­
b860­47084587155f
Connecting External
Monitor
To output live or playback video images and
audio sound to an external monitor, select the
output signals from the camera recorder, and
connect using an appropriate cable according to
the monitor to be used.
Choose the most suitable terminal according to
the monitor in use.
[HD/SD SDI] terminal:
Outputs either the HD­SDI signal or SD­SDI
signal.
[AV] terminal:
Outputs composite video and audio signals.
[HDMI] terminal:
Outputs HDMI signals.
Configure the settings in the [A/V Set] menu to
match the monitor to be connected.
(' P105 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVICE
BATT.REL
EASE
A
AV
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
SD/HD
SDI
HDMI
REMO
TE
DC
Clamp Filter
(supplied)
REMOTE
DC
Wire Clamp
(supplied)
HDMI
SDI IN
AV input
* Select the display pattern in [A/V Set]-
[HDMI/SDI Out].
(' P105 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
130
ISSUED
2012/12/21
* When [Record Format]-[System] is set to “SD”,
only SD­SDI signals are output.
(' P109 [ System ] )
* To display the menu screen or display screen on
an external monitor, set [A/V Set]-[Video Set]
-[Display On TV] to “On”.
(' P105 [ Display On TV ] )
Connecting via SDI
Digital video signals, together with embedded
(superimposed) audio signals and time code
signals, are output for both the HD­SDI and SD­
SDI signals.
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD SDI] output
terminal is used as a flag to determine valid
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will
not be output.
Memo : The sampling frequency for embedded
(superimposed) audio signals is 48 kHz. Time
code of the built­in time generator as well as
playback time code are also output.
Connecting the
Headphone
Audio output from the [+] terminal can be
selected using [A/V Set]-[Monitor] or the
[MONITOR] selection switch on the camera
recorder.
(' P107 [ Monitor ] )
The different combinations of settings that are
output from the [+] terminal and monitor
speaker are as follows.
[MONITOR]
Switch
Settings
[CH1]
[+]
terminal
L
R
CH1
[Monitor]
Settings
­
[BOTH]
[Mix]
CH1
CH1+CH2 CH1+CH2
[Stereo]
CH1 CH2
­
CH2
[CH2]
Speaker *
CH2
* Audio is output from the speaker only in Media
mode. Does not output in the Camera mode.
Settings for SDI Down­Converted Output
You can select the method to “down convert” HD
Memo : When [Record Format]-[System] is set to “SD”,
and [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item cannot be
selected.
(' P109 [ System ] )
INPUT2
INPUT1
AUX
POW
E
/CHGR
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
REMO
TE
DC
Memo : If both CH1 and CH2 are built­in microphones,
stereo sound is output from the [+] terminal
regardless of the [MONITOR] switch setting and
[Monitor] setting.
131
Connecting External Devices
video images to SD images during SD­SDI
output.
Set using [A/V Set]-[Video Set]-[SD
Aspect].
The available modes include “Side Cut”, “Letter”
(blackened at the top and bottom), and
“Squeeze” (full size, compressed at the left and
right).
(' P110 [ SD Aspect ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Connecting Wired Remote
Control
The functions of the camera recorder can be
configured using a wired remote control.
Memo : When the switches of the camera recorder and
remote control unit are operated at the same
time, the switch operation of the remote control
unit takes priority over that of the camera
recorder.
1 Connect a wired remote control to the
camera recorder.
Connect the wired remote control (sold
separately) to the [REMOTE] terminal of this
camera recorder.
INPUT2
INPUT1
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
REMO
TE
DC
REMOTE
Connect the wired
remote control
Connecting External Devices
Caution : Turn off the power of the camera recorder when
connecting a wired remote control.
2 Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
132
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Error Messages and Actions
Warning display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen, tally lamp indication and warning tone are as
follows according to the error status.
Memo : This camera recorder makes use of a microcomputer. Noise interference from external sources may
prevent it from functioning properly. When this occurs, turn off and on the power of the camera recorder
again.
Error Message
Thumbnail
Screen
Display Screen
Dedicated
Screen
TURN POWER
­
OFF
TURN BACK ON
LATER
­
−
Getting
Overheated. Please Turn
Power Off.
REC INHIBITED
−
­
Action
System error.
* The warning tone sounds and the
tally lamp blinks twice every
second.
Turn off the power, and turn it
on again.
If the error persists, consult
your nearest JVC dealer.
The fan stopped running.
The power turns off
Please consult your nearest
JVC dealer.
automatically after about 1
second.
Usage time of the fan has exceeded Check the fan and replace
9000 hours.
accordingly. For more details,
please consult your nearest
JVC dealer.
Memo : You can check the usage
time of the fan in
[System]-[System
Information]-[Fan
Hour].
(' P109 [ Fan Hour ] )
The battery has exceeded the
specified temperature.
The power turns off
automatically after about 15
second.
Wait until the temperature
drops or replace the
battery.
If the error persists,
consult your nearest JVC
dealer.
[REC] button is pressed when the Turn off the write­protect
write­protect switch of the SD card switch of the SD card, or
insert a recordable SD card.
is set.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
133
Others
FAN STOP
DETECTED
PLEASE TURN
P.OFF
FAN
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
Status
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Error Message
Thumbnail
Screen
Display Screen
Dedicated
Screen
LOST MEDIA
−
INFO [*]
Status
Action
Card is removed while recording Restore the card using this
is in progress.
Card is removed while
formatting is in progress.
Card is removed while restoring
camera recorder.
(' P42 [Restoring the SD
Card] )
is in progress.
Card is removed while adding
the OK mark.
Card is removed while writing a
setup file.
Card is removed while deleting a
Others
RECORD
FORMAT
INCORRECT
­
MEDIA FULL
­
NO CLIPS
­
NO MEDIA
­
­
No Media
­
−
134
clip.
(*: A, B)
Video format of the file for Clip Set [Resolution] and [Frame
Review is different from the
& Bit Rate] correctly.
[Frame & Bit Rate] setting of the
(' P109 [ Resolution ] )
camera recorder.
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit
Rate ] )
[REC] button is pressed when Replace the SD card with a
new one.
the media in use has no
remaining space.
Remaining space ran out during
recording.
No viewable clips are found on the Insert an SD card that
card for Clip Review.
contains clips that can be
reviewed.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
(' P70 [Viewing Recorded
Videos Immediately (Clip
Review)] )
[REC] button is pressed when an SD Insert an SD card.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
card is not inserted.
No SD card is found in Media mode Insert an SD card.
or when the thumbnail screen is
(' P39 [SD Card] )
displayed.
No Clips
No clips are found on the inserted Insert an SD card that
SD card in Media mode or when the contains playable clips.
thumbnail screen is displayed.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
(' P81 [Playing Recorded
Clips] )
12h Continuation The continuous recording time in
To continue recording, press
Record
AVCHD mode exceeds 12 hours
the [REC] button again.
and recording stops automatically.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Tally Lamp
The tally lamp start blinking when the remaining space on the SD card is running out during recording, or
when the battery power is running low.
Blinking Mode
Blinks slowly
(once every second)
Battery power is low
Remaining recording time on SD card is less than 3 minutes (during
Remaining Battery Power/SD Card Space
Blinks quickly
(2 times per second)
Remaining recording time on SD card is zero (during recording)
Error on the camera recorder
recording)
Warning Tone
Warning tone is output from the monitor speaker and [+] terminal when the battery level is low.
Warning tone is also output when an error occurs in the camera recorder.
Memo : You can specify whether to turn on the warning tone as well as setting the volume in [A/V Set]-[Audio
Set]-[Alarm Level].
(' P107 [ Alarm Level ] )
Others
135
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Power does not turn on.
Action
Is the AC adapter properly connected?
Is the battery charged?
Is the power turned on immediately after it is turned off?
Others
Make sure to wait for an interval of at least 5 seconds before turning
on the power again.
Is the record trigger button/lock switch on the handle turned on?
Unable to start recording.
Is the write­protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write­protect switch is turned off.
(' P39 [Write­Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Camera image is not output on Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
the LCD monitor and
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
viewfinder screen.
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Playback does not start after Is the selected clip a playable clip?
selecting a clip thumbnail and Playback is not possible if the clip has a different video format setting.
pressing the Set button (R).
No sound during playback.
Is the currently played clip recorded in the Variable Frame Rec mode?
(' P80 [Variable Frame Rec] )
Readjust the brightness of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Images on the LCD monitor
and viewfinder screen appear Is the [ND FILTER] switch set to “1/64”?
dark or blurred.
Is the iris closed?
Is the shutter speed setting too high?
Is the amount of peaking too little? Use the [PEAKING +/­] button to
adjust the contour for the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen.
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor] )
(' P37 [Adjusting the Viewfinder] )
The [CH1/CH2] recording level Is the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch set to “AUTO”?
Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to “ON”?
adjustment knob does not
work.
Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to “ON”, and [A/V Set]-[Audio
Set]-[Audio On FULL AUTO] set to “Auto”?
(' P107 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
SD card cannot be initialized Is the write­protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write­protect switch is turned off.
(formatted).
(' P39 [Write­Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
Battery alarm appears even Is the battery too old?
after loading a charged
battery.
136
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Symptom
The time code and user’s bit
are not displayed.
The date and time are not
displayed.
Incorrect display on the
viewfinder.
Action
Even in Camera mode or Media mode, the time code and user’s bit
may not be displayed depending to the type of display.
Is [LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[TC/UB] set to “Off”? To display
the time code and user’s bit, set it to “TC” or “UB”.
(' P104 [ TC/UB ] )
The date and time are only displayed on the Display 1 and Display 2
screens in the Camera mode (during shooting).
(' P116 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
Is [System]-[Record Set]-[Time Stamp] set to “On”? To display
the date and time, set it to “Off”.
(' P111 [ Time Stamp ] )
Is the LCD monitor used with [LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] set to “Off”?
(' P101 [LCD/VF Menu] )
The recordable time may be shorter depending on the shooting
conditions or the subject.
The actual recording time is
shorter than the estimated
time.
The two camera recorders are Is the [TC IN/OUT] switch correctly set?
not synchronized even though (' P66 [Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera] )
the time codes have been
Set [System]-[Record Set]-[Record Format]-[Frame & Bit
synchronized. ( on the Slave
Rate] such that the two camera recorders have the same frame rate.
device is not displayed.)
(' P109 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
Others
137
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Specifications
General
Item
Power
Power
consumption
Mass
Allowable
operating
temperature
Allowable
operating
humidity
Allowable
storage
temperature
Lens
Description
DC 12 V
Approx. 10.2 W
(during recording with backlight
set to [STANDARD] while the
viewfinder is in use)
Approx. 2.4 kJ (with battery)
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
30 %RH to 80 %RH
­20 °C to 50 °C (­4 °F to 122 °F)
Terminal Section
Others
Item
Description
[HD/SD SDI] output terminal (480i or 576i:
Downconverted 720p/1080i: embedded audio),
BNC (unbalanced)
HD­SDI
Compliant with SMPTE 292 M
SD­SDI
Compliant with SMPTE 259 M
[INPUT1/INPUT2] terminal
[MIC]
­50 dBu, 3 k!, XLR (balanced),
+48 V output (phantom power
supply)
[LINE]
+4 dBu, 10 k!, XLR (balanced)
[AUX] terminal
[AV] terminal
Video signal
Audio signal
[+] terminal
[REMOTE]
terminal
[] terminal
[DEVICE]
[TC] terminal
[IN]
[OUT]
138
Lens Section
­22dBu, 10 k!, 3.5 mm stereo
mini jack (unbalanced)
4­pin 3.5 mm mini jack
1.0 V (p­p)
­8 dBu (during reference level
input), 1 k! (unbalanced)
3.5 mm mini jack (stereo)
2.5 mm wired remote control
Mini USB­B type, USB 2.0,
miniB, slave function (mass
storage class) only
1.0 V(p­p) to 4.0 V(p­p) high
impedance
2.0 ± 1.0 V(p­p) low impedance
Item
Filter diameter
Description
Fujinon F1.6, 23x, f=4.1 mm to
94.3 mm
(35 mm conversion: 29 mm to
667 mm)
Φ72 mm
Camera Section
Item
Image pickup
device
Color separation
prism
Sync system
Optical filter
Gain
Electronic
shutter
Variable Frame
Rate
LCD monitor
Viewfinder
Description
1/3­inch Progressive CMOS
F1.6, 3­color separation prism
Internal sync (built­in SSG)
OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64
­6dB, ­3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB,
9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, 21dB,
24dB, Lolux (30dB, 36dB), ALC
1/6 to 1/10000, EEI
2/30­60/30fps, 2/25­50/25fps,
2/24­60/24fps
3.5­inch LCD, 16:9 920K pixels
0.45­inch LCOS, 1.22M pixels
(852 x 480 x 3)
Storage Section
Item
Supported
media
Slots
Description
SDHC/SDXC
x 2
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Video/Audio
Accessories
Warranty Card (U model only)
Instructions
Document and Software Disc
AC Adapter
Power Cord (U model: 1, E model: 2)
Battery
AV Cable
Clamp Filter
Wire Clamp
Large Eyecup
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Others
Item
Description
Recording time Approx. 25 minutes (8 GB SD
card, 35 Mbps, VBR mode)
HD mode (MOV/MP4: MPEG­2)
Video
QuickTime File Format (For
recording file Final Cut Pro)/MP4 File Format
format
Video
HQ mode
MPEG­2 Long GOP VBR,
35Mbps (Max) MP@HL,
1920x1080/59.94i, 29.97p,
23.98p, 50i, 25p
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
1280x720/59.94p, 29.97p,
23.98p, 50p, 25p
SP mode
MPEG­2 Long GOP CBR,
18.3Mbps MP@HL (720p)/
25Mbps MP@H14 (1080i)
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
1280x720/59.94p, 50p
Audio
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
HD mode (AVCHD)
Video
AVCHD File Format
recording file
format
Video
HQ mode
MPEG­4 AVC/H.264, 24 Mbps
(Max)
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i
SP mode
MPEG­4 AVC/H.264, 17 Mbps
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i
Audio
Dolby Digital 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit,
256kbps
SD mode (MOV: H.264)
Video
QuickTime File Format
recording file
format
Video
MPEG­4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
720x480/59.94i (U model only),
720x576/50i (E model only)
Audio
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
Accessories
139
ISSUED
2012/12/21
177.5
148.5
140
156.5
Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)
57
(HOOD)
197
178
415.5
269.5
345.5
402.5
Others
* The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement without
prior notice.
140
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Index
A
AC adapter .......................................... 29, 30
Action ........................................................ 83
Aspect ratio ................................................ 46
Auto power off ........................................... 31
B
Backup rec ................................................ 73
Battery ................................................. 14, 28
Brightness adjustment ............................... 50
C
Camera mode .............................. 19, 34, 116
Charging time ............................................ 29
Clip continuous rec .................................... 76
Clip cutter trig (splitting clips) ..................... 71
Clip name ............................................. 43, 82
Clip review ................................................. 70
Color bar .................................................. 124
Color matrix ............................................. 125
Computer ................................................. 129
Continuous operating time ......................... 29
P
Picture file ................................................ 126
Picture quality setting ................................. 59
Power .................................................. 30, 31
Pre rec ....................................................... 75
Preset zoom .............................................. 47
Push auto focus ......................................... 48
R
Recordable time ........................................ 39
Resolution .................................................. 45
Restoring SD card ..................................... 42
S
Safety zone display .................................. 124
Scene file ................................................. 126
SD/SDHC/SDXC card ......................... 15, 39
Selecting multiple clips .............................. 87
Setting the date/time .................................. 33
Setup file .................................................. 126
Shooting .................................................... 44
Skin detail function ................................... 124
Software Keyboard .................................... 91
Spot meter ................................................. 68
Status screen ..................................... 35, 123
Switching shutter mode ............................. 53
Switching shutter speed ............................ 53
Deleting clips ............................................. 85
Display screen ........................... 34, 116, 121
Dual rec ..................................................... 71
E
Error message ................................... 57, 133
External monitor ....................................... 130
Eyecup ...................................................... 27
T
Face detection ........................................... 49
Favorites menu ........................................ 112
File format .................................................. 45
Focus ......................................................... 47
Focus assist ............................................... 48
Formatting (initializing) SD cards ............... 41
Frame rec .................................................. 77
Tally lamp .......................................... 38, 135
Thumbnail (detailed screen) ...................... 83
Thumbnail (standard screen) ..................... 81
Thumbnail screen ...................................... 81
Time code ...................................... 62, 63, 66
Time code generator ................................. 63
Time code playback ................................... 85
U
USB mode ................................... 19, 35, 129
User button ................................................ 38
User’s bit .................................................... 62
V
Variable frame rec ..................................... 80
Video format .............................................. 45
Viewfinder ................................ 16, 30, 34, 37
F
G Gain adjustment ........................................ 52
H
Headphone ........................................ 62, 131
I
Image stabilizer .......................................... 59
Initial settings ............................................. 32
Interval rec ................................................. 78
Iris adjustment ........................................... 51
L
LCD monitor ............................. 16, 30, 34, 36
Lens cover ................................................. 28
M Marker display ......................................... 124
Media mode ................................. 19, 34, 121
Menu .............................................. 89, 90, 92
N
W Warning ............................................. 35, 135
White balance adjustment ......................... 55
White paint ................................................. 57
Wired remote control ............................... 132
Z
Zebra pattern ............................................. 67
Zoom ......................................................... 46
ND filter ...................................................... 55
O OK mark .................................................... 86
One push auto focus .................................. 48
141
Others
D
ISSUED
2012/12/21
142
ISSUED
2012/12/21
143
ISSUED
2012/12/21
GY­HM600U/GY­HM600EHD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
© 2012 JVC KENWOOD Corporation
LST1424­001C
ISSUED
2012/12/21
HD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
GY­HM650U/GY­HM650E
INSTRUCTIONS
TIME
CODE
The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement
without prior notice.
Please check the latest version of the INSTRUCTIONS from the following Mobile User Guide, or
download the PDF from the URL below.
Mobile User Guide
When you are outside, you can refer to the instructions from your Android phone or
iPhone.
http://manual3.jvckenwood.com/pro/mobile/global/
You can view the Mobile User Guide using the browser on your Android phone or
iPhone.
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Serial No. which is located
on the body.
Retain this information for future reference.
Model No.
GY-HM650U
Serial No.
Ver. 3.00
J-TECS infomation DAS13382 Count:- Checked:JK062240 Date:20121220 Approved:JK073626 Date:20121221
Please read the following before getting started:
Thank you for purchasing this JVC product.
Before operating this unit, please read the
instructions carefully to ensure the best
possible performance.
In this manual, each model number is
described without the last letter (U/E) which
means the shipping destination.
(U: for USA and Canada, E: for Europe)
Only “U” models (GY-HM650U) have been
evaluated by UL.
LST1428­001B
ISSUED
2012/12/21
2
ISSUED
2012/12/21
FOR USA
These are general IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS and certain items may not
apply to all appliances.
IMPORTANT SAFEGUARDS
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Introduction
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Read these instructions.
Keep these instructions.
Heed all warnings.
Follow all instructions.
Do not use this apparatus near water.
Clean only with dry cloth.
Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or
other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs,
convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.
Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table
specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus.
When a cart is used, use caution when moving the
cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as
power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have
fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture,
does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
INFORMATION (FOR CANADA)
RENSEIGNEMENT (POUR CANADA)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
For USA-California Only
This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
3
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Safety Precautions
FOR USA AND CANADA
Introduction
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK).
NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE
PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with
arrowhead symbol, within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that
may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a
risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within
an equilateral triangle is
intended to alert the user to
the presence of important
operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying
the appliance.
4
This device complies with Part 15 of
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not
approved by JVC could void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment. This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial
environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own
expense.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
POUR CANADA
ATTENTION
ATTENTION:
POUR EVITER TOUT RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION NE PAS
OUVRIR LE BOITER. AUCUNE
PIECE INTERIEURE N’EST A
REGLER PAR L’UTILISATEUR. SE
REFERER A UN AGENT QUALIFIE
EN CAS DE PROBLEME.
Le symbole de l’éclair à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’une “tension
dangereuse” non isolée dans
le boîtier du produit. Cette
tension est suffisante pour
provoquer l’électrocution de
personnes.
Le point d’exclamation à
l’intérieur d’un triangle
équilatéral est destiné à
alerter l’utilisateur sur la
présence d’opérations
d’entretien importantes au
sujet desquelles des
renseignements se trouvent
dans le manuel
d’instructions.
Ces symboles ne sont
utilisés qu’aux Etats-Unis.
CAUTION:
The mains plug shall remain readily
operable.
Remove the mains plug immediately if
the camera functions abnormally.
WARNING:
The battery pack, the camera with
battery installed, and the remote control
with battery installed should not be
exposed to excessive heat such as direct
sunlight, fire or the like.
Introduction
RISQUE
D’ELECTROCUTION
NE PAS OUVRIR
WARNING: TO PREVENT FIRE OR
SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOT
EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR
MOISTURE.
AVERTISSEMENT : POUR EVITER
LES RISQUES D’INCENDIE OU
D’ELECTROCUTION, NE PAS
EXPOSER L’APPAREIL A LA
PLUIE NI A L’HUMIDITE.
NOTES:
The
rating plate and safety caution are
on the bottom and/or the back of the
main unit.
The serial number plate is on the
bottom of the unit.
The rating information and safety
caution of the AC adapter are on its
upper and lower sides.
REMARQUES :
La plaque d’identification et
l’avertissement de sécurité se trouvent
sous l’appareil et/ou au dos.
La plaque du numéro de série est
située sur la partie inférieure de
l’appareil.
Les informations d’identification et
l’avertissement de sécurité de
l’adaptateur secteur sont situés sur ses
côtés supérieur et inférieur.
Caution on Replaceable lithium
battery
The battery used in this device may
present a fire or chemical burn hazard if
mistreated.
Do not recharge, disassemble, heat
above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate.
Replace battery with Panasonic, Sanyo,
Sony or Maxell CR2025.
Danger of explosion or risk of fire if the
battery is incorrectly replaced.
Dispose of used battery promptly.
Keep away from children.
Do not disassemble and do not dispose
of in fire.
5
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Introduction
When the equipment is installed in a
cabinet or on a shelf, make sure that it
has sufficient space on all sides to allow
for ventilation (10 cm (3-15/16") or more
on both sides, on top and at the rear).
Do not block the ventilation holes.
(If the ventilation holes are blocked by a
newspaper, or cloth etc. the heat may not
be able to get out.)
No naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, should be placed on the
apparatus.
When discarding batteries,
environmental problems must be
considered and the local rules or laws
governing the disposal of these batteries
must be followed strictly.
The apparatus shall not be exposed to
dripping or splashing and that no objects
filled with liquids, such as vases, shall be
placed on the apparatus.
Do not point the lens directly into the
sun. This can cause eye injuries, as well
as lead to the malfunctioning of internal
circuitry. There is also a risk of fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION!
The following notes concern possible
physical damage to this unit and to the
user.
Carrying or holding this unit by the LCD
monitor can result in dropping the unit,
or in a malfunction.
Do not use a tripod on unsteady or
unlevel surfaces. It could tip over,
causing serious damage to the unit.
CAUTION!
Connecting cables (Audio/Video, etc.) to
this unit and leaving it on top of the TV is
not recommended, as tripping on the
cables will cause the unit to fall, resulting
in damage.
6
When using the AC adapter in
areas other than the USA
The provided AC adapter features
automatic voltage selection in the AC
range from 110 V to 240 V.
USING HOUSEHOLD AC PLUG
ADAPTER
In case of connecting the unit’s power
cord to an AC wall outlet other than
American National Standard C73 series
type, use an AC plug adapter called a
“Siemens Plug” as shown.
For this AC plug adapter, consult your
nearest JVC dealer.
Plug Adapter
Remove the AC adapter from the AC
wall outlet when not in use.
Do not leave dust or metal objects
adhered to the AC wall outlet or AC
adapter (power/DC plug).
ISSUED
2012/12/21
If the plug fitted is not suitable for the
power points in your home or the cable is
too short to reach a power point, then
obtain an appropriate safety approved
extension lead or consult your dealer.
BE SURE to replace the fuse only with
an identical approved type, as originally
fitted, and to replace the fuse cover.
If nonetheless the mains plug is cut off
be sure to remove the fuse and dispose
of the plug immediately, to avoid possible
shock hazard by inadvertent connection
to the mains supply.
If this product is not supplied fitted with a
mains plug then follow the instructions
given below:
DO NOT make any connection to the
Larger Terminal coded E or Green.
The wires in the mains lead are coloured
in accordance with the following code:
Blue to N
(Neutral) or Black
Brown to L (Live)
or Red
If these colours do not correspond with
the terminal identifications of your plug,
connect as follows:
Blue wire to terminal coded N (Neutral)
or coloured black.
Brown wire to terminal coded L (Live) or
coloured Red.
If in doubt — consult a competent
electrician.
CAUTIONS:
To
prevent shock, do not open the
cabinet. No user serviceable parts
inside.
Refer servicing to qualified personnel.
When you are not using the AC
adapter for a long period of time, it is
recommended that you disconnect the
power cord from AC outlet.
FOR EUROPE
This equipment is in conformity with the
provisions and protection requirements of
the corresponding European Directives.
This equipment is designed for professional
video appliances and can be used in the
following environments:
Controlled EMC environment (for
example, purpose-built broadcasting or
recording studio), and rural outdoors
environments.
In order to keep the best performance and
furthermore for electromagnetic
compatibility we recommend to use cables
not exceeding the following lengths:
Port
DC INPUT
USB Mini
AV OUT
HDMI
REMOTE
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Shielded
Cable
Exclusive
Cable
Length
1.8 m
3m
1.5 m
3m
1m
HD/SD SDI
Coaxial
Cable
10 m
AUDIO INPUT 1/2
Shielded
Cable
3m
HEADPHONE
Exclusive
Cable
3m
AUX
Shielded
Cable
5m
TC
Shielded
Cable
5m
The inrush current of this apparatus is
4.9 A.
CAUTION:
Where there are strong electromagnetic
waves or magnetism, for example near a
radio or TV transmitter, transformer,
motor, etc., the picture and the sound
may be disturbed. In such case, please
keep the apparatus away from the
sources of the disturbance.
7
Introduction
IMPORTANT (for owners in the
U.K.)
Connection to the mains supply in
the United Kingdom.
DO NOT cut off the mains plug
from this equipment.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Dear Customer,
Introduction
This apparatus is in conformance with
the valid European directives and
standards regarding electromagnetic
compatibility and electrical safety.
European representative of
JVC KENWOOD Corporation is:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Germany
Information for Users on Disposal
of Old Equipment and Batteries
Products
Notice:
Battery
The sign Pb below the
symbol for batteries indicates
that this battery contains lead.
[European Union]
Sehr geehrter Kunde, sehr
geehrte Kundin,
dieses Gerät stimmt mit den gültigen
europäischen Richtlinien und Normen
bezüglich elektromagnetischer
Verträglichkeit und elektrischer
Sicherheit überein.
Die europäische Vertretung für die
JVC KENWOOD Corporation ist:
JVC Technical Services Europe GmbH
Postfach 10 05 04
61145 Friedberg
Deutschland
CAUTION:
To avoid electric
shock or damage to
the unit, first firmly
insert the small end
of the power cord into the AC Adapter
until it is no longer wobbly, and then plug
the larger end of the power cord in to an
AC outlet.
FOR EUROPEAN
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment this product may cause
radio interference in which case the user
may be required to take adequate
measures.
These symbols indicate that the electrical
and electronic equipment and the battery
with this symbol should not be disposed of
as general household waste at its
end-of-life.
Instead, the products should be handed
over to the applicable collection points for
the recycling of electrical and electronic
equipment as well as batteries for proper
treatment, recovery and recycling in
accordance with your national legislation
and the Directive 2002/96/EC and
2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products correctly,
you will help to conserve natural resources
and will help to prevent potential negative
effects on the environment and human
health which could otherwise be caused by
inappropriate waste handling of these
products.
For more information about collection
points and recycling of these products,
please contact your local municipal office,
your household waste disposal service or
the shop where you purchased the
product.
Penalties may be applicable for incorrect
disposal of this waste, in accordance with
national legislation.
(Business users)
If you wish to dispose of this product,
please visit our web page
http://www.jvc.eu to obtain information
about the take-back of the product.
[Other Countries outside the
European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the
European Union.
If you wish to dispose of these items,
please do so in accordance with applicable
national legislation or other rules in your
country for the treatment of old electrical
and electronic equipment and batteries.
8
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Battery Pack
Introduction
The supplied battery pack is a lithium-ion
battery. Before using the supplied battery
pack or an optional battery pack, be sure
to read the following cautions:
Terminals
To avoid hazards
... do not burn.
... do not short-circuit the
terminals. Keep it away
from metallic objects
when not in use.
When transporting, carry the battery in
a plastic bag.
... do not modify or disassemble.
... do not expose the battery to
temperatures exceeding 60°C (140°F),
as this may cause the battery to
overheat, explode or catch fire.
... use only specified chargers.
To prevent damage and prolong
service life
... do not subject to unnecessary shock.
... charge within the temperature range
of 10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F). Cooler
temperatures require longer charging
time, or in some cases stop charging
at all. Warmer temperatures prevent
complete charging, or in some cases
stop charging at all.
... store in a cool, dry place. Extended
exposure to high temperatures will
increase natural discharge and
shorten service life.
... keep a 30% battery level
if the
battery pack is not to be used for a
long period of time.
In addition, fully charge and then fully
discharge the battery pack every 6
months, then continue to store it at a
30% battery level
.
... remove from charger or powered unit
when not in use, as some machines
use current even when switched off.
... do not drop or subject to strong
impact.
9
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Contents
Introduction
Introduction
Safety Precautions ............................................ 4
Contents .......................................................... 10
Main Features ................................................. 12
Precautions for Proper Use ............................. 14
Operation Modes ............................................. 18
Names of Parts ................................................ 20
Side Control Panel ....................................... 22
SD Slot ......................................................... 23
Rear Terminal .............................................. 23
LCD Monitor ................................................ 24
Lens Section ................................................ 25
Basic System Diagram .................................... 26
Preparations
Settings and Adjustments Before Use ............. 27
Adjusting the Grip Belt ................................. 27
Attaching an External Microphone ............... 27
Attaching the Tripod ..................................... 27
Attaching the Large Eyecup ......................... 27
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover ................. 28
Attaching/Detaching the Hood ..................... 28
Power Supply .................................................. 28
Using a Battery Pack .................................... 28
Using AC Power (DC IN Power) ................... 30
Power Status Display ...................................... 30
Turning On/Off the Power ................................ 31
Initial Settings .................................................. 32
Displays on the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder .. 34
Display Screen ............................................. 34
Status Screen .............................................. 35
USB Mode Screen ....................................... 35
Remote Edit Mode Screen ........................... 35
Warning Display ........................................... 35
Adjusting the LCD Monitor and Viewfinder ...... 36
Adjusting the LCD Monitor ........................... 36
Adjusting the Viewfinder .............................. 37
Assigning Functions to User Buttons ............... 38
Tally Lamp ....................................................... 38
SD Card ........................................................... 39
Usable Cards ............................................... 39
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards ................ 41
Restoring the SD Card ................................. 42
Clips Recorded to SD Cards ........................ 43
Shooting
Basic Shooting Procedures ............................. 44
Selecting System Definition, File Format and Video
Format ............................................................. 45
Zoom Operation .............................................. 47
Focus Operation .............................................. 48
Adjusting the Focusing by Face Detection ...... 50
10
Adjusting the Brightness .................................. 51
Adjusting the Iris .............................................. 52
Setting the Gain ............................................... 53
Setting the Electronic Shutter .......................... 54
Setting the ND Filter ........................................ 56
Adjusting the White Balance ............................ 56
Adjusting the Camera Image ........................... 60
Using the Image Stabilizer ............................... 60
Audio Recording .............................................. 61
Monitoring Audio Sound During Recording Using a
Headphone ...................................................... 63
Time Code and User’s Bit ................................ 64
Setting Time Code Generator .......................... 65
Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera
......................................................................... 68
Setting Zebra Pattern ...................................... 69
Setting Spot Meter ........................................... 70
Acquiring Positioning Information by GPS ....... 72
Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip
Review) ........................................................... 72
Recording Simultaneously at Two Different
Definitions ....................................................... 73
Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter Trig) ....... 74
Dual Rec .......................................................... 74
Backup Rec ..................................................... 76
Special Recording ........................................... 78
Pre Rec ........................................................ 78
Clip Continuous Rec .................................... 78
Frame Rec ................................................... 80
Interval Rec .................................................. 81
Variable Frame Rec ..................................... 82
Playback
Playing Recorded Clips ................................... 83
Thumbnail Screen ........................................ 83
Actions ......................................................... 85
Playing back ................................................ 86
Deleting Clips .................................................. 87
Appending/Deleting OK Mark .......................... 88
Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips ................................................................ 89
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly ............... 89
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively ........ 90
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Basic Operations in Menu Screen ................... 91
Display and Description of the Menu Screen
..................................................................... 92
Text Input with Software Keyboard .............. 93
Menu Screen Hierarchical Chart ..................... 94
Camera Function Menu ................................... 95
User Switch Set Item .................................... 97
Camera Process Menu .................................... 98
Detail/Adjust Item ....................................... 101
White Balance Item .................................... 102
TC/UB Menu ................................................. 102
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Clip Metadata ............................................ 148
View Remote Feature .................................... 150
Operating Procedure ................................. 150
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom ............. 151
Configuring Settings via a Browser ................ 152
Changing View Remote Function Settings . 153
Changing Connection Setup ...................... 154
Changing Metadata Server Settings .......... 155
Changing Clip Server Settings ................... 155
Managing the Network Connection Settings File
....................................................................... 156
Saving the Connection Settings File .......... 156
Reading the Connection Settings File ........ 157
Deleting Connection Settings .................... 158
Display/Status Screen
Others
Display Screen in Camera Mode ................... 121
Display Screen in Media Mode ...................... 126
Status Screen ................................................ 128
Error Messages and Actions ......................... 159
List of FTP Transfer Errors ......................... 161
Tally Lamp ................................................. 162
Warning Tone ............................................ 162
Troubleshooting ............................................ 163
Specifications ................................................ 165
Index ............................................................. 168
Camera Features
Marker and Safety Zone Displays (Camera Mode
Only) .............................................................. 129
Smoothening the Skin Color (Skin Detail
Function) ....................................................... 129
Color Bar Output ........................................... 129
Adjusting Color Matrix ................................... 130
Configuring Setup Files ................................. 131
Saving Setup Files ..................................... 131
Loading a Setup File .................................. 132
Deleting Setup Files ................................... 133
Connecting External Devices
Managing/Editing Clips on a PC .................... 134
Connecting External Monitor ......................... 135
Connecting the Headphone ........................... 137
Connecting Wired Remote Control ................ 137
Connecting to the Network
Functions of Network Connection .................. 138
Preparing Network Connection ...................... 138
Operating Environment .............................. 138
Camera Setup for Network Connection ..... 139
Connecting via Wireless LAN .................... 139
Connecting via Wired LAN ......................... 141
Connecting via 3G Adapter ........................ 141
Importing Metadata ....................................... 142
Preparing Metadata ................................... 142
Configuring the Server for Downloading .... 142
Importing Metadata .................................... 143
Uploading a Recorded Video Clip ................. 144
Configuring the FTP Server for Uploading . 144
Uploading Video Clip ................................. 144
Connecting via a Browser .............................. 146
Editing Metadata ........................................... 147
Planning Metadata ..................................... 147
11
Introduction
LCD/VF Menu ................................................ 103
Shooting Assist Item .................................. 104
Marker Settings Item .................................. 105
Display Settings Item ................................. 105
A/V Set Menu ................................................ 107
Video Set Item ........................................... 107
Audio Set Item ........................................... 107
System Menu ................................................ 110
Record Set Item ......................................... 111
Settings Item .............................................. 115
Adding/Editing Frequently Used Menu Items
(Favorites Menu) ........................................... 117
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu ...... 117
Editing Favorites Menu .............................. 118
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Main Features
F11 Sensitivity, 1/3­inch Full HD 3CMOS
Sensors
Introduction
This camera recorder is equipped with three 1/3­
inch 2.07M pixels full HD CMOS sensors.
It delivers high image quality, high color resolution
through processing of individual R, G, B color
signals. 12­bit signal processing and the new 2D
DNR removes dark current and optical shot noise
without losing S/N and high resolution, thereby
achieving high F11 sensitivity.
New Fujinon 23x Zoom Lens
It ensures high magnification of 29 mm at wide
ends, and provides high sensitivity across all
regions with F1.6­3.0.
The zoom ring with zoom ring pin enables zooming
from the wide end to the tele end in 90 degrees.
Focus and iris control are also possible using
separate rings.
Small, Lightweight, Stylish, and
Ergonomic Design
The camera recorder is only 2.5 kJ in operation
mode.
It is light and easy to use. Its ergonomic design
takes into consideration portability and operability
and is easy on the hand during shooting.
JVC’s Proprietary FALCONBRID High­
Quality Imaging Engine
The FALCONBRID high­quality imaging engine
omits unnecessary processing through
incorporating camera processing and image
compression on a single chip. Images from
imaging devices are compressed and processed
without any loss thereby achieving high­quality
images.
MPEG2 and H.264 Codec
FALCONBRID allows users to select MPEG­2 and
AVCHD, the most commonly used codec for
professional video, as the recording format.
12
QuickTime (MPEG­2 HD/H.264 HD/
H.264 SD)/MP4 (MPEG­2 HD)/AVCHD
File Formats
Inheriting the concept of ProHD memory camera
recorders, this camera recorder can support
various file formats, such as AVCHD and
QuickTime (H.264 SD) files, in addition to
QuickTime (MPEG­2 HD/H.264 HD) files that can
be directly edited on Apple Final Cut Pro and MP4
files that are most suitable for XDCAM EX
Nonlinear Editing Workflow.
Two SDHC/SDXC Card Slots for Dual,
Backup and Series Recording
The most common SDHC/SDXC card recording
system is used as the memory card.
This ensures reliability and operation at low running
cost.
Various user friendly recording systems are also
available. These include dual recording of the
same file to two cards, and using REC/STBY to
break up video clips in one card while performing
backup recording to the other card.
Diverse Simultaneous Recording
Combinations (HD and SD, HD and
Proxy Video, etc.)
This camera recorder comes with a convenient
proxy video (480x270 30p/25p/24p, 1.2 Mbps,
MOV) recording function for distribution over the
network.
With the Dual Rec feature further enhanced, you
can now record videos in the HD quality on one
SDHC/SDXC card, while at the same time record
to the other card in the SD or proxy video quality.
Variable Frame Rec
Enables beautiful slow motion and quick motion
image recording such as overcrank and
undercrank.
SDI/HDMI Simultaneous Output
Equipped with both [HD/SD SDI] and [HDMI]
terminals as digital output.
Non­compressed full HD video signals and audio
signals can be output to the [HD/SD SDI] and
[HDMI] terminals at the same time.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Auto Focus/Optical Image Stabilizer
Professional Switch Layout and Various
Video Parameter Settings
Switches for Gain and White Balance are available
on the side panel to enable quick switchings
according to the shooting scene.
Image parameters such as gamma and color
matrixes are also available in the menu for
adjusting preferred tones.
This camera recorder is equipped with a GPS
function. Position information obtained from the
GPS satellite can be recorded as metadata during
shooting.
Diverse Wireless Communications
Functions
This camera recorder supports various operations
via a mobile device, such as remote control,
viewing, metadata transmission, and transfer of
proxy files as an FTP client.
Equipped with a USB host function, you can upload
files recorded in this camera recorder via the
network by connecting it to the optional wireless
LAN adapter or other network devices.
4­position ND Filter
This camera recorder incorporates three types of
ND filters.
Adjust the amount of light according to the
brightness during shooting by switching the 4­
position ND filter (OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64).
Application Software Provided
The [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] application
software is provided for you to copy recorded clips
to Windows or Macintosh computers and for
checking the video images. (For MP4 file format)
The disc provided with this camera recorder
comes with [JVC ProHD Clip Manager] and other
application software as well as their user guides.
* For details, refer to the user guides for each
application software.
0.45­inch 1.22M Pixel Color Viewfinder,
3.5­inch 920K Pixel LCD Display
(Equipped with Focus Assist Function)
Built­in Stereo Microphone, 2­channel
XLR Audio Input (Microphone/Line
Switch, Phantom Power Supply) and
Mini Jack Input Terminal for Wireless
Microphone Receiver
Pre Rec Function (Up to 15 Seconds)
and Interval Rec Function
Supports Wired Remote Control
35 Mbps High­quality Recording Mode
This camera recorder is equipped with a 35 Mbps
mode for the MPEG­2 (MOV, MP4, MXF) and H.
264 (MOV) file formats to support recording in high
image quality.
13
Introduction
The camera recorder is equipped with a face
detection auto focus function that covers the entire
screen.
It can switch to manual focus as well.
A built­in optical image stabilizer feature is also
available.
Built­in GPS
ISSUED
2012/12/21
How to use this manual
Symbols used
Introduction
Caution : Describes precautions concerning the
operation of this product.
Memo : Describes reference information, such
as functions and usage restrictions of
this product.
'
: Indicates the reference page numbers
and reference items.
Content of this manual
Illustrated designs, specifications and other
14
contents of this manual are subject to change
for improvement without prior notice.
AVCHD and the AVCHD logo are trademarks
of Panasonic Corporation and Sony
Corporation.
XDCAM EX is a trademark of Sony
Corporation.
SDXC and SDHC logos are trademarks of
SD­3C, LLC.
HDMI (High­Definition Multimedia Interface)
and 6 are trademarks of HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
QuickTime, Final Cut Pro, iPhone, iPad, iPod
touch, iOS, Mac OS and Safari are trademarks
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Android and Google Chrome are trademarks
and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso
Wave Incorporated.
Dolby and the double­D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows
Vista, Windows 7 and Internet Explorer are
either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Mozilla and Firefox are either trademarks or
registered trademarks of Mozilla Foundation in
the United States and/or other countries.
Intel Core 2 Duo is a trademark or registered
trademark of Intel Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other
countries.
Other product and company names included
in this instruction manual are trademarks and/
or registered trademarks of their respective
companies. Marks such as ™ and ® have
been omitted in this manual.
Precautions for Proper
Use
Storage and Usage Locations
o Allowable ambient temperature and humidity
Be sure to use this unit within the allowable
temperature range of 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104°F)
and a relative humidity of 30 % to 80 %. Using this
unit at a temperature or humidity outside the
allowable ranges could result not only in
malfunction but also serious impact on the CMOS
elements as small white spots may be generated.
Please exercise care during use.
o Strong electromagnetic waves or magnetism
Noise may appear in the picture or audio and/or the
colors may be incorrect if this unit is used near a
radio or television transmitting antenna, in places
where strong magnetic fields are generated by
transformers, motors, etc., or near devices emitting
radio waves, such as transceivers or cellular
phones.
o Use of wireless microphone near this unit
When a wireless microphone or wireless
microphone tuner is used near this unit during
recording, the tuner could pick up noise.
o Avoid using or placing this unit in the following
places.
Places subject to extreme heat or cold
Places with excessive dirt or dust
Places with high humidity or moisture
Places subject to smoke or vapor such as near
a cooking stove
Places subject to strong vibrations or unstable
surfaces
In a parked car under direct sunlight or near a
heater for long hours
o Do not place this unit at places that are subject
to radiation or X­rays, or where corrosive gases
occur.
o Protect this unit from being splashed with water.
(Especially when shooting in the rain)
o Protect this unit from getting wet when shooting
on a beach. In addition, salt and sand may adhere
to the body. Be sure to clean the unit after use.
o Protect this unit against penetration of dust when
using it in a place subject to sandy dust.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Transportation
Do not drop or hit this unit against a hard object
when transporting.
Power Saving
Maintenance
o Turn off the power before performing any
maintenance.
o Wipe the external cabinet of the unit with a soft
cloth. Do not wipe the body with benzene or thinner.
Doing so may cause the surface to melt or turn
cloudy. When it is extremely dirty, soak the cloth in
a solution of neutral detergent, wipe the body with
it, and then use a clean cloth to remove the
detergent.
Rechargeable Battery
o Be sure to use only the specified batteries.
We do not guarantee the safety and performance
of this device if an unspecified battery is used.
o The battery is not charged when purchased.
o When using the battery in a low temperature
environment (10°C/50 °F or below), the operating
time may be shortened, or it may not function
properly. When using the device outdoors in the
winter weather, warm the battery, such as by
placing it in the pocket, before attaching it.
o Do not expose the battery to excessive heat,
such as direct sunlight or fire.
o If the battery is not to be used for a long time
Use up the charge completely and detach it from
the camera to prevent deterioration. (Wait for the
battery to run out by itself such as through
continuous shooting or playback.)
Charge the battery once every half a year, and
store it again after using up the charge.
o Store the removed battery in a dry place between
15 °C and 25 °C (59 °F and 77 °F).
o ATTENTION:
The product you have purchased
is powered by a rechargeable
battery that is recyclable.
Please call 1­800­8­BATTERY for
information on how to recycle this
battery.
Under normal environment, dust will accumulate
on the camera recorder when it is used over a long
period. Dust may enter the camera recorder
especially if it is used outdoors. This may affect the
image and sound quality of the camera recorder.
Check and replace the fan after every 9000 hours
(suggested guideline).
You can check the usage time of the fan in
[System]-[System Information]-[Fan Hour].
(' P111 [ Fan Hour ] )
If the fan is used for more than 9000 hours without
replacement, “FAN MAINTENANCE REQUIRED”
will be displayed every time you turn on the power.
SDHC/SDXC Cards
o SDHC/SDXC card is referred to as “SD card” in
this manual.
o This camera recorder saves the recorded
images and audio sound on the SD card (sold
separately) in the card slot.
o Use an SD card (4 GB to 128 GB) with Class 6
or higher performance, formatted using this
camera recorder.
o Depending on the recording format, SD card with
Class 4 or higher performance can also be used.
(' P45 [Selecting System Definition, File
Format and Video Format] )
* Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
o If the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded. In
addition, the remaining space on the card may not
increase even when files are deleted using a PC.
Handling of SD Cards
o The status indicator lights up in red when data
on the SD card is being accessed.
Do not remove the SD card during data access
(such as recording, playback, or formatting). Do not
turn off the power or remove the battery and AC
adapter during access either.
o Do not use or store the SD card in a place that is
subject to static electricity or electrical noise.
o Do not place the SD card near locations that are
exposed to strong magnetic fields or radio waves.
o Inserting the SD card incorrectly may result in
damage of this unit or the SD card.
15
Introduction
When this unit is not in use, be sure to set the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “OFF(CHG)” in
order to reduce power consumption.
Regular Inspection (Maintenance)
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Introduction
o We are not liable for any accidental loss of data
stored on the SD card. Please back up any
important data.
o Make use of the SD card within the prescribed
conditions of use.
Do not use it at the following locations.
Places that are subject to direct sunlight, high
humidity or corrosion, places near thermal
equipment, sandy or dusty places, or in a car under
the sun with the doors and windows closed.
o Do not bend or drop the SD card, or subject it to
strong impact or vibration.
o Do not splash the SD card with water.
o Do not dismantle or modify the SD card.
o Do not touch the terminals with your hands or
with a metal object.
o Do not allow dust, dirt, water, or foreign objects
to adhere to the terminals.
o Do not remove the labels or stick other labels or
stickers on the SD cards.
o Do not use pencils or ballpoint pens to write on
the SD cards. Always use oil­based pens.
o If you format (initialize) the SD card, all data
recorded on the card, including video data and
setup files, will be deleted.
o You are recommended to use cards that are
formatted (initialized) on this camera recorder.
The SD card may be damaged if the camera
recorder is not operated correctly. Formatting
(Initializing) the SD card may allow it to operate
correctly.
SD cards that have been formatted (initialized)
on other cameras, computers or peripheral
equipment may not operate correctly. In this
case, format (initialize) the SD card on this
camera recorder.
o If you want to wipe out all information by
completely erasing the data, we recommend either
using commercially available software that is
specially designed for that purpose, or by
physically destroying the SD card with a hammer,
etc. When formatting or erasing data using the
camera recorder, only the file administration
information is changed. The data is not completely
erased from the SD card.
o Some commercially available SD cards may be
harder to be removed from this unit. Remove them
by hooking onto the groove on the cards.
It will be easier to remove the cards after several
times.
Do not stick any stickers on the cards.
Groove
o The SD card may pop out when it is being
removed. Be careful not to lose the card.
16
Others
o Do not insert objects other than the memory card
into the card slot.
o Do not block the vent on the unit.
Blocking of the vent causes internal heating and
may lead to burns and fires.
o Do not turn off the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]
switch or remove the power cable during recording
or playback.
o The camera recorder may not show stable
pictures for a few seconds immediately after the
power is turned on, but this is not a malfunction.
o When the video signal output terminals are not
in use, put on the covers to prevent damage to the
terminals.
o Do not drop this unit or subject it to strong impact
or vibration as it is a precision equipment.
o Optical performance of lens
Due to the optical performance of the lens, color
divergence phenomena (magnification chromatic
aberration) may occur at the periphery of the
image. This is not a camera malfunction.
o Noise may appear in the image when switching
modes.
o If placed on its side, heat release efficiency will
deteriorate.
o Use the supplied AC adapter as the power
supply. Do not use the supplied AC adapter on
other devices.
o When the connectors that come with connector
covers are not in use, put on the covers to prevent
damage to the connectors.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
About GPS
LCD Monitor and Viewfinder
o The LCD monitor and viewfinder screen are
manufactured using high­precision technology.
Black spots may appear on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen, or red, blue, and/or white spots
may not disappear. However, this is not a
malfunction and these spots are not recorded on
the SD card.
o If you use this unit continuously for a long period
of time, the characters displayed in the viewfinder
may temporarily remain on the screen. This is not
recorded on the SD card. They will not appear after
you turn the power off and then on again.
o If you use this unit in a cold place, the images
may appear to lag on the screen, but this is not a
malfunction. Retained images are not recorded on
the SD card.
o Do not press against the surface with force or
subject it to strong impact. Doing so may damage
or break the screens.
o Noise may appear in the viewfinder when
switching between the live video and playback
images.
o Due to the characteristic of the viewfinder display
device, colors may appear on the images when you
blink your eyes. It does not affect the recorded
images, SDI output, or HDMI output.
Any recordings made on this camera recorder that
are played back for profit or public preview may
infringe on the rights of the owner of the recordings.
Do not use the recordings for purpose other than
personal enjoyment without prior consent from the
owner.
License Notices
o MPEGLA AVC
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC
PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER
USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE
REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD
(“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO
THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER
ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR
WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER
LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO
LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED
FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM
MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE
HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM
o MPEGLA MPEG­2 Patent
ANY USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER
OTHER THAN PERSONAL USE THAT
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG­2 STANDARD FOR
ENCODING VIDEO INFORMATION FOR
PACKAGED MEDIA IS EXPRESSLY
PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER
APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG­2
PATENT PORTFOLIO, WHICH LICENSE IS
AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA, LLC, 6312 S.
Fiddlers Green circle, Suite 400E, Greenwood
Village, Colorado 80111 U.S.A.
Encryption in Network Connection
Wireless LAN connections make use of an
encryption function.
This encryption is designed for commercially­sold
equipment, and it cannot be altered.
17
Introduction
o The GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites
are managed by the Department of State of the
U.S., and its precision may be altered intentionally.
o Perform positioning at an unobstructed location
with a clear view that is not indoors or blocked by
trees.
o The time needed for obtaining the position
information may be longer and variation may also
be larger depending on the surrounding
environment and time of day.
o This camera recorder uses the WGS 84 World
Geodetic System.
o Signal from GPS satellites may be interrupted by
communication signal from electronic devices
such as mobile phones.
Copyright
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Operation Modes
This camera recorder has four operation modes ­ Camera mode, Media mode, USB mode and Remote
Edit mode.
Introduction
Camera
Mode
Media Mode
[MODE] Button
Press and hold
[MODE] button
Thumbnail
Display
Playback
Button
Stop
Button
USB Connection (When the confirmation
to change to USB mode appears and
[Change] is selected)
Connection disabled on PC
Playback
(Playback/Pause/
Frame-by-Frame/
Fast Forward/Rewind/
Clip Jump)
When [Change] is selected on
the confirmation screen to
switch to the Remote Edit mode
during access via a browser
USB Mode
(USB Mass Storage Class)
Remote Edit Mode
During a mode switch operation on the camera or after
ending the editing of clip metadata at the terminal
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
MODE
CANCEL
Playback Button
Stop Button
18
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Operation Mode
Camera Mode
Description
This is the camera shooting mode. The camera recorder starts up in Camera
mode when the power is turned on.
Camera images are output on the viewfinder and LCD monitor. When a
Memo : Playback of SD card is not possible in Camera mode. However, you can
check the most recently recorded video clip.
(' P72 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Media Mode
This mode allows you to play back or delete clips recorded on the SD card.
When a playable SD card is inserted, the thumbnail or playback screen is
displayed on the viewfinder and LCD monitor.
Press the [MODE] selection button to enter Media mode when you are not
USB Mode
shooting in Camera mode. Once the camera recorder is in Media mode,
thumbnails of the selected media slot are displayed.
This mode allows you to connect to a PC and transfer the files on an SD card
to the PC.
When the camera recorder is connected to a USB cable, the message
“Change to USB Mode?” appears.
Select [Change] and press the Set button to switch to USB mode.
(' P134 [Managing/Editing Clips on a PC] )
In USB mode, the camera recorder is recognized by the connected PC as a
peripheral drive. (USB mass storage class only)
Disable the connection on the PC and remove the USB cable from the camera
recorder to switch to Camera mode.
(' P134 [Managing/Editing Clips on a PC] )
Memo : When a USB cable is connected during recording, the message appears after
recording stops.
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed
automatically, such as when playback stops.
Files on the PC cannot be written to the SD card.
Remote Edit Mode
This is a mode for accessing the page for editing the metadata that is recorded
in a clip via a browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or
PC.
When you access via a browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC, a “Change to Remote Edit Mode?” message will appear on
the display screen of the camera recorder.
Select [Change], and press the Set button to switch to the Remote Edit mode
for editing the clip’s metadata.
(' P148 [ Clip Metadata ] )
Memo : If you access via a browser on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
or PC while recording is in progress, the message appears after recording
stops.
If playback is in progress, the message appears once the files are closed
automatically, such as when playback stops.
19
Introduction
recordable SD card is inserted, the camera recorder enters the recording
standby mode. “STBY” appears on the operation mode display area of the
LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Press the [REC] trigger button to start recording.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Names of Parts
A BC D
E
G
F
Introduction
FIX VA
F
R OF
3
LOLUX/
OIS/2
FOCUS
K
ASSIST/1
TIME
TER
ND FIL
FOCU
R
POWE
CODE
UMB
MENU/TH
S
AE
ON
L
LEVE
OFF
(CHG)
AUTO
MODE
MANU
SLOT
A/B
1/64
Bottom
∞
1/16
AUTO
PUSH
1/4
OFF
TER
SHUT
EL
CANC T BAL
WH
AUTO
FULL
GAIN
K/4
AE LOC
ZEBRA/
RKE
5 MA
R/6
H
ON
IRIS
PUSH
AUTO
L
M
H
B
A SET
PRE
OFF
ZOOM
REC
SERVO MANUAL
J
A Built­in Microphone
(' P61 [Audio Recording] )
B Tally Lamp
(' P38 [Tally Lamp] )
(' P162 [Tally Lamp] )
C Microphone Holder
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
D Microphone Holder Lock Knob
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
E Shoe
For mounting separately sold lights and
accessories.
F [FIX/VAR/OFF] Zoom Speed Switch
(' P47 [Zoom Operation] )
For switching the zoom speed of the zoom lever
a at the handle.
G Accessory Mounting Screw Hole
H Tripod Mounting Hole
(' P27 [Attaching the Tripod] )
I [REC] Record Trigger Button
Starts/stops recording.
Memo : This button is interlocked with the [REC] button
R on the grip and the [REC/HOLD] button Z at
the top of the handle.
20
I
J [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] Zoom Operation
Servo/Manual Switch
Set to “SERVO” when using the zoom lever at
the grip j or the zoom lever at the handle a.
(' P47 [Zoom Operation] )
K Monitor Speaker
(' P86 [Audio Output during Playback] )
L Viewfinder
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
M Visibility Adjustment Lever
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
N Eyecup
Prevents external light from entering the
viewfinder screen and cameraman’s vision.
(' P27 [Attaching the Large Eyecup] )
O Battery
(' P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )
P [+] Headphone Jack (Φ3.5 mm)
(' P63 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
Q [AUX] AUX Input Terminal (Φ3.5 mm)
For connecting to receiver such as wireless
microphone.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
dc
b aZ
REC
T
W
HOLD
Introduction
Y
2
INPUT
1
INPUT
X
W
L
M
BATT.R
N
A
ELEAS
IN OUT
E
AUX
TC
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
V
U
DEV
ICE
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDM
I
REM
OTE
O
DC
HOST
PQ R S T
R [REC] Record Trigger Button
Starts/stops recording.
Memo : This button is interlocked with the [REC] button
I at the bottom of the lens and the [REC/
HOLD] button Z at the top of the handle.
S [C.REVIEW/7] Clip Review/User 7 Button
For checking the most recently captured
images.
(' P72 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
T Zoom Lever at the Grip
To operate zoom servo with the zoom lever at
the grip, set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL]
switch 0 to “SERVO”.
(' P47 [Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip] )
U [TC] TC Input/Output Terminal
(' P64 [Time Code and User’s Bit] )
V [IN/OUT] TC IN/OUT Selection Switch
(' P68 [Synchronizing Time Code on
Another Camera] )
W Hood Release Button
(' P28 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )
X External Microphone Cable Clamp
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
Y [INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Terminal 1, 2
(XLR 3­pin x 2)
(' P27 [Attaching an External Microphone] )
Z [REC/HOLD] Record Trigger Button/Lock
Switch
Starts/stops recording.
Set the switch to [HOLD] to lock the [REC]
Trigger button.
Memo : This button is interlocked with the [REC] button
R on the grip and the [REC] button I at the
bottom of the lens.
The [REC] button R on the grip and the [REC]
button I at the bottom of the lens will not be
locked.
a Zoom lever at the Handle
(' P47 [Using the Zoom Lever at the
Handle] )
b Shoulder Belt Mount (x2)
For mounting a shoulder belt (sold separately).
Caution : Be sure to use a shoulder belt with the strength
to withstand the weight of this camera recorder.
If the shoulder belt is not properly attached, the
camera recorder may fall and cause injuries.
Check the instruction manual provided with the
shoulder belt before using.
c [POWER/CHG] Power/Charging Display Lamp
(' P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )
d [BATT. RELEASE] Battery Lock Release Button
(' P29 [Removing the Battery] )
21
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Side Control Panel
UTS R Q P
A
FOCUS ASSIST/1
OIS / 2
LOLUX / 3
TIME CODE
ND FILTER
FOCUS
AUTO
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
Introduction
POWER
1/64
MANU
B
1/4
OFF
O
ON
1/16
OFF
(CHG)
PUSH AUTO
MODE
C
N
CANCEL
WHT BAL
GAIN
SHUTTER
IRIS
D
E
FULL AUTO
AE LOCK/4
ZEBRA/5
MARKER/6
ON
PUSH AUTO
L
M
H
F G
B
A
PRESET
OFF
I J
H
K L M
A [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] Focus Switch
(' P48 [Focus Operation] )
B [ND FILTER] ND Filter Switch
(' P56 [Setting the ND Filter] )
C [PUSH AUTO] Focus Push Auto Button
(' P49 [One Push Auto Focus] )
D [IRIS] Iris Auto/Manual Selection Button
(' P52 [Adjusting the Iris] )
E [PUSH AUTO] Iris Push Auto Button
(' P52 [Adjusting the Iris] )
F [GAIN] Gain Auto/Manual Selection Button / [L/
M /H] Sensitivity Selection Switch
(' P53 [Setting the Gain] )
G [WHT BAL] White Balance Auto/Manual
Selection Button / [B/A/PRESET] Selection
Switch
(' P56 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
H [SHUTTER] Shutter Speed Auto/Manual
Selection Button
(' P54 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
I [,] One Push Auto White Balance Button
J [FULL AUTO ON/OFF] Full Auto Switch
(' P51 [Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically] )
(' P59 [Automatic White Balance Mode
(FAW: Fulltime Auto White balance)] )
K [AE LOCK/4] AE Lock/User 4 Button
When Gain, Iris, and Shutter are set to “AUTO”,
their respective values and the value of white
balance are locked when the [AE LOCK/4] button
is pressed.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
22
L [ZEBRA/5] Zebra/User 5 Button
(' P69 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
M [MARKER/6] Marker/User 6 Button
This button toggles ON/OFF the marker, safety
zone, and center mark displays.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
N [MODE] Camera/Media Mode Selection Button
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
O [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] Lock Power ON/OFF
Switch
Turns ON/OFF the power.
Hold down the lock button (blue) in the center
to toggle ON/OFF.
When the power is turning OFF, “P.OFF”
appears on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Wait for 5 seconds or more to turn on the
power again.
P Cross­Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button (R)
The function changes according to the
operation status of the camera recorder.
o During menu operation (all modes)
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Center Set button (R) : Confirms menu items
and setting values
Cross­shaped button : Selects menu items
(JK)
and setting values
o During Camera mode
Shutter operation:
Center Set button (R) : Shutter ON/OFF
Cross­shaped button : Switches shutter
(JK)
speed when shutter
is ON
AE level operation
: Cross­shaped button
(HI)
Memo : When [Camera Function]-[AE LEVEL SW] is
set to “AE LEVEL/VFR”, the cross­shaped
button (HI) is used to set the number of frames
during Variable Frame Rec.
(' P82 [Variable Frame Rec] )
(' P96 [ AE LEVEL SW ] )
Q [LOLUX/3] Low­light Shooting/User 3 Button
For switching the low­light shooting mode ON
or OFF.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
SD Slot
(' P39 [SD Card] )
A
D
Rear Terminal
A
B
C
D
DEVICE
BATT.RELEASE
A
POWER
/CHG
AV
DEVICE
OPEN
AV
HD/SD
SDI
HOST
CLOSE
HDMI
REMOTE
B
REMOTE
DC
HOST
DC
E
F
G
A [DEVICE] USB Mini Terminal
(' P134 [Managing/Editing Clips on a PC] )
B [AV] AV Output Terminal
(' P135 [Connecting External Monitor] )
C [HD/SD SDI] SDI Output Terminal (BNC)
(' P135 [Connecting External Monitor] )
D [HDMI] HDMI Output Terminal
(' P135 [Connecting External Monitor] )
E [HOST] USB Host Terminal
For connecting an USB adapter according to
the intended purpose when you are connecting
the unit to a network.
(' P139 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
F [REMOTE] Remote Terminal
(' P137 [Connecting Wired Remote Control] )
G [DC] DC Input Terminal
Input terminal for DC 12 V power supply. For
connnecting with the supplied AC adapter.
(' P30 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
C
B
A SD Card Cover
B [SLOT A/B] Card Slot Selection Button
For switching the active card slot during
shooting and playback.
C Card Slot B Status Indicator
D Card Slot A Status Indicator
23
Introduction
R [OIS/2] Optical Image Stabilizer/User 2 Button
For switching the image stabilizer feature mode
ON or OFF.
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
S [FOCUS ASSIST/1] Focus Assist/User 1 Button
For switching the focus assist function ON or
OFF.
(' P49 [Focus Assist Function] )
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
T [MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button
Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Displays the menu screen when the button
is pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
U [CANCEL] Cancel Button
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
LCD Monitor
A
Introduction
B
MENU/THUMB
N ML K
CH1
C
D
CH2
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT1
INPUT2
LINE
MIC
MIC
+48V
LCD BRIGHT
J
MONITOR
CH1
BOTH
CH2
PEAKING
DISPLAY
STATUS
AUTO
MANUAL
CANCEL
CH1
CH2
E FG H I
A LCD Monitor
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
B [MENU/THUMB] Menu/Thumbnail Button
Displays the menu screen during Camera
mode.
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Displays the menu screen when the button
is pressed during thumbnail display in the
Media mode.
Stops playback and displays the thumbnail
screen when the button is pressed during
playback screen display in the Media mode.
C LCD Cross­Shaped Button (JKHI)/Set Button
(R)
The function changes according to the
operation status of the camera recorder.
During menu operation (all modes)
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Center Set button (R) : Confirms menu
items and setting
values
Cross­shaped button : Selects menu
(JK)
items and setting
values
During Camera mode
You can also use it as a user button by assigning
a specific feature in the menu setting to this
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User
Buttons] )
D [CANCEL] Cancel Button
Cancels various settings and stops playback.
E [CH1/CH2] CH1/CH2 Recording Level
Adjustment Knob
(' P61 [Audio Recording] )
24
F [LCD BRIGHT +/­] LCD Display Brightness
Adjustment Button
(' P36 [Adjusting the Brightness] )
G [PEAKING +/­] LCD/VF Contour Adjustment
Button
(' P37 [Adjusting the Contour (LCD)] )
(' P37 [Adjusting the Contour (Viewfinder)] )
H [DISPLAY] Display Button
Press the [DISPLAY] button to switch to the
display screen during normal screen display
(when the menu screen is not displayed).
(' P34 [Display Screen] )
Switches between [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] when the [DISPLAY]
button is pressed while the menu screen is
displayed.
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
I [STATUS] Status Screen Display Button
Press the [STATUS] button to display the status
screen on the viewfinder and LCD monitor
during normal screen display (when the menu
screen is not displayed).
(' P35 [Status Screen] )
J [MONITOR]/[+/­] Audio Monitor Selection
Switch/Volume Adjustment Button
Switches the audio monitor and adjusts the
monitor speaker/headphone.
(' P63 [Monitoring Audio Sound During
Recording Using a Headphone] )
K [INPUT1/INPUT2] Audio Input Signal Selection
Switch
(' P61 [Audio Recording] )
L [CH2] CH2 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
Select the audio input terminal to record to CH2.
(' P61 [Audio Recording] )
M [CH1] CH1 Audio Input Signal Selection Switch
(' P61 [Audio Recording] )
N [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] CH1/CH2 Audio
Recording Mode Switch
(' P62 [Adjusting Audio Recording Level] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Lens Section
Introduction
A
B
C
D
E
A Filter Built­In Screw
Transparent or UV filter for lens protection,
or filters for various effects can be installed.
Installable filter types: Φ72mmP0.75
Memo : Remove the lens hood when installing the filter.
(' P28 [Attaching/Detaching the Hood] )
B Lens Cover Open/Close Switch
(' P28 [Opening/Closing the Lens Cover] )
C Focus Ring
(' P48 [Focus Operation] )
D Zoom Ring
(' P47 [Zoom Operation] )
To operate zoom with this ring, set the [ZOOM
SERVO/MANUAL] switch to “MANUAL”.
E Iris Ring
(' P52 [Adjusting the Iris] )
To operate auto iris, press the [IRIS] button on
the side control panel.
( mark appears on the screen)
25
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Basic System Diagram
GY-HM650U/GY-HM650E
Shoulder Belt
Introduction
Monitor
Earphone
Wireless Microphone Receiver
Microphone
[AUX]
[TC]
[HOST]
Network Adapter
Monitor
SDI Cable
BNC
GY-HM650U/GY-HM650E
HDMI Cable
AV Cable
RCA Pin
Battery
AC Adapter
Remote Control Unit
Carrying Case
USB Cable
Tripod
SDHC/SDXC
Memory Card
26
SDHC/SDXC
Card Reader
Non-linear Editing
System
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Settings and Adjustments
Before Use
Adjusting the Grip Belt
Open the pad and adjust the position of the grip belt
accordingly.
Use the screw hole at the bottom of this camera
recorder.
(3/8×16UNC, 1/4×20UNC)
Use the screw hole that suits the tripod.
To prevent the camera recorder from falling off,
which may result in injuries or damages, read the
instruction manual of the tripod to be used and
make sure that it is securely attached.
Preparations
INPUT2
Attaching the Tripod
INPUT1
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
o Bottom
REMO
TE
DC
HOST
Caution : If the grip is loose, the camera recorder may fall
off resulting in injuries or malfunction.
Attaching an External Microphone
You can attach a separately sold microphone to the
microphone holder.
1, 3
2
4
5
Caution : Use the tripod on a stable surface.
To prevent the camera recorder from falling,
attach securely using the rotation prevention
hole.
Use screws with screw length 5 mm and below.
Attaching the Large Eyecup
Attach the large eyecup (supplied) to prevent
external light from entering the viewfinder
screen and cameraman’s vision.
Align and attach to the groove of the eyecup
mounted on the camera recorder.
The large eyecup can be attached in any
direction.
Large Eyecup (supplied)
1 Turn the knob on the microphone holder
anticlockwise to loosen and open the
microphone holder.
2 Place the microphone in the microphone
holder.
3 Turn the knob on the microphone holder
clockwise to secure the microphone.
4 Connect the microphone cable to the
[INPUT1] or [INPUT2] terminal.
5 Pin the microphone cable to the clamp.
6 Perform the settings for the microphone
correctly.
(' P61 [Audio Recording] )
Eyecup
Memo : Do not remove the eyecup that is premounted
on the camera recorder.
27
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Opening/Closing the Lens Cover
Detaching the Hood
Remove the hood when attaching a filter,
Use the lens cover open/close switch to open or
close the lens cover.
Before shooting, open the lens cover.
When this camera recorder is not in use, close the
lens cover to protect the lens.
teleconverter or wide converter to the front of the
lens.
While pressing the hood release button, turn the
hood in the anti­clockwise direction to remove it.
Preparations
Caution : Do not press against the lens cover with force.
Doing so may damage the lens or the cover.
Attaching/Detaching the Hood
Attaching the Hood
Align the markings on the camera recorder and
hood; turn the hood in the direction of the arrow until
it is locked.
Power Supply
To use this camera recorder, you can attach a
battery pack or connect an AC adapter to it.
(' P28 [Using a Battery Pack] )
(' P30 [Using AC Power (DC IN Power)] )
Caution : Set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to
“OFF(CHG)” before changing the power supply
that operates this camera recorder.
Using a Battery Pack
Charging the Battery
Charge the battery immediately after purchase or
when the battery power is running low.
* The battery is not charged when purchased.
2
4
POWER
/CHG
3
1
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
28
4
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Memo : Blinking of the [POWER/CHG] lamp during
charging indicates the charge level.
[POWER/CHG] Lamp
Orange blinking
(4 times per second)
Orange blinking
(3 times per second)
Orange blinking
(2 times per second)
Orange blinking
(1 time per second)
Light goes out
Charge Level
Less than 25%
Less than 50%
Less than 75%
Less than 100%
Fully charged
Removing the Battery
2
1
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.
2 While pressing and holding the [BATT.
RELEASE] button, push up and remove the
battery in the direction of the arrow.
Caution : Do not remove the battery when the [POWER
ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is “ON”.
Do not insert or remove the DC cable when the
battery is in use.
Leaving the camera recorder unused with the
battery inside will deplete the battery power
even if you set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]
switch to “OFF(CHG)”. Remove the battery if
you are not using the camera recorder.
Estimated Charging and Continuous
Operating Times
o Charging Time (supplied SSL­JVC50 battery
pack)
Approx. 4 h
Memo : Use up the charge completely before you
charge the battery. If the battery is not fully
discharged before charging, the battery
capacity may drop after repeated cycles.
If the battery capacity drops due to repetitive
shallow charging and discharging, it may be
recovered by using up the charge completely
and then fully charging the battery again.
If you charge the battery immediately after using
while the battery is still warm, it may not be fully
charged.
It is recommended that you charge the battery
in an environment between 10 °C and 35 °C
(50°F and 95 °F). The battery may not be fully
charged or the charging time may be prolonged
if charged under low temperatures (below 10 °C/
50 °F).
o Continuous Operating Time (supplied SSL­
JVC50 battery pack)
Approx. 1 hrs 50 mins
Memo : Actual operating times may differ depending on
the age of the battery, charging condition, and
operating environment.
Operating time is shortened in cold
environment.
The operating time may shorten when power
zoom is used, accessories are connected, or
when the LCD monitor is frequently used.
For purchase of spare batteries and battery
charger, consult your nearest JVC dealer.
Precautions for Batteries
Store the battery in a cool and dry place when
not in use. Do not expose the battery to high
temperatures (such as in a car under direct
sunlight). This will cause battery leakage and
shorten the battery life.
If the operating time shortens drastically even
after charging, the battery may be reaching the
end of its life. Replace the battery with a new
one.
29
Preparations
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.
2 Attach the supplied battery.
Slide it in until you hear a click.
3 Connect the supplied AC adapter to the
[DC] terminal.
Open the cover of the [DC] terminal and connect
as shown in the diagram.
4 Connect the AC adapter to a power outlet.
The [POWER/CHG] lamp blinks during
charging and will go out after charging is
complete.
Remove the AC adapter after charging is
complete.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Using AC Power (DC IN Power)
Use the supplied AC adapter to operate the camera
recorder with AC power.
Power Status Display
Viewfinder Screen and LCD Monitor
The power status is displayed on the display and
menu screens.
Preparations
2
POWER
ON
1
Display
)7.4V
)100min
430%
9RES
Description
Currently powered by a battery.
When the battery power runs out,
the battery mark appears hollow,
and “RES” (yellow) is displayed.
Currently powered by an AC
adapter.
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
1 Connect the DC cable of the AC adapter to
the [DC] terminal of the camera recorder.
Check that the power switch of the camera
recorder is set to “OFF(CHG)”.
Open the cover of the [DC] terminal and
connect as shown in the diagram.
2 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “ON”.
Power will be supplied to the camera recorder.
Caution : Do not insert or remove the DC cable during
recording.
Do not use power supply of high voltage
fluctuation, containing noise such as ripple, or
with insufficient capacity.
Charging the Built­In Battery
The date/time and time code data are stored
using the built­in rechargeable battery.
When power is connected to the camera
recorder, the built­in battery always gets
charged. When the power is disconnected, the
battery gradually discharges.
The battery will be totally discharged if left
unused for 3 months and the date/time and time
code data will be reset. When this happens, set
the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “ON” to
display the [Initial Setting] screen, then set the
date/time.
(' P32 [Initial Settings] )
30
Memo : You can set the display using
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]
-[Battery].
(' P106 [ Battery ] )
Memo : If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
Display Screen
(' P121 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
(' P126 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
282min
100min
50min
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Menu Screen
(' P92 [Display and Description of the Menu
Screen] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Warnings by Lamp and Warning Tone
Turning On/Off the Power
Turning On the Power
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “ON”.
The camera recorder starts up in Camera mode
and is ready for shooting.
Memo : The camera recorder always start up in Camera
mode when the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)]
switch is set to “ON”. Use the [MODE] button at
the side of the camera recorder to switch mode.
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Turning Off the Power
Sets the camera recorder to the recording standby
or stop mode.
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “OFF(CHG)”.
2 Remove the battery and the power to the
[DC] terminal (when not in use for a long
time).
Auto Power Off function
When [System]-[Auto Power Off] is set to “On”,
the power turns off automatically when the camera
recorder is not operated for 5 minutes or longer
while running on battery.
(' P110 [ Auto Power Off ] )
Memo : When both the battery and AC adapter are
connected, power from the AC adapter
connection will be used. As such, the [Auto
Power Off] function will not have any effect.
Caution : Do not set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to “OFF(CHG)” during recording. Check that the
operation mode display is “STBY” or “STOP”
before you turn off the power.
If you have mistakenly set the [POWER ON/
OFF(CHG)] switch to “OFF(CHG)” during
recording, wait for 5 seconds or more before you
turn on the power again.
When turning off the power, first set the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch of the camera
recorder to “OFF(CHG)”. Do not remove the
battery or turn off the AC power while the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is set to “ON”.
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
.
31
Preparations
Warning status is indicated by tally lamp and
warning tone.
The tally lamp blinks.
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [+] terminal.
Memo : If you continue to use the camera recorder while
the power warning is displayed, the camera
recorder will stop automatically when the battery
or supplied voltage from the AC adapter
becomes lower.
Caution : The remaining battery power and time are
displayed as they are from the battery
information. Accurate data may not be displayed
depending on the battery condition. Replace the
battery as soon as possible when the remaining
battery power and time are low.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Initial Settings
When the power is first turned on, the Initial Setting
screen for performing the initial settings in the
camera recorder appears.
Set the date/time of the built­in clock in the [Initial
Setting] screen.
All operations are disabled until initial settings are
complete.
2 Ensure that the lens cover is closed, and
press the Set button (R).
Self­diagnosis starts.
A progress bar appears, and “Complete
Diagnosis” appears when the diagnosis is
complete.
Preparations
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
CANCEL
Memo : It is recommended to use the AC adapter as the
power supply.
Be sure to close the lens cover.
Memo : It takes about 6 minutes to complete the
diagnosis. During the diagnosis, do not operate
or turn off the camera recorder.
1 Hold down the lock button (blue) at the
center of the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch
to set to “ON”.
The Initial Setting screen appears.
3 Press the Set button (R) after confirming
the exit screen.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears.
For GY­HM650U
For GY­HM650E
32
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Memo : The [Initial Setting] screen appears when the
power is turned on for the first time and when the
power is turned on after the built­in battery is fully
discharged.
The configured date/time data is saved in the
built­in rechargeable battery even if the power is
turned off.
You can change the display style of the date/time
on the menu.
Setting the Date Display (Date Style)
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )
The date display can be changed in [LCD/VF]-
[Display Settings]-[Date Style].
Setting the Time Display (Time Style)
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )
The time display can be changed in [LCD/VF]-
[Display Settings]-[Time Style].
Date/Time Display in Each Operation
Mode
During Camera mode:
Date/time of the built­in clock is displayed.
During Media mode:
Shooting date/time of the clip being played back is
displayed.
Changing the Time after Initial Setting
Setting the Date/Time
(' P111 [ Date/Time ] )
1 Select [System]-[Date/Time].
The [Date/Time] screen appears.
2 Set the date and time.
A Move the cursor with the cross­shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
B Change the values with the cross­shaped
button (JK).
3 Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
33
Preparations
4 Set the time zone and date/time.
A Move the cursor with the cross­shaped button
(HI) and select the setting item.
B Change the values with the cross­shaped
button (JK).
5 Press the Set button (R) after setting is
complete.
The clock is set to 0 seconds of the input date/
time.
Memo : The configured date/time data can be displayed
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder and be
recorded to the SD card.
The value of the year can be set in the range of
“2000” to “2099”.
Changing the Display Style
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Displays on the LCD
Monitor and Viewfinder
Preparations
You can display the camera status, media
information, zebra pattern, and various markers in
the video image on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen during shooting.
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Video Set]
-[Display On TV] is set to “On”, the display
screen and menu screen are also displayed in
the video image from the video signal output
terminal.
(' P107 [ Display On TV ] )
Display Screen (VF/LCD) in Media Mode
(' P126 [Display Screen in Media Mode] )
This is the screen display during clip playback in
Media Mode.
The display switches between three screen
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.
(Display 0 - 1 - 2 - 0)
1000/ 2000
Display 0 screen
Display Screen
1000/ 2000
00: 00: 00.00
1920x1080
60 i HQ
Display Screen in Camera Mode
Jan 24 , 2012
12 :34 : 56
The display switches between three screen
types with every press of the [DISPLAY] button.
(Display 0 - 1 - 2 - 0)
Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the
status screen.
4030 20
10
0
Display 1 screen
282min
1920x1080
60 i HQ
1000/2000
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
x5
x5
SELECT
INFO
4030 20
10
0
Display 0 screen
Display 2 screen
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24,2012
12 :34 :56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Display 1 screen
282min
100min
50min
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24,2012
12 :34 :56
1920x1080
60 i HQ
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
Display 2 screen
34
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Status Screen
This screen allows you to check the current
This screen displays the USB mode.
Remote Edit Mode Screen
This is a mode for accessing the page for editing
the metadata that is recorded in a clip via a browser
on devices such as a smartphone, tablet terminal,
or PC.
(' P148 [ Clip Metadata ] )
Warning Display
Warning display is displayed in the display
screen (Camera mode, Media mode).
If error occurs during status screen display, the
display will return to the display screen to display
the warning.
(' P159 [Error Messages and Actions] )
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Warning Display Area
35
Preparations
settings.
To display the status screen, press the
[STATUS] button in the normal screen.
The status display differs according to the
operation mode (two types).
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Press the [STATUS] button to switch to the
display screen.
Press the [MENU] button at each status screen
(other than the [Camera 1]/[Camera 2] screen)
to enter the setting screen.
Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to switch
screens as follows:
USB Mode Screen
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
and Viewfinder
You can monitor video images on this camera
recorder using the viewfinder, LCD monitor, or
both.
Adjusting the LCD Monitor
3
2
LCD BRIGHT
PEAKING
Tilt 90 degrees
downward
Normal LCD
Preparations
Inverted
LCD
DISPLAY
Tilt 180 degrees
upward
Displays on the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder Screen (VF)
When [LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] is set to “Off”
(' P103 [ LCD + VF ] )
LCD Monitor Status
LCD closed Normal LCD
Inverted LCD
LCD opened Normal LCD
Inverted LCD
LCD Display
OFF
ON
ON
ON
VF Display
ON
OFF *
OFF *
OFF *
* Turns on when [LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] is set to
“On”.
Memo : Press and hold the [DISPLAY] button for 2 seconds
to turn ON/OFF the LCD monitor.
The function to switch between LCD monitor and
viewfinder displays by pressing the [DISPLAY]
button can be canceled by opening/closing or
rotating the LCD monitor.
The viewfinder screen is always displayed when
[LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] is set to “On”.
You can display both the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screens at the same time by setting
[LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] to “On”.
(' P103 [ LCD + VF ] )
1
1 Open the LCD cover.
2 Incline the LCD cover to a position that
enables easy viewing.
Rotate the LCD monitor to adjust the angle.
While the LCD monitor is open, you can
rotate it 180 degrees upward or 90 degrees
downward.
Rotating the LCD monitor 180 degrees
upward enables you to see the screen from
the lens side. To display the image when it is
viewed from the opposite direction (mirror
image), perform setting as follows.
Set [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[LCD
Mirror] to “Mirror”- Set button (R)
(' P104 [ LCD Mirror ] )
3 Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the LCD monitor.
You can change the angle and brightness of the
LCD monitor according to your usage condition.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [LCD BRIGHT +/−] button to adjust the
brightness of the LCD monitor.
The [+] button brightens the monitor and the
[−] button darkens it.
Press the [+] and [−] buttons simultaneously
to return to standard settings.
During adjustment, the brightness level is
displayed on the LCD monitor.
LCD BRIGHT
4030 20
36
10
0
-10
P13000K
ND 1 /64
AE+6
18 dB
F1.8
1/ 10000
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the Contour
PEAKING
4030 20
10
0
0
P13000K
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Memo : The [PEAKING +/­] operation is disabled in the
Media mode, and its value is fixed at “­10”.
Adjusting the Contrast
Use the [LCD Contrast] menu to adjust the
contrast of the LCD monitor.
Adjust using [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[LCD
Contrast].
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: +10 to ­10] (Default value: 0)
Adjusting the Viewfinder
You can change the brightness and peaking of the
viewfinder screen according to your usage
conditions.
Changing the brightness of the screen will not
affect the recorded images.
1
1 Incline the viewfinder vertically to a
position that enables easy viewing.
2 Turn the visibility adjustment lever to
adjust the visibility.
Turn the visibility adjustment lever to sharpen
the image on the viewfinder screen.
3 Adjust the brightness, contour, and
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
Adjusting the Brightness
Use the [VF Bright] menu to adjust the
brightness of the viewfinder screen.
Adjust using [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[VF
Bright].
Increasing the value increases the
brightness. [Setting Values: +10 to ­10]
(Default value: 0)
Adjusting the Contour
Use the [PEAKING +/­] button to adjust the
contour of the viewfinder screen.
The contour of the LCD monitor will also be
adjusted at the same time.
(' P37 [Adjusting the Contour] )
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] is
set to “Off”, operate after switching to the
viewfinder display by pressing the [DISPLAY]
button for 2 seconds or longer.
The [PEAKING +/­] operation is disabled in the
Media mode, and its value is fixed at “­10”.
Adjusting the Contrast
PEAKING
Use the [VF Contrast] menu to adjust the
contrast of the viewfinder screen.
Adjust using [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[VF
Contrast].
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: +10 to ­10] (Default value:
0)
2
37
Preparations
Use the [PEAKING +/−] button to adjust the
contour of the LCD monitor.
(The contour of the viewfinder screen will also
be adjusted at the same time.)
The [+] button increases contour correction
and the [−] button decreases contour
correction.
Press the [+] and [−] buttons simultaneously
to return to standard settings.
During adjustment, the contour level is
displayed on the LCD monitor.
Caution : A high­definition viewfinder is used on this
camera recorder in order to provide an accurate
focusing environment. Due to the characteristic
of the display device, colors may appear on the
images when you blink your eyes. This is not a
malfunction. It does not affect the recorded
images, SDI output, AV output, or HDMI output.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Displaying in Black and White
You can display the viewfinder screen in black
and white.
[Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[VF Color] item
- Press Set button (R) - Select “Off”Press Set button (R).
(' P103 [ VF Color ] )
Preparations
Assigning Functions to
User Buttons
You can assign functions to the following buttons
and use them as user buttons.
By assigning functions to the buttons, the usability
of the camera recorder is enhanced.
Perform settings in the menu items corresponding
to each button.
Button
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
Menu Item
[USER1]
[OIS/2] Button
[USER2]
[LOLUX/3] Button
[USER3]
[AE LOCK/4] Button
[USER4]
[ZEBRA/5] Button
[USER5]
[MARKER/6] Button
[USER6]
[C.REVIEW/7] Button
[USER7]
LCD Cross­Shaped Button (J)
[LCD KEY▲]
LCD Cross­Shaped Button (K)
[LCD KEY▼]
LCD Cross­Shaped Button (H)
[LCD KEY◀]
LCD Cross­Shaped Button (I)
[LCD KEY▶]
1 Assign functions to the buttons from the
menu.
Set items in [Main Menu]-[Camera
Function]-[User Switch Set]-[USER1]­
[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD
KEY▼], [LCD KEY◀].
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )
Memo : Operations of the user buttons are interlocked
with the menu settings.
When the menu screen is displayed, these
buttons function as the menu operation buttons.
(' P91 [Basic Operations in Menu Screen] )
Tally Lamp
This is the indicator lamp for recording and
warning.
The operation changes according to the menu
settings.
The lamp blinks when the battery or remaining
space on the SD card is low. (Camera mode only)
* Set using [Main Menu]-[System]-[Tally
Lamp].
(' P110 [ Tally Lamp ] )
TIME
CODE
C.REVIEW/7
MENU/THUMB
Menu setting
Functional
information
CANCEL
Recording status
FOCUS ASSIST/1
TIME CODE
.
OIS / 2
LOLUX / 3
AE LOCK/4
ZEBRA/5
MARKER/6
[Tally Lamp]
Warning
Caution
Recording
Special recording *
R : Lights up
J : Blinks four times in 1 second
o : Blinks once in 1 second
* Paused state during special recording ([Clip
Continuous]).
(' P78 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
Memo : Blinking takes priority over lighting up.
38
Off
­
­
­
­
On
J
o
R
R
ISSUED
2012/12/21
SD Card
This camera recorder saves the recorded images
and audio sound on the SD card (sold separately)
in the card slot.
Usable Cards
Write­Protect Switch on the SD Card
A Slide the write­protect switch upward to enable
writing or deleting.
B Slide the write­protect switch downward to
prevent writing or deleting. (Images in the card
are protected.)
Estimated Recordable Time of SD Cards
The estimated recordable time is only a guide.
Differences may occur depending on the SD card
in use and the battery condition.
(' P112 [ Resolution ] )
(' P113 [ 3 Resolution ] )
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
(' P113 [ 3 Frame & Bit Rate ] )
4GB
8GB
16 GB
32 GB
64 GB
(SDXC)
128 GB
(SDXC)
QuickTime/MP4/MXF
MPEG2/HD
SP
HQ
720p 1080i
720p/
1080i/
1080p
22
17
12
45
35
25
90
70
50
180
140
100
360
280
200
720
560
AVCHD
SP
1080i
HQ
1080i
25
50
100
200
400
19
39
78
156
312
800
624
400
Write-Protect Switch
A
Write/Delete Enabled
B
Write/Delete Disabled
(Unit: minute)
4GB
8GB
16 GB
32 GB
64 GB
(SDXC)
128 GB
(SDXC)
H.264/HD
UHQ
1080i/1080p
17
35
70
140
280
QuickTime
H.264/SD
­
480i/576i
47
95
190
380
760
H.264/Web
LP
480p
285
580
1160
2320
4720
560
1520
9440
(Unit: minute)
39
Preparations
Use a Class 6/10 SD card.
Memo : Depending on the recording format, SD card
with Class 4 or higher performance can also be
used.
(' P45 [Selecting System Definition, File
Format and Video Format] )
Caution : Using cards other than those from Panasonic,
TOSHIBA or SanDisk may result in recording
failure or data loss.
Memo : If the SD card contains files recorded by devices
other than this camera recorder or files that are
saved from a PC, the recordable time may be
shorter or data may not be properly recorded.
For each file format, up to 600 clips can be
recorded to one SD card on this camera
recorder. When 600 clips are recorded to one
card, the remaining space is displayed as 0 min
regardless of the estimated recordable time,
and no further recording can be performed.
When the file format is set to “AVCHD”, up to
4000 clips can be recorded to one SD card.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Inserting an SD Card
Removing the SD Card
This camera recorder comes with two card slots
(Slot A and B) for video/audio recording and
playback.
1
2
A
Preparations
2
B
3
1 Open the SD card cover.
2 Insert an SD card with the notched corner
pointing up.
The status indicator of the card slot to which the
card was inserted lights up in red.
3 Close the SD card cover.
Card Slot Status Indicator
The following table shows the respective states of
slot A and B.
Lamp
Lights up in
red
Slot Status
The inserted SD card is being
accessed. (writing/reading data)
Do not turn off the power of the
camera recorder or remove the SD
card.
Lights up in
On standby. The inserted SD card
green
can be used for recording or
playback.
Light goes out SD card is not inserted.
An unusable card is inserted.
An SD card is inserted but a
different slot is selected.
40
1 Check that the SD card to be removed is not
being accessed (status indicator of the
card slot lights up in red).
2 Open the SD card cover.
3 Push the SD card and remove it from the
slot.
4 Close the SD card cover.
Memo : When both slots are inserted with usable SD
cards, the previously selected slot is used.
Caution : Data may be lost if you turn off the power of the
camera recorder or remove the SD card when it
is being accessed. All data recorded on the
card, including the file that is being accessed,
may be corrupted. Be sure to check whether the
status indicator is lighted in green or not before
you turn off the power or remove the SD card.
If you mistakenly remove the card when it is
being accessed, reinsert the card only after the
status indicator goes off.
The SD card may not be recognized if you insert
and remove the card within a short time. When
this happens, remove the card and wait for a few
seconds before you reinsert.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Switching the SD cards
When both card slots are inserted with SD cards,
you can use the [SLOT A/B] button to switch the
card to use.
When the memory on an SD card is full during
recording, data recording automatically switches to
the other card.
1 Select [System]-[Media]-[Format
Media].
(' P110 [ Format Media ] )
2 Select the slot of the SD card to be
formatted and press the Set button (R).
2
MENU/THUMB
Preparations
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
AE LEVEL
SLOT
A/B
3 The status of the selected SD card appears.
4 Select [Format] and press the Set button
(R).
Memo : The [SLOT A/B] button is disabled during
recording or playback. Cards will not be
switched even if you press the button.
4
Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards
When the following cards are inserted, [!FORMAT]
appears at the remaining media display area.
Format the card using the camera recorder menu.
Unformatted SD cards
SD cards formatted under different
specifications
* For details of the menu operation, refer to “[Basic
Operations in Menu Screen] P 91”.
Caution : Be sure to format the SD card on this camera
recorder. SD cards formatted on a PC and other
peripheral equipment cannot be used on this
camera recorder.
[!RESTORE] appears at the remaining media
display area when an SD card that requires
restoring is inserted.
5 Formatting starts.
41
ISSUED
2012/12/21
6 Formatting is complete.
3 Restoring starts.
When formatting is complete, “Complete” appears
and the camera recorder returns to the [Format
Media] screen.
Preparations
Memo : During formatting, menu operation is
unavailable but you can start recording.
However, this is only available when a
recordable SD card is inserted in the other slot.
Formatting cannot be performed in the following
cases.
Recording is in progress on the SD card to be
formatted.
SD card is not inserted.
Write­protect switch of the SD card is set (2
is displayed).
Caution : If you format the SD card, all data recorded on
the card, including video data and setup files,
will be deleted.
Restoring the SD Card
It is necessary to restore the SD card if an
abnormality occurs to the data in the card due to
some reasons.
Memo : [!RESTORE] appears at the remaining media
display area when an SD card that requires
restoring is inserted.
1 Select [System]-[Media]-[Restore
Media].
(' P110 [ Restore Media ] )
2 Select the SD card to be restored and press
the Set button (R).
4 Restoring is complete.
When restoring is complete, “Complete”
appears and the camera recorder returns to the
[Restore Media] screen.
When no media that requires restoring is
inserted, the camera recorder returns to the
[Media] menu screen.
Caution : [Restore Media] can only be selected in Camera
mode. However, it cannot be selected while the
camera recorder is recording. Select [Restore
Media] in Camera mode when the camera
recorder is not recording.
[Restore Media] does not restore the SD card to
its original states completely. If restoring fails,
replace or format the SD card. Take note that
formatting erases all the information inside the
SD card.
Restoring cannot be performed in the following
cases.
Camera recorder is recording in progress.
SD card is not inserted.
Write­protect switch of the SD card is set (2
is displayed).
Restoring is not required.
2
42
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Clips Recorded to SD Cards
Folders in the SD Card
Images captured are recorded to the [PRIVATE]
folder inside the SD card.
Depending on the setting for [System] and
[Format]/[3Format], the clips may be recorded
in a folder created under the [PRIVATE] folder.
Format/3Format
QuickTime(MPEG2)
MP4(MPEG2)
AVCHD
MXF(MPEG2)
QuickTime(H.264)
QuickTime(H.264)
Record Folder
JVC/CQAV
JVC/BPAV
AVCHD
JVC/CMAV
JVC/CQAVC
JVC/CQAVC
Memo : When [System] is set to “HD+Web”, web files
(MOV format) will be recorded in the [DCIM]
folder.
By formatting (initializing) the SD card from the
[Format Media] menu on the camera recorder,
folders required for recording in the current
[System] settings will be generated.
When the [System] settings and
[QuickTime(MPEG2)] settings are changed,
folders required for recording in those settings
will be automatically generated.
Caution : When a clip inside the folder is moved or deleted
using the Explorer (Windows) or Finder (Mac),
recording to the SD card may fail if formatting
(initializing) of the card is not performed.
Clip (Recorded Data) and Clip Name
When recording is stopped, the images, audio
and accompanying data which are recorded
from start to stop are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
An 8­character clip name is automatically
generated for the recorded clip.
(“Clip Name Prefix” + “Clip Number”)
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, the clip name generated consists of
only the Clip Number (5­digit number).
(' P112 [ Format ] )
A B CG0001
Clip Number
A number in automatic
ascending order is assigned in
the recording order.
The Clip Number can be reset in
the menu.*
Clip Name Prefix (any four alphanumeric characters)
This is set to “xxxG” (“xxx” denotes the last 3
digits of the serial number) by default.
* [Clip Set] - [Reset Clip Number]
(' P115 [ Reset Clip Number ] )
Memo : Before recording starts, you can set any
characters for the clip name prefix by using
[Main Menu]-[System]-[Record Set]-[Clip
Set]-[Clip Name Prefix].
(' P115 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )
Changes cannot be made after recording.
Recorded Clips
The recorded materials may be split into several
files but they can be played back continuously
on the camera recorder.
Clips may be recorded across the two SD cards
in card slots A and B depending on the recording
time of the clip.
When copying videos in MP4 file format to a
HDD using a PC, it is recommended to use [JVC
ProHD Clip Manager Software], which is found
in the supplied disc, to maintain continuity.
Caution : A clip recorded across several cards cannot be
played back continuously. Continuous playback
is only possible when the recording is made on
one card.
43
Preparations
System
HD
HD
HD
HD
HD
SD
Example: In the case of QuickTime/MP4
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Basic Shooting
Procedures
2 Press the [REC] button to start recording to
the SD card.
This camera recorder has three [REC] buttons.
Any of the [REC] buttons can be used to start/
stop recording by default.
The tally lamp lights up in red during recording.
Zoom Operation
(' P47 [Zoom Operation] )
Adjusting the Focus Manually
(' P48 [Focus Operation] )
Preparations
2
4
4
Shooting
3
1
POWER
ON
OFF
(CHG)
MODE
1 Supply battery or AC adapter power to the
camera recorder.
(' P28 [Power Supply] )
2 Insert an SD card.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
3 Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
Hold down the lock button (blue) at the center of
the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to set to
“ON”. The camera recorder starts up in Camera
mode and is ready for recording.
4 Adjust the angle of the LCD monitor and
viewfinder.
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
Shooting
1 Configure the video and audio input
settings.
You have to configure video settings such as
brightness adjustment (iris, gain, shutter) and
white balance adjustment in order to start
shooting. You also have to adjust the audio
input settings and audio recording level for
audio recording.
Adjusting the Brightness
(' P51 [Adjusting the Brightness] )
Adjusting the White Balance
(' P56 [Adjusting the White Balance] )
Adjusting Audio Input Settings and
Recording Level
(' P61 [Audio Recording] )
44
Memo : If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the factory default, pressing the [REC] button
starts recording only to the media in the selected
slot.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record Set]
-[Slot Mode] is set to “Dual”, recording can be
performed simultaneously to the cards in both
the slots.
(' P74 [Dual Rec] )
The tally lamp can be turned off in [System]-
[Tally Lamp].
(' P110 [ Tally Lamp ] )
3 Check the most recently captured images.
Press the [C.REVIEW/7] button on the lens
to activate the Clip Review function. The
most recently captured images are played
back on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen.
After playback, the camera recorder returns
to standby mode (STBY).
(' P72 [Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)] )
Memo : [Clip Review] is assigned to [C.REVIEW/7]
button in factory default.
[Clip Review] can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Selecting System
Definition, File Format and
Video Format
You can select the resolution of the recorded
videos (HD, SD, or Web), file format for recording/
playback, and the video recording format on this
camera recorder.
Memo : Make a selection in [Main Menu]-[Record
Format].
Select a file format in [Format]/[3Format].
There are five file formats for selection.
QuickTime(MPEG2):
QuickTime file format (.MOV)
MP4(MPEG2):
MP4 file format
MXF(MPEG2):
MXF (material exchange format)
AVCHD:
AVCHD file format
QuickTime(H.264):
QuickTime format (.MOV)
Memo : The available options vary as follows depending
on the [System] setting.
When “HD”, “HD+SD”, or “HD+Web” is set,
the options for slot A are:
QuickTime(MPEG2), MP4(MPEG2),
MXF(MPEG2), AVCHD, QuickTime(H.264)
When “SD” or “HD+SD” is set, the available
option for slot B is:
QuickTime(H.264)
When “HD+Web” is set, the available option
for slot B is:
QuickTime(H.264)
Selecting a Video Format
Select a [Record Format] from the list of formats.
The selectable [Frame & Bit Rate]/[3Frame &
Bit Rate] changes according to the settings of
[System], [Format], and [Resolution].
The recording bit rate (video) is 35 Mbps VBR in
“HQ” mode, and 18.3 Mbps (1080i is 25 Mbps)
CBR in “SP” mode.
If [Format]/[3Format] is set to “AVCHD”, the
recording bit rate (system rate) is 24 Mbps VBR
in “HQ” mode, and 17 Mbps VBR in “SP” mode.
45
Shooting
Selecting a System Definition
There are three different definitions for selection.
HD:
Records in HD (High Definition) quality.
SD:
Records in SD (Standard Definition) quality.
Web:
Records in low definition quality
You can select a definition for the recorded images
from the following items under [System].
HD:
Records in HD quality for both slots A and B.
SD:
Records in SD quality for both slots A and B.
HD+SD:
Records in HD quality for slot A, and SD quality
for slot B.
(' P73 [Recording Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions] )
HD+Web:
Records in HD quality for slot A, and Web quality
for slot B.
(' P73 [Recording Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions] )
Selecting a File Format
ISSUED
2012/12/21
List of Formats
The following is a list of file formats and video
formats that can be selected on this camera
recorder.
When [System] is set to “HD”, “HD+SD”, or “HD
+Web”, the options for slot A are:
Record Format
Remarks
Resolution Frame &
Bit Rate
QuickTime 1920x1080 60i(HQ)
MP4
30p(HQ)
MXF
50i(HQ)
(MPEG2)
25p(HQ)
24p(HQ)
1440x1080 60i(HQ)
50i(HQ)
60i(SP) HDV
compatible
50i(SP) HDV
compatible
1280x720 60p(HQ)
30p(HQ)
50p(HQ)
25p(HQ)
24p(HQ)
60p(SP) HDV
compatible
50p(SP) HDV
compatible
AVCHD
1920x1080 60i(HQ) Recordable
50i(HQ) using Class 4
Format
Shooting
60i(SP)
50i(SP)
QuickTime 1920x1080 60i(UHQ)
(H.264)
50i(UHQ)
24p(UHQ)
Memo : The “1280x720” setting is not available for MXF
files.
When “HD+SD” is selected, [Frame & Bit Rate]
cannot be selected.
U model:
50i(HQ), 50i(SP), 50i(UHQ), 50p(SP),
25p(HQ)
E model:
60i(HQ), 60i(SP), 60i(UHQ), 30p(HQ),
24p(HQ), 24p(UHQ)
46
When [System] is set to “SD” or “HD+SD”, the
available options for slot B are as follows.
The video format is fixed as follows according to
the model.
Record Format
Remarks
Resolution Frame &
Bit Rate
QuickTime 720 x 480 60i (U
Recordable
(H.264)
model)
using Class 4
720 x 576 50i (E
model)
Options for slot B when [System] is set to “HD
+Web”:
Format
Record Format
Resolution Frame &
Bit Rate
QuickTime 480x270
30p(LP)
(H.264)
25p(LP)
24p(LP)
Format
Remarks
Recordable
using Class 4
Memo : [Frame & Bit Rate] is fixed depending on the
[Frame & Bit Rate] setting for slot A.
Selecting the Aspect Ratio of SD Videos
For selecting the aspect ratio for the SD image
when [System] is set to “SD” or “HD+SD”.
You can select “16:9” or “4:3”.
Memo : When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”,
aspect ratio is fixed at “16:9”.
Setting the Record Format Menu
1 Display the [Main Menu]-[Record
Format] menu.
2 Set each of the items.
3 After setting is complete for all items, press
the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The record format is switched.
A “Please Wait...” message appears on the
screen during switching.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Zoom Operation
Using the Zoom Lever at the Grip
Adjusts the angle of view.
Zoom ratio: 1x to 23x (optical zoom only)
Zooming can be operated using any of the three
levers/rings below.
Zoom Lever at the Grip
Zoom Lever at the Handle
Zoom Ring at the Lens Section:
Functions as a zoom ring when the [ZOOM
SERVO/MANUAL] switch is set to “MANUAL”.
1 Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to
“SERVO”.
2 Press the zoom lever to zoom.
The zoom speed changes according to the
extent the zoom lever is being pushed.
Zooms into wide angle and increases the
angle of view when “W” is pressed.
Zooms into telephoto and decreases the
angle of view when “T” is pressed.
A zoom bar appears during zoom operation
W
00:00:00.00
00:00:00.00
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
HOLD
12 . 5/ 30f ps
FIX VAR OFF
ZOOM
SERVO
MANUAL
4030
40
30 20
12 . 5/ 30f ps
10
0
P 13000K
5.
5.6 f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
4030
40
30 20
10
0
P 13000K
5.
5.6 f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
Using the Zoom Lever at the Handle
1 Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to
“SERVO”.
2 Set the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch
to “FIX” or “VAR”.
Memo : Setting to “FIX” will allow the zoom operation to
move at the speed set in [Handle Zoom Speed].
Set the zoom speed using [Main Menu][Camera Function]-[Handle Zoom Speed].
(' P96 [ Handle Zoom Speed ] )
Setting to “VAR” will change the zoom speed
according to the pressure applied on the lever.
3 Press the zoom lever at the handle to zoom.
Memo : When the [FIX/VAR/OFF] zoom speed switch is
set to “OFF”, the zoom lever at the handle
section cannot be used.
47
Shooting
REC
T
REC
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Using Zoom Ring at the Lens Section
1 Set the [ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to
“MANUAL”.
You can adjust the preferred angle of view by
turning the zoom ring.
Focus Operation
Adjusting Focus Manually
Saving/Recalling Current Zoom
Position (Preset Zoom)
This allows you to register up to three zoom
positions.
Shooting
1 Assign the “Preset Zoom1”, “Preset
Zoom2”, or “Preset Zoom3” function to any
of the user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
(' P97 [USER1 ­ USER7, LCD KEY▲/LCD
KEY▶/LCD KEY▼/LCD KEY◀] )
2 Save the current zoom position.
Press any of the buttons assigned with the
“Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or “Preset
Zoom3” function for more than 1 second.
The current zoom position will be stored.
3 Recall the stored zoom position.
Press any of the buttons assigned with the
“Preset Zoom1”, “Preset Zoom2”, or “Preset
Zoom3” function and release within 1
second.
The camera recorder zooms to the stored
zoom position.
Memo : To recall the stored zoom position, set the
[ZOOM SERVO/MANUAL] switch to “SERVO”.
The zoom speed to the zoom position can be set
with [Main Menu]-[Camera Function]-
[Preset Zoom Speed].
(' P98 [ Preset Zoom Speed ] )
Operating other zoom maneuvers during a
zoom position recall will cancel the recall.
FOCUS ASSIST/1
FOCUS
AUTO
TIME CODE
MANU
PUSH AUTO
1 Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to
“MANU”.
The manual focus icon " appears on the
screen.
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Memo : If [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display
Settings]-[Focus] is set to “Off”, the " icon will
not appear.
(' P105 [ Focus ] )
2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.
Memo : Using the Focus Assist function makes it easier
to focus.
(' P49 [Focus Assist Function] )
Pressing the [FOCUS AUTO] button in the
Manual Focus mode activates the One­push
Auto Focus mode, while holding down the
[FOCUS AUTO] button activates the Push Auto
Focus mode.
(' P49 [One Push Auto Focus] )
(' P49 [Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)] )
48
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting Focus Automatically
One Push Auto Focus
While in the Manual Focus mode, pressing the
[PUSH AUTO] button (within 1 minute) makes the
camera recorder focus on the center of the frame
automatically.
Memo : Face detection does not work during One Push
Auto Focus.
When the operation is complete, the camera
recorder returns to the Manual Focus mode
automatically.
One Push Auto Focus functions with emphasis
on the focusing speed. This function is not
suitable during recording.
during shooting, the focused area is displayed
in color. This enables easy and accurate
focusing.
Select the color (blue, red or green) in the menu.
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Shooting
Assist]-[Focus Assist]-[Type] is set to
“ACCU­Focus”, the depth of field becomes
shallower to enable easier focusing.
(' P104 [ Focus Assist ] )
The “ACCU­Focus” function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
Select the display color in [Main Menu]-[LCD/
VF]-[Shooting Assist]-[Focus Assist]-
[Color].
(' P104 [ Color ] )
If you use the zebra function and the Focus
Assist function at the same time, it may be
difficult to see the effect of the Focus Assist. In
this case, turn off the zebra function.
Setting Focus Assist Function to a User Button
You can assign the “Focus Assist” function to a user
button.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
Setting to Auto Focus Temporarily
(Push Auto Focus)
The camera recorder will shift to Auto Focus
mode temporarily and automatically adjusts
focus when the [PUSH AUTO] button is pressed
during shooting in Manual Focus mode.
Release the [PUSH AUTO] button to return to
Manual Focus mode.
Memo : Face detection does not work during Push Auto
Focus.
Adjusting Focus on Far Objects
Slide the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to “∞”.
The ∞ icon is displayed.
Release your finger to return to Manual Focus
mode.
49
Shooting
Set the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞] switch to
“AUTO”.
The auto focus icon # appears on the screen.
Memo : If [AF Assist] is set to “On”, you can temporarily
adjust the focus manually by turning the focus
ring when in the automatic focus adjustment
mode.
(' P96 [ AF Assist ] )
If [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]
-[Focus] is set to “Off”, the auto focus icon will
not appear.
(' P105 [ Focus ] )
Focus Assist Function
When the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button is pressed
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the Focusing by
Face Detection
Shooting
This function detects human faces and
automatically adjusts focus during Auto Focus.
It can also track moving objects.
When several faces are detected, you can select
one to focus on.
Memo : This function can also adjust the brightness
automatically according to the brightness of the
face detected.
(' P97 [ Face Detect ] )
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
CANCEL
.
1 Assign the “Face Detect” function to any of
the user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
2 Focus the camera recorder on a person and
press the user button that is assigned with
“Face Detect”.
When Face detection is enabled, the face
detection icon () appears.
When [Main Menu]-[Camera
Function]-[User Switch Set]-[Face
Detect] is set to “AF”, “#” appears.
When [Main Menu]-[Camera
Function]-[User Switch Set]-[Face
Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, “AE±0”
appears.
If you select the person nearest to the center
of the screen, an orange frame will appear
on his face.
Focus will be automatically adjusted for the
selected person.
Detection Frame (Orange)
AE
Memo : If the detection frame does not appear, make
sure that the [FOCUS AUTO/MANU/∞]
selection switch has been set to “AUTO”. And if
[Face Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, set one or more
of the items (Gain, Iris and Electronic Shutter) to
the automatic adjustment mode.
(' P51 [Adjusting the Brightness
Automatically] )
(' P52 [Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment)
Mode] )
(' P53 [Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic
Gain Adjustment)] )
(' P56 [Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)] )
Selecting Specific Person from Several
Persons
1 Hold down the user button that is assigned
with “Face Detect”.
The camera recorder will enter face
selection mode and the face detection icon
() will blink.
An orange frame will appear on the face of
the person nearest to the center of the
screen. Blue frames will appear on the faces
of others.
Detection Frame (Orange)
Blinking
Detection Frame (Blue)
2 Select a specific person.
Use the cross­shaped button (HIJK) to
select a person.
An orange frame will appear on the face of
the selected person and focus will be
automatically adjusted.
50
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Detection Frame (Orange)
Detection Frame (Blue)
Adjusting the Brightness
Adjusting the Brightness Manually
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “OFF”,
some or all of the items (Iris, Gain and Shutter
Speed) can be manually adjusted.
(' P52 [Adjusting the Iris] )
(' P53 [Setting the Gain] )
(' P54 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
Memo : If Iris, Gain and Shutter Speed are manually
adjusted, the [AE Level] setting is temporarily
disabled.
Adjust the brightness using Iris, Gain, Shutter
speed and ND filter according to the brightness of
the object.
Adjusting the Brightness Automatically
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”, Iris,
Gain, Shutter speed and ND filter are automatically
adjusted according to the brightness of the object
to maintain optimum brightness.
AE LOCK/4
AE
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
PUSH
AUTO
EL
LEV
FULL AUTO
ON
OFF
CANCEL
GAIN
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
51
Shooting
3 Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
person for face detection.
Memo : Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel the
selection.
You can specify the detection sensitivity and the
operation speed after losing sight of the face
using [Main Menu]-[Camera Function]-
[User Switch Set]-[Face Detect]-
[Sensitivity] and [Hysteresis].
(' P97 [ Sensitivity ] )
(' P98 [ Hysteresis ] )
Memo : You can use the cross­shaped button (HI) on
the side of the camera recorder to set the target
level (brighter/darker) to maintain optimum
brightness during automatic adjustment.
(' P95 [ AE Level ] )
The convergence speed of the automatic
adjustment for gain, shutter and iris can be set
in the menu.
(' P95 [ AE Speed ] )
If one or more of the items (Gain, Iris and
Shutter) have been set to “Auto”, the value of the
corresponding items when the user button that
is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed can be fixed.
(' P98 [ AE Lock ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the Iris
Auto Iris (Automatic Adjustment) Mode
You can adjust the aperture of the lens iris manually
or automatically according to the brightness of the
object.
Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto Iris mode.
The iris is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
The icon appears on the screen.
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
IRIS
Shooting
PUSH AUTO
Manual Iris (Manual Adjustment) Mode
The aperture value (F­number) of the lens can be
set manually.
1 Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Manual
Iris mode.
The icon on the screen disappears.
2 Turn the iris ring on the lens to adjust the
iris manually.
The open F­number of the aperture varies
according to the zoom position.
Wide [W] end
: F1.6
Tele [T] end
: F3.0
F­number
Decrease
Increase
Description
The subject appears brighter.
The focused range becomes
sharper, while the background is
blurred to produce a soft image.
The subject appears darker.
Background of image becomes
focused as well.
Memo : Pressing the [PUSH AUTO] button during
Manual Iris mode activates One Push Auto Iris
mode. And holding down the [PUSH AUTO]
button activates Push Auto Iris mode.
52
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
Memo : Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder to “ON” to enter Auto Iris mode
(automatic adjustment mode). The iris is
automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
In this case, the [IRIS] switch on the camera
recorder is disabled.
The iris open/close limit can be set in [Main
Menu]-[Camera Function]-[Auto Iris Limit
(OPEN)]/[Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)] during Auto
Iris.
(' P96 [ Auto Iris Limit (OPEN) ] )
(' P96 [ Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE) ] )
You can use the cross­shaped button (HI) on
the side control panel to set the target level
(brighter/darker) of the auto iris.
(' P95 [ AE Level ] )
The convergence speed of the auto iris can be
set in the menu.
(' P95 [ AE Speed ] )
One Push Auto Iris
When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,
press the [PUSH AUTO] button to adjust the iris
according to the brightness of the object.
Push Auto Iris
When the camera recorder is in Manual Iris mode,
hold down the [PUSH AUTO] button to change to
Auto Iris mode temporarily. The iris will be
automatically adjusted according to the brightness
of the object.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting the Gain
Automatic Gain Mode (Automatic Gain
Adjustment)
This function electrically boosts the light sensitivity
when there is insufficient illumination on the object.
You can set the gain of the video amplifier
according to the brightness of the object. Select the
setting mode according to your shooting
conditions.
GAIN
FULL AUTO
ON
OFF
Memo : Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder to “ON” to enter the Automatic Gain
mode ([ALC] fixed). The gain of the video
amplifier is automatically set according to the
brightness of the object.
In this case, the [GAIN] switch on the camera
recorder is disabled.
Memo : The upper limit of the gain setting value during
ALC operation can be set in [Main Menu][Camera Function]-[ALC Limit].
(' P96 [ ALC Limit ] )
Manual Gain Mode (Manual Gain
Switching)
1 Press the [GAIN] button to set to the Manual
Gain mode.
The icon on the screen disappears.
Use the [L/M/H] switch to set the gain of the
selected video amplifier.
The default positions of the switch are as
follows.
[L] : 0dB
[M] : 6dB
[H] : 12dB
Memo : You can change the gain value of each position
in the menu. Increasing the sensitivity causes
the screen to appear grainier.
(' P96 [GAIN L/GAIN M/GAIN H] )
53
Shooting
L
M
H
1 Press the [GAIN] button to set to the
Automatic Gain mode (ALC).
The icon appears on the screen.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting the Electronic
Shutter
You can change the shutter speed (time for each
shooting frame) using the electronic shutter
function. Electronic shutter can be adjusted
manually or automatically.
Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)
Shooting
1 Press the [SHUTTER] button to set to the
Manual Shutter mode.
The icon on the screen disappears.
Use the Set button (R) to switch between the
shutter modes and the cross­shaped button
(JK) to switch between the speeds.
Switching Shutter Speed
When shutter is ON, use the cross­shaped button
(JK) to set the shutter speed. Shutter speed differs
according to the video format and variable frame
rate settings.
Memo : To display Shutter in angle (DEG), set [Frame
& Bit Rate] to “24p(UHQ)”, “24p(HQ)” or
“25p(HQ)”, and set [Shutter] in [LCD/
VF]-[Display Settings] to “DEG”.
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
(' P106 [ Shutter ] )
During Modes Other Than Variable Frame Rec
Shutter
J
Resolution/
Frame & Bit
Rate
720/60p
720/30p
1080/60i
1080/30p
720/50p
720/25p
1080/50i
1080/25p
^
^
ON
720/24p
1080/24p
1/10000
(Step)
1/4000
1/2000
AE
PUSH
LEV
AUTO
EL
FULL AUTO
ON
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
OFF
1/10000
1/10000
1/1000
1/4000
1/4000
1/500
1/2000
1/2000
1/250
1/1000
1/1000
1/120
1/500
1/500
1/100
1/250
1/250
1/60
1/120
1/120
1/54
1/100
1/100
1/50
1/60
1/50
1/48
1/30
1/25
1/24
1/15
1/12.5
1/12
1/7.5
1/6.25
CANCEL
GAIN
WHT BAL
Switching Shutter Mode
Press the Set button (center of the cross­shaped
button) to turn ON/OFF the shutter.
Memo : When the shutter is ON, “Step” or “Variable” may
be selected in [Camera Function]-[Shutter].
“Step” is the factory default.
(' P95 [ Shutter ] )
54
(Standard)
SHUTTER
K
J
ON
(Upper limit)
(Variable)
K
OFF
1/6
1/10843
1/10227
~
Default values 1/60.13
1/50.09
~
1/48.09
(Lower limit)
1/30.07
1/25.05
1/24.05
1/60
1/50
1/48
Memo : The operations of the cross­shaped button
(JK) and Set button (R) are disabled in the
following cases.
During clip preview
During display of the USB switching
confirmation screen
During display of the formatting confirmation
screen
When selecting a face using face detection
When selecting a photometry area with [Spot
Meter] set to “Manual”
ISSUED
2012/12/21
During Variable Frame Rec
Shutter
J
Resolution/
Frame & Bit Rate
Frame Rate
ON
(Step)
K
J
ON
54, 27
^
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/27
1/13.5
1/6.75
50, 25 48, 24, 12, 6
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/10000
1/4000
1/4000
1/2000
1/2000
1/1000
1/1000
1/500
1/500
1/250
1/250
1/120
1/120
1/100
1/100
1/60
1/60
1/54
1/54
1/50
1/50
1/48
1/25
1/24
1/12.5
1/12
1/6.25
1/6
1/10227
1/60.13
1/54.10
1/50.09
1/10843
~
1/48.09
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
(Upper limit)
(Variable)
K
(Lower limit)
OFF
45, 22.5
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/22.5
1/11.25
1/5.625
40, 20, 10
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/20
1/10
1/5
36, 18
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/18
1/9
1/4.5
32, 2
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/54
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/32
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
1/45.07
1/40.07
1/36.05
1/32.04
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/32
Shutter
J
Resolution/
Frame & Bit Rate
Frame Rate
ON
(Step)
(Standard)
K
J
ON
(Variable)
K
(Upper limit)
48, 24, 6
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/50
1/48
1/24
1/12
1/6
1080/25p
720/25p
45, 22.5
40, 20, 10
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/10000
1/4000
1/4000
1/2000
1/2000
1/1000
1/1000
1/500
1/500
1/250
1/250
1/120
1/120
1/100
1/100
1/50
1/50
1/48
1/48
1/45
1/45
1/40
1/22.5
1/20
1/11.25
1/10
1/5.625
1/5
36, 18
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/18
1/9
1/4.5
32, 2
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/32
1/16
1/8
1/4
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
1/10227
1/10843
~
(Lower limit)
OFF
50, 25, 12.5
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/50
1/25
1/12.5
1/6.25
1/50.09
1/48.09
1/45.07
1/40.07
1/36.05
1/32.04
1/50
1/48
1/45
1/40
1/36
1/32
55
Shooting
(Standard)
720/30p, 720/24p, 1080/30p, 1080/24p
60, 30, 15
^
^
^
^
^
^
^
1/10000
1/4000
1/2000
1/1000
1/500
1/250
1/120
1/100
1/60
1/30
1/15
1/7.5
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Automatic Shutter Mode (Automatic
Shutter Adjustment)
1 Press the [SHUTTER] button or set the
[FULL AUTO] switch to “ON” to enter
Automatic Shutter mode.
The icon appears on the screen.
The camera recorder enters the Automatic
Shutter mode. The shutter speed is
automatically adjusted according to the
brightness of the object.
Shooting
Memo : Switching of shutter speed with the cross­
shaped button (JK) and switching of shutter
mode with the Set button (R) are disabled.
Setting the ND Filter
Use the ND filter to keep the lens aperture in the
appropriate range.
Switch according to the brightness of the object.
When the position on the switch is changed, the
selected position of the ND filter is displayed on the
LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
(Display 2 screen)
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display
Settings]-[ND Filter] is set to “Off”, the position
of the ND filter will not be displayed.
(' P105 [ ND Filter ] )
ND FILTER
1/64
1/16
1/4
OFF
.
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
.
56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
Adjusting the White
Balance
Adjust the white balance according to the color
temperature of the lighting. You can select the
adjustment mode according to the shooting
conditions.
As the color of the light (color temperature) varies
according to the light source, it is necessary to
readjust the white balance when the main light
source illuminating the object changes.
WHT BAL
SHUTTER
FULL AUTO
B
A
PRESET
ON
OFF
Manual White Balance Mode (Manual
Switching)
1 Press the [WHT BAL] button to set to
Manual White Balance mode.
You can select the white balance with the
[WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection switch.
Use the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch to select “PRESET” (preset mode),
“A” (memory A mode), or “B” (memory B
mode).
The value assigned to the switch appears on
the screen.
Memo : This is fixed at “FAW” when the [FULL AUTO]
switch of the camera recorder is set to “ON”.
00: 00: 00.00
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Memo : It is recommended to use the ND filter to set the
lens aperture to less than F8.
ND 1 /64
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Preset Mode (PRESET)
Two different color temperature settings are
registered on this camera recorder. You can
switch between them using the [,] button.
(Default setting: “3200K”)“5600K”)
Press the [,] button to switch to a different
color temperature.
(“Preset Temp.”)“Alternative Temp.”)
1 Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] switch to
“PRESET”.
2 Press the [,] button.
You can change both the color temperature
settings in the Preset mode in the menu.
1 Open the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.] menu.
Select [Main Menu]-[Camera Process]
-[White Balance]-[Preset Temp.] and
[Alternative Temp.], and press the Set button
(R).
The Color Temperature setting screen
appears.
Color Temperature Selection Screen
Color Temperature
Detailed Selection
Screen
2 Select the color temperature.
When selecting from a setting value (Color
Temperature Selection screen), use the
cross­shaped button (JK) to select the color
temperature.
[Setting Values: 7500K, 6500K, 5600K,
5200K, 4800K, 4200K, R3200K, 3000K,
2800K]
To select detailed values (Color
Temperature Detailed Selection screen)
Press the cross­shaped button (I) to
display the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
Use the cross­shaped button (JK) to
select a color temperature.
[Setting Values: 2300K to 15000K (in
100K increments)]
Memory A Mode (A), Memory B Mode
(B)
Set to the white balance saved in Memory A or
Memory B.
When the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch is set to “A” or “B”, press the [,] button
to execute white balance. The white balance will
be automatically adjusted and the adjusted
value will be saved in Memory A or Memory B.
1 Prepare the camera recorder.
A Set the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch to “ON”.
B Press the [IRIS] button to set to the Auto mode.
C Set the [FULL AUTO] switch to “OFF”.
2 Set the [ND FILTER] switch according to the
lighting.
(' P56 [Setting the ND Filter] )
3 Set the [WHT BAL B/A/PRESET] selection
switch to “A” or “B”.
4 Locate a place with similar lighting
conditions as the object to be shot, place a
white object near the center of the screen
and zoom in to fill the screen with white.
5 Press the [,] (Auto White Balance)
button.
The white detection frame appears when
Auto White Balance is activated. Fill the
frame with white completely.
“AUTO WHITE A OPERATION” or “AUTO
WHITE B OPERATION” appears on the
viewfinder when Auto White Balance is
activated.
When the correct white balance is achieved,
“AUTO WHITE A OK” or “AUTO WHITE B
OK” appears for about 3 seconds together
with the approximate color temperature.
57
Shooting
Setting the [Preset Temp.] or [Alternative
Temp.] Values
Memo : Use the cross­shaped button (I) to switch
between the Color Temperature Selection
screen and the Color Temperature Detailed
Selection screen.
If [White Balance] has been assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button will
display the Color Temperature Selection
screen.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
White Paint Adjustment
You can fine­tune the white balance saved in
Memory A or Memory B.
AUTO WHITE A
OPERATION
White Detection
Frame
1 Select [Main Menu]-[Camera Process]-
[White Balance]-[AWB Paint] and press
the Set button (R).
The White Paint Adjustment screen appears.
[AWB] Activating
1
Shooting
AUTO WHITE A
OK
Result Display
Caution : Do not use highly reflective objects, such as
metals. Doing so may result in improper white
balance adjustment.
The Auto White function cannot provide
optimum white balance with an object outside
the adjustment range, for example when it
contains only a single color or not enough white
color.
2 Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross­shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
Error Message
If the white balance adjustment is not correctly
completed, one of the following messages will
appear for about 3 seconds.
Message
NG : OBJECT
ERROR : LOW
LIGHT
ERROR : OVER
LIGHT
58
Status
The object used is defective.
Displayed when there is not
enough white color on the
object, or when the color
temperature is not suitable.
Use another white object and
adjust the white balance
again.
Insufficient illumination.
Displayed when the lighting is
dark. Increase the lighting
and adjust the white balance
again.
Excessive illumination.
Displayed when the lighting is
too bright. Decrease the
lighting and adjust the white
balance again.
3 Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
R Value
B Value
Memo : Selecting [,] will usually clear the White Paint
Adjustment value. But when [Main Menu]-
[Camera Process]-[White Balance]-[Clear
Paint After AWB] is set to “Off”, values will not
be cleared even when [,] is selected.
(' P102 [ Clear Paint After AWB ] )
If [White Balance] has been assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button will
display the AWB Paint Adjustment screen.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Automatic White Balance Mode (FAW:
Fulltime Auto White balance)
Press the [WHT BAL] button on the side control
panel to enter into Automatic White Balance
mode.
“<FAW>” appears on the screen.
Set the [FULL AUTO] switch on the camera
recorder to “ON” to enter Automatic White
Balance mode. An appropriate white balance is
automatically adjusted according to the color
temperature of the lighting on the object.
White balance switching with the [WHT BAL
B/A/PRESET] selection switch is disabled.
FAW Paint Adjustment
You can fine­adjust the white balance that was
automatically adjusted.
1 Select [Main Menu]-[Camera Process]
-[White Balance]-[FAW Paint] and press
the Set button (R).
The FAW Paint Adjustment screen appears.
Shooting
1
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 :56
4030 20
10
0
FAW
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
FAW
Caution : The accuracy of [FAW] is inferior to that of Auto
White Balance.
When the power of the camera recorder is
turned on with the [FAW] mode selected, it takes
about 15 seconds for the colors to stabilize.
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[Camera Function][User Switch Set]-[AE Lock] is set to “AE/WB”,
the white balance when the user button that is
assigned [AE Lock] is pressed can be fixed.
(' P98 [ AE Lock ] )
If [White Balance] has been assigned to the user
button, pressing the assigned user button will
display the FAW Paint Adjustment screen.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
2 Adjust the R and B values.
Use the cross­shaped button (JK) to adjust R
value and (HI) to adjust B value.
3 Press the Set button (R).
Returns to the [White Balance] screen.
R Value
B Value
59
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting the Camera
Image
Shooting
The picture quality of the camera can be set using
the [Camera Process] menu.
As the adjustments are shown on the screen, you
can adjust the values while checking the picture
quality on the camera.
[Detail]
[Master Black]
[Black Toe]
[Knee]
[White Clip]
[Gamma]
[WDR]
[White Balance]
[Color Matrix]
[Color Gain]
[Reverse Picture]
[Shooting Mode]
Memo : For details of the respective items, see the
[Camera Process] menu.
(' P98 [Camera Process Menu] )
Using the Image Stabilizer
Reduces blurring of images due to camera shake.
1 Check whether the image stabilizer feature
is turned ON or OFF.
If the image stabilizer icon (/) does not
appear on the screen display, the image
stabilizer function is OFF.
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24,2012
12 :34 : 56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
2 Press the [OIS/2] button to turn ON the
image stabilizer feature (when image
stabilizer feature is OFF).
The image stabilizer feature switches between
ON and OFF with every press of the [OIS/2]
button.
OFF:
Use this setting when the camera recorder is
secured, such as when using a tripod.
ON:
Reduces blurring of images due to camera
shake.
Memo : Select [Main Menu]-[Camera Function][OIS]-[Level] to set the correction level.
(' P95 [ Level ] )
Correction by this feature may not be sufficient
when camera shake is too strong.
“OIS” is assigned to [OIS/2] button in factory
default.
“OIS” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
60
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Audio Recording
Setting Input Channel to [INPUT1]/[INPUT2]
You can record audio from the two channels (CH1/
CH2) in synchronization with video images on this
camera recorder.
Select from the four options below to record the
audio.
Built­in Microphone
Microphone connected to [AUX] terminal
Microphone connected to [INPUT1] terminal
Microphone connected to [INPUT2] terminal
INPUT1
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
CH1
CH2
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT1
INPUT2
LINE
MIC
MIC
+48V
LCD BRIGHT
PEAKING
FULL AUTO
AUTO
MANUAL
CH1
ON
CH2
OFF
Selecting Audio to Be Recorded in Each
Channel
Select the audio to be recorded in CH1/CH2.
­
CH1
Switch Setting
INT
Connected Devices
Built­in Microphone
Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1
CH2
INT
Microphone connected to
[INPUT1] terminal
Setting
[LINE]
[MIC]
[MIC+48]
Description
Use this setting when connecting to
an audio device or other equipment.
The reference input level is +4 dBu.
Use this setting when connecting to
a dynamic microphone.
Use this setting when connecting to
a microphone (phantom
microphone) that requires a +48 V
power supply.
Memo : When “MIC” or “MIC+48V” is selected, set the
reference input level in [Main Menu]-[A/V
Set]-[Audio Set]-[Input1 Mic Ref.]/[Input2
Mic Ref.].
(' P107 [ Input1 Mic Ref. ] )
(' P108 [ Input2 Mic Ref. ] )
Caution : When connecting a device that does not require
a +48 V power supply, make sure that it is not
set to the “MIC+48V” position.
When the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode switch is
set to “MIC”, make sure that a microphone is
connected to the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal. If
you increase the recording level when a
microphone is not connected, noise from the
input terminal may be recorded.
When a microphone is not connected to the
[INPUT1]/[INPUT2] terminal, set the [INPUT1]/
[INPUT2] mode switch to “LINE” or adjust the
volume with the [CH1]/[CH2] recording level
adjustment knob.
Built­in Microphone
Microphone connected to
[AUX] terminal
INPUT1
Microphone connected to
[INPUT1] terminal
INPUT2
Microphone connected to
[INPUT2] terminal
Memo : When “INT” is set, the built­in microphone is
disabled if a microphone is connected to the
[AUX] terminal; audio from the microphone
connected to the [AUX] is recorded.
When “INT” is selected, set the reference input
level in [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio Set]
-[Int. Mic Gain]/[AUX Gain].
(' P108 [ Int. Mic Gain ] )
(' P108 [ AUX Gain ] )
61
Shooting
INPUT2
Select the audio to input to [INPUT1] and [INPUT2]
terminals with the [INPUT1]/[INPUT2] mode
switch.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting Audio Recording Level
You can select to adjust the audio recording levels
for the two channels (CH1/CH2) manually or
automatically.
CH1
CH2
INT
INPUT1
INPUT2
LC
FULL AUTO
AUTO
MANUAL
Shooting
CH1
ON
CH2
OFF
Manual Adjustment Mode (Manual
Adjustment)
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch on
the camera recorder to “MANUAL” to enter the
manual adjustment mode, and use the [CH1]/
[CH2] recording level adjustment knob to set the
recording level.
You can adjust the level manually during the
recording, recording standby, and stop modes.
oSetting Input Channel to “INPUT1”/“INPUT2”
1 Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch to “MANUAL” for the
channel to be adjusted manually.
2 Turn the corresponding [CH1]/[CH2]
recording level adjustment knob to adjust
the level.
When [Audio Set]-[Limiter] is set to “Off”,
adjust such that the audio level meter does not
light up at ­2 dB even for loud sounds.
(' P108 [ Limiter ] )
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24,2012
12 :34 :56
4030 20
10
0
4030 20
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
10
0
-2dB
62
oSetting Input Channel to “INT” for Both [CH1] and
[CH2]
1 Set the [CH1 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to “MANUAL”.
2 Turn the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob to adjust the level.
When the built­in microphone and the [AUX]
input terminal are used, the recording levels of
[CH1] and [CH2] are interlocked.
This is also effective when the [CH1 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is set to [CH2].
Memo : Select [Limiter], [AGC Response], [AGC Mode],
or [Int. Mic Separation] in the menu to set the
recording audio.
For the reference level to be recorded to an SD
card, set [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio
Set]-[Ref. Level] to “­20dB”, “­18dB”, or
“­12dB”. (common for CH1/CH2)
(' P108 [ Ref. Level ] )
The operations of the [CH2] recording level
adjustment knob and [CH2 AUTO/MANUAL]
selection switch are disabled.
Automatic Adjustment Mode
Set the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection
switch to “AUTO” or the [FULL AUTO] switch to
“ON” to enter Automatic Adjustment mode. The
audio recording level is set automatically
according to the input level.
When the [FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”,
mode switching with the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switch is disabled.
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio Set]
-[Limiter] is set to “Off” while in the automatic
adjustment mode, the limiter operates at
­5dBFS.
If [Limiter] is set to other than “Off”, the limiter
operates according to the value set.
(' P108 [ Limiter ] )
When [A/V Set]-[Audio Set]-[Audio On FULL
AUTO] is set to “SW Set”, you can switch the
audio recording mode with the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch on the
camera recorder even if the [FULL AUTO]
switch is set to “ON”.
(' P109 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Monitoring Audio Sound
During Recording Using a
Headphone
You can check the recorded audio using
headphone.
1
When a stereo type earphone jack is connected,
perform the following setting to output stereo
sound.
1 Set the [MONITOR] selection switch to
“BOTH”.
2 Set [Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio
Set]-[Monitor] to “Stereo”.
(' P109 [ Monitor ] )
Memo : You can set the volume of the warning tone in
[Main Menu]-[A/V Set]-[Audio Set]-[Alarm
Level]. (“Off”/“Low”/“Middle”/“High”)
(' P109 [ Alarm Level ] )
3
MONITOR
CH1
BOTH
CH2
1 Connect the headphone.
2 Select the channel to monitor with the
[MONITOR] selection switch.
Setting
[CH1]
Description
Outputs the audio recorded in [CH1].
[BOTH]
Outputs the audio recorded in
[CH1/CH2].
[CH2]
Outputs the audio recorded in [CH2].
3 Use the [MONITOR +/­] button to adjust the
monitor volume.
Memo : Audio during recording is not output from the
monitor speaker.
Warning tone is output when there is an
abnormality in the camera recorder or when the
battery is low.
(' P162 [Warning Tone] )
63
Shooting
2
AUX
Selecting Audio Output Method When the
[MONITOR] Selection Switch Is Set to
“BOTH”
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Time Code and User’s Bit
Time code and user’s bit data are recorded with the
video in this camera recorder.
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording. (Display screen)
Displaying Time Code and User’s Bit
The time code and user’s bit are displayed on the
viewfinder and LCD monitor during playback or
recording.
The display differs according to the menu settings.
Shooting
1 Set [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display
Settings]-[TC/UB] to settings other than
“Off”.
(' P106 [ TC/UB ] )
When “TC” or “UB” is selected, time code or
user’s bit data is displayed respectively on the
display screen.
F F E E DD 20
00:00:00.00
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
Memo : Values recorded on the SD card is displayed in
Media mode.
64
Time Code Operation Mode
Set the time code operation in [Main Menu]-[TC/
UB]-[TC Generator].
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )
Setting
Description
Free Run(Ext) This mode synchronizes another
camera recorder connected to the
[TC] terminal. The time code
operates in the run mode at all
times regardless of the recording
status.
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Free Run
The time code operates in the run
mode at all times regardless of the
recording status.
It continues to run even when the
power of the camera recorder is
turned off.
Rec Run
The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. It
continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD
card is not replaced. If the SD card
is removed and recording is made
on another card, time code will be
recorded on the new card from
where it was left off in the previous
card.
Regen
The time code operates in the run
mode during recording. When the
SD card is replaced, the last time
code recorded on the card is read
and recorded on a new card so that
the time code continues in running
order.
(' P65 [Setting Time Code] )
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”,
“Interval Rec” or “Frame Rec”, and [TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, Rec Run is activated.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format]/
[3Format] is set to “AVCHD”, Pre Rec enters
Free Run mode.
(' P112 [ Format ] )
(' P113 [ 3 Format ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting Time Code
Generator
Presetting the Time Code
Time code and user’s bit data generated from the
internal time code generator are recorded.
This section describes how to set [TC/UB]-[TC
Preset].
(' P103 [ TC Preset ] )
Setting Time Code
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
Required Settings Before Preset
1 Set [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] to “Rec Run”
or “Free Run”.
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )
[Rec Run]:
Preset data in the time code generator
operates in run mode during recording
mode. Set this when recording continuous
time code in connecting frames.
[Free Run]:
Time code starts to operate in run mode from
the preset time in the time code generator.
2 Select the framing mode for the time code
generator (only when the frame rate setting
is “60” or “30”).
Set using [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[Drop
Frame].
(' P103 [ Drop Frame ] )
[Drop]:
Sets the run mode of the time code generator
to drop frame mode. Use this setting when
placing emphasis on the recording time.
[Non Drop]:
Sets the run mode of the time code generator
to non­drop frame mode. Use this setting
when placing emphasis on the number of
frames.
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
OIS / 2
LOLUX / 3
CANCEL
1 Select [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[TC
Preset] and press the Set button (R).
(' P103 [ TC Preset ] )
The [TC Preset] screen appears.
1
Memo : When [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as “Regen”
and cannot be selected.
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )
65
Shooting
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Frame & Bit Rate] is
set to “50i(UHQ)”, “50i(HQ)”, “50i(SP)”,
“50p(HQ)”, “50p(SP)”, “25p(HQ)”, “24p(UHQ)”,
“24p(HQ)” or “50i”, settings cannot be made in
“Drop”.
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
You can configure the setting without accessing
the [TC/UB] menu screen.
(' P67 [Setting Time Code without Opening
the Menu] )
Memo : Drop frame/non­drop frame mode
When the frame rate setting in [Main Menu][System]-[Record Set]-[Record Format][Frame & Bit Rate] is “60p”, “60i”, or “30p”, the
actual number of frames per second is
approximately 59.94 (29.97). However, the time
code processing standard is “60p”, “60i”, or
“30p” frames. To make up for the frame number
discrepancy, the drop frame mode (Drop) drops
the 00 frame and 01 frame every minute except
for minutes that are multiples of 10. However, in
the case of “60p”, the 00, 01, 02 and 03 frame
are dropped.
The non­drop frame mode (Non Drop) does not
drop frames and ignores the discrepancy with
the actual time.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
2 Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross­
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
1 Select [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[UB
Preset] and press the Set button (R).
(' P103 [ UB Preset ] )
The [UB Preset] setting screen appears.
Cursor
1
Shooting
During non-drop
frame
During drop frame
Memo : Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).
3 Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
The time code is set and the screen returns
to [TC/UB].
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
4 Press the [MENU] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
Memo : When [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the parameter is displayed as “Regen”
and cannot be selected.
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )
2 Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to place
the cursor at the item to set, then use the
cross­shaped button (JK) to change the
values.
Numbers between 0 and 9 or alphabets
between A and F can be specified for the user’s
bit.
Presetting the User’s Bit
You can add an 8­digit hexadecimal number as the
user’s bit to the recorded image.
Cursor
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
Memo : Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the left.
AE LEVEL
OIS / 2
CANCEL
66
LOLUX / 3
3 Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
The time code is set and the screen returns
to [TC/UB].
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
4 Press the [MENU] button.
Returns to the normal screen.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting Time Code without Opening the
Menu
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
OIS / 2
TIME CODE
Memo : Settings cannot be made in the following cases.
[TC/UB]-[TC Generator] has been set to
“Regen”.
Menu screen is displayed.
The camera recorder is not in the Camera
mode.
Setting Time Code
1 Set [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] to settings
other than “Regen”.
(' P102 [ TC Generator ] )
2 Hold down the [MENU] button and press the
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The [TC Preset] setting screen appears.
Cursor
Recording Time Code in Continuation of
the Recorded Time Code on SD Card
This camera recorder is equipped with the time
code reader.
1 Set [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] to “Regen”.
When the camera recorder enters from
recording standby mode to recording mode,
it reads the time code already recorded on
the SD card and records the new time code
in continuation of that value.
The same data as the user’s bit already
recorded on the SD card is recorded.
Memo : When [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] is set to
“Regen”, the framing mode of the time code
follows the settings in [TC/UB]-[Drop Frame]
instead of the clip settings.
(' P103 [ Drop Frame ] )
During drop frame
During non-drop frame
3 Set the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to place the
cursor at the item to set, then use the cross­
shaped button (JK) to change the values.
Memo : Press the [OIS/2] button to reset each digit to “0”.
The cursor moves to the time digit (left).
67
Shooting
FOCUS ASSIST/1
CANCEL
4 Check the values and press the Set button
(R).
The time code is set and the screen returns
to the normal screen.
To cancel the setting, press the [CANCEL]
button.
Caution : When the camera recorder is switched to Media
mode during editing, editing will be canceled
and the screen will close.
When editing the time code, operation of the
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] and [OIS/2] buttons that are
configured in [Main Menu]-[Camera
Function]-[User Switch Set] is disabled. The
[OIS/2] button functions as the number reset
button.
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Synchronizing Time Code
on Another Camera
This camera recorder is equipped with a time code
input/output terminal ([TC] terminal).
Connect another camera recorder to the [TC]
terminal and synchronize to the time code.
Shooting
1 Connect the [TC] terminal of the master
device with the [TC] terminal of the slave
device.
Set the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the master device
to “OUT”, and the [TC IN/OUT] switch of the
slave device to “IN”.
Master Device
[OUT]
INPUT2
IN OUT
INPUT1
TC
Settings and Operation of the Camera
Recorder
1 Set to Camera mode.
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
2 Set [TC/UB]-[TC Generator] as follows.
Slave device:
Select “Free Run(Ext)”.
Master device:
Select “Free Run”.
3 Set LCD monitor or viewfinder to Display 1
screen.
4 Set the master device and run the time
code.
When the built­in time code generator is
synchronized with the external time code
data input, the icon on Display 1 screen
lights up.
When time code is not synchronized or time
code input is not available, the icon goes
out.
BATT.RELE
ASE
00: 00: 00.00
AUX
A
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
E
HD/SD
SDI
AV
B
HDMI
REMO
TE
HOST
DC
Slave Device
(This Camera Recorder)
4030 20
[IN]
IN OUT
INPUT2
INPUT1
TC
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
REMO
TE
DC
68
HOST
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
Memo : The built­in time code generator will continue
operation even when the master device is
disconnected after synchronization.
User’s bit will become data in the master device.
While the [TC] terminal is connected, the time
code may be out of synchronization when the
[A/V Set]-[Video Set]-[HDMI/SDI Out]
setting of the Master device and Slave device is
being changed.
(' P107 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting Zebra Pattern
When the luminance level range for displaying
zebra patterns is specified, diagonal lines (zebra
pattern) are displayed at areas with the specified
luminance levels during shooting.
ZEBRA/5
AE
PUSH
LEV
EL
AUTO
Shooting
1 Set the zebra display pattern.
Select the display pattern in [LCD/VF]-
[Shooting Assist]-[Zebra].
2 Specify the brightness (luminance) level
range for displaying zebra pattern.
Specify the upper and lower limits of the
luminance level in [LCD/VF]-[Shooting
Assist]-[Zebra]-[Top] and [Bottom].
Item
Top
Settings
Options
Upper luminance 5% ­ 100%, Over
limit for displaying (in 5 % increments)
[Zebra]
Bottom
Lower luminance 0% ­ 100% (in 5 %
limit for displaying increments)
[Zebra]
3 Display the zebra pattern.
Press the [ZEBRA/5] button to display the zebra
pattern in the specified range.
Memo : “Zebra” is assigned to [ZEBRA/5] button in
factory default.
“Zebra” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
69
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Setting Spot Meter
Shooting
The brightness of the object during shooting is
displayed.
This function is useful when setting video or stage
lighting or when specifying camera exposure.
A cursor indicating the location and the brightness
(%) of that location are displayed in the images
shown on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
Zebra patterns display the brightness of output
video signals.
(' P69 [Setting Zebra Pattern] )
This function allows you to check the brightness
of input images from the lens without depending
on image processing such as gamma curve. The
dynamic range of the camera recorder is 400 %
and a brightness range of 0 % to 400 % and
above is displayed.
Memo : Spot meter may not be consistent with the zebra
display range. When [Camera Process]-
[Gamma] is set to “Cinema”, the 100IRE output
is not consistent with the 100 % display.
When an object of more than 400 % luminance
is detected, it is displayed as “400 %”.
(' P99 [ Gamma ] )
Item
Max & Min
Max
Min
Manual
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
CANCEL
.
1 Select one of the following from [Main
Menu]-[Camera Function]-
[User Switch Set]-[Spot Meter].
(' P97 [ Spot Meter ] )
70
Settings
Displays the
brightness (%)
and positions of
the brightest and
darkest areas in
the screen.
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
Displays the
brightness (%)
and position of the
brightest area in
the screen.
Frames may also
be stopped at the
current positions.
Displays the
brightness (%)
and position of the
darkest area in the
screen. Frame
may also be
stopped at the
current positions.
Displays the
brightness (%) of
the specified
position.
Color of Frame
Indicating the
Position
Max: Green
Min: Yellow
Green
Yellow
Green
(Blinks in green
when specifying
the position)
2 Assign the “Spot Meter” function to any of
the user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
3 Press the user button that is assigned with
“Spot Meter”.
The operation switches as below when the
button is pressed.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
When [Max & Min]/[Max]/[Min] is selected
When [Manual] is selected
A The cursors appear according to the setting
when the button is pressed.
Green and yellow frames appear, and the
brightness levels of these areas are displayed.
A The brightness of the cursor position is
displayed when the button is pressed.
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
10
0
P 13000K
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
Cursor
(Green)
Brightness Indication
10
0
P 13000K
5.
5.6 f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
0
P 13000K
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
10
0
P 13000K
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
Cursor
(Max: Green)
Brightness Indication
Cursor
(Min: Yellow)
C Pressing the button in the state in B stops the
automatic position detection. The frames are
fixed at the stopped positions and the
brightness levels are displayed.
D By pressing the button, the cursors and
brightness indication disappear.
C Hold down the button in the state in A or B, the
cursor blinks in green.
Move the cursor with the cross­shaped button
(JKHI) to specify the position to display the
brightness.
When you decide on the position, press the Set
button (R) to confirm.
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
Brightness Indication
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
Brightness
Indication
Shooting
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
10
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
B By pressing the button, the cursors and
brightness indication disappear.
4030
40
30 20
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
4030
40
30 20
Cursor
(Yellow)
B Hold down the button in the state in A, the
positions of the brightest (Max) and darkest
(Min) areas in the screen are automatically
detected with regard to the changes of the
object, and the brightness level of these areas
are displayed.
4030
40
30 20
Cursor (Green)
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
4030
40
30 20
00:00:00.00
282min
100min
50min
4030
40
30 20
10
0
P 13000K
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
Cursor
(Blinks in green)
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
4030
40
30 20
10
0
P 13000K
5.6
5. f t
ND 1/64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/100
D Frames are fixed at the stopped positions and
the brightness is displayed.
Memo : When moving the cursor position, [Shutter]/[AE
Level] control is disabled.
When the brightness is 0 % in the entire screen,
the frame is fixed in the center.
If the cursor is outside the “4:3” range, changing
[Main Menu]-[System]-[Record Set][Record Format]-[SD Aspect] from “16:9” to
“4:3” restores the cursor to the default position.
(' P113 [ SD Aspect ] )
71
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Acquiring Positioning
Information by GPS
This camera recorder comes with a built­in GPS
function. The GPS function is able to record the
positioning information.
During playback, you can also display the recorded
information on the playback screen.
(' P87 [Playing back] )
Shooting
1 Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[GPS] to
“On”.
Positioning starts when the icon on the
display screen starts blinking.
After positioning is complete, the icon
switches to a solid light and records the
positioning information during shooting.
The icon that appears on the screen
changes according to the condition of signal
reception from the GPS satellite.
The GPS function is able to record the
positioning information. However, the date/
time information (atomic clock) can be
recorded only when [Format] is set to
“AVCHD” on the slot to record to.
00: 00: 00.00
Display
(No
display)
Reception
Status
GPS reception
in progress
(signal strength:
strong)
Positioning Status
Receiving strong
GPS signal. UTC
and positioning
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
GPS function is The [GPS] item is
turned off
set to “Off”.
Memo : If positioning cannot be performed after waiting
for several minutes, this means GPS reception
is poor, and there is difficulty in receiving data.
Move to an open place with no obstructions.
Otherwise, GPS information will not be recorded
when shooting is performed.
Signal may not be received depending on
circumstances such as locations that are
indoors or surrounded by tall buildings, or the
geographical conditions.
Precision error may occur in the position
information depending on the conditions of
reception.
Even when positioning is in progress,
information may be disrupted depending on the
condition of signal reception.
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 :56
0
4030 20
10
0
Display
(Yellow)
(Blink)
72
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Reception
Status
[GPS] is set to
“On”, but signal
cannot be
received
Viewing Recorded Videos
Immediately (Clip Review)
Positioning Status
GPS signal cannot
be received. UTC
and positioning
information cannot
be obtained.
GPS search in UTC information
progress
can be obtained,
but not positioning
information.
GPS reception Receiving weak
in progress
GPS signal. UTC
(signal strength: and positioning
weak)
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
GPS reception Receiving GPS
in progress
signal. UTC and
(signal strength: positioning
medium)
information can be
obtained and
recorded.
You can check (review) the last recorded video clip
on the screen.
However, the video clip cannot be played back if
the settings of the camera recorder are different
from the video format (Resolution/Frame & Bit
Rate/SD Aspect) of the clip.
(' P112 [ Resolution ] )
(' P113 [ 3 Resolution ] )
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
(' P113 [ 3 Frame & Bit Rate ] )
(' P113 [ SD Aspect ] )
Memo : To use this function, assign “Clip Review” to any
of the user buttons. “Clip Review” is assigned to
[C.REVIEW/7] button in factory default.
“Clip Review” can also be assigned to other user
buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
C.REVIEW/7
INPUT2
INPUT1
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
REMO
TE
DC
HOST
Memo : The video clip is played back according to the
setting in [Main Menu]-[Camera Function][User Switch Set]-[Clip Review]. By default
setting (Last 5sec), the last 5 seconds of the clip
is played back.
(' P97 [ Clip Review ] )
When playback is complete, the camera
recorder exits Clip Review and returns to
“STBY” (recording standby) mode.
Caution : During Clip Review, only the [CANCEL] and
[REC] buttons are enabled.
Press the [CANCEL] button to cancel clip review
and return to “STBY” (recording standby) mode.
Press the [REC] button to cancel clip review and
enter recording mode. It will take some time to
start recording after the button is pressed.
When the last clip is less than 5 seconds, the
whole clip is played back.
Only video clips in the currently selected slot can
be reviewed.
When there are no clips in the selected slot, Clip
Review function is disabled.
Clip Review is unavailable when Clip
Continuous Rec is paused (“STBYC”, yellow
text). To operate Clip Review, use the
[CANCEL] button to set to “STBYC” (white text)
first.
(' P78 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
Clip Review is unavailable when the camera
recorder is connected to an external equipment
and the equipment is in recording state.
Clip Review is unavailable when operating View
Remote via network connection.
(' P150 [View Remote Feature] )
By setting [System] to “HD+SD” or “HD+Web”, you
can record simultaneously at two different
definitions.
When HD+SD is selected:
Records a high­definition (HD) file to slot A and
a standard definition (SD) file to slot B at the
same time.
When HD+Web is selected:
Records a high­definition (HD) file to slot A and
a low bit­rate web file to slot B at the same time.
Web files can be used as a proxy file for the HD
file.
Memo : If a recordable SD card is inserted into only one
of the slots, files will only be recorded to that slot.
The [Rec Mode] is fixed at “Normal”.
Clip Cutter Trig is disabled.
[Slot Mode] cannot be selected.
Clip Review can only be performed for slot A.
(“No Media” appears if there is no card in slot A
while a card is inserted into slot B.)
Playback of web files is only possible from slot
B when “HD+Web” is selected.
73
Shooting
1 Press the button assigned with the “Clip
Review” function during standby (“STBY”
is displayed).
Playback of the configured section starts.
Recording
Simultaneously at Two
Different Definitions
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Splitting the Clips Freely
(Clip Cutter Trig)
You can split the clips freely without having to stop
recording during shooting.
Shooting
1 Assign the “Clip Cutter Trig” function to
any of the user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
2 Press the user button that is assigned with
“Clip Cutter Trig” during shooting.
[CLIP CUT] appears on the display screen and
the clip is split.
REC
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
CLIP CUT
4030 20
10
0
CLIP CUT
P13000K
Dual Rec
If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the factory default ([Slot Mode] is set to
“Series”), pressing the [REC] button starts
recording only to the media in the selected slot.
When the remaining space in the selected
media runs out, recording continues by
automatically activating the media in the other
slot.
If both the slots are loaded with recordable cards
in the Dual Rec mode ([Slot Mode] is set to
“Dual”), pressing the [REC] button starts
recording simultaneously to the media in both
the slots.
The clips recorded to the media in both the slots
are identical, and two clips of the same content
can be created only on this camera recorder.
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
REC
HOLD
Memo : Clips cannot be split again for a few seconds
after the operation is performed.
This item cannot be used when [Slot Mode] is
set to “Backup”.
Available only when [System] is set to “HD” or
“SD”.
(' P76 [Backup Rec] )
This item cannot be used when [Rec Mode] is
set to a value other than “Normal” or “Pre Rec”.
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )
The split clips are recorded seamlessly without
interruptions in the video.
A
INPUT2
BATT.REL
EASE
A
AUX
POWE
/CHGR
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
REC
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
REC
B
REMO
TE
DC
HOST
Setting to Dual Rec Mode
1 Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Slot Mode] to “Dual”.
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )
“DUAL” appears on the display screen.
00: 00: 00.00
DUAL
4030 20
74
INPUT1
10
0
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
ISSUED
2012/12/21
2 Start recording.
Insert recordable media in both slots, and
press the [REC] button.
In the Dual Rec mode, recording to the media
in both slots starts at the same time.
Both the card slot marks turn red, and the
status indicators of both the card slots also
light up in red.
REC
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
Lit in red
10
0
P13000K
3 Stop recording.
Press the [REC] button again.
Recording to both slots stops, and both the
card slot marks turn white.
The same clips are recorded to both cards.
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
White
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
Memo : During recording in the Dual Rec mode, both the
card slot marks light up in red.
During recording in the Dual Rec mode to two
cards with a different amount of remaining
space, if the space of one card runs out,
recording to both slots will stop automatically.
After recording stops, recording automatically
resumes for the card with remaining space.
Although the clips are separated in this case, the
clips can be seamlessly joined by arranging
them on the timeline of the editing software since
they are recorded seamlessly.
If the last clip on the cards that are inserted in the
two slots are different from each other, and the
time code operating mode is set to “Regen”, the
Regen mode for the selected card slot will be
enabled in the next recording.
75
Shooting
4030 20
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
Caution : To perform recording in the Dual Rec mode, it is
recommended that you start recording by
making use of two cards with the same capacity
and from the formatted state.
You can combine the use of the Dual Rec mode
with a special recording mode. While in the Dual
Rec mode, you can also set [Rec Mode] to
“Normal”, “Pre Rec”, “Clip Continuous”, “Interval
Rec”, “Frame Rec”, or “Variable Frame”. When
[Main Menu]-[System]-[Record Set]-
[Record Format]-[Format] is set to “AVCHD”,
“Clip Continuous” cannot be selected.
(' P78 [Special Recording] )
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )
(' P112 [ Format ] )
When both slots are inserted with recordable
cards, the Dual Rec (simultaneous recording)
operation can be performed. If a recordable
media is only inserted in one of the slots, you can
also start recording with one card.
In the Dual Rec mode, continuous recording by
switching from one slot to another cannot be
performed. Continuous recording will not be
performed if a recordable media is inserted in a
slot after recording to the other slot has started.
When recording to one slot is in progress with
the recorder set to the Dual Rec mode, inserting
a recordable media to the other slot does not
enable the Dual Rec operation. To perform the
Dual Rec operation, stop recording temporarily
(excluding pausing recording in the Clip
Continuous Rec mode), and start again.
When one of the cards is accidentally removed
while recording is in progress in the Dual Rec
mode, recording to the card in the other slot will
continue. However, repair of the accidentally
removed card by the recovery function may fail.
If an error occurs on one of the cards while
recording is in progress in the Dual Rec mode,
recording of the erroneous card stops, while that
of the other card continues.
Operations on clips recorded in the Dual Rec
mode, such as clip deletion in the Media mode
or appending of OK marks, can only be
performed on the card in the selected slot.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Backup Rec
The Backup Rec mode allows you to make use
of the media in slot B for backup recording by
controlling the starting and stopping of recording
in slot B without using the [REC] button.
Start or stop the recording using [Main Menu][System]-[Record Set]-[Slot Mode]-
[Backup Rec] or press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )
Shooting
Slot B starts
recording
Slot A starts Slot A stops Slot B stops
recording
recording
recording
Clip 2
Slot A
Slot B
Clip 1
Clip 2
Clip 3
Memo : During the Backup Rec mode (when [Slot
Mode] is set to “Backup”), you can control
recording to the 2 slots at different timings, and
backup recording can only be performed on this
camera recorder.
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )
You can record without worrying about missing
the important scenes by setting slot B to be
always recording (backup recording) and using
the [REC] button to start/stop recording of only
the required scenes in slot A.
It is recommended to use a media with high
capacity in slot B.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, backup recording cannot be
performed.
(' P112 [ Format ] )
76
1 Set [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Record Set]-[Slot Mode] to “Backup”.
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )
“BACKUP” appears on the display screen.
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
BACKUP
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
2 Start backup recording. (Backup recording
into slot B)
Select “REC” in [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Record Set]-[Slot Mode]-[Backup
Rec] and press the Set button (R).
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )
Backup recording into slot B starts. (The
characters “BACKUP” appear in red.)
The card slot mark of slot B turns red
(selected state), and the status indicator of
slot B also blinks in red.
Red
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
100min
50min
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
Red (selected)
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
ISSUED
2012/12/21
3 Start normal recording (normal recording
into slot A)
Press any of the [REC] buttons.
Recording into the media in slot A starts.
(The characters “RREC” appear in red.)
The card icon of slot A turns red (unselected
state), and the status indicator of slot A blinks
in red.
Red (not selected)
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
4 Stop normal recording.
Press any of the [REC] buttons again.
Recording to slot A stops, and the card slot
mark of slot A turns white (unselected state).
The characters “RREC” (red) changes back
to “STBY” (white).
The status indicator of slot A goes out.
White (not selected)
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
100min
50min
4030 20
10
0
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
White
00: 00: 00.00
100min
50min
Jan 24 ,2012
12 :34 : 56
100min
50min
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
Memo : During backup recording, if the space of one
card runs out, recording stops only for the card
that is full.
When recording to both slots is stopped,
recording in the Regen mode will be enabled for
the card slot in which recording started.
When recording is started in the other slot while
recording to one slot, the clip being recorded is
split and simultaneous recording to the other
card starts.
When recording is stopped for either slot A or B
while recording to both slots, the clip on the slot
which is still recording is split.
Although the clips are separated during
recording the clips can be seamlessly joined by
arranging them on the timeline of the editing
software since they are recorded seamlessly.
Clip Cutter Trig cannot be performed during
backup recording.
(' P74 [Splitting the Clips Freely (Clip Cutter
Trig)] )
When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, [Rec
Mode] can only be set to “Normal”.
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )
77
Shooting
100min
50min
5 Stop backup recording.
Select [STBY] in [Main Menu]-[System]
-[Record Set]-[Slot Mode]-[Backup
Rec] and press the Set button (R).
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )
You can also press the user button that is
assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )
Recording to slot B stops, and the card slot
mark of slot B turns white (unselected state).
The characters “BACKUP” changes back to
white.
The status indicator of slot B lights up in
green.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Special Recording
Besides the normal recording mode, five special
recording methods are available in this camera
recorder. They are Pre Rec, Clip Continuous,
Frame Rec, Interval Rec and Variable Frame.
Select a mode from [Record Set]-[Rec Mode].
Shooting
Memo : Set using [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode].
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, “Clip Continuous” cannot be
selected.
(' P112 [ Format ] )
Pre Rec
By setting the number of seconds in the [Pre Rec
Time], you can start recording video and audio
before actual recording starts based on the [Pre
Rec Time] setting.
When starting actual recording while the camera
recorder is in Recording Standby (STBYP)
mode, you can start recording a few seconds
earlier based on the [Pre Rec Time] setting.
Using Pre Rec allows you to record a complete
event without missing the initial scenes even if
you start the recording late.
Memo : Pre Rec Time can be set to “5sec”, “10sec”, or
“15sec” in [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode]-[Pre Rec Time].
(' P114 [ Pre Rec Time ] )
Completed Clip
(Recorded video and audio)
Recording starts a
number of seconds
earlier based on the
[Pre Rec Time] setting
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
(Recording starts) (Recording stops)
.
78
1 Set [Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Pre Rec”.
The display changes (“STBY”-“STBYP”).
2 Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Pre Rec mode.
The display changes (“STBYP”-
“RRECP”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECP”
-“STBYP”) and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green.
Caution : When the interval between start and stop
recording is short, “STBYP” may not be
displayed immediately after recording is
complete.
“RRECP”-“STBYP” (“STBY” blinks in red)
-“STBYP” is displayed.
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is
displayed.
Video and audio before the above mentioned
time may not be recorded after recording starts
in the following cases.
Immediately after power on
Immediately after recording stops
Immediately after switching from Media
mode to Camera mode
Immediately after setting [Rec Mode]
Immediately after the end of Clip Review
Immediately after changing file format
Immediately after changing video format
Clip Continuous Rec
In normal recording, when the recording stops,
the image, audio, and accompanying data from
the start till the end of the recording are recorded
as one “clip” on the SD card.
This mode allows you to consolidate several
rounds of “startstop recording” into one clip.
Example:
In normal recording, three clips are generated as
Recording 1, Recording 2, and Recording 3.
However, recording in this mode generates only
one clip.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Press [REC]
(Recording starts)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press [REC]
(Recording resumes)
Press and hold [REC]
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
(Recording pauses) (Recording pauses) (Recording stops)
Recording 1
Recording 2
Recording 3
Completed Clip
(Recorded video and audio)
Recording 1 Recording 2 Recording 3
4 Resume recording. (Recording 2)
Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) -“RRECC”).
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
Memo : The following operations cannot be performed
while recording is paused (STBYC, yellow text).
Clip Review operation
(' P72 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
Switching SD card slots
Switching operation mode
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Files are split into sizes of 4 GB (or 30 minutes)
regardless of the menu settings.
Caution : Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RRECC, red text) or recording pause
(STBYC, yellow text).
To remove the SD card in the “Clip Continuous”
mode, press the [CANCEL] button, check that
“STBYC” (white text) is displayed and the card
slot status indicator lights up in green before you
remove the card.
When the SD card becomes full during
recording, recording stops and “STOP” is
displayed.
When the [POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is
turned off during recording or recording pause,
recording stops and power is cut off after a clip
is generated.
79
Shooting
1 Set “Rec Mode” to “Clip Continuous”.
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Clip Continuous”.
The display changes (“STBY”-“STBYC”).
2 Start recording. (Recording 1)
Press the [REC] button to start recording in
Clip Continuous mode.
The display changes (“STBYC”-
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
3 Pause recording.
Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
-“STBYC” (yellow text)).
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
Memo : When the [CANCEL] button is pressed while the
camera recorder is paused (STBYC), the
display changes (“STBYC” (yellow text) -
“STBYC” (blinking yellow text) -“STBYC”
(white text)), and a “clip” is generated. The card
slot status indicator lights up in green.
5 Pause recording.
Press the [REC] button again to pause
recording. The display changes (“RRECC”
-“STBYC” (yellow text)).
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
6 Resume recording. (Recording 3)
Press the [REC] button again to resume
recording. The display changes (“STBYC”
(yellow text) -“RRECC”).
The card slot status indicator remains lighted
in red.
7 Press and hold the [REC] button.
Recording stops and the display changes
(“RRECC”-“STBYC”). A “clip” is
generated.
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
8 Press the [REC] button again.
The display changes (“STBYC”-
“RRECC”) and the card slot status indicator
lights up in red.
A new “clip” is generated from here.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Caution : If the power is cut off due to low battery power,
a proper clip may not be generated.
When [Format]/[3Format] in the [Main
Menu]-[System]-[Record Set]-[Record
Format] menu is set to “AVCHD”, Clip
Continuous Rec cannot be performed.
(' P112 [ Format ] )
(' P113 [ 3 Format ] )
Frame Rec
Shooting
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording starts with every press of
the [REC] button, and only the specified number of
frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo : Audio will not be recorded.
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file cannot be written to the
media.
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
Press [REC]
(Frame Rec starts)
Press and hold [REC]
(Frame Rec stops)
Press [REC]
Press [REC]
Recording resumes Recording resumes
Pause
Pause
Pause
Normal recording
(Padding data)
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
Actual clips recorded to the media
.
80
Specific amount of data
1 Set [Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Frame Rec”.
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )
The display changes (“STBY”-“STBY”).
2 Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
Set using [Main Menu]-[System][Record Set]-[Rec Mode]-[Rec Frames].
(' P114 [ Rec Frames ] )
3 Start recording.
Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
The display changes (“STBY”-“RREC”
-“STBY” (yellow text)).
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
4 Repeat Frame Rec.
Press the [REC] button again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
The display changes (“STBY”-“RREC”
-“STBY” (yellow text)).
Frame Rec continues until the recording is
stopped (step 5).
5 Press and hold the [REC] button.
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
Caution : Do not remove the SD card during recording
(“RREC”, red text) or recording pause
(“STBY”, yellow text).
To remove the SD card during Frame Rec, press
the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBY”
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
When [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec
Run”.
Audio cannot be recorded. A [ mark appears
in the audio level meter display.
(' P122 [Audio Level Meter] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Interval Rec
Press [REC]
(Interval Rec starts)
Press [REC]
(Interval Rec stops)
Recording resumes Recording resumes
[Rec Interval]
Pause
[Rec Interval]
Pause
Pause
Normal recording
(Padding data)
Records number of frames specified in [Rec Frames]
Actual clips recorded to the media
.
Specific amount of data
3 Set the time interval to start recording in
[Interval Rec].
Set using [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode]-[Rec Interval].
(' P114 [ Rec Interval ] )
4 Start recording.
Press the [REC] button to record only the
number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
After the specified time in [Rec Interval] has
passed, recording starts again to record only
the number of frames specified in [Rec
Frames] and pause.
Interval Rec continues until the recording is
stopped.
The display changes (“STBY”-“RREC”
-“STBY” (red text) -“RREC”-
“STBY” (red text)).
The card slot status indicator blinks in green.
5 Press and hold the [REC] button.
The card slot status indicator lights up in
green.
The display becomes “STBY”.
Caution : Do not remove the SD card during recording
(RREC, red text) or recording pause (STBY,
yellow text).
To remove the SD card during Interval Rec,
press the [CANCEL] button, check that “STBY”
(white text) is displayed and the card slot status
indicator lights up in green before you remove
the card.
When [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec
Run”.
Audio cannot be recorded. A [ mark appears
in the audio level meter display.
(' P122 [Audio Level Meter] )
1 Set [Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Interval Rec”.
(' P114 [ Rec Interval ] )
The display changes (“STBY”-“STBY”).
2 Set the number of frames to record in [Rec
Frames].
Set using [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode]-[Rec Frames].
(' P114 [ Rec Frames ] )
81
Shooting
In normal recording, when the recording stops, the
image and accompanying data from the start till the
end of the recording are recorded as one “clip” on
the SD card.
In this mode, recording and pause are performed
repeatedly at the specified time interval. Only the
specified number of frames is recorded.
The recording can be written to the media as a
single clip until it is stopped.
Memo : Audio will not be recorded.
Until a specified amount of recordings is
accumulated, the file will not be written to the
media.
After the specified number of frames is recorded
and written to the media, recording will be
performed until the same number is
accumulated again.
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Variable Frame Rec
Shooting in this mode allows you to obtain smooth
slow motion or quick motion videos.
Using different frame rate settings for recording
and playback, videos captured at normal speed
can be played back more smoothly than those in
low or high speed playback.
To enable Variable Frame Rec, the following two
settings are required at the same time.
[Record Format]-[Resolution]/
Shooting
[3Resolution] is set to “1920x1080” or
“1280x720”.
[Record Format]-[Frame & Bit Rate]/
[3Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “30p(HQ)”,
“24p(UHQ)”, “24p(HQ)” or “25p(HQ)”.
Number of Frames that can be Set
1 Set [Resolution] and [Frame & Bit Rate].
(' P112 [ Resolution ] )
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
[Resolution]:
Set to “1920x1080” or “1280x720”.
[Frame & Bit Rate]:
Set to “30p(HQ)”, “24p(UHQ)”, “24p(HQ)” or
“25p(HQ)”.
2 Set [Rec Mode] to “Variable Frame”.
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Rec Mode] to “Variable Frame”.
3 Select a recording frame rate from
[Frame & Bit Rate].
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
The selectable frame rates are as shown in the
table below.
Resolution
1920x1080
Frame & Bit Rate
30p(HQ)
1280x720
24p(UHQ)
24p(HQ)
25p(HQ)
30p(HQ)
24p(HQ)
25p(HQ)
Effect during playback
82
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[Camera Function]-[AE
LEVEL SW] is set to “AE LEVEL/VFR”, you can
use the cross­shaped button (HI) to select the
frame rate during Variable Frame Rec. In modes
other than Variable Frame Rec, the cross­
shaped button (HI) functions as the AE level
setting button.
(' P95 [ AE Level ] )
If the specified amount is not reached when
recording is stopped, normal recording is
performed and frames are added to the ending
of the clip until the amount is reached. (Padding)
Caution : The shooting frame rate cannot be changed
during recording. To change the frame rate, stop
the recording first and perform the change.
When [Main Menu]-[TC/UB]-[TC
Generator] is set to “Free Run” or “Free
Run(Ext)”, the time code will be recorded in “Rec
Run”.
Audio cannot be recorded. A [ mark appears
in the audio level meter display.
(' P122 [Audio Level Meter] )
Selectable Shooting Frame Rate
30
27, 25, 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10,
6, 2
30, 27, 25
24
22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6, 2
­
­
25
24, 22.5, 20, 18, 12.5, 10, 6, 2
60, 54, 50, 48, 45, 40,
30
27, 25, 24, 22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10,
36, 32
6, 2
60, 54, 50, 48, 45, 40,
24
22.5, 20, 18, 15, 12, 10, 6, 2
36, 32, 30, 27, 25
50, 48, 45, 40, 36, 32
25
24, 22.5, 20, 18, 12.5, 10, 6, 2
Slow motion
Standard
Quick motion
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Playing Recorded Clips
To play back clips recorded on SD cards, switch to
the Media mode.
Press and hold the [MODE] selection button in
Camera mode to enter Media mode. A thumbnail
screen of the clips recorded on the SD card is
displayed.
You can play back the selected clip on the
thumbnail screen.
Memo : When an SD card without any clips is inserted,
“No Clips” is displayed.
Operation Buttons
A
MENU/THUMB
B
CANCEL
DISPLAY
STATUS
I
H
D
C
A
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
C
Thumbnail Screen
“Standard Screen” and “Detailed Screen” are
available.
Use the [DISPLAY] button to switch between the
screens.
Thumbnails are displayed in order of recording
from the oldest to most recent.
Standard screen
J
I
A
B
C
AE LEVEL
D
B
FOCUS ASSIST/1
OIS / 2
LOLUX / 3
TIME CODE
E
F
G
A [MENU/THUMB] Button
Displays the menu.
Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the
thumbnail screen.
B [CANCEL] (Stop) Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
C Set (Play) Button
Sets the values and items. (Confirm)
Plays back the selected clip.
D Cross­Shaped Button (JKHI)
Moves the cursor.
E [FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
Switches the OK mark of the clip selected by
the cursor.
If an OK mark has been appended, it will be
deleted. Otherwise, an OK mark will be
appended.
H
D
E
F
G
A SD Card Information
Displays the status of the inserted SD card,
selected SD card, write­protect switch, and
the need for restoring.
Use the [SLOT A/B] switch to switch slots.
Clips in slot A and B cannot be displayed at
the same time.
2 : Write­protect switch of the SD card
in slot A is set.
: SD card in slot B needs to be
restored or formatted, or is an
unsupported SD card.
B Clip Mark
Displays the clip information (properties).
A
E
B
D
C
A OK Mark
Clip is appended with OK mark.
83
Playback
Use the operation buttons, on the side control
panel of the camera recorder or the LCD monitor,
to operate the thumbnail screen.
F [OIS/2] Button
Switches the selection status of the clip
selected by the cursor.
Clips being selected are displayed with
check mark.
G [LOLUX/3] Button
Enters the action selection screen.
H [DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the “Standard Screen” and
“Detailed Screen”.
I [STATUS] Button
Displays the media information screen.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Memo : Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, the OK mark indicates that the clip is
protected.
(' P112 [ Format ] )
Playback
B Continued From Mark
This mark indicates that the current clip is
continued from another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
C Uneditable Mark
This mark indicates that an OK mark cannot
be appended to or deleted from the clip, and
the clip cannot be deleted.
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set
to “AVCHD”, clips that are not recorded on
this camera recorder cannot be edited.
D Continue Mark
This mark indicates that recording of the current
clip is continued to another SD card when
recording is divided and made on several SD
cards.
E Check Mark
A green check mark is displayed when the
clip is selected.
Magenta and gray check marks are
displayed in multiple selection mode.
(' P89 [Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] )
C Cursor
Clip to be worked on. Use the cross­shaped
button (JKHI) to move the cursor.
D Thumbnail Substitution Display
A
B
A A clip with corrupted management information.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
B A clip that cannot be played back nor displayed
in thumbnail with the current video format
settings.
It cannot be played back even if you press the
Set (Play) button.
84
Memo : Dependent on the settings for [Main Menu]-
[System]-[Record Set]-[Record Format]
-[System], [Resolution]/[3Resolution], and
[Frame & Bit Rate]/[3Frame & Bit Rate].
(' P111 [ System ] )
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
When [Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, you may not be able to play back files
recorded on a camera recorder other than the
GY­HM600 and GY­HM650 series.
If the file cannot be played back, the above
thumbnail substitution display 2 is displayed.
E Clip Name
The file name (clip number) of the selected clip
is displayed.
F Operation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
The action selection screen is displayed
when the User 3 ([LOLUX/3]) button is
pressed.
(' P85 [Actions] )
G Recording Start Time
Displays the recording start time of the clip.
Memo : Data/time display depends on the [LCD/VF]-
[Display Settings]-[Date Style]/[Time Style]
settings in the [Main Menu] screen.
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )
H Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
Black space below the scroll bar (white)
indicates that there are more pages.
When the scroll bar (white) is at the bottom,
this indicates the last page.
I Remaining Battery Power
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )
J Number of Clips
If none of the clips are selected, the “running
number/total number of clips” of the clip to be
displayed appears.
Even if only one clip is selected, the number
of selected clips in the current slot is
displayed.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Detailed screen
* Items that are common with the Standard screen
will not be described. Refer to “[Standard
screen] P 83”.
A
B
C
The action selection screen is displayed when the
User 3 ([LOLUX/3]) button is pressed.
You can perform the following operations.
Item
Select All Clips
Select OK
Marked
Select Range
Description
Selects all clips.
Selects all clips appended with
OK mark.
Specifies the range when
selecting multiple clips.
(' P89 [Selecting Multiple
Clips Randomly] )
Deselect All
Clears all clip selections.
Add OK Mark
Appends an OK mark.
This Clip:
Appends an OK mark to the
clip pointed by the cursor.
Selected Clips:
Appends an OK mark to the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
All Clips:
Appends an OK mark to all
clips.
Delete OK Mark Deletes the OK mark.
This Clip:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clip pointed by the cursor.
Selected Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of the
clips selected (appended
with check mark).
All Clips:
Deletes the OK mark of all
clips.
85
Playback
A Thumbnail
Thumbnail of the clip selected by the cursor.
Use the cross­shaped button (HI) to move the
cursor.
B Scroll Mark (DE)
If there are previous clips, D appears on the
left.
If there are more clips, E appears on the
right.
The marks will not be displayed if there are
no clips before and after the current clip.
C Metadata
Metadata of the clip pointed by the cursor.
You can use the cross­shaped button (JK) to
scroll.
Actions
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Item
FTP Upload
Delete Clips
Playback
Description
Uploads a clip to the FTP server.
This Clip:
Uploads the clip pointed by
the cursor.
Selected Clips:
Uploads the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
All Clips:
Uploads all clips.
Deletes clip. However, clips with
OK mark cannot be deleted.
This Clip:
Deletes the clip pointed by
the cursor.
Selected Clips:
Deletes the clips selected
(appended with check
mark).
All Clips:
Deletes all clips.
Memo : The object of action is the clip of the current slot
being displayed.
[Selected Clips] cannot be performed if there are
no selected (appended with check mark) clips.
[This Clip] cannot be performed if there are more
than one selected (appended with check mark)
clips.
If the write­protect switch of an SD card is set,
OK mark cannot be appended or deleted, and
the clips cannot be deleted.
Playing back
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
of the camera recorder to play back.
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
A
B
CANCEL
C
A IW Button
Plays back/pauses the clip pointed by the
cursor.
You can press the cross­shaped button (HI)
to perform frame­by­frame forward playback
during pause mode.
B S/T Button
Skips in the reverse or forward direction.
O/N Button
During Playback:
Fast forwards in the reverse or forward
direction.
While paused:
Frame­by­frame playback in the reverse or
forward direction.
C o Button
Stops playback.
1 In the thumbnail screen, move the cursor to
the clip to be played back.
Move the cursor to the clip to be played back
using the cross­shaped button (JKHI).
2 Press the playback/pause button.
Playback of the selected clip starts.
Audio Output during Playback
You can confirm the playback sound from the
monitor speaker, or the headphone connected
to the [+] terminal. When a headphone is
connected to the [+] terminal, sound cannot be
output from the monitor speaker.
(' P137 [Connecting the Headphone] )
Adjust the volume of the monitor speaker and
headphone using the [MONITOR +/­] volume
adjustment button on the LCD monitor section
of the camera recorder.
86
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Time Code Playback
Time code or user’s bit recorded on an SD card can
be displayed on the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Memo : The time code is also superimposed on the
video signal output from the [HD/SD SDI] output
terminal.
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD SDI] output
terminal is used as a flag to determine valid
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will
not be output.
If a section without time code is played back, the
time code will stop. However, playback will
continue.
Deleting Clips
Delete clip.
MENU/THUMB
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
OIS / 2
Displaying Information during Shooting
Playback
During playback, pressing the [DISPLAY] button
shows the display screen.
Pressing the [AE LOCK/4] button switches the
display information during shooting between no
display, camera information display, and GPS
display.
The GPS display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
The local date/time is displayed.
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
LOLUX / 3
CANCEL
Memo : Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
deleted on the camera recorder.
Read­only clips can be deleted on a PC.
Deleting One Clip
Delete the clip (one clip) pointed by the cursor in
[Delete Clips]-[This Clip] in the menu.
Memo : Clips with OK mark cannot be deleted.
During Thumbnail Screen
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
P13000K
AE LOCK/4
Hide
Camera Information
Display
AE LOCK/4
AE LOCK/4
1 Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted.
Move the cursor to the clip to be deleted using
the cross­shaped button (JKHI).
1
+35.483197
+139.652172
Oct 30,2012
07:01:58PM
GPS Display
Memo : When [System]-[Record Set]-[Record
Format]-System is set to “HD+SD” or “HD
+Web”, only SD or web files can be played back
from slot B.
In this case, files up­converted into the HD size
are played back in the simple mode.
2 Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
87
ISSUED
2012/12/21
3 Select [Delete Clips]-[This Clip] and press
the Set button (R).
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
Appending/Deleting OK
Mark
You can append OK marks to the clips for
important scenes.
Clips appended with OK marks cannot be
3
deleted, thus protecting the important clips.
When the camera recorder is in Media mode,
you can delete the OK marks appended during
recording, or append/delete OK marks after
shooting.
4 Select [Delete] using the cross­shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
Deleting starts.
MENU/THUMB
Playback
CANCEL
4
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1
LOLUX / 3
CANCEL
During Thumbnail Screen
1 Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
Selecting and Deleting Multiple Clips
To select and delete multiple clips, refer to
“[Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips] P 89”.
Deleting All Clips
Delete all clips that are displayed.
1 Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
2 Select [Delete Clips]-[All Clips].
A screen to confirm deletion appears.
3 Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
Deleting starts.
Memo : The time taken to delete clips depends on the
number of clips to be deleted.
88
OK Mark
ISSUED
2012/12/21
During Playback or Pause Screen
1 Press [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button during clip
playback.
If the clip does not have an OK mark, an OK
mark will be appended.
If the clip is appended with an OK mark, the
OK mark will be deleted.
1000/2000
282min
1920x1080
60i HQ
00:00:00.00
Jan 24,2012
12:34:56
4030
40
30 20
0
OK Mark
Memo : The clip pauses when an OK mark is appended
or deleted during playback.
Appending/Deleting OK Mark of
Multiple Clips
To select and append/delete OK mark for multiple
clips, refer to “[Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple Clips] P 89”.
Multiple clips can be selected during thumbnail
screen or playback screen display.
After selecting multiple clips, perform
appending/deleting of OK mark, deleting of clips
using the action selection screen.
After selecting multiple clips, the selections will
be canceled by the following operations.
When [Deselect All] in the action menu is
selected
When exiting Media mode from the thumbnail
screen
When removing the SD card
When switching the slot in use
Selecting Multiple Clips Randomly
1 Move the cursor to a clip without check
mark and press the [OIS/2] button.
A green check mark appears on the clip.
1
2 Repeat Step 1 to select multiple clips.
Multiple clips can be selected.
Press the [LOLUX/3] button while the
multiple clips are selected.
Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark]-[Selected Clips]
Deletes OK mark together:
[Delete OK Mark]-[Selected Clips]
Uploading selected clips to the FTP server
together:
[FTP Upload]-[Selected Clips]
Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips]-[Selected Clips]
Memo : Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [OIS/2] button will cancel the
selection.
If the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
89
Playback
1000/2000
10
Selecting and Performing
Operations on Multiple
Clips
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Selecting Multiple Clips Consecutively
1 Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
2 Select “Select Range” in the action
selection screen, and press the Set button
(R).
2
Playback
3 Move the cursor to the beginning (or end)
of the range for multiple selection, and
press the Set button (R).
4 Move the cursor to the other end of the
range.
Magenta check marks appear on the clips
within the range. (Including clips that were
already selected.)
Gray check marks appear on selected clips
that are outside the range.
3
4
90
5 Press the Set button (R) to confirm the
range.
The check marks change from magenta to
green.
Pressing the [LOLUX/3] button while the
multiple clips are selected displays the
action selection screen. The following
operations can be performed.
Appends OK mark together:
[Add OK Mark]-[Selected Clips]
Deletes OK mark together:
[Delete OK Mark]-[Selected Clips]
Uploading selected clips to the FTP server
together:
[FTP Upload]-[Selected Clips]
Deletes selected clips together:
[Delete Clips]-[Selected Clips]
Memo : Selecting clips appended with check mark and
pressing the [OIS/2] button will cancel the
selection.
If the operation is performed on multiple clips at
the same time, a progress bar appears. You can
stop the operation by pressing the Set button (R)
while the operation is in progress. However, it is
not possible to undo operations that are
completed.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Basic Operations in Menu
Screen
Press the [MENU/THUMB] button on the side
Operation Buttons
Use the operation buttons on the side control panel
of the camera recorder or the buttons on the LCD
monitor to operate the menu.
A
MENU/THUMB
B
CANCEL
D
DISPLAY
G
C
A
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
D
B
CANCEL
C
FOCUS ASSIST/1
OIS / 2
TIME CODE
E
F
91
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
control panel of the camera recorder or on the
LCD monitor to display the menu screen on the
LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Various settings for shooting and playback can
be configured on the menu screen.
There are two types of menu screens ­ [Main
Menu] and [Favorites Menu].
[Main Menu] contains all the setting items of the
camera recorder, classified according to
functions and uses, while [Favorites Menu]
allows users to customize the menu items freely.
(' P117 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )
The operating procedures and main screen
displays are the same for both menus.
The menu screen can also be displayed on
external monitors connected to the video signal
output terminal.
(' P107 [ Display On TV ] )
A [MENU/THUMB] Button
Displays the menu screen. The [Main
Menu] screen is displayed by default.
During normal usage, [Main Menu] is
displayed if the previous menu operation
ended at [Main Menu], and [Favorites
Menu] if the previous menu operation ended
at [Favorites Menu].
Press this button to close the menu screen
during menu display and return to the normal
screen.
B [CANCEL] Button
Cancels settings and returns to the previous
screen.
C Set Button (R)
Sets the values and items.
D Cross­shaped Button (JKHI)
J : Moves the cursor upward.
K : Moves the cursor downward.
H : Moves back to the previous item.
I : Moves forward to the next item.
E [FOCUS ASSIST/1] Button
Adds the selected menu or submenu item to the
[Favorites Menu].
(' P117 [Adding/Editing Frequently Used
Menu Items (Favorites Menu)] )
F [OIS/2] Button
Resets settings in the [TC Preset] or [UB
Preset] setting screen. This button is disabled
in other screens.
G [DISPLAY] Button
Switches between the [Main Menu] and
[Favorites Menu] screens.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Display and Description of the Menu
Screen
Selecting Menu Items
I
A
B
C
F
E
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
A Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross­
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
B Menu Item
Displays the names of the menu item and
sub­menu.
Menu items with [...] after them indicates that
there is a sub­menu to access.
C Fixed Item
Items that cannot be changed are displayed in
gray and cannot be selected.
D Operation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
E Setting Value
Setting values for the menu items.
For menus with sub­menus, values are not
displayed.
F Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
G Header
Indicates the current menu type with the line
color.
Blue
: [Main Menu] Screen
Green
: [Favorites Menu] (Operation
screen)
Magenta : [Favorites Menu] (Editing screen)
H Remaining Battery Power
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )
Memo : If the supplied battery (or equivalent battery sold
separately) is not used, the battery mark which
indicates the battery level may not appear.
92
F
A
E
D
C
H
G
D
I Menu Title
Title of the currently displayed menu.
Changing Setting Values
B
A Menu Item to Change
Menu item to be changed.
A list of setting values F appears in a pop­up.
B Operation Guide
Guide for the current operation buttons.
C Setting Values Before Change
Setting values before changing. The
background of the item is displayed in blue.
D Scroll Bar
Indicates the scroll position.
E Cursor
Indicates the selected item. Use the cross­
shaped button (JK) to move the cursor
F List of Setting Values
A pop­up displaying a list of setting values for
selection.
The height of the pop­up depends on the
number of settings available. Use the scroll
bar D to confirm the current display status.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Text Input with Software Keyboard
Use the software keyboard to enter the [Scene
File]/[Picture File] subname, [Clip Name Prefix],
and the settings under [Network]-[Settings].
[Scene File]/[Picture File]
(' P131 [Configuring Setup Files] )
A
B
H
C
D
G
F
E
(' P115 [ Clip Name Prefix ] )
A
B
H
C
D
E
Settings under [Network]-[Settings]
The keyboard displayed varies according to the
settings.
(' P115 [Settings Item] )
A
B
C
H
D
F
B Character Cursor
Select a character using the key cursor D, and
press the Set button (R) to input the selected
character at the position of the character cursor.
The character cursor moves to the next position
on the right each time a character is input.
The cursor can be moved using the arrow keys
H.
C Character Keys
Use the cross­shaped button (JKHI) to move
the key cursor D to the character you want to
enter.
D Key Cursor
Indicates the currently selected character or
item. Use the cross­shaped button (JKHI) to
move the cursor.
E Confirmation Buttons
Select [Set]/[Store] and press the Set button
(R) to confirm the title.
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R)
on the side control panel of the camera
recorder to abort character input and return
to the previous screen.
F [SP] Space Key
Select [SP] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
enter a space at the current position of the
character cursor B.
G [7] Backspace Key
Select [7] and press the Set button (R) on the
side control panel of the camera recorder to
delete the character on the left of the character
cursor B.
H Arrow Keys
Moves the position of the character cursor B.
I Character Switch Button
Switches the character buttons C to the upper
case, lower case, and symbols.
G
I
E
93
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
[Clip Name Prefix]
A Character Entry Field
Field for entering the title.
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Scene File]/[Picture File] subname or up to
4 characters for the [Clip Name Prefix].
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Menu Screen Hierarchical
Chart
TC/UB...
TC Generator
TC Preset
Main Menu...
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Camera Function...
Bars
OIS
Flicker Correction
Flash Band Correction
Shutter
AE Level
AE Speed
ALC Limit
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
EEI Limit
Smooth Trans
GAIN L
GAIN M
GAIN H
AE LEVEL SW
Handle Zoom Speed
UB Preset
Drop Frame
LCD/VF...
Shooting Assist...
Marker Settings...
Display Settings...
LCD + VF
VF Color
VF Bright
VF Contrast
LCD Contrast
LCD Backlight
LCD Mirror
A/V Set...
Video Set...
AF Assist
User Switch Set...
Audio Set...
System...
Camera Process...
Detail
Master Black
Black Toe
Knee
White Clip
Gamma
WDR
White Balance...
Color Matrix
Color Gain
Reverse Picture
Shooting Mode
Reset Process
Adjust...
Record Set...
Media...
Setup File...
Auto Power Off
Tally Lamp
GPS
Network
Adjust...
Reset All
Date/Time
Time Zone
System Information
Memo : Some menus cannot be set depending on the operating mode or status of the camera recorder. These
items are displayed in gray, and they cannot be selected.
Setting value with the R mark is the factory default.
94
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Camera Function Menu
Menu screen for specifying operation settings
during shooting.
This item can only be selected in the Camera
mode.
Bars
For setting whether to output color bars.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo : The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(' P109 [ Test Tone ] )
OIS
For setting whether to enable image stabilizer.
When “On” is selected, set the Level.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
For setting the level of the image stabilizer.
[Setting Values: High, RNormal]
Memo : When “High” is selected, correcting severe
camera shake may cause the area surrounding
the image to darken.
Flicker Correction
For setting whether to adjust image flicker that
occurs under a fluorescent light.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Flash Band Correction
For reducing the condition of the flash band
phenomenon, which creates an unnatural image
with a part of it brightly lit, such as by the camera
flash of another still camera.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Shutter
For specifying shutter­related settings.
Use this item to set to “Step” (fixed value) or
“Variable” when operating with the cross­shaped
button (JK) on the right side.
Variable:
Sets to variable scan. Use this setting such as
when shooting a PC monitor.
Step:
Sets to step shutter, which switches the shutter
speed by a fixed value.
[Setting Values: Variable, RStep]
AE Level
For setting the convergence level during AE (Auto
Exposure).
This can also be adjusted using the cross­shaped
button (HI) on the right side.
[Setting Values: ­6 to +6 (R0)]
AE Speed
For setting the convergence speed during AE (Auto
Exposure).
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
95
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Level
Caution : Flash band correction function is not available in
any of the following cases.
When [Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”
When [Frame & Bit Rate]/[3Frame & Bit
Rate] is set to “24p(HQ)” or “24p(UHQ)”
When in the Automatic Shutter mode or when
the shutter is turned on in the Manual Shutter
mode
(' P54 [Manual Shutter Mode (Manual Shutter
Switching)] )
When [Network] is set to “On(SDI Off)” or
“On(HDMI Off)”
[Flash Band Correction] operates when the
luminance of the screen varies widely, with or
without flash light. However, depending on the
shooting condition, the flash band correction
may not be fully effective even if there are flash
lights.
The following symptoms may occur under flash
light, but these are not malfunctions due to flash
band correction.
Moving object appears to be stationary
momentarily.
A horizontal line appears on the image.
The [Flash Band Correction] function will be set
to “Off” if the camera recorder switches from the
Camera mode to another mode, or when the
[POWER ON/OFF(CHG)] switch is set to
“OFF(CHG)”.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
ALC Limit
For setting the maximum gain value of “ALC”,
which electrically boosts the sensitivity level
according to the brightness automatically.
[Setting Values: 24dB, R18dB, 12dB, 6dB]
Auto Iris Limit (OPEN)
For setting the limit value of the OPEN end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F5.6, F4, F2.8, F2, RF1.6]
Auto Iris Limit (CLOSE)
For setting the limit value of the CLOSE end when
auto iris is enabled.
[Setting Values: F11, RF8, F5.6]
EEI Limit
For setting the shutter speed control range when
EEI is enabled.
[Setting Values: 4F­stop, R3F­stop, 2F­stop]
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Smooth Trans
For setting the shock reduction function, which
slows down the sudden change when switching
with the [GAIN] or [WHT BAL] selection switch.
[Setting Values: Fast, Middle, Slow, ROff]
Memo : However, this function is disabled when the
[FULL AUTO] switch is set to “ON”, or when
switching the gain selection switch that was set
to “ALC”.
GAIN L/GAIN M/GAIN H
For setting the gain value of each position on the
[GAIN] selection switch.
This is fixed at “ALC” when the [FULL AUTO] switch
is set to “ON”.
[Setting Values: 24dB, 21dB, 18dB, 15dB, 12dB,
9dB, 6dB, 3dB, 0dB, ­3dB, ­6dB]
(Default values GAIN L: 0dB, GAIN M: 6dB, GAIN
H: 12dB)
Memo : When [Shooting Mode] is set to “Standard”,
“­3dB” and “­6dB” cannot be selected.
(' P100 [ Shooting Mode ] )
96
AE LEVEL SW
For specifying the operation of the cross­shaped
button (HI) on the right side.
AE LEVEL/VFR:
Sets the number of frames during Variable
Frame Rec, and operates as the AE level setting
button in other cases.
(' P82 [Variable Frame Rec] )
AE Level:
Operates as the AE level setting button at all
times.
Disable:
Disables the button.
[Setting Values: AE LEVEL/VFR, RAE Level,
Disable]
Handle Zoom Speed
This function allows you to set the zoom speed of
the zoom lever at the handle when the [ZOOM FIX/
VAR/OFF] switch is set to “FIX”.
[Setting Values: 1 to 8 (R 5)]
AF Assist
For setting whether to allow temporary manual
focus adjustment by turning the focus ring in the AF
mode.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo : This setting is effective only when the [FOCUS]
switch is set to “AUTO”.
The manual focus adjustment mode is
temporarily activated by turning the focus ring in
the AF mode. If the focus ring is not operated for
a certain time, the camera recorder returns to the
AF mode.
User Switch Set...
For specifying user button related settings.
(' P97 [User Switch Set Item] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
User Switch Set Item
USER1 ­ USER7, LCD KEY▲/LCD KEY▶/LCD
KEY▼/LCD KEY◀
By assigning one of the following functions to each
of the [FOCUS ASSIST/1], [OIS/2], [LOLUX/3], [AE
LOCK/4], [ZEBRA/5], [MARKER/6], [C.REVIEW/7]
buttons or the cross­shaped buttons on the LCD
monitor, these buttons can be used to control the
assigned function (on/off, start, switch).
Set according to the shooting conditions. Usable
only in the Camera mode.
[Setting Values: None, Zebra, Marker, Bars, Focus
Assist, OIS, Flash Band, LCD Backlight, Lolux, AE
Lock, Spot Meter, Face Detect, OK Mark, Clip
Cutter Trig, Backup Trig, Clip Review, Load Picture
File, White Balance, Preset Zoom1, Preset Zoom2,
Preset Zoom3]
Lolux
Clip Review
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]­[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Clip
Review”.
Last 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
ending.
Top 5sec:
Views about 5 seconds of the clip from the
beginning.
Clip:
Views the entire clip.
[Setting Values: RLast 5sec, Top 5sec, Clip]
Memo : This item is selectable when any of the [USER1]­
[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD
KEY▼], [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Clip
Review”.
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]­[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Spot
Meter”.
(' P70 [Setting Spot Meter] )
Max & Min:
Displays the brightest and darkest areas of the
image.
Max:
Displays the brightest area of the image.
Min:
Displays the darkest area of the image.
Manual:
Displays the image brightness at a specified
position.
[Setting Values: RMax & Min, Max, Min, Manual]
Face Detect
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]­[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “Face
Detect”.
Select the control to track results of face detection.
AF&AE:
Sets auto focus and exposure control for the
face that is being tracked.
AF:
Sets auto focus for the face that is being tracked.
[Setting Values: RAF&AE, AF]
Memo : When “AF” is specified, this function will be
activated only when the [FOCUS] switch is set
to “Auto”.
When “AF&AE” is specified, this function will be
activated only when the [FOCUS] switch is set
to “Auto”, or when one or more of the items
(Gain, Iris and Shutter) is set to Auto mode.
Sensitivity
For setting the level of ease of face detection.
[Setting Values: Low, Middle, RHigh]
97
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
To increase the sensitivity when in dim
surroundings, set a value in the Lolux mode.
[Setting Values: 36dB, R30dB]
Spot Meter
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Hysteresis
For setting the margin to maintain status when the
face that is being tracked is lost.
Set to “Fast” to select another object immediately
if the face on the screen is lost.
Set to “Slow” to operate at the same position for
some time even if the face on the screen is lost.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
AE Lock
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For specifying the operation when any of the
[USER1]­[USER7], [LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶],
[LCD KEY▼], or [LCD KEY◀] items is set to “AE
Lock”.
AE:
Use this feature to fix a value to the Auto function
of Gain, Iris, or Shutter when the user button that
is assigned “AE Lock” is pressed.
AE/WB:
Use this feature to fix a value to White Balance
and the Auto function of Gain, Iris, or Shutter
when the user button that is assigned “AE Lock”
is pressed.
[Setting Values: RAE, AE/WB]
Memo : This feature only works when Iris, Shutter or
Gain is set to Auto mode.
“AE Lock” is canceled when the button assigned
with “AE Lock” is pressed, or when any of the
functions that can be locked is operated
regardless of Manual/Auto mode.
Preset Zoom Speed
For setting the speed to shift to the preset zoom
position that is assigned to a user button.
[Setting Values: 1 to 127 (R 64)]
Camera Process Menu
Menu screen for adjusting the quality of camera
images.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode.
Detail
For adjusting the contour (detail) enhancement
level.
Increasing the value increases the sharpness of
the contour.
[Setting Values: ­10 to +10, Off (R0)]
98
Adjust...
For specifying the detailed settings of the contour
(detail).
(' P101 [Detail/Adjust Item] )
Memo : This item cannot be selected when [Detail] is set
to “Off”.
Master Black
For adjusting the pedestal level (master black) that
serves as the reference black.
Increasing the value increases the pedestal.
[Setting Values: ­50 to +50 (R­3)]
Black Toe
Process the dark areas according to the balance of
bright and dark areas in the image to adjust the
overall balance of contrast.
For altering the gain of dark areas. Adjust this item
according to the condition of the captured video
signals.
Stretch:
Increases the gain of dark areas in an image to
stretch the signals of these areas only, thereby
showing the contrast between bright and dark
areas more clearly.
Specify the amount of stretch with [Stretch
Level].
Normal:
Normal condition.
Compress:
Compresses the gain of dark areas to increase
the contrast when the entire image appears
bright and contrast is weak. Specify the
compression amount with [Compress Level].
[Setting Values: Stretch, RNormal, Compress]
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Stretch Level
Stretch amount increases when a larger value is
specified.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]
Memo : This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is
set to “Stretch”. Otherwise, this item appears as
“­­­” and cannot be selected.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Compress Level
Compression amount increases when a larger
value is specified.
[Setting Values: 1 to 5 (R 3)]
Memo : This item is displayed only when [Black Toe] is
set to “Compress”. Otherwise, this item appears
as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Knee
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Level
For setting the starting point (knee point) of knee
compression when [Knee] is set to “Manual”.
[Setting Values: R100%, 95%, 90%, 85%]
Memo : When [Knee] is set to other than “Auto”, or
[WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Sensitivity
For setting the response speed of the “Knee”
operation when [Knee] is set to “Auto”.
Set to “Slow” when shooting an object under a
condition where there is drastic change in the light
intensity.
[Setting Values: RFast, Middle, Slow]
Memo : When [Knee] is set to “Manual”, or [WDR] is set
to other than “Off”, this item appears as “­­­” and
cannot be selected.
For setting the point to apply white clip for input
video signals with a high luminance level.
108%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 108 %.
100%:
Applies white clip at the point where the
luminance level is 100 %. Even when this item
is set to “108%”, it switches automatically to
“100%” if the screen appears too white. Set to
this value when the system in use limits Y output
signals within 100 %.
[Setting Values: R108%, 100%]
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “108%” and cannot be selected.
Gamma
For adjusting the gamma curve that determines the
gradation expression.
Cinema:
Sets to a gamma curve with similar gradation to
the screen characteristics of movies.
Standard:
Sets to a standard gamma curve.
[Setting Values: Cinema, RStandard]
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Gamma Level
This item can be specified separately when
[Gamma] is set to “Standard” or “Cinema”.
Increase the number:
Enhances the gradation of black. However, the
gradation of bright areas deteriorates.
Decrease the number:
Enhances the gradation of bright areas.
However, the gradation of black deteriorates.
[Setting Values: ­5 to +5 (R 0)]
WDR
For setting the WDR (Wide Dynamic Range)
function.
When shooting object with wide dynamic range
due to backlight conditions, this function
compresses the dynamic range while maintaining
image contrast through providing gradation
compensation to the input video signals.
99
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For specifying the “Knee” operation, which
compresses video signals beyond a certain level to
show the gradation of the highlighted portion. To
check the gradation of a bright area, set to “Manual”
and adjust the knee point (starting point of knee
operation) manually.
Manual:
Enables manual adjustment of knee point using
[Level].
Auto:
Adjusts the knee point automatically according
to the luminance level.
[Setting Values: Manual, RAuto]
White Clip
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Strong:
Enhances the effect of gradation compensation
for object with wide dynamic range due to
outdoor or strong backlight conditions.
Natural:
Normal setting for wide dynamic range.
Weak:
Reduces the effect of gradation compensation
compared to the normal setting.
Off:
Sets the wide dynamic range function to “Off”.
[Setting Values: Strong, Natural, Weak, ROff]
Memo : When [WDR] is set to other than “Off”, [Black
Toe], [Knee], [Gamma] and [White Clip] cannot
be selected.
White Balance...
Menu for adjusting white balance.
(' P102 [White Balance Item] )
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
* For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] P 56”.
Color Matrix
For setting the color matrix.
Cinema Subdued:
Sets to a subdued color matrix that is similar to
the screen characteristics of movies.
Cinema Vivid:
Sets to a vivid color matrix that is similar to the
screen characteristics of movies.
Standard:
Sets to a standard color matrix.
Off:
Sets the color matrix function to Off.
[Setting Values: Cinema Subdued, Cinema Vivid,
RStandard, Off]
Adjust
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a color
according to the user’s preference.
This item is used to adjust [Color Matrix] to a
color according to the user’s preference.
The saturation, hue and brightness of the
primary and complementary colors (6 colors in
total) can be set individually.
The adjusted values of “Standard”, “Cinema
Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color Matrix]
can be stored individually.
(' P130 [Adjusting Color Matrix] )
[Setting range for Lightness/Saturation: ­10 to +10]
(roughly ± 10 %)
[Setting range for Hue: ­5 to +5] (roughly ± 5°)
Memo : This item cannot be selected when [Color
Matrix] is set to “Off”.
100
Color Gain
For adjusting the video signal color level.
Increasing the value deepens the color.
[Setting Values: ­50 to +15, Off (R0)]
Memo : Images are displayed in black­and­white when
this is set to “Off”.
Reverse Picture
For recording images correctly by setting this item
to “Rotate” when the lens image appears upside
down or laterally inverted.
Rotate:
Enables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
image.
Off:
Disables horizontal/vertical inversion of the
image.
[Setting Values: Rotate, ROff]
Shooting Mode
For switching the settings for image recording on
the camera.
Standard:
Normal shooting mode.
This setting is suitable for shooting low­noise
image quality.
Use this mode in well lit places.
Extended:
High sensitivity shooting mode.
This setting enables recording in various
brightness conditions.
Use this mode in places where the lighting is
difficult to control and the brightness is
insufficient.
[Setting Values: RStandard, Extended]
Reset Process
Restores all items in the [Camera Process] menu
to their default settings.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Detail/Adjust Item
V/H Balance
For setting the H/V balance to enhance contour
(detail) in the horizontal (H) or vertical (V) direction.
H+1 to H+4:
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
horizontal direction.
V+1 to V+4:
Increasing the value enhances contour in the
vertical direction.
[Setting Values: H+1 to H+4, RNormal, V+1 to V+4]
Memo : When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Normal”.
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD
recording, but will be fixed at “Normal” during SD
recording.
Memo : When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Low”.
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD
recording, but will be fixed at “Low” during SD
recording.
For specifying the correction frequency of the
vertical contour. Set this according to the object.
Low:
Emphasizes the low frequency range.
Middle:
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
High:
Emphasizes the high frequency range.
[Setting Values: Low, RMiddle, High]
Memo : When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“SD”, this item is fixed at “Low”.
(' P111 [ Record Format ] )
When [System] under [Record Format] is set to
“HD+SD”, this item can be set during HD
recording, but will be fixed at “Low” during SD
recording.
“High” cannot be selected under the following
settings.
When [Resolution] is set to “1920x1080”,
and [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “60i(HQ)”
or “50i(HQ)”.
When [Resolution] is set to “1440x1080”,
and [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “60i(HQ)”,
“50i(HQ)”, “60i(SP)” or “50i(SP)”.
Skin Detail
For turning On/Off the Skin Detail function, which
is used to adjust the contour correction effect of the
colors captured.
Select “On” to soften the detail at areas where skin
tone is detected.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Level
For setting the level of contour correction (degree
of softening) using the Skin Detail function.
Decreasing the value increases the level of contour
correction (degree of softening).
[Setting Values: ­1, R ­2, ­3]
Range
For adjusting the range of skin tone to trigger the
Skin Detail function.
Increasing the value increases the range.
[Setting Values: ­5 to +5 (R0)]
101
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
H Frequency
For specifying the correction frequency of the
horizontal contour. Set this according to the object.
High:
Emphasizes the high frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with fine patterns.
Middle:
Emphasizes the intermediate frequency range.
Low:
Emphasizes the low frequency range. Use this
when shooting objects with large patterns.
[Setting Values: High, RMiddle, Low]
V Frequency
ISSUED
2012/12/21
White Balance Item
Preset Temp.
For setting the color temperature when the [WHT
BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] P 56”.
Alternative Temp.
For setting the alternative color temperature in the
Preset mode.
When the [WHT BAL] switch is set to “PRESET”,
pressing the [,] button each time switches the
color temperature setting in the Preset mode.
([Preset Temp.])[Alternative Temp.])
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] P 56”.
AWB Paint
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component in the
AWB (Auto White Balance) mode.
For details, refer to “[Adjusting the White
Balance] P 56”.
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: ­32 to +32 (R 0)]
Memo : This item is selectable when the [WHT BAL]
switch on the right of the camera recorder is set
to “A” or “B”. When “PRESET” is set, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
Different values can be specified for “A” and “B”.
After the [,] (Auto White Balance) button is
pressed to readjust the white balance while
[Clear Paint After AWB] is set to “On”, R and B
values switch automatically to “0”.
Clear Paint After AWB
For specifying whether to clear the [AWB Paint] (R
value and B value) settings after executing AWB
(Auto White Balance).
On:
Sets the [AWB Paint] (R value and B value)
settings to “0” after executing AWB (Auto White
Balance).
102
Off:
Does not change the [AWB Paint] (R value and
B value) settings after executing AWB (Auto
White Balance).
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
FAW Paint
For adjusting the R (red)/B (blue) component
during FAW (Full Auto White Balance) mode.
Increase the number:
Strengthens the red/blue.
Decrease the number:
Weakens the red/blue.
[Setting Values: ­32 to +32 (R 0)]
TC/UB Menu
Menu screen for setting time code and user’s bit.
This item cannot be selected in the Media mode,
or during recording.
TC Generator
For setting the operation of the time code.
Free Run(Ext):
External time code input will be synchronized
with this and the time code will be recorded.
Free Run:
The time code operates in the run mode at all
times regardless of the recording status. It
continues to run even when the power of the
camera recorder is turned off.
Rec Run:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. It continues to run in the order of the
recorded clips as long as the SD card is not
replaced. If the SD card is removed and
recording is made on another card, time code
will be recorded on the new card from where it
was left off in the previous card.
Regen:
The time code operates in the run mode during
recording. When the SD card is replaced, the
last time code recorded on the card is read and
recorded on a new card so that the time code
continues in running order.
[Setting Values: Free Run(Ext), Free Run, RRec
Run, Regen]
ISSUED
2012/12/21
TC Preset
For setting the time code (hour, minute, second,
frame).
Display : Drop setting 02:02:25.20
: Non Drop setting 02:02:25:20
UB Preset
For setting the user’s bit. (Digit by digit)
Display : AB CD EF 01
Drop Frame
Memo : This item can be set only when [Main Menu]-
[System]-[Record Set]-[Record Format]-
[Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “60p”, “30p”, or
“60i”. When the frame rate is “24p”, “Non Drop”
becomes fixed and cannot be selected. When
the frame rate is “50p”, “25p”, or “50i”, this item
appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
Item for specifying settings related to the LCD
monitor or viewfinder screen.
This menu screen can be used to specify settings
related to the Focus Assist mode, zebra pattern
display, screen size, marker, and safety zone. In
addition, it is also used for selecting whether to
display characters on the LCD monitor or
viewfinder screen, as well as for adjusting the
picture quality of the LCD monitor.
Shooting Assist...
Menu for setting the Shooting Assist function.
(' P104 [Shooting Assist Item] )
Marker Settings...
For setting items such as the safety zone and
center mark.
(' P105 [Marker Settings Item] )
Display Settings...
For specifying display­related settings.
(' P105 [Display Settings Item] )
LCD + VF
For selecting a method to switch between the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen displays.
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
On:
Displays images on the viewfinder at all times.
Off:
Turns off the viewfinder screen display when the
LCD monitor is turned on.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
VF Color
For selecting whether to display the image on the
viewfinder screen in color or black­and­white.
Select “On” to display in color, and “Off” to display
in black­and­white.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo : The setting of this item is valid only in Camera
mode.
When this item is set to “Off”, only the captured
images are displayed in black­and­white. The
display and menu screens are displayed in
color.
When [Network] is set to “On”, this item is fixed
at “Off” and cannot be selected.
103
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For setting the framing mode of the time code
generator.
Non Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the non­
drop­frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the number of frames.
Drop:
Internal time code generator works in the drop­
frame mode. Use this setting when placing
emphasis on the recording time.
[Setting Values: Non Drop, RDrop]
LCD/VF Menu
ISSUED
2012/12/21
VF Bright
For setting the brightness of the viewfinder screen.
Increasing the value increases the brightness.
[Setting Values: ­10 to +10 (R 0)]
VF Contrast
For setting the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the viewfinder
screen.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: ­10 to +10 (R 0)]
LCD Contrast
For setting the difference in luminance between the
darkest and brightness areas in the LCD monitor.
Increasing the value increases the contrast.
[Setting Values: ­10 to +10 (R 0)]
LCD Backlight
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For setting the brightness of the LCD monitor
backlight.
[Setting Values: Bright, RNormal]
LCD Mirror
For specifying the image display method when
facing the LCD monitor.
Select “Mirror” to display the image after laterally
inverting it. (Mirror display)
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor and
Viewfinder] )
[Setting Values: Mirror, RNormal]
Memo : The setting of this item is valid only in Camera
mode.
During color bar, menu screen and status
screen display, the “Mirror” setting is disabled.
(' P129 [Color Bar Output] )
Shooting Assist Item
Focus Assist
For setting whether to add color to the contour of
the focused image upon switching the image to
black­and­white.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
104
Type
For specifying the operation when the [FOCUS
ASSIST/1] button is pressed.
(' P49 [Focus Assist Function] )
ACCU­Focus:
Enables the Focus Assist and ACCU­Focus
(forced focus) functions. The depth of field of the
object becomes shallower to enable easier
focusing. The ACCU­Focus function switches
automatically to “Off” after about 10 seconds.
Normal:
Enables only the Focus Assist function. The
focused area is displayed in color to enable
easier focusing. Display color can be specified
with [Color].
[Setting Values: ACCU­Focus, RNormal]
Color
For setting the display color of the focused area
when Focus Assist is activated.
[Setting Values: RBlue, Green, Red]
Zebra
For selecting whether to display zebra patterns at
the bright areas of the subject.
Select “On” to display zebra patterns or “Off” to
hide.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Top
For setting the maximum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: Over, 100% to 5% (in 5%
increments)] (R80%)
Bottom
For setting the minimum luminance level for the
zebra pattern display.
[Setting Values: 100% to 0% (in 5% increments)]
(R70%)
Memo : The relation between Top and Bottom is such
that Top>Bottom always holds. To maintain this
relation when setting Top, the Bottom value is
automatically corrected.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Marker Settings Item
For setting the marker and safety zone, which are
useful in helping you determine the angle of view
for the image according to the shooting purpose.
(' P129 [Marker and Safety Zone Displays
(Camera Mode Only)] )
Memo : During Clip Review or when in the Media mode,
the markers do not appear regardless of the
setting.
Marker Settings
For setting whether to display marker, safety zone,
and center marks on the screen.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Aspect Ratio
Aspect Marker
For specifying how boundary markers are to be
used to indicate the parts of an image that are
beyond the range of the aspect ratio selected in
[Aspect Ratio].
Line+Halftone:
Displays the boundary using lines, and areas
outside the boundary in halftone.
Halftone:
Displays areas outside the boundary in halftone.
Line:
Displays the boundary using lines.
Off:
Hides the boundary markers.
[Setting Values: Line+Halftone, Halftone, Line,
ROff]
Memo : When [Aspect Ratio] is set to “16:9” or
“16:9(+4:3)”, this item is fixed at “Off” and cannot
be selected.
Center Mark
For specifying whether to display a mark to indicate
the screen center within the aspect ratio selected
in [Aspect Ratio].
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Display Settings Item
This menu is used to set the displays on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
Zoom
For setting the display method of the zoom
position.
Number:
Displays the zoom position in numbers (0­99).
Bar:
Displays the zoom position in a bar.
Off:
Does not display the zoom position.
[Setting Values: Number, RBar, Off]
Focus
For setting the display method of the focal length
during manual focus.
Feet:
Displays the focus in feet.
Meter:
Displays the focus in meters.
Off:
Does not display the focal length during focus.
[Setting Values: Feet, RMeter, Off]
ND Filter
For setting whether to display the filter position.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Record Format
For setting whether to display the video format
during recording or playback.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
105
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For selecting the final image aspect ratio to be used
from the overall angle of view.
[Setting Values: 16:9(+4:3), 2.35:1, 1.85:1, R16:9,
1.75:1, 1.66:1, 14:9, 13:9, 4:3, 2.35:1 Center,
2.35:1 Top, 1.85:1 Center, 1.85:1 Top]
Memo : When [System]-[Record Set]-[Record
Format]-[SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item
is fixed at “4:3” and cannot be selected.
(' P113 [ SD Aspect ] )
Safety Zone
For setting the percentage of area that is to be
deemed as valid area (Safety Zone) within the
boundary of the aspect ratio selected in [Aspect
Ratio].
[Setting Values: 95%, 93%, 90%, 88%, 80%, ROff]
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Media Remain
For setting whether to display the remaining space
of the recording SD card.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Memo : When the remaining space warning is
displayed, the information appears even when
“Off” is selected.
The displayed time is an estimate.
TC/UB
For specifying whether to display the time code
(TC) or user’s bit (UB) rate in the display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen.
[Setting Values: UB, RTC, Off]
Audio Meter
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For specifying whether to display the audio level
meter in the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Battery
For setting the display of the remaining battery
power in the display on the LCD monitor and
viewfinder screen.
The battery information appears only on the
Display 1 screen in Camera mode.
(' P121 [Display 1 screen] )
Time:
Displays the remaining battery power in
minutes. (min)
Capacity%:
Displays the remaining battery power in
percentage. (%)
Voltage:
Displays the current battery voltage in units of
0.1 V. (V)
[Off]:
The remaining battery power is not displayed.
[Setting Values: RTime, Capacity%, Voltage, Off]
Memo : The battery mark that appears before the “Time”,
“Capacity%” or “Voltage” value changes
according to the remaining battery power.
9 : 10 % and below
8 : 11 % to 30 %
4 : 31% to 70 %
) : 71 % to 100 %
When the remaining battery power is low, “RES”
instead of the value is displayed.
Replace the battery as soon as possible.
The remaining battery power and remaining
time are intended as reference values for the
shooting duration.
106
Date/Time
For specifying whether to display the date and time
in the display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder
screen.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Date Style
For setting the date display sequence for display
on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen as well
as for time stamp recording.
Display examples of the setting values are as
follows.
DMY2: 30 Jun 2012
DMY1: 30­06­2012
MDY2: Jun 30, 2012
MDY1: 06­30­2012
YMD: 2012­06­30
[Setting Values: DMY2, DMY1, MDY1, MDY2,
YMD]
(Default values: MDY2 (U model), DMY1 (E
model))
Time Style
For setting the time display for display on the LCD
monitor and viewfinder screen as well as for time
stamp recording.
[Setting Values: 24hour, 12hour]
(Default values: 12hour (U model), 24hour (E
model))
Shutter
For setting the shutter display to be displayed on
the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen.
DEG:
Displays the shutter speed in degrees in the
same way as film cameras.
SEC:
Displays the shutter speed in seconds.
[Setting Values: DEG, RSEC]
Memo : “DEG” is selectable only when [Frame & Bit
Rate] is set to “24p(UHQ)”, “24p(HQ)” or
“25p(HQ)”.
When [Frame & Bit Rate] is set to other values,
the shutter display setting is fixed at “SEC” and
cannot be selected.
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
A/V Set Menu
Menu screen for video output and audio.
Video Set...
For specifying video output­related settings.
(' P107 [Video Set Item] )
Audio Set...
For specifying audio­related settings.
(' P107 [Audio Set Item] )
Video Set Item
Display On TV
For setting whether to display the display and menu
characters on the external monitor.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
For setting the terminal to output the video.
[Setting Values: HDMI+SDI, SDI, HDMI, ROff]
Memo : When [Network] is set to “On(SDI Off)”, videos
will not be output to SDI. Also, setting to
“On(HDMI Off)” disables the HDMI output.
The selectable options vary according to the
[Network] setting.
Resolution
For selecting the resolution of video output from the
[HDMI]/[SDI] terminal according to the monitor to
be connected.
[Setting Values: 576i, 576p, 480i, 480p, 720p,
R1080i]
Memo : The selectable options vary according to the
setting in [System]/[Resolution]/[Frame &
Bit Rate] of [System]-[Record Set]-[Record
Format].
Cross conversion output is not possible.
HDMI Color
For setting the color format of HDMI signals.
This item is selectable only when [HDMI/SDI
Out] is set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.
[Setting Values: RGB, RAuto]
When connecting to a PC monitor, set this to
“On”.
This item is selectable only when [HDMI/SDI
Out] is set to “HDMI” or “HDMI+SDI”.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
SD Aspect
For setting the style of displaying down­converted
images on a 4:3 aspect ratio screen.
Side Cut:
Displays image with the left and right sides cut
off.
Letter:
Displays as a wide image with the top and
bottom blackened.
Squeeze:
Displays image that is squeezed horizontally.
[Setting Values: Side Cut, Letter, RSqueeze]
Memo : When [Record Format]-[System] is set to “SD”
or “HD+SD”, and when [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”,
this item appears as “­­­” and cannot be selected.
(' P111 [ System ] )
SD Set Up
For selecting whether to add a setup signal to the
video signal output from the [AV] output terminal.
Setup signals are added when “7.5%” is selected.
[Setting Values: 7.5%, 0.0%]
(Default values: 7.5% (U model), fixed at “0.0%” (E
model))
Memo : Depending on the menu settings of the camera
recorder and the condition of the cable
connected to it, the setup signal setting may be
fixed at “0.0%”. “0.0%” is displayed in gray in this
case.
Audio Set Item
Input1 Mic Ref.
For setting the reference input level when the
[INPUT1] selection switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC
+48V”.
[Setting Values: ­62dB, ­56dB, R­50dB, ­44dB,
­38dB]
107
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
HDMI/SDI Out
HDMI Enhance
For setting the color range of HDMI signals.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Input2 Mic Ref.
For setting the reference input level when the
[INPUT2] selection switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC
+48V”.
[Setting Values: ­62dB, ­56dB, R­50dB, ­44dB,
­38dB]
Int. Mic Gain
For setting the sensitivity of the built­in microphone.
[Setting Values: +12dB, +6dB, R0dB]
AUX Gain
For setting the sensitivity of the [AUX] terminal
input.
[Setting Values: +12dB, +6dB, R0dB]
Ref. Level
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For setting the audio reference level to be recorded
to the SD card. (Applies to both [CH1/CH2].)
[Setting Values: ­12dB, ­18dB, R­20dB]
Limiter
For setting the limiter operation.
Ref. Level:
Sets “Ref. Level” to the maximum recording
level.
­8dBFS, ­5dBFS:
Sets “­8dBFS” or “­5dBFS” to the maximum
recording level.
Off:
Depending on the settings of the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] selection switches, the
operation may be different as described below.
The limiter does not function when
“MANUAL” is set.
The limiter functions at ­5 dBFS when
“AUTO” is set.
[Setting Values: Ref. Level, ­8dBFS, R­5dBFS, Off]
AGC Response
Attack Time
Sets the time to activate the limiter.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
Decay Time
Sets the time to deactivate the limiter operation.
[Setting Values: Fast, RMiddle, Slow]
108
AGC Mode
For setting whether to link the limiter operation of
[CH1] and [CH2].
Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo : Enabled only when both the [AUX] input terminal
and [INPUT1/INPUT2] input terminal are set to
“LINE” or “MIC”, and CH1/CH2 of the [CH1/CH2
AUTO/MANUAL] switch is set to “AUTO”.
XLR Manual Level
For setting whether to link manual audio
adjustment operation between [INPUT1] and
[INPUT2] terminals.
Select “Link” to link or “Separate” to separate.
When this item is set to “Link”, adjust the recording
level using the [CH1] recording level adjustment
knob.
[Setting Values: Link, RSeparate]
Memo : Enabled only when both the [INPUT1/INPUT2]
input terminals are set to “LINE” or “MIC”, and
both [CH1]/[CH2] of the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/
MANUAL] selection switches are set to
“MANUAL”.
When this item is set to “Link”, [CH2] recording
level adjustment knob is disabled.
Int. Mic Separation
For setting the enhancement level of the stereo
effect of the built­in microphone.
1 to 4:
Enhances the stereo effect. Increasing the value
increases the stereo effect.
Effect off:
Does not enhance the stereo effect.
Mono:
Sets the built­in microphone to monaural.
[Setting Values: 1 to 4, Effect off, Mono (R2)]
Memo : When any value from 1 to 4 is selected, the
sound quality changes slightly due to the
process of enhancing the stereo effect. This is
normal.
This menu is enabled when the [CH1]/[CH2]
selection switch is set to “INT”.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Test Tone
For specifying whether to output the audio test
signals (1 kHz) during color bar output.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
INPUT1/2 Wind Cut
Int. Mic Wind Cut
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low­cut) from the built­in
microphone. Set this item to “On” to reduce wind
noise from the microphone.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Equalizer
You can correct the characteristic and enhance the
sound of the connected microphone using this
equalizer setting.
For setting the audio frequency from a 5­band
equalizer.
Frequency:
100Hz, 330Hz, 1kHz, 3.3kHz, 10kHz
Variable level:
± 6dB (1dB step)
Memo : Audio will be recorded in the characteristic set
in the equalizer.
Set all bands to “0dB” to bypass the equalizer.
When the equalizer level is set to +side, the
audio may be distorted. In this case, reduce the
recording level in Manual mode.
If the values of multiple frequencies are
changed, the specified levels and the actual
levels may be different due to interference
between the frequency bands.
This function is enabled only when both
[INPUT1/2 Wind Cut] and [Int. Mic Wind Cut] are
set to “Off”.
For setting the audio sound of the [+] terminal to
stereo or mixed sound when the [MONITOR]
switch on the LCD monitor is set to “BOTH”.
Mix:
Outputs mixed sound (mixed sound of CH1 and
CH2) to both L and R.
Stereo:
Outputs stereo sound (outputs audio sound of
CH1 to L, and CH2 to R).
[Setting Values: RMix, Stereo]
Memo : If both CH1 and CH2 are built­in microphones,
stereo sound is output from the [+] terminal
regardless of the [Monitor] setting.
Alarm Level
For selecting whether to turn on the warning tone
as well as setting the volume.
The warning tone is output from the monitor
speaker or [+] terminal.
[Setting Values: RHigh, Middle, Low, Off]
Audio On FULL AUTO
For setting whether to enable Auto for audio when
[FULL AUTO] is set to “ON”.
SW Set:
Sets the audio recording mode following the
[CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] selection switch
setting.
Auto:
Sets audio recording mode to the forced auto
mode.
[Setting Values: SW Set, RAuto]
109
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For selecting whether to cut the low frequencies of
the audio input signals (low­cut) when the [INPUT1/
INPUT2] switch is set to “MIC” or “MIC+48V”.
Set this item to reduce wind noise from the
microphone.
Both:
Enables low­cut on both the [INPUT1] and
[INPUT2] terminals.
INPUT2:
Enables low­cut on the audio of the [INPUT2]
terminal only.
INPUT1:
Enables low­cut on the audio of the [INPUT1]
terminal only.
Off:
Disables low­cut.
[Setting Values: Both, INPUT2, INPUT1, ROff]
Monitor
ISSUED
2012/12/21
System Menu
This menu screen allows system­related settings.
For specifying recording settings, formatting and
restoring of SD card, tally lamp settings, network
settings, date/time, time zone, and other settings.
It can also be used to reset the menu settings to
their default values.
Record Set...
For specifying recorded video­related settings.
(' P111 [Record Set Item] )
Media
Format Media
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For formatting (initializing) an SD card.
Select a card slot (A or B), select [Format] from
[Cancel]/[Format], and press the Set button (R) to
format (initialize) the card.
(' P41 [Formatting (Initializing) SD Cards] )
Restore Media
For restoring an SD card.
Select a card slot (A or B), and press the Set button
(R) to restore the SD card.
(' P42 [Restoring the SD Card] )
Memo : This item appears only when the SD card needs
to be restored. However, it is not selectable
when recording in Camera mode and during Clip
Review.
Setup File
This allows you to save the menu settings as well
as the performance results of shutter speed and
AWB.
It is useful to save settings according to different
shooting conditions.
Load File...
Loads the settings.
(' P132 [Loading a Setup File] )
Store File...
Saves the settings.
(' P131 [Saving Setup Files] )
Delete File...
Deletes the configured file.
(' P133 [Deleting Setup Files] )
110
Auto Power Off
For setting whether to turn off the power
automatically when the camera recorder is not
operated for more than 5 minutes when the battery
is used. This function is valid only when the battery
is used.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo : When both the battery and AC adapter are
connected, power from the AC adapter
connection will be used. As such, this function
will not have any effect.
Tally Lamp
For specifying the illumination settings of the tally
lamp during recording.
On:
Lights up only during recording.
Off:
Turns off the indicator.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
GPS
For setting the GPS function to On or Off (power
on/off).
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Network
To use the network function, set this item to
“On(SDI Off)” or “On(HDMI Off)”.
On(SDI Off):
Uses the network function. However, SDI output
is disabled.
On(HDMI Off):
Uses the network function. However, HDMI
output is disabled.
Off:
Does not use the network function.
[Setting Values: On(SDI Off), On(HDMI Off), ROff]
Memo : Restriction applies to the following functions
when you are using the network function.
SDI and HDMI cannot be output
simultaneously.
[Variable Frame Rate] cannot be selected.
[Flash Band Correction] is fixed at “Off”.
[LCD + VF] is fixed at “Off”.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Import Metadata
For importing metadata from the FTP server.
Memo : This option is not available when [Network] is set
to “Off”.
Settings...
For specifying network­related settings.
(' P115 [Settings Item] )
Memo : This option is not available when [Network] is set
to “Off”.
Reset All
Date/Time
For setting the year, month, day, hour, and minute.
Memo : If the signal reception for GPS satellites allows
date and time to be set based on the GPS
information, you can set the time obtained from
the GPS satellite by pressing the [FOCUS
ASSIST/1] button.
If information cannot be obtained from GPS
satellites and date/time cannot be set, the
[FOCUS ASSIST/1] button appears grayed out.
The display order of the date (year, month, day)
follows the setting in [Display Settings]-[Date
Style]. However, the 24­hour format is used for
the hour display regardless of the [Time Style]
setting.
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )
For setting the UTC time difference in units of 30
minutes.
[Setting Values: UTC­00:30­UTC­12:00, UTC,
UTC+14:00­UTC+00:30 (in 30 min increments)]
(Default values: UTC­05:00 (U model), UTC (E
model))
Memo : If [Date/Time] is already set, the [Date/Time]
item is automatically adjusted when [Time
Zone] is altered.
System Information
Version
Displays information on the firmware version.
Fan Hour
For displaying the usage time of the internal fan.
Memo : Under normal environment, dust will
accumulate on the internal fan when the camera
recorder is used over a long period. Dust may
enter the camera recorder especially if it is used
outdoors. This may affect the image and sound
quality of the camera recorder. Check and
replace the fan after every 9000 hours
(suggested guideline).
Open Source License
Displays the license for the open source software
used by this camera recorder.
Record Set Item
Record Format
After setting of all items in the [Record Format]
menu is complete, select [Set] at the bottom of the
screen to apply the new settings on the camera
recorder and switch the record format. A “Please
Wait...” message appears during switching.
System
For selecting a system definition.
HD:
Records in “HD” (high definition) quality
SD:
Records in “SD” (standard definition) quality
111
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Resets all menu settings.
Memo : [Date/Time] and [Time Zone] cannot be reset.
(' P111 [ Date/Time ] )
(' P111 [ Time Zone ] )
This item is not selectable when recording in
Camera mode, during Clip Review, and in Media
mode.
Time Zone
ISSUED
2012/12/21
HD+SD:
Records in “HD” (high definition) for slot A, and
in “SD” (standard definition) for slot B.
HD+Web:
Records in “HD” (high definition) for slot A, and
in low definition for slot B.
[Setting Values: RHD, SD, HD+SD, HD+Web]
Caution : The selectable options for the [Format],
[Resolution], and [Frame & Bit Rate]
settings vary depending on the setting of this
item.
Format
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to
the SD card in slot A.
[Setting Values: RQuickTime(MPEG2),
MP4(MPEG2), MXF(MPEG2), AVCHD]
Memo : When System is set to “HD” or “SD”, the
recording file format will be the same for both SD
cards in slots A and B.
When System is set to “SD”, this item is fixed at
“QuickTime(H.264)”.
Resolution
For selecting the image size to be recorded to the
SD card in slot A. (Horizontal x vertical)
The available options vary according to the
[Format] and [System] settings.
When MP4(MPEG2) or QuickTime(MPEG2) is
selected:
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080,
1280x720]
When QuickTime(H.264) or AVCHD is selected:
Fixed at “1920x1080”
When MXF(MPEG2) is selected:
[Setting Values: R1920x1080, 1440x1080]
Memo : When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, the
recording definition will be the same for both SD
cards in slots A and B.
When [System] is set to “SD”, this item is fixed
as follows.
U model: Fixed at “720x480”
E model: Fixed at “720x576”
The selectable values of [Frame & Bit Rate]
vary according to the setting of this item.
112
Frame & Bit Rate
For selecting the frame rate and encoding bit rate
for recording to the SD card in slot A when [System]
is set to “HD”, “HD+Web”, or “HD+SD”.
The available options vary according to the
[System] and [Resolution] settings.
When “1920x1080” ([Format] is set to
“AVCHD”) is selected:
[Setting Values: 60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), 60i(SP),
50i(SP)]
(Default values: 60i(HQ) (U model), 50i(HQ) (E
model))
When “1920x1080” ([Format] is set to
“QuickTime(H.264)”) is selected:
[Setting Values: 60i(UHQ), 50i(UHQ),
24p(UHQ)] (Default values: 60i(UHQ) (U
model), 50i(UHQ) (E model))
When “1920x1080” ([Format] is set to other
than “AVCHD” or “QuickTime(H.264)”) is
selected:
[Setting Values: 60i(HQ), 30p(HQ), 24p(HQ),
50i(HQ), 25p(HQ)]
(Default values: 60i(HQ) (U model), 50i(HQ) (E
model))
When “1440x1080” is selected:
[Setting Values: 60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), 60i(SP),
50i(SP)]
(Default values: 60i(HQ) (U model), 50i(HQ) (E
model))
When “1280x720” is selected:
[Setting Values: 60p(HQ), 30p(HQ), 24p(HQ),
50p(HQ), 25p(HQ), 60p(SP), 50p(SP)]
(Default values: 60p(HQ) (U model), 50p(HQ) (E
model))
Memo : When “HD+SD” is selected, [Frame & Bit Rate]
cannot be selected.
U model:
50i(HQ), 50i(SP), 50i(UHQ), 50p(SP),
25p(HQ)
E model:
60i(HQ), 60i(SP), 60i(UHQ), 30p(HQ),
24p(HQ), 24p(UHQ)
When [System] is set to “SD”, this item is fixed
as follows for the different models.
U model: “60i”
E model: “50i”
When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, the frame
rate and encoding bit rate for recording to the SD
cards in slots A and B will be the same.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
3 Format
For selecting the format of the file to be recorded to
the SD card in slot B when [System] is set to “HD
+Web” or “HD+SD”.
This item is fixed at “QuickTime(H.264)”.
3 Resolution
For selecting the size of the image to be recorded
to the SD card in slot B when [System] is set to “HD
+Web” or “HD+SD”. (Horizontal x vertical)
Depending on the [System] settings, this item is
fixed as follows.
When HD+SD is selected:
“720x480” (U model), “720x576” (E model)
When HD+Web is selected:
Fixed at “480x270”
Memo : When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, this item
is fixed at the same value as [Resolution].
For selecting the frame rate and encoding bit rate
of the image to be recorded to the SD card in slot
B when [System] is set to “HD+Web” or “HD+SD”.
The options are fixed as follows according to the
settings for [System] and [Frame & Bit Rate].
When HD+SD is selected:
“60i” (U model), “50i” (E model)
When HD+Web is selected:
“30p”, “25p”, or “24p”
Memo : When [System] is set to “HD” or “SD”, this item
is fixed at the same value as [Frame & Bit
Rate].
SD Aspect
For setting the aspect ratio of the recorded image
when [System] is set to “HD+SD” or “SD”.
[Setting Values: R16:9, 4:3]
Memo : When [System] is set to “HD” or “HD+Web”, this
item is fixed at “16:9”.
For selecting the record mode for recording to
the SD card.
(' P78 [Special Recording] )
The selectable options vary according to the
[Record Format] menu settings.
Format
MP4
(MPEG2)
QuickTime
(MPEG2)
MXF
(MPEG2)
AVCHD
QuickTime
(H.264)
Frame & Bit Rate
30p(HQ),
24p(HQ),
25p(HQ)
Setting values
Normal, Pre
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec,
Variable Frame
60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), Normal, Pre
60i(SP), 50i(SP), Rec, Clip
60p(HQ),
Continuous,
60p(SP),
Interval Rec,
50p(HQ),
Frame Rec
50p(SP)
60i(HQ), 50i(HQ), Normal, Pre
60i(SP), 50i(SP) Rec, Interval
Rec, Frame Rec
60i(UHQ)
Normal, Pre
50i(UHQ)
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
60i (U model)
Interval Rec,
50i (E model)
Frame Rec
24p(UHQ)
Normal, Pre
Rec, Clip
Continuous,
Interval Rec,
Frame Rec,
Variable Frame
Memo : When [Slot Mode] is set to “Backup”, this item is
fixed at “Normal”.
[Variable Frame Rate] is enabled when
[Resolution]/[3Resolution] is set to
“1920x1080” or “1280x720”, and [Frame & Bit
Rate]/[3Frame & Bit Rate] is set to “30p(HQ)”,
“24p(UHQ)”, “24p(HQ)” or “25p(HQ)”.
113
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
3 Frame & Bit Rate
Rec Mode
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Pre Rec Time
For setting the pre­recording time when [Rec
Mode] is set to “Pre Rec”.
[Setting Values: R5sec, 10sec, 15sec]
Rec Frames
For setting the number of frames to record when
[Rec Mode] is set to “Frame Rec” or “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1frame, 3frames, 6frames]
Rec Interval
For setting the recording time interval when [Rec
Mode] is set to “Interval Rec”.
[Setting Values: R1sec, 2sec, 5sec, 10sec, 30sec,
1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 30min, 1hour]
Variable Frame Rate
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
For setting the frame rate during recording when
[Rec Mode] is set to “Variable Frame”.
The available options vary according to the settings
for [Record Format]-[Resolution]/
[3Resolution] and [Frame & Bit Rate]/[3Frame
& Bit Rate].
(' P82 [Variable Frame Rec] )
Slot Mode
For setting the operation of the card slot.
Series:
Mode that activates the two slots sequentially.
Dual:
Mode that activates the two slots at the same
time.
(' P74 [Dual Rec] )
Backup:
Mode that enables recording to slot B without
using the [REC] button. This item is selectable
only when [Rec Mode] is set to “Normal”.
Start or stop the recording using the [Backup
Rec] menu or press the [USER1] to [USER7],
[LCD KEY▲], [LCD KEY▶], [LCD KEY▼], [LCD
KEY◀] that is assigned with “Backup Trig”.
(' P76 [Backup Rec] )
Memo : When this is set to “Series”, and recordable
media are inserted in both slots, pressing the
[REC] button starts recording only to the card in
the selected slot (active slot).
When “Series” is selected, and [Record
Format]-[Format] is set to “AVCHD”, the
clips are recorded over the slots seamlessly
without interruption in the video.
When this is set to “Dual”, and recordable media
are inserted in both slots, pressing the [REC]
button starts simultaneous recording to the
cards in both slots.
Backup Rec
For starting/stopping backup recording with [REC]/
[STBY].
This item is selectable only when [Slot Mode] is set
to “Backup”.
Memo : When recording is stopped due to no remaining
space on the media, etc., this item is fixed at
“STOP” and cannot be selected.
114
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Time Stamp
For setting whether to display shooting date/time
information in the recorded video.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Memo : The date/time display style can be changed in
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Date Style]/
[Time Style].
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )
When the date/time is hidden while the menu
screen, status screen or other screen is
displayed, the date/time during this period will
not be recorded to the video. A confirmation
screen appears if you try to display the menu
screen or status screen during recording.
When [System] is set to “HD+Web” or “HD+SD”,
the shooting date/time information cannot be
recorded to the image to be recorded in slot B.
Clip Name Prefix
For setting the first four characters of the name of
the clip file to be recorded to the SD card.
Enter any of the 38 characters including alphabets
(upper case), numbers (0 to 9), “_” (underscore),
and “­” (hyphen) using the software keyboard.
(' P93 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
[Setting Values: xxxG] (The default value of xxx is
the last three digits of the serial number.)
Memo : When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Record Format]-[Format] is set to
“AVCHD”, this setting is not reflected in the file
name of the clip.
However, it is recorded as the display name of
the clip in the thumbnail display.
Reset Clip Number
For assigning a new number (Clip Number) by
resetting it (0001).
Select [Reset] and press the Set button (R) to reset
the number.
When [Format] is set to “AVCHD”, the clip
number is reset to “00000”.
When other clips exist on the SD card, the smallest
available number is used after reset.
Example:
If the [Clip Name Prefix] is “ABCD”, and
“ABCD0001” already exists on the SD card,
“ABCD0002” will be assigned.
For specifying network­related settings.
The display of the software keyboard for input
varies according to the item you are setting.
(' P93 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
Web
For setting the functions that make use of the web
browser.
Web Access
To access via a web browser, set to “On”.
[Setting Values: ROn, Off]
Camera Name
For setting the name to be displayed on the web
browser. Enter not more than 8 characters using
the software keyboard.
(Default value: HM650)
Change Password
Changes the password for accessing via a web
browser.
The current password is displayed. Enter a new
password directly.
Enter not more than 31 characters using the
software keyboard.
Connection Setup
For configuring the network connection settings.
Configure the settings by following the instructions
on the [Wizard] screen that is displayed according
to the type of adapter that is connected to the rear
[HOST] terminal.
You can Store, Load, or Delete the settings you
have specified on the [Wizard] screen.
Wizard
A [Wizard] screen appears according to the type of
adapter that is connected to the rear [HOST]
terminal.
Follow the instructions.
Load
Loads the settings on the [Wizard] screen.
(' P157 [Reading the Connection Settings
File] )
Store
Saves the settings on the [Wizard] screen.
(' P156 [Saving the Connection Settings File] )
Delete
Deletes the saved settings.
(' P158 [Deleting Connection Settings] )
115
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Clip Set
Settings Item
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Metadata Server
For registering the FTP server for importing the
metadata and the path of the file to be imported.
Up to 4 settings can be registered.
Meta­FTP1 to Meta­FTP4
(The name specified in the respective
[Alias] items is displayed)
oAlias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera recorder.
The name set in this item will be displayed in the
[Import Metadata] options.
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oServer
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using single­
byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to 9),
single­byte hyphen [­], or dot [.].
oPort
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an
integer between 1 and 65535.
(Default value: 21)
oFile Path
Enter the path name for the metadata file (“/pub/
meta.xml”, “/home/user/meta2.xml”, etc.)
* Enter not more than 127 characters.
oUsername
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oPassword
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oPASV Mode
For setting whether to set the communication mode
used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a
connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Clip Server
For setting the server and directory for uploading
recorded clips in the SD card to the FTP server.
Clip­FTP1 to Clip­FTP4
(The name specified in the respective
[Alias] items is displayed)
oAlias
For setting a name to distinguish the settings of this
camera recorder.
The name set in this item will appear on the [FTP
Upload] action screen of the thumbnail display.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oServer
For setting the server name (“mystation.com”, etc.)
or the IP address (“192.168.0.1”, etc.) of the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 127 characters using single­
byte alphanumeric characters (a to z, 0 to 9),
single­byte hyphen [­], or dot [.].
oPort
Enter the FTP server port number to use using an
integer between 1 and 65535.
(Default value: 21)
oDir. Path
Enter the path name for the directory to upload to
(“/pub”, “/home/user”, etc.)
* Enter not more than 127 characters.
oUsername
Enter the user name for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oPassword
Enter the password for connecting to the FTP
server.
* Enter not more than 31 characters.
oPASV Mode
For setting whether to set the communication mode
used for file transfer to the passive mode.
Set to “On” if the camera is inside a firewall, and a
connection from the FTP server to the camera
cannot be established.
[Setting Values: On, ROff]
Reset Network
Restores all items in the [Network] menu to their
default settings.
116
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adding/Editing
Frequently Used Menu
Items (Favorites Menu)
You can select and add/edit frequently used menu
items freely to create a personal menu screen
(Favorites Menu).
Memo : [Favorites Menu] is only enabled in the Camera
mode. [Favorites Menu] remains unchanged
even when the recording format changes.
Up to 20 menu items can be added.
Added items in [Favorites Menu] will not be reset
even when [Main Menu]-[Reset All] is
executed.
Long descriptive names may be displayed for
the menu items in [Favorites Menu] to enable
better understanding.
DISPLAY
Memo : Adding items to [Favorites Menu] cannot be
performed in the following cases. [USER1 Add]
is displayed in gray in the operation guide.
Selected item is already added to [Favorites
Menu].
Number of menu items that can be added (20
items) is exceeded.
AE LEVEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1
CANCEL
2
3 Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
A screen to confirm the addition appears.
4 Select [Add] and press the Set button (R).
The selected menu item is added to [Favorites
Menu].
CANCEL
MENU/THUMB
1 Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main
Menu] screen.
2 Select the menu or submenu item to add.
OIS / 2
4
TIME CODE
.
117
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
MENU/THUMB
Adding Menu Items to Favorites Menu
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Editing Favorites Menu
You can delete or change the order of the items
added to [Favorites Menu].
4 Press the [OIS/2] button.
A delete mark () appears at the beginning of
the menu item.
Deleting Items from [Favorites Menu]
1 Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
A Press the [MENU] button to open the [Main
Menu] screen.
B Press the [DISPLAY] button to open the
[Favorites Menu] screen.
2 Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed­shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
2
Memo : When the [OIS/2] button is pressed again while
the menu item with the delete mark () is
selected, the menu item will be excluded from
the items to be deleted and the delete mark ()
disappears.
5 Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
6 Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
Header
(Magenta)
6
3 Select the menu or submenu item to delete.
3
118
Memo : Deletion is not complete until the changes are
saved with [Save & Exit].
To exit the editing mode without deleting any
items, select [Exit without Saving].
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Changing the Order of Items in [Favorites
Menu]
MENU/THUMB
3 Select the menu or submenu item to move
and press the Set button (R).
The moving mode is activated and a position
selection bar for the move appears.
DISPLAY
CANCEL
3
MENU/THUMB
AE LEVEL
FOCUS ASSIST/1
CANCEL
OIS / 2
TIME CODE
2
Position
Selection Bar
4 Select the position to move to with the
cross­shaped button (JK).
Move the position selection bar with the cross­
shaped button (JK) and select a position to
move to.
5 Press the Set button (R).
The selected item moves to the new position.
4
Header
(Magenta)
5
119
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
1 Open the [Favorites Menu] screen.
Press the [MENU] button to open the [Favorites
Menu] screen.
2 Select [Edit Favorites] and press the Set
button (R) or crossed­shaped button (I).
The header turns magenta and the editing
mode is activated.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
6 Press the [FOCUS ASSIST/1] button.
The option menu to exit the [Favorites Menu]
editing mode appears.
7 Select [Save & Exit] and press the Set
button (R).
7
Menu Display and Detailed Settings
Memo : Moving is not complete until the changes are
saved with [Save & Exit].
To exit the editing mode without saving any
changes, select [Exit without Saving].
To return to the editing mode, select [Cancel].
120
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Display Screen in Camera
Mode
Display 0 screen
This screen displays the event. It is also used to
display warnings only.
※1 a Z
A
※1
282min
100min
50min
D
12 . 5/ 30f ps
W
※2
0
P13000K
P
13000K
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.
6
F1.6
1/ 100
HI J
*1
*2
Appears only during warnings
Appears only during operation
Display 1 screen
※
282min
100min
50min
D
12 . 5/ 30f ps
a Z
Y
X
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
0
G
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
HI J K
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
M N
L
* Appears only during warnings
Display 2 screen
A
B
C
D
E
F
b
a Z
Y
282min
100min
50min
X
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
12 . 5/ 30f ps
1920x1080
30p HQ
0
G
4030 20
10
0
P13000K
HI J K
L
5 . 6f t
ND 1 /64
AE+6
0dB
F1.6
1/ 100
W
V
U
T
S
R
Q
P
O
Memo : Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only.
C Remaining Space on Media
Displays the remaining recording time of the SD
cards in slot A and slot B separately.
: Currently selected slot. (White card)
2 : Write­protect switch of SD card is set.
!INVALID
: SD card cannot be read or
written to, or restored.
!FORMAT
: SD card requires
formatting.
!RESTORE
: SD card requires restoring.
!INCORRECT : When [Rec Mode] is set to
other than “AVCHD”/“SD”
with a Class 4 SD card
inserted.
Or when the SD card is not
supported.
!REC INH
: When attempting to record
in 50i(HQ)/50i(SP) to an SD
card recorded in
[AVCHD]60i(HQ)/60i(SP)
(or vice versa).
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Media
Remain] is set to “Off”. However, warnings will
be displayed.
(' P106 [ Media Remain ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only. (When the remaining time
is shorter than 3 minutes)
The displayed time is an estimate.
D Frame rate
Displayed as xx/yy fps (xx: recording frame rate,
yy: playback frame rate) only when [Rec Mode]
is set to “Variable Frame”.
(' P113 [ Rec Mode ] )
M N
121
Display/Status Screen
※
A
A OK Mark
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.
(' P88 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
B Voltage/Battery Power
Displays the current status of the power supply
in use.
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
E Resolution
Displays the video image resolution.
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Record
Format] is set to “Off”.
(' P105 [ Record Format ] )
F Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Record
Format] is set to “Off”.
(' P105 [ Record Format ] )
G Audio Level Meter
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.
appears on the screen when in the Auto
mode.
4030 20
10
0
Display/Status Screen
When [Rec Mode]-[Rec Mode] is set to
“Frame Rec”, “Interval Rec”, or “Variable
Frame”, audio cannot be recorded and is
indicated by the [ mark.
4030 20
10
0
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Audio Meter]
is set to “Off”.
(' P106 [ Audio Meter ] )
H GPS Mark
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[GPS] is set
to “On”, the signal reception status is displayed.
(' P110 [ GPS ] )
Memo : The display changes according to the signal
reception sensitivity. If signals cannot be
received, the mark appears in yellow.
This item is not displayed when [GPS] is set to
“Off”.
122
I Volume Operation Indicator
Displayed when there are changes made to the
volume of the headphone, speaker (0 to 15),
and the values of LCD BRIGHT, PEAKING (­10
to +10).
0
12
LCD BRIGHT
PEAKING
-10
0
Memo : There is no audio output from the speaker in
Camera mode.
J Flash Band Correction Mark
This item is displayed when [Main Menu]-
[Camera Function]-[Flash Band Correction] is
set to “On”.
(' P95 [ Flash Band Correction ] )
K Image Stabilizer Mark
Displayed when the image stabilizer is ON.
: When [Level] of [OIS] is set to
“Normal”.
: When [Level] of [OIS] is set to
“High”.
Memo : If image stabilizer is set to “OFF” when the
Display 0 screen is displayed, appears for 3
seconds.
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
L White Balance Mode
Displays the current white balance mode.
(*****K indicates color temperature)
A<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
Auto A.
B<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
Auto B.
P<*****K> : When the white balance is set to
Preset.
<FAW> : During Full Auto White Balance
mode.
<FAW> : When [AE LOCK] is set to “On”
during Full Auto White Balance
mode.
Memo : Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
M Shutter
The current shutter speed is displayed when
the shutter is set to “On”.
(' P95 [ Shutter ] )
is displayed when the [FULL AUTO] switch
is set to “ON” to enable Full Auto shooting
mode, or when the [SHUTTER] button is
pressed to enable automatic shutter mode.
Memo : The variable range of the shutter speed varies
according to the video format settings.
(' P54 [Setting the Electronic Shutter] )
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
If the shutter speed is not displayed, the shutter
is OFF.
P AE Level
Appears when the AE function is activated,
and [Main Menu]-[Camera Function]-
[AE Level] is set to a value other than
“Normal”.
(' P95 [ AE Level ] )
When operated while manual operation is
disabled, “AE” blinks for about 5 seconds.
When face detection is enabled and [Face
Detect] is set to “AF&AE”, appears on the
left side of “AE”.
(' P50 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
R Focus Display
Displays the value of the focal length during
manual focus.
# is displayed during Auto Focus.
When face detection is enabled, appears
on the left side of #.
(' P50 [Adjusting the Focusing by Face
Detection] )
(' P97 [ Face Detect ] )
Memo : You can specify whether to display the focus
value (“Feet”/“Meter”) or turn off the display in
[Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]
-[Focus].
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(' P105 [ Focus ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
S Focus Assist
“FOCUS” is displayed when auto focus is
activated.
When ACCU­Focus is enabled, “ACCU­
FOCUS” blinks for about 10 seconds while
Focus Assist starts up, after which the
“FOCUS” indicator lights up.
If recording starts while [ACCU­Focus] is
active, [ACCU­Focus] will be forcibly
deactivated.
(' P104 [ Focus Assist ] )
Memo : Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
T Luminance Information
Displayed when the Spot Meter function is
activated.
(' P70 [Setting Spot Meter] )
MAX
: Maximum luminance
MIN
: Minimum luminance
123
Display/Status Screen
N Iris F­Number
Displays F­number of the lens iris.
O Gain
Displays the gain value.
is displayed in the ALC mode during
Manual shooting.
is displayed when AE LOCK is set to “ON”.
“LUX30” or “LUX36” is displayed when in the
low­light shooting mode.
Memo : Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
Q ND Filter Position
Displays the current ND filter position.
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[ND Filter] is
set to “Off”.
(' P105 [ ND Filter ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
U Date/Time Display
Displays the current date and time.
Memo : The date/time display style can be specified in
[Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]
-[Date Style]/[Time Style].
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Date/Time] is
set to “Off”.
(' P106 [ Date/Time ] )
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Record
Set]-[Time Stamp] is set to “On”, this item is
not displayed.
(' P115 [ Time Stamp ] )
Display/Status Screen
V Zoom Display
Displays the zoom position. (Zoom bar or
value)
The zoom bar will only be displayed for 3
seconds after the zoom operation is
activated.
The value will always be displayed. (0 to 99)
Memo : You can specify the display method (Number/
Bar) and whether to turn off the display in [LCD/
VF]-[Display Settings]-“Zoom”.
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(' P105 [ Zoom ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 screen only when
there is a change.
W Network Connection Icon
When [Main Menu]-[System]-[Network]
is set to “On”, the network connection status
is displayed.
This icon is not displayed when “Off” is
selected.
Icon
(Blink)
(Yellow)
Status
Connection is not established
(starting up, preparing for
connection)
Connection is not established
(preparing for connection)
Connection is established
When a USB adapter different
from the connection settings is
detected
(No display) When an incompatible USB
adapter is detected, or when
[Network] is set to “Off”
124
X Time Code ()/User’s Bit () Display
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data.
Example of time code display:
00:00:00:00
※
* Colon (:) denotes non­drop frames and dot (.)
denotes drop frames.
Example of user’s bit display:
FF EE DD 20
Memo : You can specify whether to display the time
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[TC/UB].
This item will not be displayed when “Off” is
selected.
(' P106 [ TC/UB ] )
Y Time Code Lock Indicator
When the built­in time code generator is
synchronized to the external time code data
input during the synchronization of time code
with another camera recorder, lights up.
(' P68 [Synchronizing Time Code on Another
Camera] )
Z Event/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(' P159 [Error Messages and Actions] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Slot Mode] is
set to “Series”.
This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Media
Remain] is set to “Off”. However, warnings will
be displayed.
(' P106 [ Media Remain ] )
Displayed in the Display 0 and Display 1 screens
during warnings only. (When the remaining time
is shorter than 3 minutes)
Display/Status Screen
a Media Status
­­­­
: No card found in the selected
slot
STBY
: Recording standby
RREC
: Recording
REVIEW
: Clip Review
(' P72 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
STBY P
: Pre Rec recording standby
(' P78 [Pre Rec] )
RRECP
: Pre Rec recording
(' P78 [Pre Rec] )
STBY C
: Clip Continuous Rec recording
standby
(' P78 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
RRECC
: Clip Continuous Rec recording
(' P78 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBYC
: Clip Continuous Rec recording
(displayed in pause
yellow)
(' P78 [Clip Continuous Rec] )
STBY : Interval Rec recording standby
(' P81 [Interval Rec] )
STBY
: Interval recording pause
(displayed in
red)
RREC
: Interval Rec recording
(' P81 [Interval Rec] )
STBY : Frame Rec recording standby
(' P80 [Frame Rec] )
RREC
: Frame Rec recording
(' P80 [Frame Rec] )
STBY
: Frame Rec recording pause
(displayed in
yellow)
(' P80 [Frame Rec] )
STOP
: Unable to record to the card in
the slot
P.OFF
: Power OFF
b Dual Rec/Backup Rec Display
“DUAL” is displayed in the Dual Rec mode and
“BACKUP” is displayed in the Backup Rec
mode.
(' P114 [ Slot Mode ] )
125
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Display Screen in Media
Mode
Media Display 0 Screen
This screen displays the media status or event. It
is also used to display warnings only.
O
A
※
NM L K
Memo : Displayed in the Media Display 0 screen during
warnings only.
1000/ 2000
282min
C Resolution
Displays the video image resolution.
D Frame Rate/Bit Rate
Displays the frame rate and bit rate in pairs.
E Operation Guide
Displays a guide for the current operation
buttons.
F Audio Level Meter
Displays the audio levels of CH1 and CH2.
0
G
H
* Appears only during warnings
Media Display 1 Screen
Display/Status Screen
A
B
C
D
O
NM L K
1000/ 2000
282min
1920x1080
60 i HQ
J
4030 20
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
4030 20
10
I
H
Media Display 2 Screen
O
NM L K
1000/ 2000
282min
1920x1080
60 i HQ
J
00: 00: 00.00
Jan 24, 2012
12 :34 :56
E
0
F
4030 20
10
0
G
126
0
H
Memo : This item is not displayed when [Main Menu]-
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Audio Meter]
is set to “Off”.
(' P106 [ Audio Meter ] )
G Volume Operation Indicator
Displayed when there are changes made to
the volume of the headphone, speaker (0 to
15), and the value of LCD BRIGHT (­10 to
+10).
The [PEAKING +/­] operation is disabled in the
Media mode, and its value is fixed at “­10”.
(' P122 [Volume Operation Indicator] )
0
G
A
B
C
D
10
00: 00: 00.00
0
F
A Media
Displays the media slot (A or B) of the
currently played clip.
2 appears when the write­protect switch of
the SD card is set.
B Voltage/Battery Power
Displays the current status of the power supply
in use.
(' P30 [Power Status Display] )
I
ISSUED
2012/12/21
H Information Display
Use the [AE LOCK/4] button to switch between
camera information display, GPS display and
turning off the display.
The GPS display displays information on the
recording location of the video being played
back only when GPS information has been
recorded.
The local date/time is displayed.
Camera information display displays only
information of Gain, Iris, Shutter and White
Balance that have been recorded.
J Time Code ()/User’s Bit () Display
Displays the time code (hour: minute:
second: frame) or user’s bit data.
Example of time code display:
00:00:00:00
※
* Colon (:) denotes non­drop frames and dot (.)
denotes drop frames.
Example of user’s bit display:
FF EE DD 20
0dB
F1. 6
1/ 100
P13000K
AE LOCK/4
Hide
Camera Information
Display
AE LOCK/4
AE LOCK/4
GPS Display
I Date/Time Display
Displays the date/time that is recorded on the
currently played SD card.
Memo : The date/time display style can be specified in
[LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[Date Style]/
[Time Style].
(' P106 [ Date Style ] )
(' P106 [ Time Style ] )
K Event/Warning Display Area
Displays error messages.
(' P159 [Error Messages and Actions] )
L Media Status
PLAY
STILL
FWD *
: Playing
: Still picture playback mode
: High­speed playback in the
forward direction (* playback
speed: 5x or 15x)
REV *
: High­speed playback in the
reverse direction (* reverse
playback speed: 5x or 15x)
STOP
: Stop mode
P.OFF
: Power OFF
M Check Mark
Displayed when the currently played clip is
selected.
N OK Mark
Displayed when OK mark has been appended.
(' P88 [Appending/Deleting OK Mark] )
O Clip Information
Displays current clip number/total number of
clips.
127
Display/Status Screen
+35.483197
+139.652172
Oct 30,2012
07:01:58PM
Memo : You can specify whether to display the time
code, user’s bit, or turn off the display in [TC/UB]
of [Main Menu]-[LCD/VF]-[Display
Settings].
(' P106 [ TC/UB ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Status Screen
For checking the settings of the camera recorder.
Camera 1 Screen/Camera 2 Screen
Audio Level Screen
For checking audio related information such as
microphone volume level.
(' P61 [Audio Recording] )
For checking information related to shooting using
the camera recorder.
Video Screen
For checking the settings related to video output.
(' P107 [Video Set Item] )
Display/Status Screen
USER Switch Set Screen
For checking the status (functions assigned) of the
user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
Audio Screen
For checking the settings related to audio input.
(' P107 [Audio Set Item] )
128
Network Screen
For checking the network­related settings.
(' P115 [ Wizard ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Marker and Safety Zone
Displays (Camera Mode
Only)
The marker and safety zone displays are useful in
helping you determine the angle of view for the
image according to the shooting purpose.
Example of display when [Aspect Ratio] = “4:3”,
[Aspect Marker] = “Line+Halftone”, and [Center
Mark] = “On”
Safety Zone
Center Mark
Color Bar Output
Color bars can be output on this camera recorder.
Memo : The audio test signals (1 kHz) can be output
simultaneously with the color bar output.
(' P109 [ Test Tone ] )
To Output the Color Bar Using the Menu
To output color bars, follow the setting procedure
below.
1 Set [Camera Function]-[Bars] to “On”.
(' P95 [ Bars ] )
Color bars are output.
To Output the Color Bar Using the User Button
Aspect Marker
Camera Features
.
Memo : You can turn On/Off the safety zone and center
mark displays using [LCD/VF]-[Marker
Settings]-[Aspect Ratio], [Safety Zone], and
[Center Mark].
(' P105 [ Safety Zone ] )
1 Assign the “Bars” function to any of the
user buttons.
(' P38 [Assigning Functions to User Buttons] )
2 Press the user button that is assigned with
“Bars”.
Color bars are output.
Smoothening the Skin
Color (Skin Detail
Function)
The Skin Detail function can be used to reduce the
contour enhancement of video signals for only the
skin areas so as to produce a smoother skin tone.
1 Set [Skin Detail] to “On”.
(' P101 [ Skin Detail ] )
Set [Main Menu]-[Camera Process]-
[Detail]/[Adjust]-[Skin Detail] to “On”.
Memo : You can specify the adjustment level for the
contour enhancement of the skin tone in [Main
Menu]-[Camera Process]-[Detail]/[Adjust]
-[Skin Detail]/[Level].
(' P101 [ Level ] )
129
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Adjusting Color Matrix
The color matrix of the camera recorder can be
adjusted to a color of the user’s preference.
When shooting is performed using multiple
cameras, the colors of the different cameras can
be adjusted, and a color of the user’s preference
can be set on this camera recorder.
The Saturation, Hue and Lightness of the
primary and complementary colors (6 colors in
total) can be set individually.
Adjust the color on the vector scope and
waveform monitor using the DSC color chart.
* The adjusted values of “Standard”, “Cinema
Vivid”, and “Cinema Subdued” in [Color Matrix]
can be stored individually.
(' P100 [ Color Matrix ] )
Camera Features
1 Select [Camera Process]-[Color Matrix]/
[Adjust].
(' P100 [ Adjust ] )
2 Adjust Hue.
Select the color using the cross­shaped
button (JK) and confirm using the cross­
shaped button (I). (The cursor moves to
Hue.)
Pressing the cross­shaped button (J)
rotates the hue in the clockwise direction on
the vector scope.
Pressing the cross­shaped button (K)
rotates the hue in the anti­clockwise
direction on the vector scope.
Red
Cyan
R
I
Mg
R
I
Y
Mg
Y
B
G
B
G
Cy
Yellow
Blue
R
I
Cy
Mg
R
I
Y
Mg
Y
B
G
Green
R
I
B
G
Cy
Magenta
Mg
R
I
Y
Cy
Mg
Y
B
G
130
Cy
B
G
Cy
3 Adjust Saturation.
Press the cross­shaped button (I) to move
the cursor to Saturation.
Each of the colors changes in the direction
indicated by the arrow on the vector scope.
Pressing the cross­shaped button (J)
moves the color outward from the center of
the circle on the vector scope.
Pressing the cross­shaped button (K)
moves the color toward to the center of the
circle on the vector scope.
Red
R
I
Cyan
Mg
R
I
Mg
Y
Y
B
G
Yellow
R
I
B
Cy
G
Blue
Mg
Cy
R
I
Mg
Y
Y
B
B
G
G
Cy
Magenta
Green
R
I
Mg
Cy
R
I
Mg
YI
Y
B
B
G
Cy
G
Cy
4 Adjust Lightness.
Pressing the cross­shaped button (J)
lightens; and pressing the cross­shaped
button (K) darkens.
Press the cross­shaped button (I) to return
the cursor to Hue.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Configuring Setup Files
The menu settings can be stored on the camera
recorder or an SD card by saving them as a setup
file.
Loading a saved setup file enables you to
reproduce the appropriate setup state speedily.
Two types of setup files are available.
oScene file:
File that contains all menu settings, ranging from
video format settings to image creation settings
such as device settings and shooting conditions,
as well as the contents of the [Favorites Menu].
oPicture file:
File that contains image creation settings in
accordance to the shooting conditions ([Camera
Process] menu items).
(' P98 [Camera Process Menu] )
Memo : Make use of the [Setup File] menu to save or
load a setup file.
The following operations can be performed on
the [Setup File] menu.
[Saving Setup Files] P 131
[Loading a Setup File] P 132
[Deleting Setup Files] P 133
Camera recorder
SD slot A
SD slot B
: [CAM1] to [CAM4]
: [1] to [8]
: [31] to [38]
Compatibility
oScene file
Only scene files of the GY­HM600 and
GY­HM650 series can be loaded.
When the scene files saved using GY­HM650
are loaded, the functions that only exist on
GY­HM650 are ignored.
oPicture file
Only picture files of the GY­HM600 and GY­HM650
series can be loaded.
1 Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu]-[System]-[Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(' P110 [ Setup File ] )
2 Select [Store File] and press the Set button
(R).
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and
press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4 Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross­shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
4
Memo : Files cannot be written in the following cases.
(Displayed in gray, selection disabled)
When the inserted SD card is not supported or
not formatted. (File name appears as “­­­”.)
When a write­protected SD card is inserted
(a 2 mark appears beside the SD card icon).
5 Name the file.
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
(' P93 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
You can enter up to 8 characters for the
[Store File]/[Picture File] subname.
Memo : When overwriting an existing file, the subname
of the existing file is displayed.
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous screen.
131
Camera Features
Number of Storable Setup Files
Saving Setup Files
ISSUED
2012/12/21
6 Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
5
6
7 Save the file.
A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen.
7
Camera Features
Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
Loading a Setup File
1 Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu]-[System]-[Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(' P110 [ Setup File ] )
2 Select [Load File] and press the Set button
(R).
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and
press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4 Select the file to load using the cross­
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
4
Memo : When the write­protect switch of the inserted SD
card is set, a 2 mark appears beside the SD
card icon. Setup files can be loaded from an SD
card even if the write­protect switch is set.
Setup files that are completely incompatible will
not be displayed.
(' P131 [Configuring Setup Files] )
5 Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the
screen.
8 Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
5
6 Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
132
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Deleting Setup Files
1 Display the [Setup File] menu.
Select [Main Menu]-[System]-[Setup File]
and press the Set button (R).
(' P110 [ Setup File ] )
2 Select [Delete File] and press the Set button
(R).
3 Select [Scene File] or [Picture File], and
press the Set button (R).
The existing files are displayed.
4 Select the file to delete using the cross­
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
4
Camera Features
Memo : Scene files saved on the SD card cannot be
deleted.
5 Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the
screen.
5
6 Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
133
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Managing/Editing Clips on
a PC
2 Select [Change] using the cross­shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The camera recorder switches to USB mode.
Loading Clips to the PC (USB
Connection Mode)
You can load clips to a PC by connecting the
camera recorder to the PC via the USB port.
Doing so enables clips stored in the SD card to
be managed and edited on the PC.
Files on the SD card can be managed/edited on
the connected PC in this mode only for USB
mass storage class devices that are recognized
by the said PC as a peripheral drive.
Memo : Files cannot be written to the SD card.
Make sure to manage/edit files recorded in the
MP4 file format using the (JVC ProHD Clip
Manager) PC application software in the
supplied disc.
For details on how to install the application
software, refer to the [User's Guide] of the [JVC
ProHD Clip Manager] inside the supplied disc.
1 Connect the camera recorder to the PC
using a USB cable.
A confirmation message “Change to USB
Mode?” to enable the USB connection appears.
Connecting External Devices
INPUT2
INPUT1
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
DEVICE
REMO
TE
DC
HOST
AV
PC
134
2
Memo : If recording is in progress, the “Change to USB
Mode?” message appears after recording
stops.
If playback is in progress, the camera recorder
switches to USB mode after the file closes
automatically, such as when playback stops.
Disconnecting
Disable the connection on the PC, then remove
the USB cable from the camera recorder.
Doing so exits the USB mode and switches the
camera recorder to Camera mode.
Memo : The procedure for disabling the USB connection
varies according to the PC in use. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of the PC.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
When your PC cannot recognize the SD
card
Confirm and update the OS of your PC.
OS
Windows XP/
Windows XP SP1
Windows XP SP2/
Windows XP SP3
To output live or playback video images and
audio sound to an external monitor, select the
output signals from the camera recorder, and
connect using an appropriate cable according to
the monitor to be used.
Choose the most suitable terminal according to
the monitor in use.
[HD/SD SDI] terminal:
Outputs either the HD­SDI signal or SD­SDI
signal.
[AV] terminal:
Outputs composite video and audio signals.
[HDMI] terminal:
Outputs HDMI signals.
Configure the settings in the [A/V Set] menu to
match the monitor to be connected.
(' P107 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
Memo : When [Network] is set to “On(HDMI Off)” or
“On(SDI Off)”, either HDMI signal or SDI signal
is output.
Connecting External Devices
Description
Necessary to update to SP2
or higher.
Necessary to download the
update software.
(KB955704)
http://www.microsoft.com/
downloads/details.aspx?
familyid=1CBE3906­
DDD1­4CA2­B727­
C2DFF5E30F61&
displaylang=en
Windows Vista
Necessary to update to SP1
or higher.
Windows Vista SP1/ Necessary to download the
Windows Vista SP2 update software.
(KB975823)
32 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=2d1abe01­
0942­4f8aabb2­
2ad529de00a1
64 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=7d54c53f­017c
­4ea5­
ae08­34c3452ba315
Windows 7
Necessary to download the
update software.
(KB976422)
32 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=3ee91fc2­
a9bc­4ee1­
aca3­2a9aff5915ea
64 bit version
http://
www.microsoft.com/
downloads/en/
details.aspx?
FamilyID=73f766dd­
7127­4445­
b860­47084587155f
Connecting External
Monitor
135
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Connecting via SDI
Digital video signals, together with embedded
INPUT2
(superimposed) audio signals and time code
signals, are output for both the HD­SDI and SD­
SDI signals.
User’s bit output from the [HD/SD SDI] output
terminal is used as a flag to determine valid
video signals. Therefore, accurate values will
not be output.
Memo : The sampling frequency for embedded
(superimposed) audio signals is 48 kHz. Time
code of the built­in time generator as well as
playback time code are also output.
INPUT1
DEVICE
BATT.REL
EASE
A
AV
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
SD/HD
SDI
HDMI
REMO
TE
HOST
DC
Clamp Filter
(supplied)
REMOTE
HOST
DC
Settings for SDI Down­Converted Output
You can select the method to “down convert” HD
Wire Clamp
(supplied)
HDMI
SDI IN
AV input
Connecting External Devices
* Select the display pattern in [A/V Set]-
[HDMI/SDI Out].
(' P107 [ HDMI/SDI Out ] )
* When [Record Format]-[System] is set to “SD”,
only SD­SDI signals are output.
(' P111 [ System ] )
* To display the menu screen or display screen on
an external monitor, set [A/V Set]-[Video Set]
-[Display On TV] to “On”.
(' P107 [ Display On TV ] )
136
video images to SD images during SD­SDI
output.
Set using [A/V Set]-[Video Set]-[SD
Aspect].
The available modes include “Side Cut”, “Letter”
(blackened at the top and bottom), and
“Squeeze” (full size, compressed at the left and
right).
(' P113 [ SD Aspect ] )
Memo : When [Record Format]-[System] is set to “SD”,
and [SD Aspect] is set to “4:3”, this item cannot be
selected.
(' P111 [ System ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Connecting the
Headphone
Connecting Wired Remote
Control
Audio output from the [+] terminal can be
The functions of the camera recorder can be
configured using a wired remote control.
Memo : When the switches of the camera recorder and
remote control unit are operated at the same
time, the switch operation of the remote control
unit takes priority over that of the camera
recorder.
selected using [A/V Set]-[Monitor] or the
[MONITOR] selection switch on the camera
recorder.
(' P109 [ Monitor ] )
The different combinations of settings that are
output from the [+] terminal and monitor
speaker are as follows.
[MONITOR]
Switch
Settings
[CH1]
[+]
terminal
L
R
CH1
[Monitor]
Settings
­
[BOTH]
[Mix]
CH1
CH1+CH2 CH1+CH2
[Stereo]
CH1 CH2
­
CH2
[CH2]
Speaker *
1 Connect a wired remote control to the
camera recorder.
Connect the wired remote control (sold
separately) to the [REMOTE] terminal of this
camera recorder.
CH2
* Audio is output from the speaker only in Media
mode. Does not output in the Camera mode.
INPUT2
INPUT1
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
INPUT2
INPUT1
DEVIC
E
AUX
POW
E
/CHGR
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AV
B
HDMI
REMO
TE
DC
AUX
HD/SD
SDI
HOST
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
REMOTE
Connect the wired
remote control
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
DC
HOST
Caution : Turn off the power of the camera recorder when
connecting a wired remote control.
2 Turn on the power of the camera recorder.
Memo : If both CH1 and CH2 are built­in microphones,
stereo sound is output from the [+] terminal
regardless of the [MONITOR] switch setting and
[Monitor] setting.
137
Connecting External Devices
REMO
TE
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Functions of Network
Connection
The network function can be operated by
connecting one of the following adapters to the
rear [HOST] terminal.
USB wireless LAN adapter
USB­Ethernet adapter
USB­Cellular adapter
(' P139 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
The network feature comes with a browser­
based function that makes use of devices such
as smartphones, tablet terminals, and PCs, as
well as an FTP function for executing operations
on the thumbnail screen or menu.
List of Functions
Importing Metadata
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format) from the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
(' P142 [Importing Metadata] )
Uploading Recorded Clips
You can upload clips recorded in the SD card to a
preset FTP server.
(' P144 [Uploading a Recorded Video Clip] )
Editing Metadata
Planning Metadata
Connecting to the Network
You can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s metadata via a browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC,
and edit the metadata that is to be applied to
clips to be recorded.
(' P147 [ Planning Metadata ] )
Clip Metadata
You can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s metadata via a browser on devices
such as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC,
and display or rewrite the metadata that is
recorded to a clip.
(' P148 [ Clip Metadata ] )
View Remote
You can access via a browser on devices such as
a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check the
live image or remotely control the camera.
(' P150 [View Remote Feature] )
138
Preparing Network
Connection
Operating Environment
Computer
oCPU
Core 2 Duo 2.4 GHz or higher
oMemory
2 GB or higher
oDisplay
1024x768 or higher
oOS
Windows XP SP3/Windows Vista SP2 (32 bit/64
bit)/Windows7 SP1 (32 bit/64 bit)
Mac OS X v10.5 or later
oWeb Browser
Internet Explorer 8 or later
Safari 5.1 or later
Google Chrome 21.0 or later
Mozilla Firefox 15 or later
Smartphone/Tablet Terminal
oiPhone/iPad/iPod touch
iOS 5.1.1 or later (Safari 5.1 or later)
oAndroid Smartphone
Android 4.0 or later (standard browser)
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Camera Setup for Network Connection
1 Connect an appropriate adapter according
to the intended use to the [HOST] terminal
at the rear of the camera recorder.
The following adapters can be connected.
USB wireless LAN adapter
USB­Ethernet adapter
USB­Cellular adapter
INPUT2
Connecting via Wireless LAN
Connection via Access Point
1 Perform setting on the camera recorder,
and start up the [Wizard] screen.
(' P139 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
2 [Wireless LAN] appears on the [Wizard]
screen.
INPUT1
BATT.RELE
ASE
A
AUX
POW
ER
/CHG
REC
DEVIC
E
AV
B
HD/SD
SDI
HDMI
REMO
TE
DC
HOST
HOST
HOST
Connect an appropriate adapter
Memo : Only a network connection adapter can be
connected to the [HOST] terminal.
Connect or disconnect an adapter only after you
have turned off the power of the camera
recorder.
You can find the latest information on the
compatible adapters at the product page of our
website.
Two types of network coverage (WAN and LAN)
are available for each application.
3
4 Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a browser.
(' P146 [Connecting via a Browser] )
139
Connecting to the Network
2 Enable the network connection.
Set [Main Menu]-[System]-[Network] to
“On(HDMI Off)” or “On(SDI Off)”.
3 Configure the connection settings.
Select [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Network]-[Settings]-[Connection
Setup]-[Wizard] and press the Set button
(R).
A wizard screen appears according to the
type of adapter connected. Follow the
instructions on the screen to perform setting.
(' P139 [Connecting via Wireless LAN] )
(' P141 [Connecting via Wired LAN] )
(' P141 [Connecting via 3G Adapter] )
3 Press the I button to display the [Select
Connection Type] screen.
Select “Connect with Access Point”.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting. Perform setting for the following.
Mode of connection
Method of setting
* SSID, type of encryption, Passphrase, and
IP Address setting (“DHCP” or “Manual”) in
cases other than WPS
ISSUED
2012/12/21
P2P Connection
You can access the web function of this camera
recorder from devices such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC.
1 [Wireless LAN] appears on the [Wizard]
screen.
2 Press the I button to display the [Select
Connection Type] screen.
Select “P2P”.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting.
Perform setting for the following.
Mode of connection
Method of setting
* SSID and Passphrase in cases other than
WPS
4 Select [SSID] from the list of access points
(smartphone, tablet terminal, PC, etc.), and
enter [Passphrase].
Display the list of access points in the
wireless connection settings of the
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and
select “HM650­*****”. (The “*****” portion
varies according to the device.)
After the password confirmation screen
appears, enter the [Passphrase] displayed
on the [Network] screen.
2
Connecting to the Network
Memo : When “WPS” is selected in the [Select Setup
Type] screen, the following steps 3 and 4 are not
required.
3 Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, and display the [Network] (status)
screen.
Press the [STATUS] button on the camera
recorder to display the status screen.
Press the cross­shaped button (HI) to
display the [Network] screen.
Check to ensure that the [SSID] and
[Passphrase] that you have set in the wizard
are displayed.
140
5 Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a browser.
(' P146 [Connecting via a Browser] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Connecting via Wired LAN
You can connect a device such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC directly to the camera
recorder using a cross cable to access the camera
recorder’s web functions.
1 Connect the [HOST] terminal on the camera
recorder to the smartphone, tablet
terminal, PC, etc. using a cross cable.
2 Perform setting on the camera recorder,
and start up the [Wizard] screen.
(' P139 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
3 [Ethernet] appears on the [Wizard] screen.
4 Press the I button to display the [IP
Address Configuration] screen.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting. Perform setting for the following.
IP address setting (DHCP or manual)
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
DNS Server
You can make use of the FTP function by
connecting a USB­Cellular adapter to this camera
recorder.
1 Connect the USB­Cellular adapter to the
[HOST] terminal of the camera recorder.
2 Perform setting on the camera recorder,
and start up the [Wizard] screen.
(' P139 [Camera Setup for Network
Connection] )
3 [Cellular] appears on the [Wizard] screen.
4 Press the I button to display the [Select
Carrier] screen.
Follow the screen instructions to complete
setting. Perform setting for the following.
Carrier selection
Access point
Connection phone number
User name
Caution : You can access the web functions via a browser
on devices such as a smartphone, tablet
terminal, or PC only in a LAN environment.
Note that you may have to pay very high bills in
the case of pay­per­use contracts. Fixed price
contract is recommended if you are using the
network function.
Note that you may have to pay very high bills if
the APN is incorrectly set. Make sure that the
setting is correct.
There may be communication even when you
are not using the network function.
Remove the adapter when the function is not in
use.
141
Connecting to the Network
5 Setting is complete.
After setting is complete, you can access the
camera recorder via a browser.
(' P146 [Connecting via a Browser] )
Connecting via 3G Adapter
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Importing Metadata
You can download a metadata settings file (XML
format) from the FTP server and store metadata in
the camera recorder.
The imported metadata is applied to clips to be
recorded.
Preparing Metadata
You can record one of the four metadata types
Configuring the Server for Downloading
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP server for downloading the metadata (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
path of the file to download.
1 Open the [Metadata Server] screen.
Open the [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Network]-[Settings]-[Metadata Server]
screen.
below.
Title1
Title2
Creator
Description
:
:
:
:
Not more than 63 characters
Not more than 127 characters
Not more than 127 characters
Not more than 2047 characters
Only ASCII characters (single­byte
alphanumeric characters and symbols) are
usable.
Metadata makes use of the XML description
format.
Edit the
<Title1><Title2><Description><Creator> tag
element using the XML editor. (Indicated by the
frames below)
Connecting to the Network
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<NRT-MetaInterface lastUpdate="2012-07-26T18:06:21+09:00"
xmlns="urn:schemas-proHD:nonRealTimeMetaInterface:ver.1.00"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance">
<MetaData>
<Title1>Title1 sample</Title1>
<!-- only "en",max63bytes -->
<Title2>Title2 sample</Title2>
<!-- only "en",max127bytes -->
<Description>Description sample</Description>
<!-- only "en",max2047bytes -->
<Creator>Creator sample</Creator>
<!-- only "en",max127bytes -->
</MetaData>
</NRT-MetaInterface>
2 Register the [Metadata Server].
Select a server using the cross­shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
The server settings screen appears. Perform
setting for each item.
Up to 4 settings can be registered.
(' P116 [ Metadata Server ] )
Memo : For details on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
142
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Importing Metadata
Download the metadata settings file (XML format)
from the FTP server.
1 Select [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Network]-[Import Metadata] and press
the Set button (R).
The [Import Metadata] screen appears.
3 Select [Import] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Import starts.
After import is complete, the display is restored
to the screen before the [Import Metadata]
screen appears.
3
2 Select the server for importing the
metadata.
The name that is registered in [Metadata
Server]-[Alias] is displayed.
Select a server using the cross­shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
2
143
Connecting to the Network
Memo : You cannot exit the menu or perform recording
while import is in progress.
If import of the metadata failed, “Import Error!” is
displayed, and a message indicating the cause
of the error appears.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the [Import
Metadata] screen in step 1.
(' P161 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Uploading a Recorded
Video Clip
Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset
FTP server.
Configuring the FTP Server for
Uploading
For specifying the settings for connecting to the
FTP server to upload recorded clips to (domain
name, user name, password, etc.) as well as the
directory of the upload destination.
1 Open the [Clip Server] screen.
Open the [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Network]-[Settings]-[Clip Server] screen.
2 Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded.
Move the cursor to the clip to be uploaded using
the cross­shaped button (JKHI).
2
3 Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
3
2 Register the [Clip Server].
Register the server to upload recorded clips in
the SD card to.
Up to 4 servers can be registered.
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )
4 Select [FTP Upload]-[This Clip]- server
to upload to, and press the Set button (R).
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
Connecting to the Network
Memo : For details on the registered information, please
consult the network administrator for the server.
Uploading Video Clip
Upload clips recorded in the SD card to a preset
FTP server.
All playable clips on the thumbnail screen can be
uploaded.
Uploading a Video Clip
1 Set the camera recorder to the Media mode.
Press and hold the [MODE] selection button
in Camera mode to enter Media mode. A
thumbnail screen of the clips recorded on the
SD card is displayed.
You can upload the selected clips on the
thumbnail screen to the FTP server.
(' P83 [Thumbnail Screen] )
144
Memo : The options for the server to upload files to are
indicated using the preset names in [Clip
Server]-[Alias].
To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
When uploading starts, the [MODE] selection
button is disabled until uploading is completed
or stopped.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
5 Upload is complete.
After upload is complete, “Successfully
Completed.” appears on the screen.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
5
Selecting and Uploading Multiple Clips
To select and upload multiple clips, refer to
“[Selecting and Performing Operations on Multiple
Clips] P 89”.
Uploading All Video Clips
1 Press the [LOLUX/3] button.
The action selection screen is displayed.
2 Upload the clips.
Select [FTP Upload...]-[All Clips]- server to
upload to, and press the Set button (R).
3 Upload starts.
The status of the transfer process is indicated
by a progress bar.
Memo : To stop uploading, press the Set button (R).
Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen, and
press the Set button (R) to stop uploading and
return to the thumbnail screen.
If the file to be uploaded has the same file name
as an existing file in the FTP server, an overwrite
confirmation window appears.
When “HTTP” is selected in the [Select FTP
Proxy] screen of the network connection setting,
the overwrite confirmation window will not be
displayed and the existing file is overwritten.
4 Upload is complete.
After all clips are uploaded successfully,
“Successfully Completed.” is displayed.
Press the Set button (R) to return to the
thumbnail screen.
When clips are not uploaded successfully,
the following errors are displayed.
2
(' P161 [List of FTP Transfer Errors] )
145
Connecting to the Network
Cause of Error
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Connecting via a Browser
You can access the web functions of this camera
recorder via a browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
Make the necessary preparations for connection in
advance.
(' P139 [Connect an appropriate adapter
according to the intended use to the [HOST]
terminal at the rear of the camera recorder.] )
3 Enter the user name and password.
Enter the user name (prohd) and the password
(initial password:0000) on the login screen to
display the main page of the camera.
1 Set the camera recorder to the Camera
mode, and display the [Network] (status)
screen.
Press the [STATUS] button on the camera
recorder to display the status screen.
Press the cross­shaped button (HI) to
display the [Network] screen.
Check the displayed [IP Address].
Connecting to the Network
2 Start up the browser on the terminal you
wish to connect to the camera recorder,
and enter the [IP Address].
(Example: 192.168.0.1)
If “192.168.0.1” is displayed in [IP Address],
enter “http://192.168.0.1”.
http://192.168.0.1
146
Memo : The password can be altered in [Main Menu]
-[System]-[Network]-[Settings]-[Web][Change Password].
(' P115 [ Change Password ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Editing Metadata
You can create the metadata to be inserted into a
recorded file, or rewrite the metadata of a recorded
clip.
Planning Metadata
3 Editing Metadata
A Enter information for the necessary fields.
B After input is complete, tap (click) [Save] to
overwrite the metadata.
A
You can access the page for editing the camera
recorder’s metadata via a browser on devices such
as a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC, and edit
the metadata that is to be applied to clips to be
recorded.
B
1 Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page from a device such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(' P146 [Connecting via a Browser] )
2 Tap (click) the [Planning Metadata] tab to
open the [Planning Metadata] screen.
2
Keyboard
4 Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Update of the [Planning Metadata] starts.
After update is complete, “Renewal of
planning metadata is succeeded.” is
displayed. Tap (click) [OK].
Returns to the screen in step 3.
147
Connecting to the Network
Memo : If update failed, “Renewal of planning metadata
is succeeded.” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
3.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Clip Metadata
You can access the page for editing the metadata
via a browser on devices such as a smartphone,
tablet terminal, or PC, and display or rewrite the
metadata that is recorded to a clip.
1 Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page from a device such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(' P146 [Connecting via a Browser] )
2 Tap (click) the [Clip Metadata] tab to start
up the [Clip Metadata].
2
Memo : When the menu or status is displayed, display
of the confirmation screen will be put on hold.
If the menu is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the menu.
If the status is displayed on the camera recorder,
close the status display.
Pressing the Set button (R) on the camera
recorder while in the Remote Edit Mode ends
the Remote Edit Mode forcibly and switches to
the Camera mode.
4 Select the clip to rewrite the metadata.
A list of recorded clips appears on the [Clip
Metadata] screen.
Tap (click) the clip for which you want to
rewrite the metadata.
Connecting to the Network
3 Set the camera recorder to the “Remote
Edit Mode”.
“Change to Remote Edit Mode?” appears on
the display screen of the camera recorder.
Select [Change] and press the Set button (R)
to switch to the Remote Edit Mode.
3
148
Memo : You can switch the displayed slot using the [Slot
A] and [Slot B] tabs.
You can jump through the displayed clips
backward or forward by 30 clips each using the
[↑­30] and [↓+30] tabs.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
5 Editing the Metadata of Selected Clips
A Edit the information for the necessary fields.
If you are using a PC, input using the mouse
and keyboard.
If you are using a smartphone or tablet
terminal, tap the text input area to display a
standard software keyboard on the screen.
Enter the information using the displayed
keyboard.
B You can tap (click) [OK Mark] to add an OK mark
to or delete it from selected clips.
C After editing is complete, tap (click) [Save] to
overwrite the metadata.
A
B
6 Tap (click) [OK] on the confirmation screen.
Update of the metadata starts.
After update is complete, “Renewal of clip
metadata is succeeded.” is displayed. Tap
(click) [OK].
Returns to the screen in step 4.
C
Memo : If update failed, “Renewal of clip metadata is
failed.” is displayed.
Tap (click) [Close] to return to the screen of step
4.
Keyboard
Connecting to the Network
149
ISSUED
2012/12/21
View Remote Feature
You can access via a browser on devices such as
a smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC to check the
live image and perform the following remote control
operations.
Start/stop recording
Zooming
Register/delete preset zoom
1 Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page from a device such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(' P146 [Connecting via a Browser] )
2 Tap (click) the [View Remote] tab to open
the [View Remote] screen.
2
A Page Switch Tab
Tap (click) this tab to move to the [Planning
Metadata], [Clip Metadata], or [Settings]
screen.
B Live View Screen
Displays the live images.
Tap a live image to display or hide information
that is displayed on the live image, such as
remaining space on the media and time code.
C [Clear] Button
Switches to the Delete Preset Zoom Position
mode.
(' P151 [Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom] )
(' P152 [Deleting a Preset Zoom] )
D [Preset] Button
Switches to the Register Preset Zoom Position
mode.
(' P151 [Registering Preset Zoom] )
E [A]/[B]/[C] Buttons
Use these buttons to perform preset registration
or delete a preset data.
F Zoom Control
Operate the zoom function by dragging the
zoom button along the sliding bar.
Tap (click) the [Wide] or [Tele] button to fine­
tune the zoom position.
G Function Lock Button
Locks the functions that have been set on the
[Settings] screen.
(' P153 [Changing View Remote Function
Settings] )
Icon
Operating Procedure
Connecting to the Network
01:12
12:54
54.19
19
Z 00
ProHD
H Stop Record Button
I Start Record Button
B
C
26min
50min
STBY
282min
I
H
E
F
G
150
Description
Not locked
A
D
Locked
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Registering/Deleting Preset Zoom
Registering Preset Zoom
You can register any 3 zoom positions.
1 Set to the Register Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to switch to the
Register Preset Zoom mode.
4 In the same way, register [B] and [C].
After all three positions A, B and C are
registered, the positions of the [A], [B], and [C]
buttons will be rearranged according to the
order of the registered zoom position from the
left.
12:54
54.19
19
01:12
Z 00
ProHD
12:54
54.19
19
01:12
Z 00
ProHD
26min
50min
STBY
26min
50min
STBY
282min
282min
2 Determine the zoom position.
Use the zoom control to operate the zoom and
determine a position.
3 Tap (click) [A].
Position [A] is registered, and position A is
displayed on the sliding bar of the zoom control.
01:12
12:54
54.19
19
Z 00
ProHD
5 Cancel the Register Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Preset] button to cancel the
Register Preset Zoom mode.
Memo : After registration is complete ([A], [B], and [C]
buttons are all active), tapping (clicking) each
button switches to the corresponding preset
zoom position.
This function operates independently of the
preset zoom position on the camera recorder.
(' P48 [Saving/Recalling Current Zoom
Position (Preset Zoom)] )
Connecting to the Network
26min
50min
STBY
282min
151
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Deleting a Preset Zoom
1 Set to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
When any of positions [A], [B], and [C] are
registered, tapping (clicking) the [Clear] button
switches to the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
26min
50min
STBY
You can change the network­related settings by
accessing via a browser on devices such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
1 Access the main page of the camera.
Access the page from a device such as a
smartphone, tablet terminal, or PC.
(' P146 [Connecting via a Browser] )
2 Tap (click) the [Settings] tab.
12:54
54.19
19
01:12
Z 00
ProHD
Configuring Settings via a
Browser
282min
2
2 Tap (click) the [A], [B], or [C] button that
corresponds to the position you want to
delete.
The position is deleted, and the button is
grayed out.
The corresponding zoom position mark on
the sliding bar also disappears.
3 Open the [Settings] screen.
Set each of the items as follows.
12:54
54.19
19
01:12
Z 00
ProHD
Connecting to the Network
A
26min
50min
STBY
282min
B
Grayed out
C
Position mark
disappears
D
3 Cancel the Delete Preset Zoom mode.
Tap (click) the [Clear] button to cancel the
Delete Preset Zoom mode.
Memo : The Clip Review function of the camera recorder
is unavailable during View Remote operation.
(' P72 [Viewing Recorded Videos Immediately
(Clip Review)] )
152
ISSUED
2012/12/21
A View Remote
Settings for operations on the View Remote.
B Connection Setup
Settings related to the network.
You can change the settings for each of the
preset items on the [Wizard] screen of the
camera recorder.
C Metadata Server
Settings on the server for importing the
metadata.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the Metadata Server menu on the camera
recorder.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
D Clip Server
Settings for the server to upload recorded clips
to.
Setting can be performed in the same way as
the [Clip Server] menu on the camera recorder.
The latest settings are reflected, regardless of
whether they are specified via the camera
recorder or web operation.
Memo : Priority is given to menu operation on the
camera recorder.
When the menu on the camera recorder is
opened while the [Settings] screen is opened
using the browser, a warning appears, after
which the display returns to the main screen.
While the menu is displayed on the camera
recorder, the [Settings] screen cannot be
opened via the browser.
Changing View Remote Function
Settings
For performing setting for using the View Remote
function.
A
B
C
C [OK]/[Cancel]
Tap (click) [OK] to save the settings.
Tap (click) [Cancel] to stop setting and return to
the main [Settings] screen.
153
Connecting to the Network
A [Camera Name]
For setting the name that appears at the top
left of the view screen.
Tapping the text input area displays a
software keyboard.
If you are using a PC, enter using the PC
keyboard.
By tapping the Go key after input is complete,
the software keyboard disappears.
B [Restrictions]
For setting the buttons to be disabled on the
View screen while in the locked mode.
[REC]:
For setting whether to disable the Stop
Record button or zoom operation during
recording.
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock] and [Lock].
[Except REC]:
For setting whether to disable the Stop
Record button or zoom operation in any
mode other than the recording mode.
Tap (click) each item to switch between
[Unlock] and [Lock].
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Changing Connection Setup
You can change the settings for each of the preset
items on the [Wizard] screen of the camera
recorder.
If all the items cannot be displayed in a single
page, scroll down to display the remaining
items.
Items that cannot be changed are grayed out
according to the type of adapter connected and
the mode of connection.
D Settings on the [Select Setup Type] Screen
E
A
B
C
E Settings on the [IP Address Configuration]
Screen
When “DHCP” is selected, all items will be
grayed out.
D
A Type of Adapter Connected
B Mode of Wireless LAN Connection
C [Search Access Point] Button
Tap (click) to display a list of the detected
access points.
The currently selected access point is indicated
by a dot mark ().
F
Connecting to the Network
G
H
F Settings during Use of a 3G Connection Adapter
G Settings on the [Select FTP Proxy] Screen
H [OK]/[Cancel] Button
After changing of settings is complete, tap
(click) the [OK] button.
On the confirmation screen, tap (click)
[Execute] to change the settings on the camera
recorder and restart the network.
154
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Changing Metadata Server Settings
You can make direct changes to the FTP server for
importing the metadata set in [Metadata Server] on
the camera recorder, or the path of the file to import.
Changing Clip Server Settings
You can make direct changes to the server and
directory settings that are specified in [Clip
Server] on the camera recorder for uploading
recorded clips in the SD card to the FTP server.
A
A
B
B
A FTP Server to Upload Recorded Clips To
The registered FTP server name (name that is
set in Alias) is displayed.
B Settings Specified in [Clip Server]
Settings specified in [Main Menu]-[System]
-[Network]-[Settings]-[Clip Server] are
displayed.
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )
155
Connecting to the Network
A FTP Server for Importing the Metadata
The registered FTP server name (name that is
set in Alias) is displayed.
B Settings Specified in [Metadata Server]
Settings specified in [Main Menu]-[System]
-[Network]-[Settings]-[Metadata Server]
are displayed.
(' P116 [ Metadata Server ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Managing the Network
Connection Settings File
This camera recorder allows you to save the
network connection settings on the Wizard screen
to the camera recorder unit.
Loading a saved connecting settings file enables
you to reproduce the appropriate network
connection state speedily.
Memo : To save or load the connection settings, go to
[Main Menu]-[System]-[Network]-
[Settings]-[Connection Setup].
The following operations can be performed on
the [Connection Setup] menu.
[Saving the Connection Settings File] P 156
[Reading the Connection Settings
File] P 157
[Deleting Connection Settings] P 158
Saving the Connection Settings File
1 Select [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Network]-[Settings]-[Connection
Setup] and press the Set button (R).
2 Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
2
3 Select the file to be newly saved (or
overwritten) using the cross­shaped
button (JK), and press the Set button (R).
Number of Storable Setup Files
Camera recorder
: [CAM1] to [CAM4]
3
Connecting to the Network
4 Name the file.
Enter the subname using the software
keyboard.
(' P93 [Text Input with Software Keyboard] )
Memo : When overwriting an existing file, the subname
of the existing file is displayed.
Select [Cancel] and press the Set button (R), or
press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous screen.
156
ISSUED
2012/12/21
5 Select [Store] and press the Set button (R).
Reading the Connection Settings File
1 Select [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Network]-[Settings]-[Connection
Setup] and press the Set button (R).
2 Select [Load] and press the Set button (R).
4
5
6 Save the file.
A confirmation screen appears when you
choose to overwrite.
Select [Overwrite] on the confirmation
screen, and press the Set button (R). Saving
starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen.
6
2
3 Select the file to read using the cross­
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
3
Saving starts, and “Storing...” appears on the
screen when the file is newly saved.
7 Saving is complete.
After saving of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
4
5 Reading is complete.
After reading of the file is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen, and the menu screen
closes automatically.
157
Connecting to the Network
4 Select [Load] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Loading starts, and “Loading...” appears on the
screen.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Deleting Connection Settings
1 Select [Main Menu]-[System]-
[Network]-[Settings]-[Connection
Setup] and press the Set button (R).
2 Select [Delete] and press the Set button
(R).
2
3 Select the file to delete using the cross­
shaped button (JK), and press the Set
button (R).
3
Connecting to the Network
4 Select [Delete] on the confirmation screen,
and press the Set button (R).
Deletion starts, and “Deleting...” appears on the
screen.
4
5 Deletion is complete.
After file deletion is complete, “Complete”
appears on the screen.
158
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Error Messages and Actions
Warning display on the LCD monitor and viewfinder screen, tally lamp indication and warning tone are as
follows according to the error status.
Memo : This camera recorder makes use of a microcomputer. Noise interference from external sources may
prevent it from functioning properly. When this occurs, turn off and on the power of the camera recorder
again.
Error Message
Thumbnail
Screen
Display Screen
Dedicated
Screen
­
TURN POWER
OFF
TURN BACK ON
LATER
­
−
Getting
Overheated. Please Turn
Power Off.
REC INHIBITED
−
­
Action
System error.
* The warning tone sounds and the
tally lamp blinks twice every
second.
Turn off the power, and turn it
on again.
If the error persists, consult
your nearest JVC dealer.
The fan stopped running.
The power turns off
Please consult your nearest
JVC dealer.
automatically after about 1
second.
Usage time of the fan has exceeded Check the fan and replace
9000 hours.
accordingly. For more details,
please consult your nearest
JVC dealer.
Memo : You can check the usage
time of the fan in
[System]-[System
Information]-[Fan
Hour].
(' P111 [ Fan Hour ] )
The battery has exceeded the
specified temperature.
The power turns off
automatically after about 15
second.
Wait until the temperature
drops or replace the
battery.
If the error persists,
consult your nearest JVC
dealer.
[REC] button is pressed when the Turn off the write­protect
write­protect switch of the SD card switch of the SD card, or
insert a recordable SD card.
is set.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
159
Others
FAN STOP
DETECTED
PLEASE TURN
P.OFF
FAN
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED
Status
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Error Message
Thumbnail
Screen
Display Screen
Dedicated
Screen
LOST MEDIA
−
INFO [*]
Status
Action
Card is removed while recording Restore the card using this
is in progress.
Card is removed while
formatting is in progress.
Card is removed while restoring
camera recorder.
(' P42 [Restoring the SD
Card] )
is in progress.
Card is removed while adding
the OK mark.
Card is removed while writing a
setup file.
Card is removed while deleting a
RECORD
FORMAT
INCORRECT
­
clip.
(*: A, B)
Video format of the file for Clip
Review is different from the
current [Resolution] and
[Frame & Bit Rate] setting.
MEDIA FULL
­
[REC] button is pressed when
NO CLIPS
­
NO MEDIA
­
­
No Media
Others
­
−
160
Set [Resolution] and
[Frame & Bit Rate]
correctly.
(' P112 [ Resolution ] )
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit
Rate ] )
Replace the SD card with a
new one.
the media in use has no
remaining space.
Remaining space ran out during
recording.
No viewable clips are found on the Insert an SD card that
card for Clip Review.
contains clips that can be
reviewed.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
(' P72 [Viewing Recorded
Videos Immediately (Clip
Review)] )
[REC] button is pressed when an SD Insert an SD card.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
card is not inserted.
No SD card is found in Media mode Insert an SD card.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
or when the thumbnail screen is
displayed.
No Clips
No clips are found on the inserted Insert an SD card that
SD card in Media mode or when the contains playable clips.
thumbnail screen is displayed.
(' P39 [SD Card] )
(' P83 [Playing Recorded
Clips] )
12h Continuation The continuous recording time in
To continue recording, press
Record
AVCHD mode exceeds 12 hours
the [REC] button again.
and recording stops automatically.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
List of FTP Transfer Errors
If the upload of a recorded clip or download of the metadata setup file (XML format) is not successfully
completed, the following errors are displayed.
Error message
Timeout.
Media Was Removed.
Adapter Was Removed.
Cannot Connect to Server.
Status
Transfer was discontinued due to
timeout caused by network
transmission or server failure.
SD card is removed while FTP
transfer is in progress.
The USB network device is
removed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
Unable to connect to the FTP server.
Action
Execute again.
Use a different server.
Insert the SD card and execute FTP
transfer again.
Connect the USB network device.
161
Others
Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
(' P116 [ Metadata Server ] )
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )
Access Denied.
Access is denied.
Adjust the Server and Port settings
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
(' P116 [ Metadata Server ] )
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )
Authentication for login to the FTP Adjust the Username and Password
Invalid Username or
Password.
server failed.
settings for [Metadata Server] or
[Clip Server].
(' P116 [ Metadata Server ] )
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )
Invalid Path Was Requested. The path specified for the FTP
Adjust the [Clip Server] and [Dir.
server is incorrect.
Path] settings for [Metadata
Server] or [File Path].
(' P116 [ Metadata Server ] )
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )
Server Error.
There was an unintended operation Execute again.
of the FTP server.
Use a different server.
Invalid Request.
A bad request is executed for the Execute again.
FTP server.
Invalid Data Size.
Invalid data size, such as a planning Adjust the planning metadata saved
metadata size that exceeds 4 KB. in the [Metadata Server].
(' P147 [ Planning Metadata ] )
Invalid Data Format.
The XML format of the planning
Adjust the planning metadata saved
metadata is invalid.
in the [Metadata Server].
(' P147 [ Planning Metadata ] )
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Error message
Transfer Error.
Invalid URL.
Media Access Error.
Internal Error.
Other Error.
Media Read Error.
Status
Action
Transfer failed due to
Execute again.
communication failure.
The path was deemed invalid by the Adjust the Server and Port settings
FTP server.
for [Metadata Server] or [Clip
Server].
(' P116 [ Metadata Server ] )
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )
Insert a different SD card.
Reading/writing of the SD card
failed while FTP transfer is in
progress.
An internal error has occurred while Adjust the settings and execute
FTP transfer is in progress.
again.
An unknown error or other errors
Adjust the settings and execute
have occurred while FTP transfer is again.
in progress.
Reading of the SD card failed while Insert a different SD card.
FTP transfer is in progress.
Tally Lamp
The tally lamp start blinking when the remaining space on the SD card is running out during recording, or
when the battery power is running low.
Blinking Mode
Blinks slowly
(once every second)
Battery power is low
Remaining recording time on SD card is less than 3 minutes (during
Remaining Battery Power/SD Card Space
Blinks quickly
(2 times per second)
Remaining recording time on SD card is zero (during recording)
Error on the camera recorder
recording)
Warning Tone
Warning tone is output from the monitor speaker and [+] terminal when the battery level is low.
Warning tone is also output when an error occurs in the camera recorder.
Others
Memo : You can specify whether to turn on the warning tone as well as setting the volume in [A/V Set]-[Audio
Set]-[Alarm Level].
(' P109 [ Alarm Level ] )
162
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Troubleshooting
Symptom
Power does not turn on.
Action
Is the AC adapter properly connected?
Is the battery charged?
Is the power turned on immediately after it is turned off?
163
Others
Make sure to wait for an interval of at least 5 seconds before turning
on the power again.
Is the record trigger button/lock switch on the handle turned on?
Unable to start recording.
Is the write­protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write­protect switch is turned off.
(' P39 [Write­Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Camera image is not output on Is the camera recorder set to the Camera mode?
the LCD monitor and
Use the [MODE] selection button to switch to the Camera mode.
viewfinder screen.
(' P18 [Operation Modes] )
Playback does not start after Is the selected clip a playable clip?
selecting a clip thumbnail and Playback is not possible if the clip has a different video format setting.
pressing the Set button (R).
No sound during playback.
Is the currently played clip recorded in the Variable Frame Rec mode?
(' P82 [Variable Frame Rec] )
Readjust the brightness of the LCD monitor and viewfinder.
Images on the LCD monitor
and viewfinder screen appear Is the [ND FILTER] switch set to “1/64”?
dark or blurred.
Is the iris closed?
Is the shutter speed setting too high?
Is the amount of peaking too little? Use the [PEAKING +/­] button to
adjust the contour for the LCD monitor and the viewfinder screen.
(' P36 [Adjusting the LCD Monitor] )
(' P37 [Adjusting the Viewfinder] )
The [CH1/CH2] recording level Is the [CH1/CH2 AUTO/MANUAL] switch set to “AUTO”?
Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to “ON”?
adjustment knob does not
work.
Is the [FULL AUTO] switch set to “ON”, and [A/V Set]-[Audio
Set]-[Audio On FULL AUTO] set to “Auto”?
(' P109 [ Audio On FULL AUTO ] )
SD card cannot be initialized Is the write­protect switch of the SD card turned on?
Make sure that the write­protect switch is turned off.
(formatted).
(' P39 [Write­Protect Switch on the SD Card] )
Battery alarm appears even Is the battery too old?
after loading a charged
battery.
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Symptom
The time code and user’s bit
are not displayed.
The date and time are not
displayed.
Incorrect display on the
viewfinder.
Action
Even in Camera mode or Media mode, the time code and user’s bit
may not be displayed depending to the type of display.
Is [LCD/VF]-[Display Settings]-[TC/UB] set to “Off”? To display
the time code and user’s bit, set it to “TC” or “UB”.
(' P106 [ TC/UB ] )
The date and time are only displayed on the Display 1 and Display 2
screens in the Camera mode (during shooting).
(' P121 [Display Screen in Camera Mode] )
Is [System]-[Record Set]-[Time Stamp] set to “On”? To display
the date and time, set it to “Off”.
(' P115 [ Time Stamp ] )
Is the LCD monitor used with [LCD/VF]-[LCD + VF] set to “Off”?
(' P103 [LCD/VF Menu] )
The recordable time may be shorter depending on the shooting
conditions or the subject.
The actual recording time is
shorter than the estimated
time.
The two camera recorders are Is the [TC IN/OUT] switch correctly set?
not synchronized even though (' P68 [Synchronizing Time Code on Another Camera] )
the time codes have been
Set [System]-[Record Set]-[Record Format]-[Frame & Bit
synchronized. ( on the Slave
Rate] such that the two camera recorders have the same frame rate.
device is not displayed.)
(' P112 [ Frame & Bit Rate ] )
Check the mode of connection and method of setting ([SSID] and
Cannot connect to wireless
LAN.
[Passphrase] in cases other than WPS).
(' P139 [Connecting via Wireless LAN] )
Even if the Passphrase is wrong, “Completed the Setup Wizard.
Please Input the Passphrase into Your Device.” may appear at the
browser setting depending on the type of encryption.
Adjust [Passphrase] again.
Others
The View Remote screen turns The network path is congested.
Wait a while before refreshing (reloading) the web browser.
black.
The screen flickers.
The screen freezes.
Cannot perform remote
operation.
The clips cannot be uploaded Adjust the [Clip Server] settings.
to the FTP server.
(' P116 [ Clip Server ] )
The maximum size of the recorded clip is 4 GB.
If a file size limit has been set in the FTP server settings, set the size
limit to more than 4 GB.
Take necessary action as described in “[List of FTP Transfer
Errors] P 161”.
The wireless LAN may be disconnected depending on the
The wireless LAN is
disconnected.
environment. Change the usage environment.
Connect via wired LAN.
(' P141 [Connecting via Wired LAN] )
Signal reception from GPS satellites may be affected by buildings or
GPS signal cannot be
received.
trees.
Perform positioning preferably at an unobstructed location with a clear
view.
The precision error may be up to hundreds of meters if the GPS signal
The position is not accurate.
is weak or reflected off surrounding buildings.
164
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Specifications
General
Item
Power
Power
consumption
Mass
Allowable
operating
temperature
Allowable
operating
humidity
Allowable
storage
temperature
Lens
Description
DC 12 V
Approx. 13.0 W
(during recording with backlight
set to [STANDARD] while the
viewfinder is in use)
Approx. 2.5 kJ (with battery)
0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F)
30 %RH to 80 %RH
­20 °C to 50 °C (­4 °F to 122 °F)
Terminal Section
Item
Description
[HD/SD SDI] output terminal (480i or 576i:
Downconverted 720p/1080i: embedded audio),
BNC (unbalanced)
HD­SDI
Compliant with SMPTE 292 M
SD­SDI
Compliant with SMPTE 259 M
[INPUT1/INPUT2] terminal
[MIC]
­50 dBu, 3 k!, XLR (balanced),
+48 V output (phantom power
supply)
[LINE]
+4 dBu, 10 k!, XLR (balanced)
[AUX] terminal
[+] terminal
[REMOTE]
terminal
[] terminal
[DEVICE]
[HOST]
[TC] terminal
[IN]
[OUT]
Item
Filter diameter
Description
Fujinon F1.6, 23x, f=4.1 mm to
94.3 mm
(35 mm conversion: 29 mm to
667 mm)
Φ72 mm
Camera Section
Item
Image pickup
device
Color separation
prism
Sync system
Optical filter
Gain
Electronic
shutter
Variable Frame
Rate
LCD monitor
Viewfinder
Description
1/3­inch Progressive CMOS
F1.6, 3­color separation prism
Internal sync (built­in SSG)
OFF, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64
­6dB, ­3dB, 0dB, 3dB, 6dB,
9dB, 12dB, 15dB, 18dB, 21dB,
24dB, Lolux (30dB, 36dB), ALC
1/6 to 1/10000, EEI
2/30­60/30fps, 2/25­50/25fps,
2/24­60/24fps
3.5­inch LCD, 16:9 920K pixels
0.45­inch LCOS, 1.22M pixels
(852 x 480 x 3)
Storage Section
Item
Supported
media
Slots
Description
SDHC/SDXC
x 2
­22dBu, 10 k!, 3.5 mm stereo
mini jack (unbalanced)
4­pin 3.5 mm mini jack
Others
[AV] terminal
Video signal
Audio signal
Lens Section
1.0 V (p­p)
­8 dBu (during reference level
input), 1 k! (unbalanced)
3.5 mm mini jack (stereo)
2.5 mm mini jack (stereo)
Mini USB­B type, USB 2.0,
miniB, slave function (mass
storage class) only
USB­A type, USB2.0, network
connection function only
1.0 V(p­p) to 4.0 V(p­p) high
impedance
2.0 ± 1.0 V(p­p) low impedance
165
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Video/Audio
Others
Item
Description
Recording time Approx. 25 minutes (8 GB SD
card, 35 Mbps, VBR mode)
HD mode (MOV/MP4/MXF: MPEG­2)
Video
QuickTime File Format (For
recording file Final Cut Pro)/MP4 File Format/
format
MXF File Format
Video
HQ mode MPEG­2 Long GOP VBR, 35
Mbps (Max) MP@HL,
1920x1080/59.94i, 29.97p,
23.98p, 50i, 25p
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
1280x720/59.94p, 29.97p,
23.98p, 50p, 25p
SP mode MPEG­2 Long GOP CBR, 18.3
Mbps MP@HL (720p)/25 Mbps
MP@H14 (1080i)
1440x1080/59.94i, 50i
1280x720/59.94p, 50p
Audio
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
HD mode (AVCHD)
Video
AVCHD File Format
recording file
format
Video
HQ mode MPEG­4 AVC/H.264, 24 Mbps
(Max)
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i
SP mode MPEG­4 AVC/H.264, 17 Mbps
1920x1080/59.94i, 50i
Audio
Dolby Digital 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit,
256kbps
HD mode (MOV: H.264)
Video
QuickTime File Format
recording file
format
Video
MPEG­4 AVC/H.264, 35 Mbps
(Max)
1920x1080/59.94i, 23.98p, 50i
Audio
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
166
Item
Description
SD mode (MOV: H.264)
Video
QuickTime File Format
recording file
format
Video
MPEG­4 AVC/H.264, 8 Mbps
720x480/59.94i (U model only),
720x576/50i (E model only)
Audio
LPCM 2ch, 48 kHz/16 Bit
Web mode (MOV: H.264)
Video
QuickTime File Format
recording file
format
Video
MPEG­4 AVC/H.264, 1.2 Mbps
480x270/29.97p, 23.98p, 25p
Audio
μ­law 2ch, 16 kHz
Accessories
Accessories
Warranty Card (U model only)
Instructions
Document and Software Disc
AC Adapter
Power Cord (U model: 1, E model: 2)
Battery
AV Cable
Clamp Filter
Wire Clamp
Large Eyecup
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ISSUED
2012/12/21
177.5
148.5
140
156.5
Dimensional Outline Drawing (Unit: mm)
57
(HOOD)
197
178
415.5
269.5
345.5
402.5
* The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement without
prior notice.
Others
167
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Index
A
B
C
D
AC adapter .......................................... 29, 30
Access point ............................................ 139
Action ........................................................ 85
Aspect ratio ................................................ 46
Auto power off ........................................... 31
Backup rec ................................................ 76
Battery ................................................. 15, 28
Brightness adjustment ............................... 51
Camera mode .............................. 19, 34, 121
Charging time ............................................ 29
Clip continuous rec .................................... 78
Clip cutter trig (splitting clips) ..................... 74
Clip name ............................................. 43, 84
Clip review ................................................. 72
Color bar .................................................. 129
Color matrix ............................................. 130
Computer ................................................. 134
Connection settings file ............................ 156
Continuous operating time ......................... 29
Deleting clips ............................................. 87
Display screen ........................... 34, 121, 126
Dual rec ..................................................... 74
Error message ................................... 58, 159
External monitor ....................................... 135
Eyecup ...................................................... 27
F
Face detection ........................................... 50
Favorites menu ........................................ 117
File Format ................................................. 45
Focus ......................................................... 48
Focus assist ............................................... 49
Formatting (initializing) SD cards ............... 41
Frame rec .................................................. 80
FTP server ................................. 142, 86, 144
Others
E
G Gain adjustment ........................................ 53
GPS ............................................. 72, 17, 122
H
Headphone ........................................ 63, 137
I
Image stabilizer .......................................... 60
Initial settings ............................................. 32
Interval rec ................................................. 81
Iris adjustment ........................................... 52
L
LCD monitor ............................. 17, 30, 34, 36
Lens cover ................................................. 28
M Marker display ......................................... 129
168
Media mode ................................. 19, 34, 126
Menu .............................................. 91, 92, 94
Metadata .......................................... 142, 147
N
ND filter ...................................................... 56
Network ........................................... 124, 138
Network operating environment ............... 138
O OK mark .................................................... 88
One push auto focus .................................. 49
P
P2P .......................................................... 140
Picture file ................................................ 131
Picture quality setting ................................. 60
Power .................................................. 30, 31
Pre rec ....................................................... 78
Preset zoom (browser) ............................ 151
Preset zoom (camera) ............................... 48
Push auto focus ......................................... 49
R
Recordable time ........................................ 39
Remote edit mode ............................... 19, 35
Resolution .................................................. 45
Restoring SD card ..................................... 42
S
Safety zone display .................................. 129
Scene file ................................................. 131
SD/SDHC/SDXC card ......................... 15, 39
Selecting multiple clips .............................. 89
Setting the date/time .................................. 33
Setup file .................................................. 131
Shooting .................................................... 44
Skin detail function ................................... 129
Software keyboard ..................................... 93
Spot meter ................................................. 70
Status screen ..................................... 35, 128
Switching shutter mode ............................. 54
Switching shutter speed ............................ 54
T
Tally lamp .......................................... 38, 162
Thumbnail (detailed screen) ...................... 85
Thumbnail (standard screen) ..................... 83
Thumbnail screen ...................................... 83
Time code ...................................... 64, 65, 68
Time code generator ................................. 65
Time code playback ................................... 87
U
USB mode ................................... 19, 35, 134
User button ................................................ 38
User’s bit .................................................... 64
V
Variable frame rec ..................................... 82
ISSUED
2012/12/21
Video format .............................................. 45
View remote ............................................. 150
Viewfinder ................................ 17, 30, 34, 37
W Warning ............................................. 35, 162
White balance adjustment ......................... 56
White paint ................................................. 58
Wired LAN ............................................... 141
Wired remote control ............................... 137
Wireless LAN ........................................... 139
Z
Zebra pattern ............................................. 69
Zoom ......................................................... 47
Symbol
3G adapter ............................................... 141
Others
169
ISSUED
2012/12/21
170
ISSUED
2012/12/21
171
ISSUED
2012/12/21
GY­HM650U/GY­HM650EHD MEMORY CARD CAMERA RECORDER
© 2012 JVC KENWOOD Corporation
LST1428­001B